JP7271223B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine and a reel game machine .

Various types of gaming machines are widely known, for example, pinball gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, and reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines.

In addition, the following patent document 1 can be mentioned about related prior art.

Japanese Patent No. 5956529

Gaming machines these days are provided with display means for displaying information relating to game results, and a display device for displaying various effect images. Since the above-mentioned display means mainly displays information for hall officials, it is important to display information accurately. On the other hand, the above-mentioned display device mainly displays information for the player, so it is important to display highly complex and abundant effect images.
In this way, for various display devices such as display means and display devices provided in game machines, appropriate display control operations should be performed according to their characteristics. Improvement is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to further improve display control operations according to the characteristics of various display devices (display means and display devices) provided in game machines. .

A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises control means for performing control processing related to a game, storage means capable of reading and writing information by the control means, and clear processing for clearing information in the storage means. Memory information clearing means, display means for displaying predetermined information calculated based on game results, display control means for performing display control of the display means, and display contents to be displayed on a display device for image display are specified. image control means for issuing a display list to be displayed, image generation means for completing predetermined image data based on the display list in a predetermined first memory, and storing various compressed data as basic data for the image data. and a second memory , wherein the first memory has one or a plurality of expansion spaces that can be used as expansion spaces for expanding compressed data for moving images based on a base address in which the lower bits below a predetermined bit position are 0. area can be secured, and the compressed data acquired from the second memory can be decoded into a predetermined two-dimensional work space. , a first process of partitioning the first memory into a plurality of memory areas including a development memory area, and setting necessary setting values in predetermined built-in registers to obtain an integer N times the unit space (N≧1 ) in the expansion memory area and assigning unique information that is unique in the expansion memory area. By describing information, new unique information and a new two-dimensional work space can be secured, and unnecessary two-dimensional work space can be deleted. Corresponding to the fact that the first information specifying the dimensional workspace and the second information specifying the compressed data in the second memory and specifying acquisition of the compressed data are described in the display list, The compressed data specified by the second information is expanded in the two-dimensional work space specified by the first information, and the display control means executes control to intermittently light the display means at a predetermined cycle. In addition, the operation confirmation display of the display means is executed for a predetermined period of time after the completion of the clear processing.

According to the above configuration, the display means for displaying the predetermined information calculated based on the game results does not perform the operation confirmation display during execution of the clear process, so that the display control operation of the display means can be optimized. . Further, in the case of a display device that displays an image, the display control operation can be optimized by adopting the compression data decompressing method as described above.

According to the present invention , it is possible to further improve the display control operation according to the characteristics of various display devices (display means and display devices) provided in the gaming machine.

1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a gaming machine as an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the game board of the game machine as an embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine as an embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a pre-reading foretelling effect in the embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side of the embodiment; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an initial setting process in FIG. 5; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing power supply abnormality check processing according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between each determination condition in terms of operation and the value of the W register when transitioning to setting change processing, RAM clear processing, setting confirmation processing, and backup restoration processing; 6 is a flowchart showing main loop processing in FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting change process in FIG. 5; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing output management processing in FIG. 10; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment decoding table; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the segment configuration and the display pattern of the segments in the setting value indicator; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing in FIG. 5; FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process in FIG. 5; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a set value offset conversion table; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing main loop pre-processing in FIG. 5 ; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the main control side timer interrupt processing of embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing power supply check/backup processing in FIG. 18; FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a setting abnormality check process in FIG. 18; FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing special symbol management processing in FIG. 18; 21. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 21; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing a change management process in FIG. 23; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot random number determination processing in FIG. It is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot random number determination method of the embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the random-number determination table for big-hit determination used for a big-hit random-number determination process. 25 is a flow chart showing variation pattern lottery processing in FIG. 24; It is the figure which showed the example of the deviation fluctuation pattern table of embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a hit variation pattern table of the embodiment. It is a diagram showing another example of the winning variation pattern table of the embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the common variation pattern table at the time of a setting error of embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a common variation pattern table for setting errors according to the embodiment; It is the figure which showed the storage example of the 1st data table and 2nd data table in embodiment. It is the figure which showed the other storage example of the 1st data table in embodiment, and a 2nd data table. It is the figure which illustrated the memory area structure in ROM of the main-control part. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams of scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, and motor data registration information according to the embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of sound data registration information according to the embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a main scenario table of the embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a sub-scenario table of the embodiment; It is a flow chart of production control main processing of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of command analysis processing in production control of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of the command correspondence processing in the production control of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of production control timer interrupt processing of the embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of display control timing of the embodiment; It is the figure which illustrated one display mode of the setting operation log|history. It is the figure which showed the example of the screen during a setting confirmation. It is the figure which showed the example of the information for a history display in embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of backup operation of history display information as an embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of processing for adding individual history information in history display information; 7 is a flowchart of power-on history information initial setting processing according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for updating history information in response to the occurrence of a target event for history display; FIG. 8 is a flowchart of history information update processing according to the embodiment; 9 is a flowchart of history display processing according to the embodiment; 9 is a flowchart of history information screen creation processing according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram exemplifying numerical values of set values that can be expressed in the embodiment; It is a flow chart of left design lottery processing of an embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the left design lottery table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for left design lottery. It is the flowchart which showed another example of left design lottery processing. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a left symbol lottery offset table used in the process shown in FIG. 60; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of mini-character advance notice lottery processing according to the embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a first mini-character advance notice lottery table; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a first advance notice offset table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a second mini-character advance notice lottery table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a second advance notice offset table; It is a flowchart of big hit production lottery processing of the embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a first offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68; FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a second offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68; FIG. It is a flow chart of SU notice lottery processing of an embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the SU effect table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU stage lottery. It is the figure which showed the example of the SU3 replacement table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU3 replacement. It is the flowchart which showed another example of the SU preliminary announcement lottery process. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a first offset table for SU3 replacement and a second offset table for SU3 replacement used in the process of FIG. 76; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a lottery mode of SU advance notice effect in the embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flowchart of setting-related command processing (S2130e) as a first modified example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting-related command processing (S2130e) as a second modified example; FIG. It is the figure which showed the example of the setting value conversion table which the production|presentation control part uses in a modification. It is a figure which shows the kind of suggestion production|presentation of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing which suggestion production|presentation of embodiment is performed. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of suggestion production|presentation of embodiment, and timing. It is a flow chart for executing a suggestion effect (effect 01) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for executing a suggestive effect (effect 02) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of command corresponding processing when receiving a customer waiting demonstration command in the production control of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of command correspondence processing when receiving a decorative design designation command in the production control of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for executing a suggestion effect (effect 05) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for executing a suggestion effect (effect 06) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of command correspondence processing when receiving a decorative design designation command in the production control of the embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table used when executing a suggestive effect (effect 09) according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart for executing a suggestive effect (effect 10) of the embodiment. It is a table and a flow chart for executing a suggestive effect (effect 11) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for executing a suggestive effect (effect 12) of the embodiment. It is an example of a table used in the re-lottery process of the embodiment. It is an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestive effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestive effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestive effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for executing a suggestion effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for executing a suggestive effect (effect 14) of the embodiment. It is a table used in the suggestive effect (effect 14) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of the command correspondence processing at the time of receiving a large winning opening winning command in the effect control unit of the embodiment and a table to be used. It is a flow chart of command corresponding processing when receiving a jackpot end command in the effect control unit of the embodiment. It is an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestive effect (effect 16) of the embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the suggestion production|presentation (production|presentation 17) of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating suggestive production|presentation (production|presentation 18) of embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suggestive effect (effect 19) of the embodiment; It is a figure for performing suggestion production (production 20) of an embodiment. It is a flow chart for executing a suggestive effect (effect 21) of the embodiment. 9 is a flow chart for explaining another example of effect according to the embodiment; 9 is a flow chart for explaining another example of effect according to the embodiment; 10 is a flowchart for explaining setting value change suggestion effect 2 according to the embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining setting value change suggestion effect 3 of the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining setting value suggestion effect 1 of the embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining setting value suggestion effect 1 of the embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining setting value suggestion effect 1 of the embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining setting value suggestion effect 1 of the embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of suggestion production|presentation of embodiment, and execution timing. It is a figure which shows the kind of big hit suggestion production|presentation of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing which a big-hit suggestion production|presentation of embodiment is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of selective implementation of the production|presentation to the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of the state of waiting for a customer of embodiment, and the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation 02 of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the classification and execution timing of production|presentation of embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining another example of the suggestive effect 16 of the embodiment; It is a block diagram of the control structure of the pachinko game machine of embodiment (another embodiment) which was made into 1CPU structure. It is a block diagram of the production|presentation control means of another embodiment. 129 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a main part of the configuration shown in FIG. 128; FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a display circuit and LCD interface in another embodiment; It is a functional block diagram schematically showing each functional configuration of the effect control unit and the liquid crystal control board in the case of a 2CPU configuration. It is a functional block diagram which represented typically the functional structure of the production|presentation control part of embodiment set as 1CPU structure. It is a flow chart of production control main processing of another embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing various timings within a frame period of display data; It is the figure which illustrated the correspondence of the production control command and the liquid crystal control command. It is the figure which represented typically the example of the scenario data about each production|presentation element determined corresponding to the production|presentation control command. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the process which the production|presentation control part of another embodiment performs according to reception of the production|presentation control command. 4 is a time chart for explaining the flow of operations in an embodiment in which the preloader does not function; 4 is a time chart for explaining the flow of operations in an embodiment that causes the preloader to function; FIG. 11 is a block diagram describing the internal configuration of a data transfer circuit in another embodiment together with the related circuit configuration; It is the figure which showed the example of the index table in another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of VRAM area division in another embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a virtual drawing area that can be arbitrarily set in a virtual drawing space in a VRAM and an actual drawing area (drawing area Ad) in a frame buffer; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between the entire frame buffer and valid data areas in another embodiment; 9 is a flowchart of various initial setting processes in another embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of drawing update processing (when the preloader is not activated) in another embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a display list; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing display list issuing processing (when DMAC is not interposed); FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the CPU issuing a display list to the drawing circuit via the data transfer circuit in the VDP circuit; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a display list issuing process (when DMAC intervenes); FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing DMA start setting processing in FIG. 150; FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing processing subsequent to FIG. 150; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of transfer of a display list to a drawing circuit by a DMAC; FIG. 11 is a flowchart of drawing update processing (when the preloader is activated) in another embodiment; FIG. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing a part of the processing in FIG. 154; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a transfer mode of a rewrite list to a drawing circuit in another embodiment; FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing another part of the process of FIG. 154; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how a display list is issued to a preloader (when DMAC is not interposed); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how a display list is issued to a preloader (when DMAC intervenes); FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example of delaying the drawing start timing (when the preloader is not operated); FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example of delaying the drawing start timing (when the preloader is functioning); FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a modified example using a CPU that only performs image effect control; FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram of the operation (when the preloader is not operated) in the modified example assuming the configuration of FIG. 162; FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram of the operation (when the preloader is made to function) in the modified example assuming the configuration of FIG. 162; FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing normal operation confirmation processing in a modified example based on the configuration of FIG. 162; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a drawing method as a modified example; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of another drawing method as a modified example;

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.

<1. Game Machine Structure>
<2. Game Machine Control Configuration>
[2-1. Main control part]
(Regarding setting value change operation)
(About performance display)
(Production control command)
[2-2. Production control unit]
<3. Overview of operation>
[3-1. Symbol variation display game]
(Special symbol variation display game)
(Decorative pattern variation display game)
(Normal pattern fluctuation display game)
(About hold)
[3-2. game state]
[3-3. About hit]
[3-4. About production]
(Direction mode)
(Notice production)
(Direction means)
<4. Processing of Main Control Unit>
[4-1. Main control side main processing]
(initial setting processing)
(Processing after initial setting)
(main loop processing)
(setting change processing)
(RAM clear processing)
(Setting confirmation process)
(main loop preprocessing)
(Advantages of set value display data table and set value conversion table as embodiments)
[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
(power supply check/backup processing)
(Processing for error management and game progress, etc.)
[4-3. Processing related to special symbol variation display game]
(Special design management processing)
(Special figure 1 starting entrance check process)
(Special symbol variation start process)
(variation management processing)
(Jackpot random number determination process)
(Variation pattern lottery process)
(Advantages of setting value related data table as an embodiment)
<5. Processing of Production Control Unit>
[5-1. Outline of processing]
[5-2. Display setting history confirmation screen]
[5-3. Regarding the data type of the setting value in the embodiment]
[5-4. Set value suggestion effect]
(Suggestive production by left pattern)
(Suggestion production by mini character notice)
(Suggestion production by jackpot end production)
(Suggestion production by SU notice)
[5-5. Regarding the difference in the range of setting values that the main control unit and the production control unit correspond]
<6. Modified example of setting-related command processing and setting value conversion>
<7. Other Modifications Related to Setting Values>
<8. Summary so far>
<9. Suggestion Effect Regarding Set Values>
[9-1. type of performance]
[9-2. performance timing]
[9-3. Production example]
(Production 01) ~ (Production 21)
(Summary of each production)
[9-4. Other production examples]
(Set value change suggestion effect 1)
(Set value change suggestion production 2)
(Set value change suggestion production 3)
(Setting value suggestion production 1)
<10. Suggestion production about the big hit>
[10-1. type of performance]
[10-2. performance timing]
[10-3. Production example]
<11. Other performances>
<12. Regarding effects with different appearance probabilities depending on the setting value>
[12-1. 1st example]
[12-2. Second example]
<13. Example of selective implementation in amusement machines>
[13-1. Regarding the appearance timing of the production]
[13-2. About waiting for customers]
[13-3. About prefetching]
[13-4. About changing (first half)]
[13-5. About fluctuation (second half)]
[13-6. About the jackpot]
[13-7. About fluctuating (overall)]
[13-8. Setting Suggestion Effect and Appearance Timing]
[13-9. Jackpot Suggestion Production and Appearance Timing]
[13-10. Production button and each production]
<14. Example 2 of Selective Implementation in Gaming Machine>
<15. About the definition>
<16.1 CPU configuration>
[16-1. Control Configuration of Pachinko Machine]
[16-2. Configuration of Production Control Unit]
[16-3. Function comparison of production control unit]
[16-4. Processing of production control unit]
[16-5. Operation example of production control]
[16-6.1 Summary of CPU configuration and modified example]
<17. Image production control>
[17-1. Comparison with and without preload]
[17-2. About the data transfer circuit]
[17-3. Preload data cache]
[17-4. About drawing]
[17-5. CPU processing related to image effect control]
(Example of not using preloader)
(Example of functioning preloader)
[17-5. Modifications and Other Modifications Related to Image Effect Control]

<1. Game Machine Structure>

The structure of a pachinko game machine 1 as an embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 3 of the pachinko game machine 1.

A pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "game machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in an attached game board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. have. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Also, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. By inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is released. , to release the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 and open to the front side.

Under the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 is pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

The upper receiving tray unit 8 also has a ball ejection button 14 for ejecting the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and a game ball dispensing device (not shown) for dispensing game balls. A ball lending button 11 for making a request and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided. Also, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a performance button 13 (operating means) configured to be operable by the player. The effect button 13 can be operated (input can be accepted) when the built-in lamp (button LED 75) is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and a predetermined operation (press, repeated hits, long press, etc.) is performed while the built-in lamp is lit. By doing so, it is possible to bring about changes in the production.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the front operation panel 7 is provided with a cross key 16 for users such as players and hall staff to select various items and indicate directions. there is

A firing operation handle 15 for operating a firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7 .

Speakers 46 are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the shooting operation handle 15 to produce a sound effect (sound effect). In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, full-color LEDs for light production, etc.) are provided at appropriate locations on the glass door 6 to exhibit a light production effect by light decoration. A plurality of full-color LEDs (light effect LEDs) as the decorative lamps 45 are provided around the pachinko game machine, that is, around the front frame edge of the glass door 6 in the circumferential direction.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in the figure is provided with a ball guiding rail 5 that guides the shot game balls in an annular shape as a board surface partitioning member. The four corners are non-game areas.

Approximately in the center of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) are independently displayed. A liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36 capable of variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a left pattern (corresponding to the left display area), a middle pattern (corresponding to the middle display area), and a right pattern (corresponding to the right display area). is provided. In the following description, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the left, middle and right symbols may be referred to as "symbol group". That is, for example, the symbol stopped and displayed in the left display area is one of the symbol group forming the left symbol.
The liquid crystal display device 36, under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, displays various effects in the form of images in addition to the variable display operation of decorative symbols.

In the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long way. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and to control the flow of the game ball depending on the strength or stroke length of the game ball's launch. It works as flow path distribution means that enables distribution of the path to the left and right. In this embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 3a so that the flow paths for game balls are formed on both upper sides (left and right sides) of the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. The game balls hit by the shooting device 32 on the upper side of the game area 3a are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and are divided into the left flowing path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and the right flowing path 3c on the right side. flow something.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as various function display portions, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is an upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and a lower starting port. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) arranged side by side corresponding to the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. In the liquid crystal display device 36, in time synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns by the special pattern display devices 38a and 38b, the decorative patterns by images are variably displayed, and decorated with various advance notice effects (effect images). A symbol variation display game is executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

In addition, in the various function display units, next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display device) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged. Composite is called 5 special patterns 1, 2, display of the number of operation pending balls of normal patterns, state notification during variable time reduction function (during time saving) and during high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-precision composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as "composite display device") having a display function.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol variation display game is executed by a normal symbol variation display operation represented by two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, normal patterns by LEDs alternately turn on and off in a seesaw manner, and by stopping with either side lit up, the propriety of the normal pattern variable display game becomes clear. there is Further, a round number display device 39b having three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided. The number-of-rounds display device 39b notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the big hit by a combination of lighting and extinguishing states of the three LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. Detecting sensors 34a, 35a (upper start sensor 34a, lower start sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of game balls are formed inside each of them. ing.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1", and in some cases "special symbol 1" (abbreviated as )), and is configured as a fixed winning rate type winning device that does not have starting opening/closing means (means for opening or enlarging the starting opening). In this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (eg, game nail (not shown), windmill 44, center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow path 3b to the upper start port 34 A game ball that has flowed down the path 3c is configured to easily enter (win a prize), whereas a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a variable winning rate type winning device capable of varying the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening by the opening opening/closing means. In this embodiment, as a starting opening opening and closing means, a so-called "electric tulip It is configured as a "type" winning device.

The lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2", and in some cases is abbreviated as "special symbol 2". ), and the winning region of the lower starting port 35 is an open state ( winning easy state) and a closed state (difficult winning state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than in the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, the closed state (non-winning state) is maintained in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

On both sides of the normal variable prize winning device 41, a total of four general prize winning openings 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, are arranged. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In addition, a movable accessory (not shown) that exerts a visual performance effect is arranged in the area of the game board at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball.

In addition, diagonally above the normal variable winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the middle part of the right flow path 3c, there is a normal symbol start port 37 (third start means) are provided. This normal symbol starting port 37 is a prize winning port related to normal symbol fluctuation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is provided. is formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left flow path 3b or may be formed in both flow paths.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, there is a special variable winning configured to be able to open or expand the big winning port 50 by a projecting open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 50 is formed inside.

A bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging out from the surface of the game board 3 is formed around the big winning opening 50, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right downstream path 3c. there is When the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large winning opening closed state), the downstream guide portion ( It is adapted to form part of the upper edge 55a). In addition, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, a flow path correction plate is provided substantially parallel to the downstream direction of the game ball. 51d is protruded, and functions to attract the falling game balls toward the big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加

The process of entering the game ball into the big winning hole 50 is as follows.
A game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is projected onto the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball contacts the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the game board 3 surface, thereby correcting the flowing direction of the game ball to the direction of the big winning opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (closed state of the large winning opening), the game ball rolls on it, and further in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is guided in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winning state (starting port open state), a game ball can enter the lower starting port 35 . On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted in the game board surface and the big winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is led into the big winning opening 50.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the firing position on the side of the special variable winning device 52 (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c), the upper start opening A game ball is difficult or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates, winning to the starting openings 34 and 35 is difficult or impossible. The movable wing pieces 47 operate in a more advantageous opening/closing pattern than in the normal state in a game state accompanied by a state with an electric sapo, which will be described later.

In the case of the present embodiment, the manner in which the player should hit to obtain an advantageous situation changes according to the game state. Specifically, if the game state is accompanied by the "state without electric sapo", which will be described later, it is advantageous to hit "left", aiming for the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b. If it is a game state accompanied by "with state", "right hitting" aiming to make the game ball pass through the right flow path 3c is advantageous.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, a promise is made for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper starting port 34 or lower starting port 35, 13 for the big winning port 50, and 10 for the general winning port 43) is determined by the game ball payout device 19 (Fig. 3 See). The game balls that have not won the winning openings are ejected from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. FIG.
Here, "winning" means that the winning opening does not have a structure in which the game ball is taken in, or the winning opening is not a structure in which the game ball is taken in, but is a winning opening made up of a pass-through gate (for example, the normal symbol start opening 37). If it is, it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, "winning" occurs in that winning hole treated as if A game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning hole, it will be detected by the winning detection switch. Irrespective of this, there are cases where the term "winning" includes the case where a game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Game Machine Control Configuration>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing game operation control of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that controls overall game operations (game operation control), and a main control unit. A production control board (production control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "production control unit 24") that receives production control commands from the production means and controls the execution of production (appearance control) by the production means, and a prize ball. A payout control board (payout control means) 29 for performing payout control, a power supply board (power control means (not shown)) for generating and supplying necessary power to the gaming machine 1 from an external power supply (not shown), is configured with
The effect control unit 24 is connected to a liquid crystal control unit 40 that drives the display of a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device. The liquid crystal control unit 40 is, for example, the above-described main control board (main control unit) 20, production control board (production control unit) 24, payout control board 29, various boards such as a power supply board, etc. Micro It is configured with a computer.
Note that the power supply route to each part is omitted in FIG.

[2-1. Main control part]

The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor containing a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program describing game operation control procedures, various data necessary for game operation control are stored. A ROM (Read Only Memory) 202 (main control ROM) for storing data and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and buffer memory are installed, and the microcomputer is configured as a whole. .

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing periodic interrupts, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) with a constant period, a time measurement function, and the CPU 201. An interrupt controller circuit that enables/disables interrupts such as timer interrupts that give interrupt signals, and can output a system reset signal to reset the CPU 201 by detecting power on/off and power failure. A reset circuit, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors abnormal operation of the control program, and an out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range , and a counter circuit or the like for generating random numbers within a certain range in terms of hardware.

The counter circuit includes a random number generating circuit for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit for sampling random numbers from the random number generating circuit at predetermined timings, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 obtains the numerical value indicated by the random number generating circuit as a random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit (magnitude of random number: 65536)). , the random number is used for the jackpot lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number, in order to prevent cheating such as hitting a winning game.

The main control unit 20 includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winning (entering a ball) to the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winning to the lower starting hole 35, and a normal symbol starting hole 37. A normal symbol start opening sensor 37a that detects the passage of the, a large winning opening sensor 52a that detects winning to the big winning opening 50, a general winning opening sensor 43a that detects winning to the general winning opening 43, and an out opening 49 An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (out ball) discharged from the outlet is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals output from these. The main control unit 20 can grasp which winning hole the game ball has entered based on the detection signal from each sensor.

The main control unit 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting opening 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected with a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. . Furthermore, the main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling display of normal symbols.

A compound display device 38c and a round number display device 39b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 outputs control signals for controlling display of various information displayed on the compound display device 38c, It is possible to transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the prescribed number of rounds by the big hit displayed on the number display device 39b.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external centralized terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 transmits predetermined signals to the hall computer HC provided outside the game machine via the frame external centralized terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, big hit information, prize ball information, symbol variation execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring game information from the main control unit 20 and managing the operation status of the game machines of the pachinko hall.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command (number of prize balls) relating to payout is sent to the payout control board 29 A payout control command that specifies ) can be transmitted.

The payout control board 29 is connected with a launch control board (launch control section) 28 that controls the launcher 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls. The main roles of this payout control board 29 are to receive payout control commands from the main control unit 20, to control prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and to transmit status signals to the main control unit 20. is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a shortage of supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls (prize balls) to be paid out. can receive each detection signal. The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for putting out game balls. of control signals can be transmitted.

Further, the payout control board 29 is provided with a full detection sensor 60 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9) that detects when the upper tray 9 is full of game balls. , a front door open sensor 61 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor that detects at least the open state of the front frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the front door open sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. This state signal includes a ball clogged signal indicating a full state, a door open signal indicating that at least the front frame 2 is open, a resupply out signal indicating insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and prize balls. A count error signal indicating an insufficient payout of balls or an abnormality in the ball counting sensor 19b, and a payout completion signal indicating completion of the payout operation are included, and various status signals can be transmitted. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 is open (door open error), whether the game ball dispensing device 19 is normally dispensed (out-of-supply error), and whether the upper tray 9 Monitor the full state (ball clogging error), etc.

Furthermore, a firing control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a permission signal for permitting firing can be transmitted to the firing control board 28. FIG. The firing control board 28 controls energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the dispensing control board 29, and operates the firing operation handle 15. It realizes the shooting operation of the game ball by. Specifically, when a firing permission signal is output from the payout control board 29 (firing permission signal ON state), a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 allows the player to touch the handle. The shooting operation of the game ball is permitted on the condition that the presence of the game ball is detected and the shooting stop switch (not shown) provided on the shooting operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the shooting permission signal is not output (shooting permission signal OFF state), even if the shooting operation handle 15 is operated, the shooting operation is not executed and the game ball is not shot. In addition, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁
When the payout control board 29 detects the ball jam error, it transmits a ball jam signal to the main control unit 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 (fire permission signal OFF). Until the full state of is eliminated, the control is performed to stop the launching operation.
Also, the payout control board 29 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 28 on condition that the launch permission is instructed by the main control unit 20 .

Here, the main control unit 20 is connected to a setting key switch 94 and a RAM clear switch 98, and can receive detection signals from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for inputting an instruction to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM 203 .
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to a setting change mode (at the time of ON operation) by inserting a setting key possessed by the hall staff and performing an ON/OFF operation when power is turned on.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the setting value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value representing the stage of the winning probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON/OFF according to the operation of a RAM clear button which is operable with the front frame 2 opened. The setting key switch 98 is provided with a key cylinder into which the above-described setting key can be inserted and removed. When it is turned in the opposite direction from the ON state, it is turned OFF. The key cylinder is provided so that it can be operated by inserting a setting key while the front frame 2 is open. Note that the key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting a setting key.

In this example, the above RAM clear button is also used for changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for forwarding the set value Ve.

A RAM clear switch 98 and a setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine 1 . For example, it is arranged on the main control board 20 .

A setting/performance indicator 97 is also connected to the main controller 20 .
The setting/performance display 97 is configured with, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as display means capable of displaying setting values Ve and performance information (to be described later). The setting/performance indicator 97 is mounted, for example, on the main control unit (main control board) 20 at a position where it can be easily viewed.
The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying the setting value Ve and performance information to the setting/performance display device 97 .

Here, the set value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least the jackpot (hit type that the condition device described later will operate) for each stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6) The higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability (setting 1 is the lowest winning probability, and thereafter, the winning probability increases in ascending order of the set values), which works favorably for the player. there is In other words, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the so-called "machine discount (ball output rate, payout rate)", which is advantageous to the player.
In this way, the set value Ve is a value that defines the probability of winning a jackpot, a machine discount, etc., and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event such as a profit state acting on a player. , in the present embodiment, the degree of advantage in the game is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are six levels of set value Ve (levels of advantage) that are legally available. Specifically, it is assumed that the legally usable range of the set value Ve (hereinafter referred to as “usable range Re”) is in the range of “1” to “6”.
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only a part of the set values Ve among the set values Ve that can be used under the rules. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 of this example uses only three values, for example, "1", "2", and "6", among the set values Ve within the usable range Re, which are "1" to "6". do. In other words, the specification is limited to three stages for the winning probability, instead of six stages, which is the maximum stage according to the rules.
Hereinafter, the range of setting values Ve actually used in the pachinko game machine 1, specifically, the range of setting values Ve actually used among the setting values Ve within the usable range Re (in the above example, "1 , 2, and 6) is referred to as the 'usage range Ru'.

The set value Ve is set exclusively by a hall staff such as a hall clerk based on the sales strategy of the hall (amusement store). When there are a plurality of types of jackpots, it is possible to appropriately determine which jackpot winning probability is changed according to the set value Ve, or the type of target jackpot. For example, if there are three types of jackpots 1 to 3, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the winning probability of all the jackpots 1 to 3 may be. The combined winning probability may be increased. Also, the winning probability of some jackpots may be increased. For example, only the winning probabilities of the jackpots 1 and 2 may be increased, and the winning probability of the jackpot 3 may be set to be constant with all set values Ve.

(Regarding setting value change operation)

In order to change the setting value Ve, in this example, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON (operated to the setting change mode side) in a state where the gaming machine 1 is powered off and the front frame 2 is released, and The game machine 1 is powered on while the RAM clear button is pressed (the RAM clear switch 98 is ON). Then, the current setting value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance display 97, and the setting value Ve (1, 2, and 6 in this example) can be changed in a "setting change mode".

In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is made in the main control side main process, which will be described later (see step S104 in FIG. 5). When the above operation conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, processing for setting change is executed accordingly.

After shifting to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button functioning as a change operator for the set value Ve is turned ON, the current display value of the setting/performance display 97 changes to "1→2→6→1→ 2→6→ . . . ” within the usage range Ru. When the setting key switch 94 is turned off when the desired set value Ve is reached, the set value Ve is determined, and information about the determined set value Ve is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 .
When the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated and the display of the setting/performance display 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the game is shifted to a state in which the progress of the game is permitted.

(About performance display)

The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information to the setting/performance display device 97 .
The performance information is information that pachinko halls and related government agencies want to confirm, and typical examples thereof include information on the presence or absence of fraudulent prize balls such as excess prize balls for the gaming machine 1 and information on the original performance of the gaming machine 1. is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player is enjoying the game, unlike the advance notice effect or the like.

For this reason, the setting/performance display device 97 is inside the game machine 1, for example, the main control unit (main control board) 20, the payout control board 29, the launch control board 28, the relay board, the production control unit (production control board (liquid crystal It is provided at a position where the display information can be viewed when the front frame 2 is opened, such as on the control board) ) 24 or a board case (a protective cover that protects the board).

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of payout balls paid out due to winning during a specific state (total number of prize balls during a specific state: α) is The information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α/β) divided by the number of pieces: β can be adopted as the performance information.
The above-mentioned "total number of payouts" is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out when entering the winning opening (upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, big winning opening 50). is. In the case of the present embodiment, there are three upper starting openings 34 or lower starting openings 35, thirteen large winning openings 50, and ten general winning openings 43. FIG.
Further, which state to adopt as the specific state can be appropriately determined according to the state under which performance information is desired to be grasped. In the case of this embodiment, any state can be employed among the normal state, latent probability state, time saving state, probability variable state, and jackpot game. Also, a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, a normal state and a variable probability state, and all game states except during a winning game, etc., and the types to be measured can be determined as appropriate.
Also, as the period of the specific state, the period of either the low probability state or the high probability state of the jackpot lottery probability may be adopted.
Also, the total number of payouts excluding one or a plurality of specific winning holes from the measurement target may be the total number of payouts (total number of payouts excluding specific winning holes). For example, the total number of payouts may be obtained by excluding the big winning opening 50 from the measurement target among the winning openings.

(2) In addition, only one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding a specific winning hole, or the total number of out-balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as the performance information.

In this embodiment, the total number of balls paid out during the normal state (normal number of balls paid out) and the total number of out balls during the normal state (normal number of out balls) are measured in real time. The value obtained by multiplying the value divided by 100 (normal payout count/normal out count x 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as “normal ratio information”). In addition, the display value at this time shall be the value rounded off to the first decimal place.
Therefore, the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the normal ratio information are respectively stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM 203 (specified total winning ball number storage area, specified out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area). It is designed to be stored (memorized). However, when the total number of out-balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is stopped once, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the performance information. This prescribed number is not the total number of out balls in the normal state, but the total number of out balls during all game states (including during winning games) (hereinafter referred to as "the number of out balls in all states"). This all-state-out number is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (all-state-out number storage area) of the RAM 203 . Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the specified total number of winning balls storage area, specified out number storage area, specified ratio information storage area, and all state out number storage area are abbreviated as "measurement information storage area".

Then, the normal ratio information at the end point is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (this normal ratio information is stored), and then the measurement information storage area (normal payout number, normal out number and the total number of out balls) are cleared, and measurement is started again (measurement of the number of normal payouts, the normal number of out balls, the normal ratio information, and the number of out balls in all states is started). The setting/performance display device 97 displays the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured. It should be noted that not only the information of the previous time but also the history of the time before last or the time before that (three times before) may be displayed.

Here, in the case of this example, the setting/performance indicator 97 alternatively displays the setting value Ve and the performance information. Specifically, in this example, settings are changed and checked only when the power is turned on. After the set value Ve is displayed on the performance indicator 97 and the setting change or setting confirmation is completed, the performance information is displayed.
It should be noted that the configuration in which the set value Ve and the performance information are displayed by a common display is not limited, and a configuration in which they are displayed by separate displays can also be adopted. In that case, the setting value Ve and the performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Production control command)

The main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information about the special symbol variation display game, information about errors, etc. to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent dishonesty such as goto, the main control unit 20 only transmits signals to the effect control unit 24, and a one-way communication configuration in which signals from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It's becoming

Here, the effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT). Bit7 is ON, and Bit7 of EVENT is OFF. When transmitting these information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, the CPU 201 (main control CPU), when there is a command to be transmitted, sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and after a predetermined time has passed since this setting, the first time strobe signal. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the transmission of this strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive commands.

[2-2. Production control unit]

The production control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor that incorporates a CPU 241 (production control CPU), and includes a ROM 242 (production control ROM) that stores production data required for production control processing, and a RAM 243 that functions as a work area and buffer memory. It is composed mainly of a microcomputer equipped with a performance control RAM), and is also equipped with a sound control unit (sound source IC), RTC (Real Time Clock) function unit, counter circuit, interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. and controls the entire production operation.
The effect control unit 24 of this example has a memory 244 as a memory from which information can be read and written, in addition to the RAM 243 described above. The memory 244 is composed of, for example, an SRAM (Static RAM), and the speed of reading information by the CPU 241 is slower than that of the RAM 243 . The RAM 243 is not connected to a backup power supply, and cannot hold stored information when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, whereas the memory 244 is connected to a backup power supply and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. stored information can be retained even if the
The usage of the memory 244 will be described later.

The main role of the production control unit 24 is to receive the production control command from the main control unit 20, select and decide the production based on the production control command, and control the liquid crystal control unit 40 to cause the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image. , sound control of the speaker 46, light emission control of the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs (the button LED 75 and other performance LEDs (not shown)), operation control of the movable body (accessory), and the like.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 is configured as a computer device including a CPU and various memory devices, and controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 . The liquid crystal control unit 40 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, and an image that stores image data (effect image data) for which the VDP performs image expansion processing. A ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM) for temporarily storing image data developed by the VDP, and a CPU ( LCD control CPU), ROM (liquid crystal control ROM) that stores a program describing the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for the display control, RAM (liquid crystal control ROM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory control RAM).
The liquid crystal control CPU controls the operation of the VDP (display driving operation of the liquid crystal display device 36) based on the instruction from the effect control unit 24, so that the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an image according to the instruction of the effect control unit 24. is done.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment shown in FIG. Such a configuration is commonly referred to as a "two CPU" configuration. On the other hand, the configuration in which the effect control unit 24 is equipped with a CPU that performs the same function as the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40, that is, the configuration in which the effect control unit 24 also functions as the liquid crystal control unit 40 is a “1 CPU” configuration. is called

The production control unit 24 has a sound control unit (sound controller: sound source IC) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and the sound signal output by the sound control unit is amplified by the amplifier unit 46d and sent to the speaker 46. supplied.
In addition, the production control unit 24 includes a lamp driver unit 45d that functions as an optical display control unit for the optical display device 45a that includes the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, and a movable body accessory motor that operates a movable body (not shown). A motor driver section 80d (motor drive circuit) that functions as a drive control section for 80c is connected. The effect control section 24 instructs the lamp driver section 45d and the motor driver section 80d to control the light display operation by the light display device 45a and the operation of the movable body accessory motor 80c.

A position detection sensor 82a for monitoring the movement of the movable body role is also connected to the production control unit 24, and the production control unit 24 detects the current movement of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Also, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, the malfunction of the action of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, it is detected as an error.

In addition, the production control unit 24 is connected to the production button 13 and the cross key 16 switches shown as the operation unit 17 in the drawing, that is, the operation detection switches of the production button 13 and the cross key 16, and the production control unit 24 controls the production buttons. 13 and an operation detection signal from the cross key 16 can be received.

Based on the performance control command sent from the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24 selects (determines) a performance pattern by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance, and selects (determines) the required performance pattern. To display a desired performance by controlling various performance means at timing. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern fluctuation display operation, A "drawing scenario" in a broad sense is realized by the time-series development of advance notice effects, etc.

Here, for the effect control command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-described strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), and receives and analyzes it. Specifically, the CPU 241 executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing based on the input of the strobe signal described above, and obtains the effect control command in the interrupt processing realized thereby, and analyzes the contents of the command. conduct.
At this time, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 performs the processing even during execution of interrupt processing based on another interrupt (timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed). is interrupted to perform command reception interrupt processing, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, command reception interrupt processing is performed preferentially.

<3. Overview of operation>
[3-1. Symbol variation display game]

Next, the outline of the game operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the control configuration (FIG. 3) as described above will be described.
First, the symbol variation display game will be described.

(Special symbol variation display game)

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 A "jackpot lottery" is held by random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variation display game. Derivation display is performed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big-hit lottery based on winning the upper starting port 34 and the big-winning lottery based on winning the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the big-hit lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived from the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big-hit lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived from the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that the game ball enters the upper starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the side of the special symbol display device 38b, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variability display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the big win lottery result is a "big win", a predetermined "big win". In other cases, the special symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "lost" mode, thereby deriving the game result (big hit lottery result).

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38a is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the side of the special symbol display device 38b. The variable display game is called "special symbol variable display game 2". In addition, unless particularly necessary, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and ""Special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game".

(Decorative pattern variation display game)

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, along with this, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (dramatic game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Along with this, various productions are developed. When the special pattern variation display game ends, the decoration pattern variation display game also ends, the special pattern display device reflects the predetermined special pattern indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the decorative symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big win" (when the big win lottery result is "big win"), the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the display state of "7" in the 7 segment), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". ” in each display area, the decorative pattern reflects the “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” display areas, the three decorative patterns are “7”, “7”, “7 ” is displayed).

When the "big hit" is achieved, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "big win" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 is actuated to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern. A special game state (jackpot game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the open door 52b is operated until the opening time of the jackpot opens for a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) or until the number of game balls that win the jackpot (big prize jack) 50) (maximum number of winning balls: maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or enlarged by one actuation of the accessory: e.g. 9) until the winning area is opened or expanded, and if any of these conditions are met, the big winning opening is closed. round) repeated.

When the big win game is started, an opening performance for notifying the start of the big win is first performed, and after the opening performance is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. After the end of the specified number of rounds, an ending effect is performed to notify that the big win is over, thereby ending the big win game.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20, based on the entry (winning) of the game ball into the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, specifically On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting opening sensor 34a or the lower starting opening sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition related to special symbols) is met, a lottery will be held to determine whether it is a "big hit" or "lose". If it is a ``jackpot'', the type of the jackpot will be drawn, and if it is a ``losing'', the drawing of the winning type (winning type (hit type) lottery) ) 'and (if there is only one type of loss, the lottery may be omitted because there is no need to perform a type lottery for the loss), and based on the lottery result information, the special symbol fluctuation pattern Also, a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special stop symbol") to be finally stopped and displayed is determined according to the winning type.
Then, the main control unit 20, as the production control command to specify the processing state, at least special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the big hit lottery result and special symbol variation time, etc.) "variation pattern specification command" including It is transmitted to the production control section 24 side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control section 24 . In addition, in this embodiment, in order to increase the variety of effects, a "decorative design designation command" including special stop design information (symbol lottery result information (information on winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24. It's like

The above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information can include information designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "ready-to-win effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect", which will be described later) will occur. More specifically, the variation patterns of the special symbols are roughly classified into a "hit variation pattern" for winning and a "losing variation pattern" for losing, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. For these variation patterns, for example, 'reach variation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of reach production described later, 'normal variation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of reach production, pseudo-continuous production and reach production (overlapping occurrence) A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as 'pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern' to be specified, 'pseudo-continuous normal fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of pseudo-continuous production and does not specify the occurrence of reach production. In order to secure the performance time of the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation pattern that designates the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is usually set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

Effect control unit 24, based on the information included in the effect control command (here, variation pattern designation command and decorative design designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, chronologically during the decorative design variation display game Decide the production content to be developed (production scenario such as advance notice production) and the decorative pattern to be finally displayed stopped (decorative stop pattern), and display the decorative pattern by fluctuating according to the time schedule based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern. A pattern variation display game is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. has substantially the same time width. The effect control unit 24 also controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect), sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting and flashing drive (light effect) of the decorative lamp 45 and LED are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decoration symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above-described two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise specified.

(Normal pattern fluctuation display game)

In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning a prize), the main control unit 20 performs an "assisting winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variation display game, and after a certain period of time has passed, the result is changed to a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assist hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is set to a specific lighting state (for example, two LEDs 39 are all lit, or "○" and " The LED on the side of "○" among the LEDs expressing "x" is in a lighting state), and the display is stopped.

When this "assist hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates, thereby opening the movable wing 47 in an inverted "V" shape and opening the lower starting port 35. Or it becomes a state (starting opening open state) that is enlarged and the game ball is easy to flow in, and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "general electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this general electric open game, by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41, until the opening time of the lower starting port 35 passes a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or the game winning the lower starting port 35 The winning area is opened or expanded until the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4). 2 times) is repeated.

(About hold)

Here, in this embodiment, during the special/decorative pattern variation display game, during the normal pattern variation display game, during the jackpot game, or during the general electric open game, the upper start port 34, the lower start port 35, or the normal symbol start port 37 When a prize is generated, that is, there is an input of a detection signal from the upper starting opening sensor 34a or the lower starting opening sensor 35a or the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is established, As data relating to the right to start the variable display game, this data is reserved and stored up to a predetermined maximum number of reserved memories (for example, a maximum of 4), excluding data related to the variable display. The reserved data that is not used for the symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as "operational reserved ball". In order to make clear to the player the number of activated balls held, a special held display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place on the gaming machine 1, or a held display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. light up the device.

Also, in this embodiment, up to four operation reserve balls relating to special design 1, special design 2, and normal design are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of RAM 203, respectively, and reserved as the number of determinations of special design or normal design variation. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reservation memory number) of each operation reservation ball number regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

[3-2. game state]

The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of game states in addition to the big win which is the special game state. In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, first, various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of game states: a normal state, a time-saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variable state. These game states are distinguished by whether or not a jackpot lottery probability state (low probability state, high probability state) and an electric chew support state (privilege game) occur (with electric support, without electric support).

"Electric chew support state" means that the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 in the general electric open game (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing 47 and the number of times it is opened) is in the normal state It refers to the "open extended state" extended more than. When the open extension state occurs, the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds in the normal state (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is increased, for example. It is extended from the normal 1 time to 2 to 3 times.
In the case of the present embodiment, under the electric chew support state, the auxiliary winning lottery probability fluctuates from a low probability (for example, 1/256) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) (normal A pattern probability fluctuation state) occurs, and a 'normal pattern time saving state' that shortens the average time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation display operation time) occurs (for example, from 10 seconds 1 second). Therefore, when the electric chew support state occurs, the common electric open game occurs frequently, and the operating rate improved state (high base state) in which the operating rate of the movable wing pieces 47 per unit time is improved than in the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under the electric chewing support state is abbreviated as "with electric support", and the other case is abbreviated as "without electric support".

In the present embodiment, the “normal state” means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability), and the game state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

"Time-saving state" means that the probability of the jackpot lottery is as low as the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (variation display operation time of special symbols)) is lower than the normal state. It is a game state in which a 'special symbol time saving state' that is also shortened occurs and an electric chew support state occurs. In other words, during the time saving state, it becomes "low probability + electric sapo + special symbol time saving state".

The “potential state” is a “special symbol probability variable state” in which the jackpot lottery probability has changed to a high probability (for example, 1/39.9) that is higher than the above low probability, and a game state without an electric sapo (high Probability + no electricity support).

"Probability variable state" is a game state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as high as the latent probability state, but the special symbol time saving state and the electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the variable state, it becomes "high probability + electric sapo + special pattern time saving state".

Regarding the game state, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability, if the game state is "normal state" or "time saving state", at least the jackpot lottery probability is "low probability state", and the game state is "latent state" or "variable probability". state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. During the jackpot, a jackpot game is generated in which the jackpot is opened and closed, but the jackpot lottery probability and the presence/absence of an electric sapo are placed under the same low probability/no electric sapo game state as in the above-described normal state.

[3-3. About hit]

Next, the “hit” in the game machine 1 will be explained.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big win lottery (hit lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of wins. In the case of this example, the types of hits include, for example, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "variable probability 6R", and "variable probability 10R".
Note that the notation of "R" means the prescribed number of rounds (maximum number of rounds).

The jackpot type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed, or a game ball is displayed. It means something that operates when passing through a specific area in the big winning opening.

The variable probability state ends the high probability state and shifts to the low probability state when the special symbol variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: the prescribed ST number) without winning the jackpot type. , It is a so-called "number-of-times-cutting variable machine (ST machine)", and when the prescribed number of STs is completed, the game is shifted to the normal state from the next game. However, it may be a "general probability changer" that continues until the next big hit is won.
The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2), It may be the number of executions of either one (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2). Also, the number of times of the time-saving state is not limited to 60 times or 100 times, and can be determined as appropriate according to the playability. Also, there is no particular limitation on the type of hit to be provided, and it can be determined as appropriate.

Here, in this example, a plurality of types are provided for "losing" as well as the jackpot types. Specifically, there are three kinds of loss types, "loss 1", "loss 2", and "loss 3".
As described above, when the result of the win-lose lottery is "loss", a lottery for the type of loss is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3-4. About production]
(Direction mode)

Next, the production mode (production state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of performance modes for producing performances related to game states, and is configured to be able to move between the performance modes. Specifically, there are provided a normal production mode, a time saving production mode, a latent probability production mode, and a probability variable production mode corresponding to each of the normal state, the time saving state, the latent probability state, and the probability variable state. In each production mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of decorative patterns is displayed with different background production, so that the player can grasp what kind of game state he is currently staying in. It has become.

The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a functional unit (production state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of production modes. Effect control unit 24 (CPU241), the specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), specifically to the effect control command including the game state information managed by the main control unit 20 side Based on this, the current game state is grasped in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side, and transition control between a plurality of types of performance modes is possible. As the specific effect control command as described above, for example, there are a variation pattern designation command, a decorative design designation command, a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state, and the like.

(Notice production)

Next, the advance notice effect will be described. The performance control unit 24 is based on the content of the performance control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, variously related to the current performance mode and the jackpot lottery result. It is configured to be able to control the appearance of such a "notice effect". Such a notice effect is used as a "promotion effect" to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation of whether or not the winning type has been won (hereinafter referred to as "expectation to win"), and to arouse the player's expectation of winning. work. Typical advance notice effects include "ready effect", "pseudo-continuous effect", and "pre-reading effect". The effect control unit 24 functions as a notice effect control means capable of controlling the execution (appearance) of these effects.

"Reach production" refers to a production mode with a reach state (variation display mode with a reach state: reach fluctuation pattern), specifically, to derive and display the final game result via the reach state Say the production mode. The ready-to-win effects include multiple types of ready-to-win effects associated with winning expectations. For example, in some cases, the degree of winning expectation is relatively higher than when the normal reach effect appears. Such reach performance is called 'super reach performance'. Many of these "super reach" have relatively longer presentation time (fluctuation time) than normal reach in order to arouse expectation of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, the super reach includes a plurality of types of reach effects such as super reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of these super reach 1 to 4 is "super reach 1 < super reach 2 < super Reach 3 < Super Reach 4” relationship.

"Pseudo-continuous effect" refers to a mode of production accompanied by a pseudo-continuous change display state (pseudo-continuous change) of decorative patterns. It refers to a variable display mode in which a part or all of the symbols are once temporarily stopped, and the display operation is repeated once or more than once, such as executing the re-variable display operation of the decorative symbols from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "pre-reading forewarning effect (continuous forewarning effect)" that is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Such a "pseudo-run" basically has a rate of occurrence (appearance rate) that increases the expectation of winning as the number of pseudo-fluctuations increases. It is made easy to select an effect for arousing expectations such as reach.

"Pre-reading notice effect" (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "pre-reading notice" or "pre-reading effect") is based on the result of pre-reading judgment, before the fluctuation display of the pattern to be judged is performed, It means an effect that notifies the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. The term "advantageous state" means a state that is advantageous to the player.
Specifically, the look-ahead effect of this example is mainly for pending display of the operation pending balls (undigested operation pending balls) that have not yet been subjected to the execution of the symbol variation display game (the special symbol variation display operation). Before the operation reserve ball is offered to the symbol variation display game, it is performed in a performance mode that can notify the winning expectation in advance by using the aspect and the background effect of the symbol variation display game to be executed first. . In addition, in the pattern variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", various effects such as so-called "SU (step-up) notice effect", "timer notice effect", "resurrection effect", and "premier notice effect" are available. It occurs, and it is designed to excite the game content.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the "holding change notice effect" as an example of the look-ahead notice effect will be described.
In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display effect or advance notice effect is displayed). display area) is provided, and in the display area on the lower side of the screen, a reservation display area 76 (reservation display portions a1 to d1) that displays the number of operation reservation balls on the special symbol 1 side and a special symbol A reservation display area 77 (reservation display portions a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation reservation balls on the second side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of the operation pending ball, that effect is notified by a predetermined pending display mode. In FIG. 4, the presence or absence of the operation retention ball is lit (with operation retention ball: “○ (white circle)” in the illustration), or in the off state (no operation retention ball: dashed circle in the illustration). It shows an example in which information about the number of balls in operation is notified.

The display (suspension display) regarding the presence or absence of the operation reserve ball is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (the order of winning). It is displayed as the first (that is, the oldest) active holding ball on the time axis among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, there is provided a changing display area 78 for showing the active holding ball currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game pending K which is currently being played is placed on the icon of the strike seat J appears. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest pending a1 or a2 icon (icon image) displayed in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is the pending K during game execution. As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the striker J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation pending ball occurs, from the main control unit 20, the pre-reading judgment information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation holding balls at the time of the pre-reading judgment (the number of the existing operation holding balls including the operation holding ball that occurred this time) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 22).
In the case of this embodiment, the pending addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the pending addition command can specify the upper byte side data that can specify the number of operation pending balls at the time of prefetching judgment, and the prefetching judgment information. lower byte side data.

Here, as can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, based on the occurrence of a winning prize on the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 and a new reserved ball, the prediction of the reserved ball is performed. As a judgment, a jackpot lottery for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball is performed. As will be described later, the main control unit 20 reserves and stores information representing the result of the big-hit lottery performed as such prefetch determination in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 .
The information of the jackpot lottery result obtained at the time of the prefetch determination is used for selecting (lottery) the pattern variation pattern in the pattern variation display game, and can be rephrased as "variation pattern selection information". Therefore, it can be said that the main control unit 20 carries out the pre-reading determination and holds and stores the resulting “variation pattern selection information” in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 .

When the effect control unit 24 receives the pending addition command transmitted by the main control unit 20, based on the prefetch determination information included therein, as part of the display control processing related to the pending display, "prefetching preview effect" is performed. Effect control processing related to is performed. Concretely, a "pre-reading notice lottery" is carried out to determine whether or not the pre-reading notice effect can be executed.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is, specifically, the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot lottery result at the start of variation) executed when the operation reserve ball is offered to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20, This is the game information obtained by pre-reading and judging the fluctuation pattern at the time of fluctuation start. That is, this information includes at least the information (prefetching winning/losing information) that prefetches the winning/losing lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and the information that prefetches the pattern lottery result (prefetching pattern information) and the fluctuation at the start of the fluctuation. Information (prefetch variation pattern information) obtained by prefetch determination of the pattern can be included. What kind of information is included in the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the contents to be notified by the pre-reading notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the pending addition command includes prefetch hit/loss information, prefetch pattern information, and prefetch variation pattern information.

It should be noted that the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead judgment when the operation reserve ball is generated is not necessarily the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the operation reserve ball is actually used for the fluctuation display operation. no. For example, representatively explaining the case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "super reach 1", in this case, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is called "super reach 1" It is possible to specify that it is not the type of reach production itself, but the "super reach type" that is the gist of it.

In the case of this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon targeted for the pre-reading notice is, for example, a normal holding display. (Normal pending display mode) can change from white (normal pending display mode) to pending display (special pending display mode) with blue, green, red, and danger patterns (or special colors and patterns such as rainbow colors) for advance notice display (special pending display mode) System" pre-reading notice effect (also referred to as "holding change notice") is performed.
FIG. 4 shows an example in which the operation holding ball of the hatched holding display portion b1 has changed to a special holding display. Here, the display of blue, green, red, and danger pattern of the pending icon means that the expectation of winning is high in this order, and especially the display of the pending icon with the danger pattern has an extremely high expectation of winning the jackpot. It is supposed to be a premium pending icon that will be displayed.

(Direction means)

Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine 1 . The directing means may be stimulus transmission means capable of exhibiting directing effects by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations. light production means), a sound generator such as a speaker 46 (sound generator 46a: sound production means), a production display device such as a liquid crystal display device 36 (display means), a pressure device that conveys contact pressure to the operator's body, Typical examples are a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, and a movable body accessory that exerts a visual presentation effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the sense of sight like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display device). When it is called an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that produces effects by image display, and devices that produce effects by means other than images, such as 7-segment displays, are included in the concept of the above-mentioned effect display device.

<4. Processing of Main Control Unit>

Next, processing performed by the main control unit 20 of this embodiment will be described. The processing of the main control unit 20 mainly consists of predetermined main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 5) and timer interrupt processing that is started by a scheduled interrupt from CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 18). and

[4-1. Main control side main processing]

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing main processing on the main control side.
The main processing on the main control side is started when a system reset occurs due to a system reset signal from the power supply board during recovery from a power outage or power failure, or when the control program goes out of control, the watchdog timer function ( WDT) is exhibited and the CPU 201 is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main processing is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes initial setting processing necessary for starting the game operation, such as initial setting of register values of each unit including the CPU 201. (step S101).

(initial setting processing)

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process in step S101.
In FIG. 6, when the above system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 sets itself to an interrupt disabled state in step S201, and then sets the value of the stack pointer in the RAM 203 to the stack area as stack pointer setting processing in step S202. Execute the setting process corresponding to the final address of Then, in the following step S203, the RAM protection is invalidated, and the prohibition area in the outside-designated-area travel prohibition function of the RAM 203 is invalidated.

Next, in step S204, the CPU 201 executes processing for turning off the security signal, setting value display, and firing permission signal. Here, the security signal is a signal output to the hall computer HC through the frame external common terminal board 21, and functions as a signal for notifying the hall computer HC of a state such as a setting being changed. Turning off the set value display means turning off the display of the set value Ve on the setting/performance indicator 97 .
The firing permission signal is a signal output from the payout control board 29 to the firing control board 28 as described above, and the CPU 201 instructs the payout control board 29 to turn off the firing permission signal.
Here, turning off the security signal and turning off the set value display are countermeasures against turning on/off the power during setting change. That is, since the power may have been turned off while the set value Ve was being displayed in the setting change process, the set value display and the security signal are temporarily turned off.

In step S205 following step S204, the CPU 201 executes power supply abnormality check processing.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the power failure check process, the WDT timer is cleared (step S11), and it is determined whether or not the power failure signal is ON (step S12). The power failure signal is a signal output from the power supply board, and indicates that the power failure signal OFF is at a normal level and that the power failure signal ON is not at a normal level (that is, is abnormal). If the power failure signal is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S101 shown in FIG. 5 and redoes the main control side main processing from the beginning. That is, when an abnormality is recognized in the power supply, the main processing on the main control side is reset.
If the power supply abnormality signal is not ON, the CPU 201 terminates the power supply abnormality check process because no abnormality is recognized in the power supply.

Returning to FIG. 6, the CPU 201 performs various setting processes at the time of startup in step S206 in response to completion of the power abnormality check process in step S205. In the setting process of step S206, for example, an interrupt mode setting process for setting a predetermined interrupt mode, an internal hard random number setting process for activating an internal hard random number circuit, and the like are executed.

In step S207 following step S206, the CPU 201 sets the activation waiting time of the sub-control board (effect control unit 24). Then, through the processing of steps S208 to S210, it waits until the set activation waiting time elapses. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the set start-up waiting time (step S208), the power failure check process (step S209) is executed, and if the start-up waiting time is not zero (step S210: ≠0), step S208 return to the process of Activation of the effect control unit 24 is completed by the standby process based on such an activation waiting time.

In step S<b>210 , when the activation waiting time has elapsed (waiting time=0), the CPU 201 proceeds to step S<b>211 and transmits a standby screen display command to the effect control unit 24 .
In response to this standby screen display command, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a predetermined screen, such as a screen on which characters such as "Please Wait..." Control for execution.

In response to the execution of the transmission process of step S211, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S212, and performs payout control while executing the power supply abnormality check process (S212: see FIG. 7) by the processes of step S212 and step S213. It waits for a power-on signal from the board 29 to be sent. This power-on signal is a signal output when the payout control board 29 normally starts up, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 starts normally. Accordingly, when the payout control board 29 does not function normally due to some trouble, the processing of steps S212 and S213 is repeated and the game operation is not started. Therefore, an abnormal payout such as failure to pay out prize balls does not occur, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.
When the power-on signal is sent (step S213: ON), the CPU 201 ends the initial setting process of step S101.

(Processing after initial setting)

After completing the initial setting process, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S102 shown in FIG.
In step S102, the CPU 201 acquires the information of the input port n (that is, the predetermined input port) and copies it to the W register.
Here, the input port n is a 1-byte (8-bit) port, and in this example, the following signals are input. Note that "b0" to "b7" shown below represent bit positions.

b0: setting key (input signal from setting key switch 94)
b1: out-of-supply detection signal b2: counting error signal b3: disconnection detection signal 1
b4: disconnection detection signal 2
b5: door open signal (detection signal of front door open sensor 61)
b6: RAM clear button (input signal from RAM clear switch 98)
b7: Power-on signal and dispensing communication confirmation signal

Here, for the setting key b0, "0" means that the setting key switch 94 is OFF, and "1" means that the setting key switch 94 is ON. As for the door open signal b5, "0" means that the door is closed (the front frame 2 is closed), and "1" means that the door is open. Further, with respect to the RAM clear button b6, "0" means that the RAM clear switch 98 is OFF (button non-operated state), and "1" means that the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (button operated state).

In step S103 following step S102, the CPU 201 masks the value of the W register. Specifically, the values required for determining the migration of setting change processing (S115), RAM clear processing (at least S117 and S118), setting confirmation processing (S109), and backup restoration processing (S111) described below. A setting key (b0), a RAM clear button (b6), and a door open signal (b5) are masked.
As can be understood from the above description, the conditions for transitioning to the setting change process are that, at startup, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the operating state with the front frame 2 opened. ing.
Further, in this example, the condition for shifting to the RAM clear process is, in terms of operation, that the setting key is in a non-operating state and the RAM clear button is in an operating state at the time of startup.
In terms of operation, the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation process are that the front frame 2 is opened, the setting key is in the operating state, and the RAM clear button is in the non-operating state.
Further, as a condition for transitioning to the backup restoration process, in terms of operation, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are to be in a non-operating state at the time of startup.

FIG. 8 shows the relationship between each determination condition in terms of operation and the value of the W register when shifting to these setting change processing, RAM clear processing, setting confirmation processing, and backup restoration processing.
FIG. 8 shows the order of setting change processing, RAM clearing processing, setting confirmation processing, and transition determination to backup restoration processing.
The determination of the transition to the first setting change process is performed under the following conditions as shown in FIG. : ON, therefore, the conditions for the value of the W register are the 0th bit: 1, the 5th bit: 1, and the 6th bit: 1.
The determination of the transition to the second RAM clearing process is performed by determining whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON and the value of the W register is 1 at the 6th bit. Here, in this example, the determination of transition to the RAM clearing process is performed when the conditions for transitioning to the setting change process are not satisfied. In addition, the RAM clear switch 98 must be OFF in order to shift to the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process. From these points, if the condition for transition to the setting change process is not satisfied and the RAM clear switch 98 is ON, it can be estimated that the transition operation to the RAM clear process is being performed. For this reason, in this example, as described above, in judging the transition to the RAM clearing process, in terms of operation, it is only necessary to judge whether the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (6th bit: 1 or not). and

The judgment conditions for the transition to the third setting confirmation process are set key: ON, door open: ON, and RAM clear switch 98: OFF. : 1, 6th bit: 0 is the condition.
Further, the determination conditions for the determination of the transition to the fourth backup restoration process are set key: OFF, RAM clear switch 98: OFF, and accordingly, the W register value is 0:0, 6th bit: 0. conditional.

Here, regarding the backup restoration process, the transition condition for performing only the backup restoration process without going through the setting confirmation process is described as the setting key: OFF and the RAM clear switch 98: OFF in terms of operation as described above. However, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed, the condition for determining whether or not to simply perform the backup restoration process is that the backup flag, which will be described later, is ON (step S106). (Refer to the judgment process of ).

Returning to FIG.
In step S104, the CPU 201 executes a setting change condition satisfaction determination process in response to performing the masking process in step S103. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the masked value (3 bits) in step S103 is "111" in order to determine whether or not to shift to the setting change mode.
When the masked value is "111" and a positive result is obtained that the setting change condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 executes the setting change process of step S115. That is, processing for newly setting the set value Ve is performed according to the operation of the RAM clear button or setting key.
Details of the setting change processing in step S115 will be explained later.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, detection signals from the setting key switch 94, the front door open sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98, in other words, detection signals used to determine whether to shift to the setting change mode The signals are input to the same input port of the main control unit 20, and collective determination is made as to whether or not the values of the input detection signals satisfy predetermined conditions.
As a result, the number of judgment processes can be reduced in comparison with the case of individually judging whether or not the value of each detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition for judging transition to the setting change mode.

In response to executing the setting change process in step S115, the CPU 201 executes RAM clearing process in step S116. This RAM clearing process is a process for initializing values in a predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203, and a setting for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the end of the setting change process executed in step S115. This includes processing for transmitting a change end command, the details of which will be described later.

Subsequently, in step S104, if the value after masking in step S103 is not "111" and a negative result that the setting change condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S105 to Determine whether or not Specifically, at least it is determined whether or not the "setting value" stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is a value outside the use range Ru (outside the range of "1", "2", and "6" in this example). do.
Here, the value handled by the CPU 201 regarding the set value Ve is the set value Vd. The set value Vd is a value corresponding to the set value Ve. In this example, it is a 1-byte value. Values from (0) to 02H(3) are defined. In addition, "H" means a hexadecimal number (the same shall apply hereinafter). In this example, the set value Vd=00H represents the set value Ve="1", the set value Vd=01H represents the set value Ve="2", and the set value Vd=02H represents the set value Ve="6". assumed. In the main control unit 20, the setting value Vd is mainly handled as the "setting value", and this setting value Vd is stored in the "setting value" storage area in the work area of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 20. .
In the determination process of step S105, it is determined whether or not the set value Vd stored in the work area is within the range of 00H to 02H.

If it is determined in step S105 that the set value is outside the use range Ru (that is, outside the normal range) and the RAM is abnormal, the CPU 201 performs processing to wait for the power to be turned on again after step S112. Afterwards.
Specifically, in step S112, the CPU 201, as a command transmission process when the power is turned on again, gives an effect control command (setting Waiting for change command) to the production control unit 24. When a RAM abnormality is detected at startup, the setting change mode is forcibly entered, and the change (setting) of the set value Ve is accepted. For this reason, the CPU 201 first notifies the effect control section 24 side that the setting change wait command is used to shift to the setting change mode in step S112.
Receiving the setting change waiting command, the effect control unit 24 executes a screen display on the liquid crystal display device 36 for prompting the setting change operation, such as a screen including characters such as "Please open the door and change the setting". Let At this time, the effect control unit 24 may perform control to cause the corresponding light effect (for example, lighting of all LEDs in the light display device 45a) and sound effect to appear together with the screen display.

In step S113 following step S112, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF), and then repeats the error display process in step S114. In the error display process of step S114, a process for causing the setting/performance indicator 97 to display an error is performed. This error display process is repeated until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, and when the power is turned on again, the processes after step S101 are executed again as the main control side main process. At this time, if an operation to shift to the setting change mode has been performed according to the screen display or the like, the shift to the setting change mode is performed, and the RAM abnormal state is resolved.

If it is determined in step S105 that the set value is not outside the usable range Ru and that there is no RAM abnormality, the CPU 201 advances to step S106 to determine whether the backup flag is ON (backup flag=5AH in this example). is ON state).
In the game machine 1, when the power is cut off, the information stored in the RAM 203 is backed up by the power check/backup process (step S901, see FIG. 19) described later in the main control side timer interrupt process. If the backup process has been properly performed at the time of power shutdown, the backup flag is turned ON (see step S1010 in FIG. 19). Therefore, in step S106, the backup flag is checked to determine whether or not backup recovery is possible. Specifically, in step S106, it is determined whether or not the backup flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is in the ON state (5AH).

When determining in step S106 that the backup flag is not ON, the CPU 201 advances the processing to step S112 described above. As a result, when the backup return condition is not satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly entered in the same manner as in the case where the RAM abnormality described above is recognized.

Here, as described above, the determination process in step S106 corresponds to the process of determining whether the transition to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed is possible regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is ON, the CPU 201 determines in step S107 whether or not the RAM clear condition (condition for shifting to RAM clear processing) is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1".
When the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1" and a positive result indicating that the RAM clear condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 advances the processing to step S116 described above. As a result, the above-described RAM clear processing is executed.

Here, as can be seen by referring to the route from steps S107 to S116 described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to clear the RAM without changing the settings. This makes it possible to clear data other than the data related to the set value Ve, such as payout-related data in the RAM 203 .

Further, in step S107, if the value of the 6th bit of the W register is not "1" and a negative result is obtained that the RAM clear condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S108 and sets the confirmation condition ( It is determined whether or not the transition condition to the setting confirmation process) is established. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the W register after being masked in step S103 is "110".
If the value of the W register after masking is "110" and a positive result is obtained that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 executes the setting confirmation process in step S109, and advances the process to step S110. That is, the process shifts to backup recovery.
The details of the setting confirmation process in step S109 will be explained again.

On the other hand, if the value of the W register after masking is not "110" and a negative result is obtained that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 skips the setting confirmation processing of step S109 and proceeds to step S110. .

In step S110, the CPU 201 performs processing of transmitting a predetermined effect control command corresponding to the time of backup return to the effect control unit 24 as command transmission processing at the time of backup return.

In step S111 following step S110, the CPU 201 performs backup restoration processing.
The backup restoration process is a process of restoring the operation before the power shutdown after the power is turned on based on the memory contents of the RAM 203 backed up at the time of the power shutdown. Specifically, the CPU 201 restores the stack pointer before the power shutdown, and performs processing for starting the game operation from the processing state at the time of the power shutdown.
Also, in the backup recovery process, a power failure recovery display command (OB03H) for instructing information display corresponding to the backup recovery is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in the main loop pre-processing of step S119 to be described later. Therefore, a process of storing the low-order byte data of the power failure recovery display command in the register is executed.

When the backup restoration process of step S111 is executed, or when the RAM clear process of step S116 described above is executed (that is, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are executed, or only the RAM clear process is executed) , the CPU 201 proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, the CPU 201 sets a CTC for periodically generating a timer interrupt every predetermined time such as 4 ms.
By performing the setting process of step S117, an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output thereafter, and the main control side timer interrupt process is executed.

In subsequent step S118, the CPU 201 performs processing for transmitting an effect control command for instructing the start of the game to the effect control unit 24, then advances the process to step S119 to execute main loop pre-processing, and then step S120. main loop processing.
Note that the main loop pre-processing in step S119 will be described later.

(main loop processing)

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the main loop processing of step S120.
In the main loop processing of FIG. 9, the CPU 201 sets itself to an interrupt disabled state in step S601, and executes random number update processing in subsequent step S602. In this random number update process, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game (random numbers related to the jackpot lottery that circulates within a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery) random number) and random number related to the subsidized lottery (random number for the subsidized hit judgment used for the subsidized lottery))) Random number used to change the initial value (start value) (initial value random number for special symbol judgment , the initial value random number for auxiliary hit determination) and the random number for the variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as various random number counters used for the symbol lottery related to the big win lottery, the auxiliary winning lottery, or the variation pattern lottery, a counter for generating the initial value of the random number counter for special symbol determination, a special symbol determination A random number counter for auxiliary hit determination, a counter for generating an initial value of a random number counter for auxiliary hit determination, a random number counter for auxiliary hit determination, a random number counter for variation pattern, and the like are provided. These counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. In the random number update process of step S602, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial values of the special symbol determination random number counter and the auxiliary hit determination random number counter described above, the variation pattern random number counter, etc. are updated, and the above various generate soft random numbers for . For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number counter for the fluctuation pattern is "0 to 238", the value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the value of the random number for the fluctuation pattern of the RAM 203, and the obtained value is After adding "1", it is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding "1" to the acquired value is "239", "0" is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other random number counters for initial value generation are similarly updated.

After completing the random number update process in step S602, the CPU 201 saves the values of all registers in step S603, and then performs performance display monitor tally division process in step S604.
This performance display monitor aggregate division process is a process of calculating a value as the above-described performance information (here, for example, a value as the above-described "normal time ratio information"). As described above, the value of the normal ratio information is calculated using the total number of payouts and the total number of out balls. Lower starting port 35, general winning port 43, big winning port 50) is calculated based on the result of counting the number of winning game balls, and the total number of out balls is the number of game balls discharged from the out port 49. Find by counting.
The number of winning balls and the number of out balls are counted in the later-described input management process (see step S904 in FIG. 18) in the main control side timer interrupt process. The CPU 201 calculates a value as normal time ratio information in step S604 based on the count values obtained by counting the number of winning balls and the number of out balls performed on the timer interrupt processing side. As described above, the calculated value as the normal time ratio information is stored in a predetermined area (measurement information storage area) of the RAM 203 .
The value of the normal time ratio information calculated in this way is displayed on the setting/performance indicator 97 by the later-described performance display monitor display process (see step S916 in FIG. 18) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In step S605 following step S604, the CPU 201 performs all register restoration processing, sets itself to the interrupt enabled state in step S606, and returns to step S601.

Thus, in the main loop process of step S123, the processes of steps S601 to S606 are repeated in an infinite loop. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S601 to S606 except while the intermittent timer interrupt processing is being performed.

(setting change processing)

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the setting change process in step S115.
In this setting change process, a process for setting the set value Ve based on the operation, and an effect control command for notifying that the setting is being changed or that the setting change has been completed (completed) are sent to the effect control unit 24. Processing and the like for transmission are performed.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first executes a process of transmitting a setting changing command (BA76H) to the effect control unit 24 in step S401.
In response to this setting change command, the effect control unit 24 displays a screen on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the setting is being changed, such as a screen on which characters such as "setting is being changed" are arranged. A process is executed to cause the setting to be executed, or to output a corresponding sound from the speaker 46 while the setting is being changed. Furthermore, at this time, the effect control unit 24 may light predetermined LEDs (for example, all LEDs) in the above-described light generating means (light display device 45a) according to a predetermined lighting pattern.
It should be noted that the processing executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to various effect control commands transmitted by the CPU 201 relating to the setting change, including the command during setting change, will be described later (FIG. 52A, etc.).

In subsequent step S402, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF state), and then sets system operation status=2 in step S403. This system operation status is information for at least identifying whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been passed at the time of startup. A value (for example, "0") indicates that the setting change process has not been performed.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 5, in this example, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process (S116) are executed, and when only the RAM clear process is executed without executing the setting change process, the RAM Although the clear processing (program) is shared, by using the above system operation status, it is possible to execute the processing separately in the former case and the latter case while sharing the RAM clear processing program. .

In step S404 following step S403, the CPU 201 executes processing for acquiring the setting value. Specifically, the set value Vd (one of 00H to 02H in this example) stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired.

The processing from step S405 following step S404 updates the display value on the setting/performance display 97 in accordance with the forward feeding operation of the set value Ve (operation of the RAM clear button), or completes the setting change operation (operation of the setting key). operation) to set the set value Ve.
First, in step S405, the CPU 201 decrements the acquired set value Vd by 1 ("set value -1"), and in subsequent step S406 determines whether the set value Vd is "2" (maximum number of steps - 1) or more. (set value ≥ 2”). In this example, since the maximum value of the setting value Vd is 02H (the maximum number of stages is "3"), it is not determined that the setting value≧2 in step S406 that is executed for the first time after the setting change process is started. .
In step S406, if the set value Vd is not 2 or more, the CPU 201 sets the carry flag (on) in step S407, and increments the set value Vd by 1 ("set value + 1") in step S408. Then, in step S409, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is ON. If the carry flag is ON, the CPU 201 executes a setting change command acquisition process in step S411, and transmits the setting change command to the effect control unit 24 by the following command process in step S412.
The setting change command will be described later.
After executing the command transmission process in step S412, the CPU 201 executes the output management process in step S413. By this output management process, the setting value Ve corresponding to the current setting value Vd is displayed on the setting/performance indicator 97 . Details of the output management processing in step S413 will be described later.

In step S414 following step S413, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF, that is, whether or not the setting key switch 94 is OFF. It is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 98 is not ON, the CPU 201 executes the output management process of step S413 again.
By the processing of steps S413 to S415, the CPU 201 waits until either the setting key or the change switch is turned ON, and during the standby, causes the setting/performance display 97 to display the current set value Ve by the processing of step S413. Repeat the process for

In step S415, if the change switch is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S406.
If the set value Vd acquired at the start of the setting change process in step S115 (the set value Vd that was being set until then) is 02H, it is determined that the change switch is ON in step S415. In the process of step S406, which is executed accordingly, the determination result that "the set value≧2" is obtained (because the value is decremented by -1 in step S405 but incremented by 1 in step S408). The setting value Vd should be returned to 00H in response to a change operation (forward feeding operation) performed when the setting value Vd is 02H. Therefore, if it is determined in step S406 that "set value≧2", the carry flag setting process in step S407 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S408. As a result, the carry flag is determined to be OFF in step S409, so the process proceeds to step S410 and the set value Vd is returned to 00H ("set value←0").
In response to returning the set value Vd to 00H in step S410, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S413 via the processes of steps S411 and S412. That is, in this case, the setting/performance indicator 97 displays the setting value Ve ("1" in this example) corresponding to the setting value Vd=00H.
Note that the carry flag is turned OFF when it is determined to be ON in step S409, for example.

Through the above process, while the setting is being changed, the set value Vd is cyclically changed within the range of 00H to 02H (within the use range Ru) according to the change operation, and the changed set value Vd is changed. The set value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance indicator 97 .

Here, according to the processing of steps S405 to S410 described above, the upper limit value for returning the set value Vd to "00H" can be changed depending on the magnitude of the value to be compared with the set value Vd in step S406 . I understand. That is, in the above example, by setting the comparison target value in step S406 to "2 (02H)", when the setting value Vd=2 and the operation of the change switch is detected in step S415, the setting value Vd is returned to "00H". If the values to be compared in step S406 are "1" and "0", respectively, when the set value Vd=1 and when the change switch operation is detected when the set value Vd=0, the set value Vd is returned to "00H".
Regarding the pachinko game machine 1, it is conceivable to separately produce a model that allows setting changes and a model that does not allow setting changes, but if the processing of steps S405 to S410 described above is adopted, the comparison target in step S406 By setting the value to "0", it can be seen that a model whose settings cannot be changed can be easily created. This means that, while the program for causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to execute the processing is kept common, only by changing the stored value of the comparison object value referred to in the processing of step S406 , the machine type for which the setting can be changed and the setting changeable model are changed. It means that it is possible to separately create models that are impossible. In this respect, the program is highly versatile.
Further, according to the process shown in FIG. 10, even if the comparison target value in step S406 is set to "0" to disable the setting change, the setting change operation is effectively processed (S415). Then, according to the setting change operation effectively processed in this way, the value of the setting value information stored in the register is also changed in the processing of FIG. 10 (S40 8 ). However, if the value to be compared in step S405=“0”, the program does not change the set value Vd in the end even if the setting change operation is performed.

Further, the setting change time command transmitted in step S412 is a command for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting value Ve corresponding to the setting value Vd being selected during the setting change process. It is a command in which information representing Ve is stored.
Through the series of processes of steps S406 to S415 described above, every time the setting value Ve being selected is switched by the forward feeding operation of the setting value, a setting change time command reflecting the setting value Ve after switching is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. will be
10, the CPU 201 uses a set value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) to obtain the set value Ve corresponding to the set value Vd, although the illustration of FIG. 10 is omitted.

When it is determined in step S415 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S416 and executes processing for saving the setting value Vd. That is, a process of storing the set value Vd in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 203 is executed.
The CPU 201 ends the setting change process of step S115 in response to executing the save process of step S416.

FIG. 11 is a flow chart of the output management process in step S413.
First, the CPU 201 executes security signal output processing in step S501. Specifically, a process for outputting a security signal to the hall computer HC through the external common terminal board 21 for frame is performed.
In step S502, the CPU 201 outputs 0 to the LED common port, that is, the common port of the LED as the setting/performance indicator 97. In step S503, the CPU 201 acquires display data from the 7-segment decode table. Execute the process. That is, it is a process of acquiring display data of set values Ve (“1”, “2”, and “6”) based on set values Vd.
When 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the setting/performance indicator 97 is turned off (no display), the significance of which will be described later.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a 7-segment decode table, and FIG. 13 shows an example of the relationship between the segment configuration and segment display patterns in the setting/performance display 97. In FIG.
The 7-segment decoding table is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20. FIG.

In this example, the seven segments in the setting/performance indicator 97 are numbered from 0 to 6 as shown in FIG. 13A. The setting/performance indicator 97 is provided with a DP (dot point) display section (light emitting section) as well as these seven segments 0 to 6, and the DP display section is numbered "7". ing.
As the 7-segment display data, a total of 10 pieces are prepared, from the display data "SEG_0" representing the numerical value "0" to the display data "SEG_9" representing the numerical value "9". The display data is 1-byte (8-bit) data, and if the least significant bit position is the first bit position, the first bit position is segment "0" display/non-display (light emission/non-light emission). represents Similarly, the second bit position is segment "1", the third bit position is segment "2", the fourth bit position is segment "3", the fifth bit position is segment "4", and the sixth bit position is segment "4". bit position indicates display/non-display of segment "5", and the seventh bit position indicates display/non-display of segment "6".
Also, in the display data in this example, the 8th bit position indicates display/non-display of DP (“7”).

The 7-segment decode table shown in FIG. 12 is configured so that the corresponding display data, specifically the display data of SEG_1, SEG_2, and SEG_6 are obtained from the set values Vd=00H, 01H, and 02H. It is configured.
Specifically, in the 7-segment decode table of this example, at least an area for storing display data for each set value Vd of 00H to 05H is secured, such as the address area of "6203" to "6208" in the drawing. The display data SEG_1 (“06” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd=00H is stored in the uppermost layer area (the area with the lowest address number) in this area, and the set value is stored in the second area. Display data SEG_2 ("5B" in the figure) corresponding to Vd=01H is stored, and display data SEG_6 ("7D" in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd=02H is stored in the third area.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=03H, the fifth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=05H are provided for display purposes. Although "00" is stored as data, its significance will be explained again.
In the 7-segment decode table of this example, display data SEG_E ("79") for displaying "E" representing a set value error is stored in the seventh area. A setting value error can be notified through the setting/performance indicator 97 in response to a case where the setting value Vd indicates an abnormal value such as a value outside the use range Ru. .

Returning to FIG.
The CPU 201 performs processing for outputting the display data acquired from the 7-segment decoding table by the processing in step S503 to the setting/performance display device 97 in step S504.
The subsequent processing of steps S505 to S508 is processing for dynamically lighting (intermittently lighting) the LED for displaying the set value Ve in the setting/performance display unit 97 . Specifically, in step S505, the CPU 201 increments the LED counter by 1, and in subsequent step S506, determines whether or not the 0th and 1st bits (lower 2 bits) of the LED counter are "11". Here, the low-order 2 bits of the LED counter become "11" when the increment processing in step S505 is performed multiple times of 4.
In step S506, if the 1st and 0th bits of the LED counter are "11", the CPU 201 proceeds to step S507, outputs data designating a segment for displaying the set value to the LED common port, and outputs data for specifying the segment for displaying in step S508. Execute timer count processing. By executing the output process in step S507, the setting/performance display device 97 displays the set value Ve based on the display data output in step S504. This display state is continued for the time set by the display timer in step S508 (4 ms in this example).

The output management process shown in FIG. 11 ends when the process of step S509 following the timer count process of step S508 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S414 shown in FIG. And if the change switch is ON, the output management process of step S413 is repeated. Since 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502 as described above, the lighting state of the set value display LED started in the previous step S507 is canceled by the execution of step S502. Since the LED counter is incremented by 1 in step S505, it is determined in step S506 that the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter are not "11". executed. That is, after the process of step S507 is executed and the set value display LED is lit for at least 4 ms, until the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter become "11" again, that is, in this example, The LED is turned off for at least 4ms×3=12ms.
In this manner, dynamic lighting is realized in which the set value display LED is intermittently lit at a predetermined cycle.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 executes input data creation processing in step S509 in response to execution of timer count processing in step S508.
This input data creation process is executed by calling the same process of step S902 in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), for example. As will be described later, the input data created in the input data creation process includes input data of the RAM clear switch 98 indicating whether or not there is an operation to sequentially feed the set value Ve, and setting key switch 98 indicating whether or not there is an operation to complete the setting change. 94 input data are included.
As can be seen from FIG. 10, the determination of whether or not there has been an operation to complete the setting change (S414) and the determination of whether or not there has been an operation to feed the set value Ve forward (S415) are executed after the output management process of step S413. By executing the input data creation process in step S509, the data required for these determination processes are obtained in advance.

(RAM clear processing)

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the RAM clear processing shown in FIG.
First, in step S601, the CPU 201 executes an area RAM initialization process. The initialization process in step S601 is a process of initializing (clearing) values in a predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203. FIG. However, in the initialization processing of step S601, the storage area of the set value Vd in the work area is excluded from initialization.

Note that the performance information described above is stored in an area outside the use area of the RAM 203, and is therefore not cleared in the initialization process of step S601.
The objects to be cleared by the RAM clear processing are the data in the RAM area (normal data storage area) such as various flags, timers, counters, etc. necessary for normal game progress. These data include, for example: That is, data related to the game state designation (normal state, probability variable state, time saving state, latent probability state, etc., the game state flag that specifies the current game state), a flag that specifies whether it is in a winning game (condition device operation flag), various data related to the execution of winning games (current number of rounds, maximum number of rounds, etc.), data related to jackpot lottery results (jackpot judgment flag: winning lottery result information, special pattern judgment data: pattern lottery result information) , Suspension data related to operation suspension balls (number of operation suspension balls, various random numbers used for jackpot lottery, various random numbers used for auxiliary winning lottery, random numbers for fluctuation patterns), special symbol operation status, game progress Timer (special pattern accessory operation timer), input/output data related to switches and sensors, various winning counters that count the number of winning balls in the winning opening, flag specifying the presence or absence of electric support state (open extension flag), electric Electric support number counter that counts the remaining number of support, counter that counts the remaining number of times in high probability state (special figure probability variable number counter, general figure probability variable number counter), various error flags (excluding RAM error flag), and payout related data, etc. In any case, when the RAM clear process is executed, all data other than specific data (set value Vd and performance information) are set to the initial state.

Here, as can be understood from the description of FIG. 5 above, when the setting change process (S115) is executed, the process proceeds to step S116 and the RAM clear process is executed.
The setting value Vd can be changed in the setting change process. When the setting value Vd is changed, there is a possibility that values other than the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 will not match the changed setting value Vd. Therefore, when the setting change process is performed, the area other than the set value Vd in the work area is cleared (initialized) by executing the RAM clear process.

In response to the execution of the initialization process of step S601, the CPU 201 sets 30 s to the RAM clear notification timer in step S602 and executes the process for setting the deviation to this special figure. The RAM clear notification timer is a timer for setting the RAM clear notification time executed by the effect control unit 24 according to the RAM clear command transmitted in the processing of step S803 in FIG. set. In addition, the special figure referred to here means, for example, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 described above.

In step S603 following step S602, the CPU 201 determines whether the above-described system operation status is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been performed after activation.
If the system operation status is "2", the CPU 201 executes the processing corresponding to the setting change processing in steps S604 to S612.
If the system operation status is not "2", the CPU 201 advances the process to step S613, stores the lower byte data of the RAM clear command in the register, and ends the RAM clear process of step S116.
The operation of storing the lower byte data of the command in the register as described above functions as the operation of designating the command type to be transmitted in step S804 of the main loop preprocessing (FIG. 17), which will be described later.

After going through the setting change process, the CPU 201 first resets the system operation status to "0" in step S604, executes the process of acquiring the setting change end command (BA77H) in step S605, and executes the command acquisition process in step S606. A setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by transmission processing.

The processing of steps S607 to S612 subsequent to step S606 is processing related to the display of the set value Ve on the setting/performance indicator 97. FIG.
First, in step S607, the CPU 201 outputs data designating a segment for setting value display to the LED common port, and in subsequent step S608, retrieves display data corresponding to the setting value Vd from the 7-segment decode table (see FIG. 13). DP is added to the display data in step S609, that is, the value of the 7th bit position of the display data is set to "1". Output to the setting/performance indicator 97 .

The processing of steps S612 and S613 following step S611 is processing for continuing the display state of the set values Ve and DP on the setting/performance display 97 for a predetermined time (1 s in this example). Specifically, the CPU 201 repeatedly executes display timer count processing in step S612 (for example, timer count processing with a period of 4 ms similar to the previous step S508 (see FIG. 11)) until it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed. do.

If it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed, the CPU 201 executes the storage processing in step S613 and ends the RAM clear processing in step S116.

As can be understood from the description so far, when the setting change process of step S115 is executed and the setting change completion operation is performed (step S412 in FIG. 10: Y), in the RAM clear process of step S116 A setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (S605, S606), and notification of the end of the setting change is made.
In the case of this example, the setting change end command notifies the effect control section 24 that the setting change has ended, and does not have the function of notifying the set value Ve set in the setting change process. .
In this example, the setting value Ve set in the setting change process is notified to the effect control unit 24 by a setting value command transmitted in the process of step S808 in FIG. 17 (main loop pre-processing) described later.

(Setting confirmation process)

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process in step S109.
The setting confirmation process is a process for confirming and displaying the setting value Ve being set.
In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first sets the fraud information timer to 30 seconds in step S701. The fraud information timer is a timer for managing the output time of the security signal to the hole computer HC.
In subsequent step S702, a process of acquiring current set value information is performed. That is, the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM is obtained.

In step S703 following step S702, the CPU 201 executes processing for acquiring setting value data from the setting value offset conversion table.

FIG. 16 shows an example of the set value offset conversion table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control section 20. As shown in FIG.
The set value offset conversion table converts the set value Vd (00H to 02H) to the set value Ve (“1
, '2', '6') as a table for conversion into identification data ('SETNUM1' to 'SETNUM6').
In this example, the set value offset conversion table has at least an area for storing the identification data of the set value Ve for each of the set values Vd of 00H to 05H, such as the address areas of "6215" to "6220" in the drawing. The identification data (“00” in the drawing) of the setting value Ve “1” corresponding to the setting value Vd=00H is stored in the uppermost area of this area, and the setting value Vd=01H is stored in the second area. The identification data (“01” in the drawing) of the corresponding setting value Ve “2” is stored, and the identification data (“05” in the drawing) of the setting value Ve “6” corresponding to the setting value Vd=02H is stored in the third area. stored.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=03H, the fifth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=05H have the setting value "00" is stored as the identification data of Ve, but its significance will be explained again.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 acquires the above identification data as "set value data" by the acquisition process in step S703.

In response to the execution of the acquisition process of step S703, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting confirmation command (BA6xH) in step S704, and transmits the setting confirmation command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of the following step S705. Send.
In the acquisition process of step S704, the CPU 201 performs a process of including the setting value data acquired in step S703, that is, the identification data for identifying the setting value Ve being set among the current setting values in the setting confirmation command.
As a result, the command transmission process of step S705 is executed, so that the effect control unit 24 is notified of the fact that the setting is being checked and the current set value Ve.

The processing of steps S706 and S707 subsequent to step S705 is processing for displaying the current set value Ve on the setting/performance indicator 97 .
Specifically, in step S706, the CPU 201 first executes a process of acquiring set values and DP data. That is, a process of acquiring the current set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 and the DP data (“1”) in the setting/performance display 97 is executed. After that, the output management process of step S707 is executed. The output management process in step S707 is the same as the output management process in step S413 shown in FIG. As a result, the setting/performance indicator 97 in this case displays the value representing the current set value Ve and DP.

In step S708 following step S707, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF (the setting key switch 94 is OFF), that is, whether or not an instruction to end the setting confirmation display has been performed. If so, the output management process in step S707 is executed again. As a result, after the setting confirmation command is transmitted in step S705, the process of step S708 waits until an instruction to end the setting confirmation display is performed. The process of displaying the current set values Ve and DP on the display 97 is continued.

When it is determined that the setting key is OFF in step S708, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting confirmation end command (BA67H) in step S709, and sends the setting confirmation end command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of the following step S710. Then, the setting confirmation process of step S109 is completed.

(main loop preprocessing)

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of main loop pre-processing in step S119.
In the main loop pre-processing, the CPU 201 first executes an initialization command acquisition process in step S801, and transmits the initialization command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process in subsequent step S802. The initialize command is a command for instructing initialization (return to origin) of the movable body role product motor 80c that operates the movable body as the role product.

In step S803 following step S802, the CPU 201 performs processing for acquiring transmission command data from the acquired lower byte command, and transmits the acquired command data to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing in step S804.
Here, in the acquisition process of step S803, the data of the command whose lower byte data is stored in the register in the course of the process passed after activation is acquired. Specifically, when the RAM clearing process of step S116 is passed through (when both the setting change process and the RAM clearing process are performed, or when the setting change process is not performed and only the RAM clearing process is performed), The data of the RAM clear command (BA02H) is acquired. On the other hand, if the backup restoration process in step S111 is performed (when both the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process are performed, or when only the backup restoration process is performed without the setting confirmation process), the power failure restoration is performed. Data of the display command (OB03H) is acquired.
As a result, the effect control unit 24 executes different processes depending on whether the RAM clear process is performed or the backup return process is performed.

In step S805 following step S804, the CPU 201 executes processing for transmitting the pending number of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Here, in the process of step S805, when the backup return process of step S111 is performed, the pending number of special figures 1 and 2 is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the RAM clear process of step S116 is performed. If so, the pending number is not transmitted (because the pending number information has been cleared).

The processing of steps S806 to S808 following step S805 is processing for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the current set value Ve by the set value command.
First, in step S806, the CPU 201 acquires the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as processing for acquiring current setting value information. 16) to acquire the set value data. Specifically, the identification data of the setting values Ve (“1”, “2”, and “5”) corresponding to the setting values Vd (00H to 02H) obtained in step S806 are obtained.
Then, the CPU 201 performs acquisition processing of the setting value command (F6xxH) in subsequent step S808, and transmits the setting value command to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing in step S809.
In acquisition processing in step S808, a setting value command including the identification data acquired in step S807 is acquired. With such a setting value command, it is possible to notify the present setting value Ve to the effect control section 24 .

In response to execution of the command transmission processing in step S809, the CPU 201 executes internal function register setting processing in step S810, that is, register setting processing for initial setting of various functions such as the hardware random number counting function. In S811, a process of setting the performance display monitor lighting timer to 5 seconds is executed. The performance display monitor lighting timer is a timer for managing the operation time of the operation confirmation lighting operation (blinking operation for 5 seconds in this example) when the setting/performance indicator 97 is activated.

Furthermore, in step S812 following step S811, the CPU 201 resets the system operation status to "0", and turns on the firing permission signal for the payout control board 29 in step S813. In response to this, the payout control board 29 determines that it is in the shooting permission state, outputs the permission signal to the shooting control board 28, and permits the shooting operation of the game ball by the shooting device 32. FIG. Thereby, the game ball can be shot by the shot operation handle 15. - 特許庁
In this case, the discharge control board 29 receives a discharge permission signal from the main control unit 20 and permits the discharge operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which the main control unit 20 directly outputs the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 is also possible. .
After executing the process of step S813, the CPU 201 ends the main loop pre-processing of step S119.

(Advantages of set value display data table and set value conversion table as embodiments)

Here, in this embodiment, like the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. is stored.
This data table contains set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to set values Vd (“00H” to “02H”) that can be set by the setting change process (see FIG. 10). It includes certain first set value related information and second set value related information that is set value related information that is selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a set value that cannot be set by the setting change process. Specifically, as the first setting value related information, "00", "01", and "05" respectively stored at addresses "6215", "6216", and "6217" in the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 correspond. , "00", "00", and "00" stored in addresses "6218", "6219", and "6220" correspond to the second set value related information.
Further, in the data table, as the first set value related information, at least specific information (that is, "00" at the address "6215") related to the set value Ve representing the stage with the lowest winning probability is stored, and the second set value related information is stored. As the value-related information, the same information as the specific information is stored.

When the set value Vd is a value that cannot be set, it is conceivable to rewrite the set value Vd stored in the RAM 203 with a value representing the lowest level.
However, if it is tampered with after being rewritten, there is a risk that the corresponding information will be obtained from the data table based on the unsettable setting value Vd, and that an operation corresponding to the unsettable setting value will be realized.
According to the above configuration, since it is impossible to obtain information corresponding to the set value Vd that cannot be set from the data table, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and the game is fair. can increase

Further, in this embodiment, 0 is stored as the specific information described above.
As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud due to falsification of setting values by a simple method of writing specific information=0 in the setting value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be enhanced by a simple technique.

Further, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12 is also set value-related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the settable set value Vd through the setting change process. Setting value related information (addresses “6203” to “6205”) and second setting value related information that is setting value related information that is selected when the main control unit 20 refers to setting values that cannot be set by setting change processing. (addresses "6206" to "6208") are included. In the 7-segment decoding table, 0 is stored as the second set value related information.
As a result, even if the data table is referenced by the setting value Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process due to fraudulent activity or some kind of malfunction, the setting value display means (in this example, the setting/performance display unit 97) can be set. It is possible to prevent the value display from being performed. Specifically, in this example, data of "00", that is, "00000000" is acquired as the display data, so all the segments "0" to "6" in the seven segments for setting value display are hidden. As a result, numerical values are not displayed.
Therefore, erroneous display of set values can be prevented.

[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]

The main control side timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
The main control side timer interrupt processing is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In FIG. 18, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first executes power supply check/backup processing in step S901. This power supply check/backup process mainly monitors the level of the power supplied from the power supply board, and if an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the power is restored so that the game can be resumed without hindrance when the power is restored. A backup process or the like for storing predetermined game information in the RAM 203 is performed.

(power supply check/backup processing)

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the power check/backup process in step S901.
In the power check/backup process, in step S1001, the CPU 201 reads the power failure signal output from the power board twice, and in the following step S1002, determines whether or not the read values match. If the two values do not match, the process returns to step S1001 and the power failure signal is read twice.

If both values match in step S1002, the CPU 201 determines in step S1003 whether the power failure signal is at a normal level (the power failure signal is OFF=normal level, ON=not normal level).
If the power failure signal is at the normal level (step S1003: OFF), the CPU 201 turns the backup flag OFF in step S1004, clears the power failure confirmation counter in step S1005, and ends the power failure check process in step S901. That is, when it is confirmed that the power failure signal is at a normal level, the timer interrupt processing is continued without executing the backup processing described below.

On the other hand, if the power supply abnormality signal is not at the normal level in step S1003 (step S1003: ON), the CPU 201 increments the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter by one in step S1006, and increases the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter in step S1007. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (threshold = a natural number equal to or greater than 2: for example, "2").
If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is not equal to or greater than the threshold, the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check process in step S901. In other words, when the state where the power failure signal is not at the normal level is detected, but the detection is not continuous, the backup processing is not performed and the timer interrupt processing is continued.

On the other hand, if the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is equal to or greater than the threshold, the CPU 201 performs backup processing shown as steps S1008 to S1011.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first clears the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (S1108), turns off the firing enable signal (S1009), and turns on the backup flag (S1010).
Furthermore, the CPU 201 transmits a power-off command to the effect control unit 24 (S1011), and advances the process to step S1012.

In step S1012, the CPU 201 performs processing to enable RAM protection and disable the prohibited area.
RAM protection is a function to prevent the RAM 203 from being rewritten due to malfunction or erroneous operation. By setting the RAM protection to valid, only data reading from the RAM 203 is enabled, and data writing is disabled.
Also, the prohibited area is an area corresponding to the specified area in the IAT (prohibition of traveling outside the specified area) function, and by setting the prohibited area to invalid, the IAT reset will not occur thereafter.

In step S1013 following step S1012, the CPU 201 clears the value of the output port, stops timer interrupt processing in step S1014, sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, and shifts to infinite loop processing.
During this infinite loop, the CPU 201 is reset by the WDT and transitions to an operation stop state due to loss of operating power.

Return the description to FIG.
In FIG. 18, after completing the power check/backup process in step S901, the CPU 201 executes input data creation process in step S902. Specifically, input data is created based on input information (ON/OFF signals and rising states (ON edge, OFF edge)) from various sensors and switches.
The input information here is, for example, the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a. ON/OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal to be output, ON/OFF information (operation information), status signals from the payout control board 29 (ON/OFF information of the front door open sensor 61 and the full detection sensor 60), and the like. As a result, whether or not a game ball is detected in an out hole or each winning hole is monitored for each interruption.

After finishing the input data creation process of step S902, CPU201 is step S903 and performs the timer management process which manages the timer used for game motion control. Here, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the gaming machine 1 are updated (subtraction processing).

Next, the CPU 201 performs input management processing in step S904. In this input management process, based on the input data created in the input data creation process (S902), the values of the winning counter and OUT ball monitoring counter are updated. A "winning counter" is a counter that is provided corresponding to each winning hole and counts the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls). The OUT ball monitoring counter is a counter for counting game balls discharged from the OUT port 49 (out balls).
The input management process in step S904 functions as input management means for managing input signals (detection signals) from various prize winning opening sensors.

In step S905 following step S904, the CPU 201 executes setting abnormality check processing.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 checks the set value error flag in step S1101. The set value error flag is a flag that is set (turned ON) by the processing of step S1103 described below when an abnormality is recognized in the set value Vd, and in this example, "5AH" means the ON state. .

In step S1101, if the set value error flag is "5AH" (ON state), the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905. That is, the fact that the setting value error flag is determined to be ON in step S1101 means that the transmission of the setting value abnormality command (the command for instructing the performance control unit 24 to perform setting error notification) has already been executed in step S1104, which will be described later. Therefore, the setting error check process ends without sending the setting value error flag again.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S1101 that the set value error flag is not "5AH" (it is OFF), the CPU 201 determines in step S1102 whether the set value Vd is within the normal range (within the range of 0 to 2). determine whether or not Specifically, the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the value is within the range of "00H" to "02H".

If the set value Vd is within the normal range, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
If the set value Vd is not within the normal range, the CPU 201 advances to step S1103 to set the set value error flag (ON state). A value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check process is finished.
Here, the setting value error flag includes step S1308 (setting error determination at the time of winning) in FIG. 22 described later, step S1501 in FIG. It is used in step S1701 in FIG. 28 (setting error determination when performing variation pattern lottery at the start of variation).

Here, upon receiving the set value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 performs processing for notifying data abnormality of the set value Ve. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an image including a message such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a member of staff."
In the gaming machine 1, a setting error (setting value error) can be canceled by performing a setting change operation.

Returning the description to FIG.
After the CPU 201 completes the setting abnormality check process in step S905, the CPU 201 executes error management process in step S906. In this error management process, based on input data related to various sensors and status signals from the payout control board 29, the presence or absence of error occurrence is monitored.
When an error occurs, the CPU 201, as error processing, transmits the corresponding command to the effect control unit 24 if the error type requires transmission of an error command. When the effect control unit 24 receives this error command, it executes error notification according to the error type. Further, the CPU 201 transmits an error cancellation command to the effect control section 24 when the error during occurrence is eliminated. When the performance control unit 24 receives this error cancellation command, it terminates the error notification being executed.

Next, in step S907, the CPU 201 executes timer interrupt random number management processing for periodically updating the random numbers associated with each variation display game. Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, for the random number for special symbol judgment and the random number for auxiliary hit judgment, update the random number (add +1 for each interrupt), and Then, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. Note that the internal lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) are generated by the random number generation circuit, and are not updated here.

In step S908 following step S907, the CPU 201 executes prize ball management processing. In this winning ball management process, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command designating the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29 . When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, it controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Next, CPU201 is step S909 and usually performs design management processing. In this normal symbol management process, a process necessary for executing the normal symbol variation display game is performed. Here, it monitors whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for auxiliary hit determination) necessary for the auxiliary winning lottery is generated. Acquire (random number acquisition process), hold and store the maximum number of held balls up to the upper limit with the game information as hold data (operation hold balls related to normal symbols) (hold storage process). Then, when the predetermined fluctuation display start condition regarding the normal pattern is satisfied, an auxiliary winning lottery based on the operation holding ball is performed, and the selection of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern based on the auxiliary winning lottery result and the normal pattern stop display mode (normal stop symbol). Further, here, in order to perform variable display of normal symbols, LED display data for variable display is created if the pattern is in motion, and LED display data for stop display is created if the pattern is not in motion.

Furthermore, in step S910, the CPU 201 executes a normal electric accessary product management process. In this normal electric accessary product management process, a process necessary for executing the normal electric open game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary winning lottery is a hit, a process of setting solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c, whereby the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable wing 47 is controlled.

Subsequently, CPU201 is step S911 and performs a special design management process. In this special symbol management process, a big hit lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol variation display game, and based on the result of the lottery, the special symbol variation pattern (forecast variation pattern and variation pattern at the start of variation) and the special stop symbol are determined. is determined, and other processes necessary for the special symbol variation display game are executed.
The details of the special symbol management process in step S911 will be explained again.

Next, the CPU 201 executes a special electric accessary product management process in step S912. In this special electric accessary product management process, the setting process necessary for controlling the execution of the winning game is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the execution control of the hit game (jackpot game) corresponding to the hit type is performed.
Specifically, it sets solenoid control data for the big winning hole solenoid 52c, counts the number of rounds (in the case of a big hit), and monitors the maximum number of winnings to the big winning hole 50 and the opening time. In addition, when the winning game ends, transition setting of the game state is performed based on the game state at the time of winning and the winning type.

Also, here, a plurality of production control commands are transmitted according to the progress of the winning game. At the start of the jackpot, at the start of the round game, at the end of the round game, at the end of the maximum number of rounds, etc., the timing of sending the jackpot start command, the round start command, the round end command, the big win opening prize command, and the jackpot end command has arrived. send accordingly. The big win start command includes the current winning type information, and is used on the side of the performance control section 24 when determining a series of winning performance scenarios to be developed during the winning game. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information about the type of the hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the hit, that is, information capable of specifying the game state after the end of the hit game. It is used when deciding the production mode after the game. Therefore, since this "jackpot end command" can specify the game state after the end of the winning game, it plays a role as a game state designation command for designating the game state.

After completing the processing for game progress up to step S912, the CPU 201 performs external terminal management processing in step S913. In this external terminal management process, the operating state information of the gaming machine 1 is output to external devices such as the hall computer HC and island lamps through the external centralized terminal board 21 for frame. The operating state information includes, for example, game information such as winning game occurrence information, symbol variation display game execution start information, number of wins/number of prize balls, and error information.

Next, the CPU 201 executes LED management processing in step S914. In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) for LED indicators such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the setting/performance indicator 97 is performed. A control signal based on display data created in normal symbol management processing (step S909), special symbol management processing (step S911), etc. is output to the corresponding display device or indicator in this LED management processing, and display control is performed. done. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of the special symbols in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b and the normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 39a are realized.

In step S915 following step S914, the CPU 201 saves the values of all registers, and then performs performance display monitor display processing in step S916. That is, this is a process for causing the setting/performance indicator 97 to display the value as the above-described normal time ratio information.
As mentioned above, in the case of this example, the value of the normal time ratio information is recalculated each time the number of out balls in all states reaches a predetermined specified value, and the setting/performance indicator 97 displays the current normal It is possible to display the time ratio information and the previous normal time ratio information (normal time ratio information whose calculation was completed at the most recent recalculation timing). Therefore, in the display processing in step S916 in this case, processing for displaying the values as the normal time ratio information on the setting/performance display unit 97 is performed.
It should be noted that the current normal time ratio information value is a value calculated in the processing of step S604 in the main loop processing (FIG. 11) described above, and the previous normal time ratio information value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the CPU 201 reads out the stored value and causes the setting/performance display 97 to display it.

Next, the CPU 201 restores the values of all registers in step S917, clears the WDT count value in step S918, and ends the main control side timer interrupt processing.

When the above timer interrupt processing ends, the CPU 201 executes the main loop processing (S123) until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[4-3. Processing related to special symbol variation display game]
(Special design management processing)

Next, processing of the main control unit 20 relating to the special symbol variation display game will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the above-mentioned special symbol management process (step S911). As described above, the special symbol management process is executed as part of the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Based on the special symbol variation pattern (previous variation pattern and variation pattern at the start of variation) and determination of special stop symbols, etc. are performed.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first performs a special pattern 1 starting port check process for the special pattern 1 side (upper starting port 34 side) in step S1201, and then performs special pattern 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) in step S1202. Special figure 2 start opening check processing is performed.
The details of these starting port check processes will be described again with reference to FIG. 22 .

After completing the start port check processing in steps S1201 and S1202, the CPU 201 determines the state of the condition device operation flag in step S1203. This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is ON (for example, 5AH), it indicates that a jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (for example, 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

If the conditional device operation flag is OFF (≠5AH), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol operation status branch processing of step S1204, special symbol operation status according to the special symbol operation status (00H ~ 03H) Processing related to the variable display operation is performed (steps S1205, S1206, S1207).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1203 that the big hit game is in progress (=5AH), the CPU 201 does not perform the processing related to the special symbol fluctuation display operation in steps S1205 to S1207, and proceeds to the special symbol display data update process in step S1208. That is, when the big win game is being played, the variable display operation of the special symbols is not performed (the display state of the special symbols of the special symbol display device is kept as fixed display after the big win). It should be noted that the "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol.

In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S1204, depending on whether the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", "varying (02H)", or "confirming (03H)". , perform corresponding processing.

Specifically, the CPU 201 performs special symbol variation start processing (step S1205) when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", and special symbol variation when it is "varying (02H)". During symbol fluctuation processing (step S1206), when it is "confirming (03H)", during special symbol confirmation time processing (step S1207) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next variation, and the above-mentioned "while fluctuating" means that the behavior of the special symbol is fluctuating (fluctuation display). The above "confirming" means that the fluctuation of the special symbols is finished and the stop (confirmed) display is in progress (during the special symbol confirmation time).

It should be noted that, in the process during the special design fluctuation of step S1206, whether or not the special design is in the process of fluctuation, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special design has passed is monitored, and if the fluctuation time has passed, the effect control command As a process of transmitting a "variation stop command" to the production control unit 24, storing a fixed display time (eg 500 ms) in the special symbol role product operation timer, and switching the special symbol operation status to "confirming (03H)" (Store 03H in the special symbol operation status) processing and the like. The above-mentioned "variation stop command" is a command indicating that the special symbol variation has ended. By this variation stop command, the effect control unit 24 indicates that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the special symbol variation time has elapsed. By grasping the fact (termination), the decoration pattern currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed. As a result, when the special symbol variation display game is terminated, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated. Further, the above-mentioned "determined display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the special symbol confirmation time process of step S1207, it is monitored whether or not the above-described fixed display time has elapsed. Switch the symbol operation status to "waiting (01H)" (store 01H in the special symbol operation status), and if the special symbol variation display game of this time is a big hit, the process required to start the big win game (stop the big win pattern) various setting processing at the time). In the various setting processes when the jackpot pattern is stopped, as the jackpot game transition pre-processing, the jackpot judgment flag is cleared, the condition device operation flag is turned on, and the game state is set to the same game state as the normal state. process.
In addition, in the process during the special symbol confirmation time of step S1207, when the game state is updated, the process of transmitting the "game state designation command" including the transition information of the game state to the effect control unit 24 is performed. The effect control unit 24 can grasp that the game state has shifted by the game state designation command.

By the processing of steps S1205, S1206, and S1207, the variable display operation of setting the variable start and the variable stop of the special symbol is realized.
The details of the special symbol variation start processing in step S1205 will be explained again with reference to FIG.

When one of steps S1205 to S1207 is completed, the CPU 201 executes special symbol display data update processing in step S1208. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if the special symbol is fluctuating, 7-segment display data for the special symbol fluctuating is created, and if the special symbol is not fluctuating. For example, data for 7-segment display during special symbol stop display is created. The special symbol display data created here is output to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b by the LED management process (step S914) of FIG.

The CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process of step S911 in response to executing the update process of step S1208, and proceeds to the special electric auditors product management process of step S912 shown in FIG.

(Special figure 1 starting entrance check process)

With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22, the special figure 1 start opening check process (step S1201) will be described.
This special figure 1 starting opening check process plays a role as winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. In the special figure 1 start opening check process in this example, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side (processing at the time of winning on the special figure 1 side), the winning of the upper start opening 34 occurs. Addition processing of the number of operation pending balls on the special figure 1 side due to, storage processing of various random numbers (suspension storage processing), transmission processing of pending addition command, etc. are executed.
In addition, the special figure 2 starting opening check process (step S1202) also plays a role as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, like the special figure 1 starting opening check process, and the special figure 2 side As pre-start processing for executing the special symbol variation display game 2 (processing at the time of winning on the special figure 2 side), addition processing of the number of operation pending balls on the special figure 2 side due to the occurrence of winning at the lower start port 35, Various random number storage processing, pending addition command transmission processing, and the like are executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 starting opening check processing and the special figure 2 starting opening check processing are substantially the same processing contents. In the following, the special figure 1 starting opening check processing will be mainly described, and the details of the special figure 2 starting opening check processing will be omitted to avoid duplication.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1301 whether or not a winning (winning ball) into the upper starting port 34 has been detected.
When the winning to the upper starting port 34 is detected, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1302 and determines whether or not the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 operation reserved balls") is 4 or more. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation retention balls is the maximum retention storage number (here, upper limit 4 pieces) or more. However, if there is no winning detection of the upper starting opening 34 (step S1301: N), the special figure 1 starting opening check process of step S1201 is finished without doing anything.

If the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is 4 or more in step S1302, that is, the winning of the upper start port 34 is detected, but if the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is 4 or more, the CPU 201 goes to step S1311 described later. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number is not 4 or more (less than 4), 1 is added to the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number (step S1303), and the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the CPU 201 acquires various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation reserved ball generated this time. Specifically, from various random number counters, the current values of the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special symbol, and the random number for the variation pattern are acquired, and the acquired random number is stored in the reserve storage area of the RAM 203 . This reserve storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as actuation reserve balls (hold data). Until the symbol 1 variable display operation is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the symbols are reserved and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are satisfied (in the order of winning). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of reserved memories: n=4 in this embodiment), each of which can store reserved data for the maximum number of reserved memories. It has become.

In step S1305 following step S1304, the CPU 201 selects prefetch prohibition data (EVENT: "01H").
Subsequently, CPU201 is step S1306, and determines whether "special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied. The special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is a condition that prohibits the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation reservation ball.

When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied, CPU201 advances to step S1311 without executing the prefetch decision processing (step S1309) regarding prefetch decision. In this case, the pending addition command with prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "01H") specifies prohibition of prefetching, and the prefetching judgment for this special figure 1 operation pending ball is prohibited, and as a result, prefetching notice The performance will not be executed either. In other words, it can be said that the prefetching prohibition data designates that the prefetching determination process (step S1309) is not executed.

In this example, instead of performing the prefetch determination of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of the game state, it is determined whether or not the prefetch is prohibited based on the current game state. The reason is as follows.
In the case of a game state with 'with electric sapo' that is advantageous to right-handed hitting (time saving state, probability variable state), winning to the lower start port 35 occurs frequently, but left-handed hitting is advantageous. In the case of a game state with 'no electric support' (normal state, latent state), winning at the lower starting port 35 hardly occurs and winning at the upper starting port 34 occurs frequently. Considering that, instead of blindly performing the look-ahead judgment of special figures 1 and 2 regardless of the game state, if it is a time-saving state or a variable state with 'with electric sapo', look-ahead judgment on the special figure 1 side is prohibited to allow pre-reading judgment on the special figure 2 side, and if it is in the normal state or latent state of 'no electric sapo', prohibit the pre-reading judgment on the special figure 2 side and pre-reading judgment on the special figure 1 side is allowed.

In step S1306, if the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied, the CPU201 refers to the setting value error flag in step S1307 (flag set in the setting abnormality check process of step S905), setting error in subsequent step S1308 (whether the set value error flag is ON: 5AH).
If it is a setting error, the CPU 201 determines that an abnormality (set value data abnormality) has occurred, and proceeds to step S1311 without executing the prefetch determination process (step S1309). Although the details will be described later, if an abnormality in the set value Vd is recognized in the processing at the time of winning, a pending addition command including prefetch prohibition data (01H) is transmitted without making it a RAM error, and the start opening check in step S1201 will exit the process.

On the other hand, if it is not a setting error, the CPU 201 executes prefetch determination processing in step S1309. In this look-ahead determination processing, a look-ahead determination is made of the big hit lottery result executed at the start of variation. Therefore, a series of 'pre-reading winning/losing determination' to pre-read the winning lottery result, 'pre-reading pattern determination' to pre-read the pattern lottery result, and 'pre-reading variation pattern determination' to pre-read the variation pattern at the start of the fluctuation processing is included.

Specifically, in step S1309, the CPU 201 first acquires the random number value for judging a big hit stored in the RAM 203 (random number storage area for judging), and compares the random number value for judging a big hit with the "random number judging table for judging a big hit" to be described later. Based on , a win-lose lottery (at least a look-ahead win-lose judgment that determines whether it is a big hit or a loser) is performed for the current operation reserve ball, and the result (referred to as "look-ahead win-lose result") is obtained.

In the present embodiment, the set value Vd is used for win-lose determination (win-lose lottery), and a specific method of win-lose determination as the present embodiment based on such a set value Vd will be described later. Since the hit/lose determination is performed in the same way in the process (FIG. 23) at the start of the variation of the special symbols, the specific method of the hit/lose determination will be explained again when the process at the start of the variation is described.

Here, in the present embodiment, the prefetch hit/loss result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201 . This is because the look-ahead winning/losing determination result is immediately used in subsequent look-ahead pattern determination processing, and this data is not required and need not be stored in the RAM 203 .

In addition, in step S1309, the CPU 201 creates a symbol table (not shown) corresponding to the prefetch winning/losing result (at least hit or lose) and the special symbol type (special symbols 1 and 2) as the above-described prefetch symbol determination processing. Perform the pattern lottery used. Specifically, the CPU 201 conducts a symbol lottery (lottery for winning type) for the current operation pending ball based on the special symbol determination random number value and the symbol table acquired in the previous step S1304, and the result (" (referred to as "look-ahead symbol result"). In the "symbol table" of the present embodiment, the determination value (winning area) for determining the symbol type is defined, and depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random number belongs to, it is displayed as a stop symbol. The type of special symbol to be played is determined.
Incidentally, when there are a plurality of types of winnings as in this example, a winning symbol table for determining the winning type is provided. If there is only one kind of loss, the lost symbol table is unnecessary.
Here, in this example, in response to the fact that there are a plurality of types of losses, namely, "loss 1", "loss 2", and "loss 3", a losing pattern table for lottery of losing types is used in symbol determination. do.
Also, in this example, there are at least four types of hits, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "variable probability 6R", and "variable probability 10R", as described above. Based on the winning symbol table, a special symbol type corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the special symbol determination random number value among these four winning types is determined.

Here, for some or all of the above-described symbol tables, a symbol table that defines different symbol selection rates according to the set value Ve may be provided. For example, regarding the jackpot symbol table, it is possible to provide tables with different selection rates of jackpot types for each of settings 1 to 6 (for example, 6 types of jackpot pattern tables corresponding to 6 stages of settings). For example, it is conceivable to determine the contents of the table so that the higher the setting, the more advantageous the ball-out performance becomes for the player. Of course, it may be a jackpot symbol table common to each setting. Further, the symbol table used in step S1309 is also used in the processing (FIG. 23) at the start of variation.

The CPU 201 does not store the look-ahead symbol result in the RAM 203 while taking it into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201 as in the case of the look-ahead winning/losing determination described above. This is because the look-ahead pattern result is immediately used in subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not required and need not be stored in the RAM 203 .

After finishing the above look-ahead symbol determination, the CPU 201 executes look-ahead variation pattern determination. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, the above-mentioned look-ahead pattern result (in this example, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probable variation 6R", "probability variation 10R", "missing 1", "missing 2", "missing 3" represents either) Then, a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern according to the look-ahead symbol result and the variation pattern random number obtained in step S1304 are used to perform a lottery of variation patterns to determine a look-ahead variation pattern. That is, the variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation) to be executed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the variation display operation is pre-read and determined.

In this example, the variation pattern table is also used in the variation pattern lottery performed in the process at the start of variation (FIG. 23).
A specific example of the above fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation pattern lottery process using the table will be explained again when explaining the process at the time of fluctuation start.

Note that the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination result (winning command data (EVENT)) is immediately used in the pending addition command creation process in step S1310 described below, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, the CPU 201 ends the processing of step S1309 while the result of the prefetch variation pattern determination is not stored in the RAM 203 but is stored in the register.

After executing the prefetch determination process in step S1309, the CPU 201 advances to step S1310 to create data on the lower byte side of the pending addition command according to the prefetch determination result. Specifically, the data representing the type of the look-ahead variation pattern is created as the winning command data (EVENT) on the lower byte side of the pending addition command.
As for the EVENT data, "01H" set in step S1305 is updated to a value corresponding to the prefetch variation pattern (value obtained in the prefetch variation pattern determination processing) in this process.

After completing the creation process of step S1310, the CPU 201 creates data on the upper byte side of the pending addition command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls in step S1311. That is, data representing the current number of pending balls in operation and the above-described look-ahead symbol result (special symbol type) are created as winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side of the pending addition command.
For the data of the MODE, 1 reservation of special figure 1 to 4 reservations of special figure 1, 1 reservation of special figure 2 to 4 reservations of special figure 2 are set so as to be identifiable.

In response to execution of the creation processing in step S1311, the CPU 201 performs transmission processing of the pending addition command in step S1312. That is, it creates a pending addition command containing the winning command data created in steps S1310 and S1311 as EVENT and MODE, respectively, and transmits it to the effect control section 24 .

Here, if the prefetching prohibition condition is met (Y in S1306), or if an abnormality in the set value Vd is recognized in the determination processing in the previous step S1308, the CPU 201 outputs the above-mentioned prefetching prohibition data (lower byte=01H). without updating and send a pending add command with no lookahead data.
Also, at the time of overflow (when a new prize is won when the maximum number of pending memories has been reached), a pending addition command specifying overflow is transmitted (see the processing route of Y in step S1302). ).

In addition, after the pending addition command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, it is used in the effect control unit 24 side when displaying the "prediction effect" related to the current operation pending ball. Only, it is not particularly used in the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 201 exits the special figure 1 start opening check process of step S1301 without storing the pending addition command in the RAM 203, and then performs the special figure 2 start opening check process of step S1302.

Here, as described above, in this example, even if there is an abnormality in the data of the set value Vd at the time of winning (when the operation pending ball is generated), the pending addition command is transmitted. , is a command having prefetching prohibition data, even if the prefetching notice effect based on the set value Ve or the prefetching notice effect not based on the set value Ve is configured to be able to appear, the effect related to the prefetching notice Since the control itself is prohibited, no pre-reading notice caused by the malfunction appears, and the player is not disadvantaged, so no particular problem arises. If the pre-reading forewarning effect is not prohibited, and if the high-expectation pending display appears in the pre-reading forecast effect of the pending display system even though the set value Ve is abnormal, the subsequent RAM error processing. If the progress of the game is stopped due to (error processing caused by an abnormality in the set value), the player's expectation for winning will disappear at once, causing a great distrust of the gaming machine. However, in the case of this example, as described above, the pre-reading notice itself is prohibited, so that such a problem does not occur and the player is prevented from feeling distrustful.

(Special symbol variation start process)

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (step S1205), which is the process at the start of variation, will be described.
In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is zero in step S1401, and if the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is not zero, the process proceeds to step S1403, and this time Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S1403 to S1412) for the special figure 2 operation holding ball to be used for fluctuation display is performed.
On the other hand, if the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is zero, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is zero in step S1402, and if the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is not zero, Proceeding to the processing of step S1403, the processing (steps S1403 to S1412) relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol targeting the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be used for this fluctuation display is performed.
By the processing of steps S1401 and S1402 above, which of the special figure 1 operation reservation ball and the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is preferentially used for the fluctuation display operation (which operation reservation ball is preferentially digested? ) is determined. In this embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested. That is, the special symbol variation display game 2 is preferentially executed over the special symbol variation display game 1. - 特許庁It should be noted that it is not limited to the above-described priority variation type, and may be configured to consume the operation pending balls in the order in which they have won.

In addition, when the number of operation pending balls of both the number of special figure 2 operation pending balls and the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is zero, it will be in the state of "no operation pending balls". This state of "no operation pending ball" is a state in which the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory, and the effect control section 24 side is notified that this state has entered, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers (customer waiting demonstration screen). Therefore, when it becomes "no operation pending ball", the process proceeds to step S1413, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of "no operation pending ball". .

In step S1413, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (01H)", the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status). Then, as an effect control command, a "demonstration display command" for displaying a customer waiting demo screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S1415), and the special symbol variation start process of step S1205 is finished.
After that, if it is "waiting (00H)" when the determination process of step S1413 is executed, the special symbol variation start process is finished without transmitting the demonstration display command again. The reason for doing this is that if the demonstration display command is sent without any conditions when the number of pending balls in operation is zero, the transmission of the demonstration display command is repeated at a cycle of 4ms while the number of pending balls in operation is zero. This is to prevent unnecessary transmission from occurring, which unnecessarily increases the control load.

If the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is not zero in step S1401, and if the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is not zero in step S1402 (while the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is zero, When the number is not zero), the CPU 201 performs processing (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of variation of the special symbol for the operation pending ball to be used for the current variation display.
Here, for the processing of steps S1403 to S1412 described below, if the determination in step S1401 above is 'NO', the processing for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the determination in step S1402 above If it is 'NO', it will be processed for the special figure 1 operation reservation ball, but since the method of processing is the same, unless it is particularly necessary to avoid duplication, the special symbol 1 side operation It will be explained without distinguishing whether it is a process for the reserved ball or a process for the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 2 side.

In step S1403, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls in operation pertaining to the special symbol side used for this variable display operation -1), and in subsequent step S1404, the number of pending balls in operation after the subtraction is included. A pending subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this pending subtraction command, the performance control unit 24 side grasps the number of remaining active pending balls after the current active pending ball number is digested, and shifts the pending display currently being displayed.

Next, CPU201 is step S1405, sets the special design operation verification data. This special symbol operation confirmation data is information that designates the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side this time. If the special symbol 2 is the fluctuation start side, "01H (special symbol 2 fluctuation start specification)" is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol operation confirmation data storage area) of the RAM 203.

Next, CPU 201 shifts the pending data stored in the pending storage area of RAM 203 in step S1406, and clears the pending 4 storage area in subsequent step S1407. In the processing of steps S1406 to S1407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (holding 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n=1 (random number for judging a big hit, random number for judging a special symbol, and for fluctuation pattern A random number) is read out and stored in the judgment random number storage area of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage areas (reserved 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area, reserved 4 storage area) corresponding to the reserved n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are stored. area) are stored in the reserved storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S1406), and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free area (step S1407). As a result, the starting order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n of operation pending balls (n=1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation pending ball acquired at the time of winning the starting gate wins which pending memory. The pending storage of the new active pending ball is enabled as it is identified as corresponding to the area.

Next, in step S1408, the CPU 201 performs processing for transmitting a command for specifying the remaining number of fluctuations and a game state command. In this step S1408, it is determined whether or not the "electricity support number counter" that counts the remaining number of times that the power supply is present is zero. Remaining number designation command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this "variation frequency remaining specification command", the effect control unit 24 side can execute the process of grasping the remaining time saving frequency and notifying the remaining time saving frequency information.
In addition, in step S1408, a process of transmitting a game state command designating the current game state to the effect control unit 24 is also performed.

Next, the CPU 201 executes change management processing in step S1409.
In this variation management process, a big win lottery corresponding to the start of variation, a pattern lottery for a stop symbol, and a variation pattern lottery are performed. Further, in the variation management process, an abnormality determination of the set value Vd is performed, and when an abnormality is recognized in the data of the set value Vd, an effect control command (RAM abnormality command) for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting error ) is sent.
Details of the change management process in step S1409 will be explained again with reference to FIGS. 24 to 33. FIG.

After finishing the variation management process of step S1409, the CPU 201 stores 5AH (ON state) in the special symbol N varying flag (N=1, 2) designating that the variation is being displayed in step S1410. "Special symbol N fluctuating flag" is a flag indicating whether any special symbol to be targeted among special symbols 1 and 2 is fluctuating, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH) indicates that the target special symbol is fluctuating, and indicates that the target special symbol is stopped when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H).
In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag (N=1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag (N=2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

Next, in step S1411, the CPU 201 executes command transmission processing at the start of fluctuation. In this command transmission process, in order to notify the effect control unit 24 side of the contents of the variation pattern selected in the variation management process of step S1409, the effect control command includes variation pattern information that can specify the variation pattern content. A pattern designation command” is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.例文帳に追加
Also, in the command transmission process, based on the design lottery result in step S1409, a decorative design designation command is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. FIG. The decorative design designation command consists of 2 bytes, an upper byte (MODE) designating the special design type on the fluctuation side and a lower byte (EVENT) designating the winning type. Therefore, this decorative design designation command includes information about the special design type and winning type (design lottery result) on the fluctuation side. Since this decorative pattern designation command includes information about the winning type, the effect control unit 24 side mainly includes a combination of decorative patterns when forming a ready-to-win state (symbol types with ready-to-win patterns as constituent elements), It is used to determine the combination of decorative patterns (decorative stop patterns) that are finally stopped and displayed, and the announcement effect corresponding to the winning type in the pattern variation display game.
Furthermore, in the command transmission process, a set value command for notifying the present set value Ve to the effect control section 24 side is also transmitted. By this setting value command, the effect control section 24 side can make different types of effects appear according to the current setting value Ve, or change the appearance rate of a predetermined effect.

Then, in the following step S1412, the CPU 201 switches to the special symbol operation status "fluctuation (02H)" as the fluctuation start time setting process (stores 02H in the special symbol operation status), the random number storage area for judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern Perform processing to clear the storage area.

CPU201 ends special design fluctuation start processing of step S1205 according to having executed the fluctuation start time setting processing of step S1412. After completing the special symbol variation start process, the CPU 201 performs the special symbol display data update process (step S1208) of FIG. 21, thereby starting the special symbol variation display.

(variation management processing)

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the change management process in step S1409.
In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not there is a setting error in step S1501. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value error flag is ON (5AH).

In step S1501, when it is determined that the setting error flag is OFF and it is not a setting error, the CPU 201 executes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and then proceeds to the pattern lottery process in step S1503.
In step S1502, the big hit random number determination process selects (determines) the big hit/lost type by lottery based on the big hit determination random number (internal lottery random number), the big hit determination random number determination table, and the set value Vd. be.
Details of the jackpot random number determination process as an embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG.

If the CPU 201 determines that there is a setting error in step S1501, it skips the big hit random number determination process in step S1502 and proceeds to the pattern lottery process in step S1503.

Here, in this embodiment, when a setting error occurs (when the determination result of Y is obtained in step S1501), the big hit random number determination process is not performed unless the setting error is resolved.
As described above, a setting error can be cleared by performing a setting change operation. That is, when falling into a setting error state, by performing a setting change operation and canceling the setting error state, the state in which the big hit random number determination process is performed is restored.
Incidentally, as described above, the setting value abnormality command for performing the setting change operation is transmitted in the setting abnormality check process (FIG. 20).

In the symbol lottery process of step S1503, the CPU 201 determines the type of hit/lost (type of stop symbol) based on at least the winning/losing lottery result (big hit determination flag), the random number for special symbol determination, and the symbol table. conduct. Then, the result (special symbol determination data) is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol determination data storage area) of the RAM 203 . As a result, the type of winning (type of winning/losing) related to the special symbol variation display game of this time is determined.
As with the symbol lottery process at the time of pre-reading determination, the symbol lottery can also be selected according to the set value Vd.

In step S1504 following step S1503, the CPU 201 performs the current variation display operation based on at least the symbol lottery result (the above-mentioned special symbol determination data), the variation pattern random number, and the variation pattern table as the variation pattern lottery process. A lottery process is performed to determine the variation pattern at the start of variation for the ball that is held in operation.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery process in the present embodiment, a variation pattern lottery is performed using the set value Vd and the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls in operation after subtracting the amount consumed this time).
The details of the variation pattern lottery process in this embodiment will be explained again with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33. FIG.

After executing the fluctuation pattern lottery process in step S1504, the CPU 201 ends the fluctuation management process in step S1409. After that, the process proceeds to step S1410 shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, in this example, the lottery results of win-lose lottery and symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation are stored in the RAM 203. is data that is used not only in the special symbol management process (step S911: see FIGS. 18 and 21) to which the is.
This point is different from the prefetch determination process in which the lottery result is not stored in the RAM 203 .

Although the explanation by illustration is omitted, in the variation management process of step S1409, when the win-lose lottery result is a hit, the game state after the win game is specified as the setting process for shifting the game state. Necessary setting processing is performed (game state transition preparation processing).

(Jackpot random number determination process)

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot random number determination method of the embodiment.
Prior to the detailed description of the jackpot random number determination process in FIG. 25, the jackpot random number determination method employed in the embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as a premise, in this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit can take 65,536 different values from 0 to 65,535. In the jackpot random number determination in the present embodiment, the determination reference value TH is determined within the range of possible values for such a jackpot determination random number, and based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the jackpot determination random number and the determination reference value TH, Judgment of big hit/loss is performed. As an example, in this example, when the value of the random number for judging a big hit is within the range of "0 to judgment reference value TH", the judgment result of the big hit is obtained. there is

In this embodiment, as a jackpot random number judgment, when the probability is low (normal state: hereinafter abbreviated as "low probability") and when the probability is high (variable probability state: hereinafter abbreviated as "high probability") Two types of determination are performed, that is, determination corresponding to . Therefore, as the determination reference value TH, two types of determination reference value TH1 used for determination at low probability and determination reference value TH2 used for determination at high probability are set.
As exemplified in FIG. 26, the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high probability is made larger than the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability, thereby increasing the probability of winning a big hit in the judgment at the time of high probability. ing.

In the case of this example, different values are prepared for each set value Ve as the determination reference value TH in order to make a big hit random number determination according to the set value Ve. As a specific example, for the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability, the value (BIGLMAX1) corresponding to the setting value Ve "1", the value (BIGLMAX2) corresponding to the setting value Ve "2", and the setting value Ve "6" A value (BIGLMAX6) corresponding to is prepared, and for the judgment reference value TH2 at high accuracy, the value (BIGHMAX1) corresponding to the setting value Ve "1", the value (BIGHMAX2) corresponding to the setting value Ve "2", and A value (BIGHMAX6) corresponding to the set value Ve "6" is prepared. The judgment reference value TH1 (=842) at the time of low probability and the judgment reference value TH2 (=8429) at the time of high probability shown in FIG. are doing.
In this example, the decision reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is set to BIGLMAX1<BIGLMAX2<BIGLMAX6, and the decision reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is set to BIGHMAX1<BIGHMAX2<BIGHMAX6. The higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning.

In this example, in the actual determination process, the “lower limit of determination” (corresponding to “BIGMINI-1” described later) is also used as a threshold for the random number value. First, it is determined whether or not the random number value is greater than the "determination lower limit value". When the random number value is larger than the "judgment lower limit value", a big hit judgment is performed using the above-described judgment reference value TH1 or judgment reference value TH2.
If the "lower limit of judgment" is set to "0", the condition for judging a big hit is that the random number is within the range of "0" to "the judgment reference value TH". On the other hand, if the "judgment lower limit" is set to a value (X) greater than "0", the judgment condition for a big hit is that the random number is within the range of "X" to the "judgment reference value TH". Become.

Based on the above premise, the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first acquires setting difference information from the big hit determination random number determination table in step S1601.

FIG. 27 illustrates a random number determination table for judging a big hit used in the random number judging process, FIG. A random number determination table is illustrated.
As the jackpot random number determination process, the determination process for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A and the determination process for special figure 2 using the table shown in FIG. 27B are performed. Since it is similarly performed by the common processing shown in FIG. 25, only the determination processing for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A will be described below.

In step S1601, the setting difference information means a variable stored at the current reference address in the table shown in FIG. Since it is the top address of the table, the CPU 201 acquires the variable represented by "000H" stored at the top address as the setting difference information.
In subsequent step S1602, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting difference information is other than "000H". If the setting difference information is "000H" and a negative result is obtained in step S1602, the CPU 201 advances to step S1603 to acquire a determination reference value. That is, the variable (variable represented by "BIGMIN-1") stored at the address next to the top address in the table shown in FIG. 27A is acquired as the determination reference value. This process corresponds to the process of acquiring the "lower limit for determination" described above.
Next, in step S1604, the CPU 201 carries out processing for shifting to a designated address. Specifically, a process of shifting the reference destination address described above from the current reference destination address (“4093” in FIG. 27A) to an address four ahead (“4097” in FIG. 27A) is performed.
Then, in step S1610, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the random number value (the value of the random number for judging a big hit) is larger than the judgment reference value.
The series of processes of steps S1601->S1602->S1603->S1604->S1610 described above corresponds to the process of determining whether or not the random number value is greater than the above-described lower limit determination value.

In step S1610, if the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1611 and acquires small hit information.
Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the win information corresponding to the lower limit judgment value ("BIGMIN-1"), a variable represented by "000H, 000H, 000H" in the next address of the lower limit judgment value is stored. The variables correspond to "low-probability big hit information", "high-probability medium-big hit information", and "small hit information" in order from the left.
In step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1"), the CPU 201 stores the The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" of the winning information is acquired.
As for the hit information, "05AH" indicates "hit" and "000H" indicates "miss".

In step S1612 following step S1611, the CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in probability variation, and if it is not in probability variation, acquires low probability medium jackpot information in step S1613, finishes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and is in probability variation If so, the high probability medium jackpot information is acquired in step S1614, and the jackpot random number determination processing in step S1502 is finished.
Here, the low-probability big hit information acquisition process in step S1613 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1") in step S1610, In step S1613, the CPU 201 acquires the leftmost "000H" of the winning information variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored in the address next to the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1").
Also, regarding the high-probability middle-big hit information acquisition process of step S1614, the process of step S1614 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1") in step S1610. If so, the CPU 201 acquires the middle "000H" of the winning information variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address of the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1").

Through the series of processes described above, if the random number value is equal to or less than the lower limit value for determination, information about the failure is acquired.

Subsequently, when it is determined in step S1610 that the random number value is greater than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 returns to step S1601 and acquires setting difference information from the random number determination table for judging a big hit.
If the process of step S1601 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is greater than the lower limit value in step S1610, the reference address described above is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. , "001H" stored in the reference destination address is obtained as the setting difference information.
Therefore, in this case, the determination result that the setting difference information is other than "000H" is obtained in subsequent step S1602, and the CPU 201 advances the process to step S1605.

The processing of steps S1605 to S1609 is processing related to acquisition of the determination reference value TH according to the set value Ve. First, a process relating to the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is performed.
Specifically, in step S1605, the CPU 201 acquires the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as setting value information acquisition processing, and corrects the setting value information acquired in subsequent step S1606 by 2 bytes. That is, the set value Vd, which is 1 byte in this example, is corrected to 2 bytes.
Next, in step S1607, the CPU 201 acquires a determination reference value corresponding to the setting value Ve based on the correction information, that is, the setting value Vd corrected by 2 bytes.
When step S1607 is executed for the first time after the start of the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, the reference address is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. In the process of step S1607, the determination reference values stored in the addresses shifted by the amount corresponding to the correction information from the reference address (that is, in this case, "BIGLMAX1" at address "4098", "BIGLMAX2" at address "4099") "Any one of 'BIGLMAX6' at address '4100'). Specifically, in this case, if the above correction information corresponds to the set value Ve "1" (set value Vd="00H"), "BIGLMAX1" at the address next to the reference address is obtained, If the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve "2" (set value Vd="01H"), "BIGLMAX2" at the address two ahead of the reference destination address is acquired, and the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve If it corresponds to "3" (set value Vd="02H"), "BIGLMAX6" at the address three ahead of the reference destination address is acquired.

In response to obtaining the determination reference value in step S1607, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the random number value is greater than the determination reference value in step S1610 through the processing of steps S1608→S1609 (these processing will be described later). judge. As a result, the big hit determination is performed using the determination reference value TH1 when the probability is low.

Big hit determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is performed in step S1610, and if it is determined that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, a big hit), the above-described step S1611 and subsequent steps Processing is executed, and winning information acquisition processing is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the winning information corresponding to the case of using the low probability judgment reference value TH1, the low probability judgment reference value TH1 ("BIGLMAX1""BIGLMAX2""BIGLMAX6") is stored. A variable represented by "05AH, 05AH, 000H" is stored in the next address of the area ("4098" to "4100") (this variable is also in order from the left side "low probability middle jackpot information""high probability middle Represents big hit information” and “small hit information”).
In the process of step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH1, the CPU 201 stores the random value in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. The rightmost '000H' of the hit information variables '05AH, 05AH, 000H' is obtained.
Also, in this case, if it is not during the probability change, the CPU 201 in the process of step S1613, out of the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above Acquire the leftmost "05AH", and if it is during probability change, in the process of step S1614, acquire the center "05AH" among the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information.

Here, in step S1610, the big hit judgment using the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability was performed, and the random number value was larger than the judgment reference value TH1 (that is, the judgment at the time of low probability was "missing") In this case, the big hit judgment is performed using the judgment reference value TH2 (“BIGHMAX1”, “BIGHMAX2”, “BIGHMAX6”) at the time of high probability. At this time, the reference address is the address ``4097'' shown in FIG. should be shifted to the address "4103", that is, the top address of the information storage area ("4103" to "4107") for judging the big hit using the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high probability.
If the set value Ve is in three stages, the address shift amount is six addresses from "4097" to "4103". In the information storage area for judging a big hit using the judgment reference value TH1, not only "BIGLMAX1", "BIGLMAX2" and "BIGLMAX6" but also "BIGLMAX3", "BIGLMAX4" and "BIGLMAX5" are stored. In other words, in this case, the address shift amount should be 9 addresses corresponding to the increase of 3 in the determination reference value TH1.

In this way, when the reference destination is shifted from the information storage area corresponding to the low probability in the table to the information storage area corresponding to the high probability, the shift amount of the reference destination address is the number of stages of the setting value Ve (the number of setting values Ve to be used). number). Therefore, in this example, the setting stage information is acquired in step S1608, and the process of shifting to the designated address is performed based on the setting stage information in the subsequent step S1609. Specifically, in this example, setting stage information indicating "three stages" is acquired, and the reference address is shifted forward by six addresses based on the setting stage information.

By executing the processing of steps S1608 and S1609, when it is determined that the big hit determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is performed in step S1610 and the random value is greater than the determination reference value TH1 , in the process of step S1601, the setting difference information "001H" of the address "4103" shown in FIG. 27A is obtained.
Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the setting difference information is other than "000H" in the determination processing of step S1602, and the processing after step S1605 is executed again.
Then, in the acquisition process of step S1607 in this case, the determination reference value TH2 corresponding to the set value Ve is acquired from among the determination reference values TH2 of "BIGHMAX1", "BIGHMAX2", and "BIGHMAX6", and through steps S1608 and S1609 In the determination process in step S1610 that is performed, it is determined whether or not the random number value is greater than the acquired determination reference value TH2. That is, the big hit determination is performed using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high probability.

In this way, in step S1610, a big hit determination is performed using the high probability determination reference value TH2, and if it is determined that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH2 (a big hit), steps after step S1611 are performed. Acquisition processing of hit information is performed by processing.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the storage area ("4104" to "4106") of the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high probability as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case of using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high probability. Variables represented by "000H, 05AH, 000H" are stored in the next address (this variable also represents "low-probability middle-big hit information", "high-probability middle-big hit information", "minor hit information" in order from the left). .
In the process of step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH2, the CPU 201 stores the random value in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. The rightmost '000H' of the hit information variables '000H, 05AH, 000H' is obtained.
Also, in this case, if it is not during the probability change, the CPU 201 in the process of step S1613, out of the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above Acquire the leftmost "000H", and if it is during probability change, in the process of step S1614, acquire the central "05AH" among the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information. In other words, if the odds are not changing, the information of "lost" is acquired, and if the odds are changing, the information of "hit" is acquired.

In step S1610, a big hit judgment is performed using the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high probability, and the random number value is larger than the judgment reference value TH2 (that is, the judgment reference values TH1 and TH2 are both lost). In this case, in this example, the processing is performed based on the information stored in the area of addresses "4109" to "4111" in the table shown in FIG.
Here, depending on the processing of steps S1608 and S1609 executed when the high-accuracy determination reference value TH2 is acquired in step S1607, the reference address may be six addresses ahead of the previous address "4103". It will be shifted to "4109". Therefore, in the process of step S1601 executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is greater than the determination reference value TH2, "000H" stored at the address "4109" is obtained as the setting difference information. be done. That is, in this case, the processing proceeds in steps S1601→S1602→S1603.

Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, in the storage area of the information corresponding to deviation ("4109" to "4111"), "65535" is stored as the determination reference value at the next address ("4110") of the setting difference information. stored. In other words, a "defect determination reference value" for reliably determining a deviation is stored for a random number value that can be between 0 and 65535. FIG. Furthermore, variables "000H, 000H, 000H" representing deviation information are stored at the next address ("4111") of the determination reference value for deviation. The variables are also information corresponding to low probability, high probability, and small hits in order from the left.

In this case, in the acquisition process of step S1603, "65535" is acquired as the "determination criterion value for deviation" stored at the address next to the reference address as the determination criterion value. Then, in the determination processing of step S1610 that is executed through the processing of step S1604, it is determined whether or not the random number value is greater than the "determination reference value for error"=65535. A determination result is obtained that is not greater than the "determination reference value for deviation".

In this way, in step S1610, determination using the "determination reference value for deviation" is performed, and if it is determined that the random number value is not greater than the "determination reference value for deviation", the deviation information is acquired.
Specifically, in step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the "determination reference value for failure", the CPU 201 sets the "determination reference value for failure" in the table. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address is obtained.
Also, in this case, if it is not during the probability change, the CPU 201 changes the leftmost "000H" among the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored in the next address of the "determination reference value for failure" in the processing of step S1613. If it is acquired, and it is during probability change, in the processing of step S1614, the central "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" is acquired.
In this way, when it is determined that there is a loss with respect to both of the determination reference values TH1 and TH2, each "hit information" (small hit information, low-probability medium-big hit information, high-probability Information representing "losing" is acquired as middle jackpot information).

(Variation pattern lottery process)

The fluctuation pattern lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33. FIG.
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504.
First, in step S1701, the CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a setting error based on the setting error flag. That is, based on the big hit determination flag, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (=5AH).

If it is determined in step S1702 that it is not hit (lost), the CPU 201 selects a deviation variation pattern table in step S1703, and proceeds to variation pattern selection processing in step S1706. That is, it is a process of selecting a variation pattern based on the table and the random number for the variation pattern.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a hit variation pattern table in step S1704, and proceeds to variation pattern selection processing in step S1706.

FIG. 29 shows an example of a losing variation pattern table, and FIG. 30 shows an example of a winning variation pattern table.
First, as a premise, a variation pattern table for special figure 1 and a variation pattern table for special figure 2 are prepared as a losing variation pattern table and a hit variation pattern table, respectively.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of loss performed using the loss variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8s, normal fluctuation 12s, normal reach, super reach 1, super reach 2, super reach 3, and super reach 4.
Also, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning performed using the winning variation pattern table shown in FIG. There are 5 types of "Super Reach 4".
In addition, regarding "normal fluctuation", the numerical value written together represents the fluctuation time, and "s" after the numerical value means "second".

Here, among the above-described variation patterns, especially "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", "normal variation 8s", and "normal variation 12s" belong to variation patterns corresponding to so-called "loss" that are not selected at the time of winning (hereinafter (It is sometimes referred to as a "loss variation pattern").

In this embodiment, the variation pattern lottery at the time of loss is performed using a different variation pattern table for each loss type (loss 1, 2, 3) regardless of special figures 1 and 2 (see FIG. 29).
Here, in the present embodiment, the selection rate (the rate at which the corresponding type is selected) by symbol lottery is different for each of the types of "losing 1", "losing 2", and "losing 3". ' has the highest selection rate, and 'loss 2' and 'loss 3' have lower selection rates than 'loss 1'. Specifically, in this example, the selectivity of "miss 1" is "190/200", and the selectivity of "miss 2" and "miss 3" is respectively "5/200". In this case, if the big hit determination result is "loss", in most cases, "loss 1" is selected as the type of loss.

As the variation pattern lottery for the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery when the loss type is "loss 1" is not determined according to the set value Ve, but determined according to the number of retained balls. Therefore, among the variation pattern tables for special figure 1, the variation pattern table used when the loss type is "loss 1" is common between the set values Ve, but different tables for each number of retained balls are provided.

In the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 in the case of "loss 1", the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", "normal variation 8s", "normal variation 12s", and "normal reach". In this example, the fluctuation pattern to be selected is changed according to the number of reserved balls.
Specifically, if the number of held balls = 0, "normal fluctuation 12s" and "normal reach", if the number of held balls = 1, "normal fluctuation 8s" and "normal reach", if the number of held balls = 2, "normal Variation 6s" and "Normal reach", and when the number of pending balls = 3, "Normal variation 4s" and "Normal reach" are the fluctuation patterns to be selected.

Here, in the variation pattern table, the numerical values stored for each variation pattern to be selected are based on the premise that the random number for determining the variation pattern can take 200 different values from 0 to 199. Distribution of winning probability It represents a value (a value representing distribution). For example, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1, in the table of "missing 1" and "holding ball number = 0", the stored value for "normal fluctuation 12s" = "160", the stored value for "normal reach" = "40" This means that the winning probability of "normal variation 12s" is "160/200" and the winning probability of "normal reach" is "40/200".
The above distribution value is shown as the stored value of the table for the sake of convenience of explanation, and the actual fluctuation pattern table stores the judgment reference value used in the above-mentioned jackpot random number judgment. become. For example, in the above table of "missing 1" and "holding ball number = 0", for example, "159" is stored as the actual stored value (criterion value), and in that case, the random number for the variation pattern is 159 or less. If so, "normal fluctuation 12s" is selected, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is greater than 159, "normal reach" is selected.

As can be seen by referring to the distribution value shown in FIG. 29, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 1", "normal fluctuation" is more likely to be selected than "normal reach"I'm trying to do it (so that the appearance rate is high).
In addition, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "loss 1", the larger the number of held balls, the shorter the fluctuation time normal fluctuation pattern is selected.

Subsequently, as the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery in each case where the type of loss is "disappear 2" and "disappear 3" is a lottery according to the set value Ve, while depending on the number of pending balls I don't do lottery. For this reason, the variation pattern table for special figure 1 used in each case of "loss 2" and "loss 3" is common among the number of held balls, but different tables are prepared for each set value Ve there is

In the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "loss 2" and "loss 3", the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is 4 of "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". considered to be a seed.
In this example, for the fluctuation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 3", the fluctuation pattern to be lottery is changed according to the set value Ve.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1, the variation patterns to be drawn for each combination of "missing 2", "missing 3" and setting 1, 2, 6 are as follows.
Setting 1 and "missing 2" = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 1 and "missing 3" = super reach 1
Setting 2 and "missing 2" = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 2 and "missing 3" = super reach 2, 3
Setting 6 and "missing 2" = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 6 and "missing 3" = super reach 4

From the distribution values illustrated in the figure, in this example, as a variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 2", in the case of setting 1, super reach 4, 3, 2, 1 Fluctuation in order The pattern is made easy to select, and in the case of setting 2, the variation pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 2, 3, 4, and in the case of setting 3, the variation pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 3, 2, 4. making it easy.
In addition, in this example, regarding the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "loss 3", the higher the setting (the larger the set value Ve), the higher the expectation of winning Super reach tends to be selected. I'm trying

It should be noted that, like the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the above case of "loss 2", the variation pattern table used for the lottery in which the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is three or more types has a plurality of values ( A value represented by “the number of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates−1”) is stored. For example, in the table corresponding to the case of setting 1 and "mismatch 2" in the figure, for example, the first value = 9, the second value = 39, and the third value = 99 as the judgment reference values. In that case, if the random number for the fluctuation pattern is the first value or less, "Super Reach 1" is set, and if it is greater than the first value and is less than the second value, "Super Reach 2" is the second value. If it is larger than the value and equal to or smaller than the third value, "super reach 3" is selected, and if it is larger than the third value, "super reach 4" is selected.

Subsequently, as the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2, for the variation pattern lottery when the loss type is "1", unlike the case of special figure 1, the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is only "normal variation 12s" there is For this reason, among the variation pattern table for special figure 2, "miss 1" and "number of held balls = 0", "miss 1" and "number of held balls = 1", "miss 1" and "number of held balls = 2”, “missing 1”, and “number of held balls=3”, the distribution value corresponding to “normal variation 12 s” is all “200”.
In this case, since the lottery result is the same even if the number of reserved balls is different, the variation pattern table may be a common table for the number of reserved balls.

In addition, as the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery in the case of "missing 2" and "missing 3" is a lottery according to the set value Ve as in the case of special figure 1, It will not be a lottery according to the number of pending balls. Therefore, regarding the variation pattern table for special figure 2, the variation pattern table used in each case of "loss 2" and "loss 3" is common between the number of held balls, but differs for each set value Ve A table is provided.

In the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2 corresponding to the case of "loss 2" and "loss 3", the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is "normal variation 12s" and "super reach 4". , any one of these "normal fluctuation 12s" and "super reach 4" is selected.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2 corresponding to the cases of "out 2" and "out 3" in this example, "normal variation 12s" is always selected when either setting 1 or 2 , and in the case of setting 6, "super reach 4" is selected.

Next, the winning variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning, both special figures 1 and 2 use different tables for each winning type.
In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the lottery target is set as follows for each winning type. That is, if the hit type is "normal 4R", both the special figures 1 and 2, the variation pattern for the lottery is "normal variation per", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", "super reach 4" It is said to be 5 types of ".
Also, if the hit type is "normal 6R", in the special figure 1, the variation pattern for the lottery is "normal fluctuation per", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". It is a seed, and in the special figure 2, there are four types of "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4" excluding "per normal fluctuation".
In addition, if the hit type is "variable 6R" or "variable 10R", the variation patterns for the lottery are "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4" for both special figures 1 and 2. There are 4 types.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the set value Ve is performed only for a specific winning type. Specifically, for the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of "normal 4R" and "variable 10R", and for the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2, "normal Variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of 4R, ``variable probability 6R'', and ``variable probability 10R''.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern lottery in the case of "normal 4R", in both special figures 1 and 2, the fluctuation pattern of the lottery target is changed by the set value Ve. Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery corresponding to "normal 4R" in this example, if the setting is 1, there are five types of "normal variation per" to "super reach 4", and if the setting is 2 or 6, "super Reach 1” to “Super Reach 4” are the variation patterns for the lottery.
Regarding the variation pattern lottery in the case of "normal R6", "probability variation 6R", "probability variation 10R" which is a hit type other than "normal 4R", in both special figures 1 and 2, the variation pattern for the lottery is the set value Ve It is considered immutable.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only in the case of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R". Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of special figure 1, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the case of these "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R".
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 30, in this example, in the variation pattern table of special figure 1, in each table of "normal 4R" and "variable probability 10R", the distribution value for "super reach 4" is set as the set value Ve increases making it bigger. As a result, the higher the current setting is, the more easily the variation pattern with the highest winning expected value is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 at the time of hitting each of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R".

In addition, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed for "normal 4R", "probability variation 10R" and "probability variation 6R". Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of special figure 2, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the case of "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R". In this example, in the variation pattern table of special figure 2, in all of these "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", "probability variation 10R" tables, the distribution value for "super reach 4" is increased as the set value Ve increases .

Here, as can be seen by referring to the distribution values in the figure, in this example, the distribution value for "super reach 4" is the largest in each table regardless of the winning type or the set value Ve. That is, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery when it is determined as a big hit, the variation pattern with the highest winning expectation is most likely to be selected.

Returning the description to FIG.
In the selection process of step S1706 described above, a variation pattern is selected based on the above-described loss or hit variation pattern table.
Specifically, when the losing variation pattern table is selected in response to the determination of the deviation in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the deviation type, the number of held balls, and the set value Ve from the variation pattern table. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the selected table and the random number for variation pattern. In addition, when the hit variation pattern table is selected in response to the determination of the hit in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the hit type and the set value Ve from the hit variation pattern table, and selects the selected table. A variation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for the variation pattern. In this case, it is needless to say that the special figure 1 and special figure 2 tables are selected and divided depending on whether the symbol to be processed is the special figure 1 or 2.
As can be understood from the above description, in each hit/lose variation pattern table, one or more determination reference values corresponding to the variation pattern of the lottery target (the number of variation patterns of lottery candidates - 1) are defined. , In the selection process of step S1706, the variation pattern is selected based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value stored in the table selected as described above and the value of the random number for the variation pattern.

In the above description, the variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern is divided for each set value Ve, but a common table may be used for some set values Ve.
FIG. 31 shows an example thereof.
Here, a modified example of the winning variation pattern table is shown on the premise that the set value Ve can take six values corresponding to the settings 1-6.
In the example of FIG. 31, a table corresponding to "normal 4R""variable probability 10R" for special figure 1, and a table corresponding to "normal 4R""variable probability 6R""variable probability 10R" for special figure 2 are set respectively An example is shown in which the table is divided into groups of 1 to 3 and groups of settings 4 to 6. FIG.
As in the example of FIG. 31, in performing the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve, it is not limited to dividing the table individually for each set value Ve, and common among some set values Ve table may be used.

Next, the processing when a setting error is detected at the time of variation pattern lottery will be described.
If it is determined in step S1701 of FIG. 28 that there is a setting error, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1705, selects the common variation pattern table for setting error, and executes selection processing in step S1706.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of the common variation pattern table for setting errors.
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of setting error performed using the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error, for both special figures 1 and 2, the loss variation pattern is forcibly selected regardless of whether it is a hit or a loss. make it That is, in this example, one of the "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s" is forcibly selected.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of setting error in this example, for the special figure 1 side, a different variation pattern is selected according to the number of reserved balls, and for the special figure 2 side, a specific variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls Only, specifically, only "normal variation 12s" is selected.
For the special figure 1 side, a normal variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected as the number of held balls is larger.

Also in FIG. 32, for convenience of explanation, as a table structure, a structure that stores a distribution value corresponding to the case where the random number for the fluctuation pattern lottery can take a value of 0 to 199 is shown. As a table for each number (0 to 3), a structure is adopted in which at least the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is associated with the determination reference value.
Regarding the special figure 2 side, if a specific variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of balls held as in this example, there is no need to divide the table for each number of balls held (0 to 3) Needless to say.

In FIG. 28, in the selection process of step S1706, when the setting error common variation pattern table is selected in step S1705, the variation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for variation pattern. Specifically, in this example, a table corresponding to the current number of pending balls in the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error is selected, and the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value and the random number for the variation pattern stored in the selected table is determined. A variation pattern is selected based on the results of the comparison.

The CPU 201 ends the variation pattern lottery process in step S1508 in response to executing the selection process in step S1706. When the lottery process in step S1504 ends, the change management process in step S1409 shown in FIG. 24 ends, and thereafter the process proceeds to step S1410 (fluctuation flag ON process) shown in FIG.
As described above, in the command transmission process of step S1411 following step S1410, the "variation pattern designation command" representing the lottery result of the variation pattern and the "decorative design designation command" representing the design lottery result are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. be.
On the production control unit 24 side, based on these commands, a combination of decorative patterns when forming a ready-to-win state (symbol types with ready-to-win patterns as constituent elements), and a decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern). A combination of is determined, and a lottery or the like of the notice effect corresponding to the winning type is performed in the symbol variation display game.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a setting error is recognized at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure, the pattern (normal fluctuation) is forcibly removed, but at this time, the decorative pattern In order to confuse the player if the intense heat fluctuation is selected as the side fluctuation, in this example, as described above, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time such as normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s is selected. there is
In this embodiment, the effect control unit 24 side is also devised so as not to perform the advance notice effect in the event of a setting error. Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives a setting value abnormality command (see step S1104 in FIG. 20) for notifying a setting error from the main control unit 20 side, the lottery for the advance notice effect is not performed. be.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error is recognized based on the setting value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 displays a message such as "RAM is abnormal. The occurrence of an abnormality is notified by, for example, displaying an image containing The notification is not limited to notification by image display using the liquid crystal display device 36, for example, notification by sound or LED lighting (and/or blinking), or a combination of multiple types of effect means such as images, sounds, and LEDs. It is also possible to make notification by matching.

In the above, for the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error on the special figure 1 side, the normal variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected as the number of retained balls is larger, but this is an example, for example, the retained ball It is also possible to select a normal variation pattern with a longer variation time as the number decreases.
Alternatively, as exemplified in FIG. 33, it is possible to select the same variation pattern for each number of reserved balls as in the special figure 2 side. The example of FIG. 33 shows a case where "normal variation 12s" is commonly selected for each number of held balls.
In this way, in the setting error common variation pattern table, the relationship between the number of held balls and the variation pattern to be selected can be variously considered, and is not limited to a specific relationship.
In addition, for the special figure 2 side, it is also possible to make the variation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls different like the special figure 1 side.

(Advantages of setting value related data table as an embodiment)

Here, in this example, in the random number determination table for judging a big hit shown in FIG. 27A, the area below the storage area for information corresponding to loss (“4109” to “4111”) is an empty area. Also, in this example, in the random number determination table for judging a big hit shown in FIG. 27B, the area below the storage area for information corresponding to loss (“4148” to “4150”) is an empty area. In this example, "0" is stored in these empty areas.
In these random number determination tables for judging a big hit, the area other than the empty area can be rephrased as a use data storage area in which use data used for progress control of game operations is stored. In addition, the empty area can be rephrased as an unused data storage area in which unused data that is not used for progress control of game operations is stored.

Then, when such a random number determination table for judging a big hit is used as a first data table containing a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set value Vd, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 The ROM 202 stores the first data table and a second data table which is stored in a lower layer storage area than the first data table and which does not contain setting value related information.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a storage example of the first data table and the second data table in the ROM 202 of this embodiment.
As shown in the figure, in the ROM 202 of this embodiment, a special symbol creation address table, that is, a second data that does not include set value related information table is stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table containing a plurality of setting value related information and the setting value related information stored in the storage area on the lower layer side than the first data table The first data table contains a use data storage area storing use data used for controlling the progress of game motions, and a second data table not used for controlling the progress of game motions. and a stored unused data storage area.

If only the used data storage area is reserved in the first data table containing setting value related information, when trying to increase the number of setting values Vd to be used (the number of steps), the incremented setting value If the setting value related information related to Vd is added to the first data table, the data after the second data table to be stored in the lower layer must be shifted to the lower layer side. That is, the data after the second data table are forced to be rewritten to shift the storage area.
When trying to increase the number of setting values Vd to be used by securing a storage area for not only used data but also unused data in the first data table containing setting value related information as described above, It is possible to store set value related information related to the increased set value Vd in the unused data storage area.
Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite data after the second data table, and reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described use data storage area, use data having a capacity corresponding to the number of setting values Vd that can be set in the setting change process ("3" in this example) is stored. The storage area stores unused data of a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process (in this example, "3" corresponding to set values Ve "3", "4", and "5"). It is Specifically, in this example, the capacity is not used according to "3" set values Ve, which is obtained by subtracting the number of actually used set values Ve = 3 from the number of set values Ve that can be legally set = 6. Data is stored.
As a result, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure the storage capacity of the setting value related information related to the incremented setting value Ve when the number of setting values Ve to be used is increased. .
Therefore, it is possible to prevent rewriting of data after the second data table.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, "0" is stored as unused data. It is possible to prevent the set value related information corresponding to the value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and to enhance the fairness of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 stores the first data table in a storage area below the second data table, and stores the second data table in a storage area below the first data table. It is assumed that the data table is not stored.
Specifically, in the ROM 202 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the set value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) as the first data table is stored in the lowest layer area of the normal data area. .
Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 has "normal program area", "unused area", "normal data area", "unused area", "measurement program area", and "normal area". An unused area," a "measurement data area," and an "unused area" are defined. The "normal program area" is an area in which programs related to general games are stored. be. For example, the jackpot determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 27 is stored in this "normal data area".
The "measurement program area" is an area that stores programs related to the display and measurement of performance information such as the above-mentioned normal time ratio information, and the "measurement data area" is referenced based on the program in the "measurement program area". This is an area in which a data table related to display and measurement of performance information to be displayed is stored.

As shown in FIG. 35, by storing the set value offset conversion table as the first data table in the lowest layer area of the normal data area, the first data table can be, for example, the above-mentioned "special symbol creation address table" ( 34), etc.), and the second data table is not stored in the storage area below the first data table.

When the number of set values Vd to be used is increased by storing the first and second data tables in the ROM 202 in the manner described above, the contents of the first data table located in the lowest layer of the data area in the ROM 202 , and it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the data portion on the layer side lower than the first data table.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

<5. Processing of Production Control Unit>
[5-1. Outline of processing]

Next, the processing of the effect control unit 24 will be described. First, an example of the structure of scenario data for effect control will be described.
The structure of the scenario registration information will be explained with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37A shows the structure of scenario registration information as a main scenario and sub-scenarios. This scenario registration information is set using a work area provided in the RAM 243 (for example, built-in CPU work memory) of the effect control section 24 .
In this embodiment, the scenario registration information has 64 channels of scenario channels sCH0 to sCH63. Scenarios registered in each scenario channel sCH can be executed simultaneously.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each scenario channel sCH includes the sub-scenario timer (scTm) used in the sub-scenario update process, the previous time (scPrevTm), and the sub-scenario execution line indicating the execution line of the sound/motor sub-scenario table. (scIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) indicating the execution line of the lamp sub-scenario table, main scenario timer (msTm) used for scenario update processing, main scenario execution line (mcIx) indicating the execution line of the main scenario table, There are a main scenario number (mcNo), a main scenario option (mcOpt) which is optional data that can be added to the main scenario, a user option (userFn), a waiting time (delay), and a checksum (checkSum).

When the sound output by the speaker 46, the light emission by the optical display device 45a, and the driving of the movable body role by the movable body body motor 80c are started, the standby time (delay) and the main scenario number (mcNo) are set to the scenario channel sCH0. Register to an empty scenario channel among sCH63.
The waiting time (delay) indicates the time from registration to the scenario channel sCH to the start of the scenario. Note that this waiting time (delay) is decremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41, which will be described later). When the waiting time (delay) is 0, the process corresponding to the registered data is executed.

FIG. 39 shows examples of scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as part of the main scenario table. As a scenario for each scenario number, the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is described as time data in each line of the scenario, and the sub-scenario number (scNo) and option (OPT) can be described. . That is, in the main scenario table, sub-scenarios (and optionally options) to be executed are specified as time by the main scenario timer (msTm). A scenario data end code D_SEEND or a scenario data loop code D_SELOP is written in the last line of the scenario.
Note that the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is incremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later) from the start of the main scenario.
The scenario table for each scenario number advances to the next row when the time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in a certain row has passed. Time data in each line indicates the timing at which the line ends.
For example, in the case of scenario number 2, the operation of sub-scenario number 2 is specified as the time of the timer value "1500", the operation of sub-scenario number 20 is specified as the time of the next timer value "500", and the next timer value " The operation of sub-scenario number 21 is specified as the time of 2000″. The next line is the scenario data end code D_SEEND. If the scenario data end code is D_SEEND, this scenario is deleted from the scenario registration information (work).

Next, the structure of the lamp data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37B. As the lamp data registration information, a scenario selected from the lamp sub-scenario table, that is, information indicating the performance operation (lighting pattern) by the optical display device 45a is registered. This lamp data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243 .
In this embodiment, the lamp data registration information has 16 channels of lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. A priority is set for each of the ramp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15, and the priority increases in order from the ramp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. Therefore, the scenario (ramp sub-scenario) registered in the ramp channel dwCH15 is executed with the highest priority. For example, if scenarios are registered in ramp channels dwCH3 and dwCH10, the scenario registered in ramp channel dwCH10 is preferentially executed.
Ramp channel dwCH0 is mainly used for ramp effects associated with BGM (Background Music), ramp channel dwCH15 is used for error-related ramp effects, and ramp channels dwCH1 to dwCH14 are used for normal effects.

Information that can be registered in each lamp channel dwCH includes a registered lighting number (lmpNew) indicating the number of a registered lighting pattern, an execution lighting number (lmpNo) indicating the number of a lighting pattern to be executed, and a lamp sub-scenario. There is an offset (offset) that indicates an execution line, an execution time (time), and a checksum (checkSum).

FIG. 40A shows examples of lamp sub-scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as part of the lamp sub-scenario table. As the lamp sub-scenario of each number, a value of time data (time) is described in each line (row) of the scenario, and a lamp channel and a lamp number indicating various lighting patterns are described. A lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is written in the last line.

In this ramp sub-scenario table, the time data (time) of each line indicates the start time of that line after the sub-scenario started.
The main scenario timer (msTm) described above is compared with the time data in the table, and if they match, the lamp number of that line is registered in the lamp data registration information in FIG. 37B. The registered ramp channel dwCH is the channel indicated on the line.
For example, assume that scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 39 is registered and sub-scenario number 2 is referenced in a certain scenario channel sCH described above. In lamp sub-scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 40A, lamp channel 5 (dwCH5) and lamp number 5 are described with time data (time)=0 on the first line. In this case, when the main scenario timer (msTm)=0, first, the information of the first line is registered as the registration lighting number (lmpNew)=5 in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information in FIG. 37B. The value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) of the scenario registration information is updated to the value of the next line (second line). This is a registration for executing the lighting pattern operation of lighting number 5 with a relatively low priority of lamp channel dwCH5.
As for the second line, the same processing is performed when the main scenario timer (msTm) reaches "500". That is, the registered lighting number (lmpNew)=6 (that is, the lighting pattern of the lighting number 6) is registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information.
If the time data (time) is the same value for two consecutive lines, the processing for each line will be started at the same time.
In the lamp drive data creation process, which will be described later, the lamp drive data is created based on the lamp data registration information thus updated.

Next, the structure of motor data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37C. Information indicating the scenario selected from the motor sub-scenario table is registered as the motor data registration information. This motor data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243 .
In this embodiment, the motor data registration information has eight channels of motor channels mCH0 to mCH7 corresponding to, for example, eight motors.
Information that can be registered in each motor channel mCH includes the execution operation number (no), registered operation number (noNew), operation count (lcnt), excitation counter (tcnt), execution step (step), and operation line, as shown in the figure. (offset), parent (source)/child (destination) attribute (attribute), parent number (retNo), return address (retAddr), loop start point (roopAddr), loop count (roopCnt), error counter (errCnt) ), current input information (currentSw), software switch information (softSw), and software count (softCnt).

FIG. 40C shows an example of motor sub-scenario number 1 as part of the motor sub-scenario table. As the motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line (row) of the scenario, and the information of motor, solenoid/user option is described. A scenario data end code D_MSEND is written in the last line.

Regarding this motor sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) reaches 0 (it is initially 0), the time data (time) value of this motor sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm), so the time data value to be set is (the time data of the current line) - (the time data of the previous line).
The motor data (motors 0 to 3, 4 to 7) are constructed so that one byte per motor indicates the motor operation pattern number (motor operation table number, which will be described later). The number of the motion pattern is set to the registered motion number (noNew) and execution motion number (no) of the motor channel corresponding to the motor number.
In step S2202 in FIG. 44, which will be described later, this motor data registration information is updated, and in step S2203, motor drive data is created based on the update of the motor data registration information.

FIG. 38 shows sound data registration information. Information indicating the scenario selected from the sound sub-scenario table is registered as the sound data registration information. This sound data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243 .
In this embodiment, the sound data registration information has 16 sound channels aCH0 to aCH15.
Information that can be registered in each sound channel aCH includes volume transition amount (frzVq), volume (frzVl), transition amount change (rsv2), volume change (rsv1), phrase change (rsv0), stereo (frzSt ), loop (frzLp), phrase number hi (frzHi), and phrase number low (frzLo).

FIG. 40B shows examples of sound sub-scenario numbers 1 and 2 as part of the sound sub-scenario table. As the sound/motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line (row) of the scenario, and information of BGM, notice sound, error sound, and sound control is described. A scenario data end code D_SEEND is written in the last line.
Regarding this sound sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) reaches 0 (it is initially 0), the time data (time) value of this sound sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm), so the time data value to be set is (the time data of the current line) - (the time data of the previous line).
The BGM data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information such as the BGM phrase number and volume value, and is set to the sound channel aCH0 (additionally aCH1 in the case of stereo) in the sound data registration information. .
The notice sound data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information, such as the notice sound phrase number and volume value, and is set in an empty portion of the sound channels aCH2 to aCH14.
The error sound data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information such as the error sound phrase number and volume value, and is set in the sound channel aCH15.
The sound control data consists of channel information in the lower 6 bytes and control information in the upper 2 bytes.
In step S2033 of FIG. 41, which will be described later, reproduction output control is performed based on the scenario updating process and the updated sound data registration information.

Note that the sound sub-scenario table and the motor sub-scenario table may have an integrated table structure for each line of time.

An example of the processing of the effect control unit 24, particularly the processing of the CPU 241, which performs effect control using the scenario data structure as described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The CPU 241 starts the processing of FIG. 41 when the main body of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

First, in step S2000, the CPU 241 performs necessary initial setting processing before starting the game operation. For example, as initialization processing, interface system initialization, interrupt setting, external memory initialization, WDT initialization, starting point return processing and control initialization of movable body characters, sound source control initialization, serial output controller initialization initialization, scheduler (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler) initialization, system timer initialization, liquid crystal control initialization, etc.
Each scheduler refers to the above-described scenario registration information, motor data registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information, or progress of scenario control based on these. As initialization processing, the work area for storing the scenario registration information and the like is initialized.

After completing the initial setting process in step S2000, the CPU 241 executes power-on history information initial setting process in step S2001. The initial setting process is a process for holding in the RAM 243 information necessary for displaying a later-described setting history confirmation screen Gs performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 . Although the details will be described later, predetermined history information such as change history information of the set value Ve is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (see FIG. 46).
Note that processing executed by the CPU 241 for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, including the power-on history information initial setting processing in step S2001, will be described again.

CPU241 repeats the process after step S2002 according to having performed the process of step S2001.
Especially in this embodiment, the CPU 241 executes the processing from step S2002 while monitoring the frame timing of the liquid crystal display device 36 . In this example, control based on a V blank signal, which is a synchronization signal used especially for display control, is performed.
In this embodiment, the V blank signal is generated twice during 1/30 second (33.3 ms), which is one frame period of the display image on the liquid crystal display device 36 . Since the CPU 241 counts up the V blank interrupt counter according to the V blank signal, the V blank interrupt counter is counted up every 1/60 second (16.6 ms).
Of course, each processing of the CPU 241 is performed based on a processing clock whose frequency is much higher than that of the V blank signal. Each process in FIG. 41 is performed while grasping the period from the frame start to the end according to the V blank signal. Steps S2021 to S2043 are repeated until the end of one frame period is confirmed by the value of the interrupt counter. The processing of steps S2050 to S2052 is performed when the end of one frame period is detected.

In step S2002, the CPU 241 performs clear control on the WDT circuit that the effect control section 24 has.
In subsequent step S2003, the CPU 241 checks the frame update flag. The frame update flag is a flag for managing scheduler update and the like in a frame period.
The frame update flag is turned off at the start of a certain frame of display data (because it is turned off at step S2052 described later at the end of the frame).
Therefore, at the frame start timing, the CPU 241 advances from step S2003 to S2004.

In step S2004, the CPU 241 updates the frame of the scenario scheduler. Specifically, this is processing for updating the waiting time (delay), main scenario timer (msTm), and sub-scenario timer (scTm) of the scenario registration information in FIG. 37A. In other words, it can be said that the processing advances the timer of the production scenario by one timing at the start of the frame.
Then, the CPU 241 turns on the frame update flag in subsequent step S2005. This is information indicating that the scenario timer has progressed in the current frame.
Also, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2006. This is information indicating that the scheduler has not been updated, that is, the scenario contents (scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information) have not been updated as the timer progresses.
Then, the process returns to step S2002. After clearing the WDT circuit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2020 because the frame update flag is ON in step S2003. Here, the WDT circuit is sequentially reset if the CPU 241 is in a normal processing state.

As described above, steps S2004 to S2006 are performed only once after the frame start timing, and the timer of the scenario registration information is updated in step S2004. A scenario for presentation progresses every 33.3 ms, which is one frame period. For example, the main scenario timer (msTm) advances every 33.3 ms. The time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in one row in the main scenario table of FIG. 39 corresponds to the time of the indicated value×33.3 ms. The time in one row indicated by time (time) in the sub-scenario table in FIG. 40 also corresponds to the time of the indicated value×33.3 ms.

CPU 241 branches the process at step S2020 depending on the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter has not reached "2" (that is, if it is "0" or "1"), the process proceeds to step S2021.
The V blank interrupt counter is cleared at the end of the frame in step S2051 and is incremented twice per frame. Therefore, V blank interrupt counter=0 indicates the first half period of the frame, and V blank interrupt counter=1 indicates the second half period of the frame. The V blank interrupt counter is set to 2 by the V blank signal at the end of the frame.
The CPU 241 proceeds from step S2020 to step S2021 so as to repeat steps S2021 to S2043 as many times as possible during the frame period in which the V blank interrupt counter is "0" or "1".

In step S2021, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on whether the V blank interrupt counter is "0" or "1". That is, whether the current time is the first half or the second half of a certain frame period.
At present, if the V blank interrupt counter is 0, that is, in the first half of the frame, the process advances to step S2022 to confirm a received command from the main control unit 20. FIG. That is, it confirms whether or not one or more received commands are stored in the command reception buffer. If there is no received command, the process proceeds to step S2030.
If there is one or more received commands, the CPU 241 performs command analysis processing in step S2023.

Then, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2024. It should be noted that turning off the scheduler update flag in step S2024 means that even after the scheduler update flag has been turned on in step S2031 in the current frame period, if a command is received, the scheduler update flag is turned off again. It means turn off.

An example of command analysis processing in step S2023 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG.
As described above, the CPU 241 is step S2022 in FIG. 41 and checks whether or not the effect control command supplied from the main control unit 20 is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, the command is read by the processing in FIG.

The RAM 243 is provided with a command reception buffer for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main control unit 20 in the effect control unit 24 .
First, in step S2101 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms the read pointer indicating the read address of the command reception buffer and the write pointer indicating the write address.
The light pointer is updated in response to command reception, and accordingly, the received effect control commands are stored at the address indicated by the light pointer. The read pointer is updated when reading from the command reception buffer (step S2102). Therefore, if the read pointer is not equal to the write pointer, the effect control command that has not yet been read is stored in the command reception buffer. If the read pointer is not equal to the write pointer, the process advances to step S2102, and the CPU 241 loads 1-byte command data from the address indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. In this case, the read pointer is incremented for the next read (load).

Incidentally, in practice, the determination of the presence/absence of the received command in step S2022 of FIG. 41 can also be made by determining whether the read pointer=write pointer. As an actual program, if the read pointer=write pointer at the time when the command check process is first started, it is determined in step S2022 in FIG. 41 that there is no received command.

As described above, one effect control command is composed of 2 bytes, 1 byte as a mode and 1 byte as an event. In step S2103 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms whether the loaded 1-byte command data is a mode or an event. This confirmation is performed by the value of Bit7 of the 8 bits (Bit0 to Bit7).
If it is in the mode, the process advances to step S2104 as processing for receiving the upper data of the command, and saves the read command data in the register "command HI byte". It also clears the "command LO byte" register. Then, the process returns to step S2101.
Even after that, if the read pointer is not the write pointer, the effect control command that has not yet been read is stored in the command reception buffer. Load 1 byte of command data from address. It also increments the read pointer.
If the read command is an event, the process advances from step S2103 to step S2105 as processing for receiving lower order data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register "command LO byte".

By saving the mode and event command data in the "command HI byte" and "command LO byte" registers, the CPU 241 has received one command.
Therefore, in step S2106, the CPU 241 performs processing according to the received command. A specific example will be described later with reference to FIG.

The read pointer=write pointer is when the effect control command that the CPU 241 has not yet taken in does not exist in the command reception buffer. The command analysis processing as step S2023 in FIG. 41 is terminated by confirming that the read pointer=write pointer in step S2101.

An example of command handling processing in step S2106 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 43A shows basic processing as command handling processing. In response to the reception of the 2-byte effect control command, the CPU 241 first checks in step S2121 of FIG. 43A whether or not it is currently in the test mode. If it is in the test mode, in step S2122 all production scenarios are cleared, sound output is stopped, and the LED in the optical display device 45a is turned off. Then, in step S2123, the test mode is terminated.
These processes are not performed unless in the test mode.
And CPU241 will perform the process about the taken-in production|presentation control command in step S2130.

As the effect control command, for example, a special symbol variation pattern specification command, a decorative pattern specification command, a pending addition command, a game state specification command, a power supply command, a RAM clear command, a setting change command, a setting change end command, and a setting confirmation Command, setting confirmation end command, setting value command (in this example, at least at the time of startup (S808 in FIG. 17) and at the start of pattern fluctuation (S1411 in FIG. 23), the main control unit 20 transmits), error command (of various errors notification command) and so on. In step S2130, CPU 241 performs a process defined by the program in response to the received command. Here, four production control commands are shown in FIGS. 43B to 43E to illustrate specific processing.

FIG. 43B shows processing S2130a when a variation pattern designation command is taken in as command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs processing for setting a decorative design designation command waiting state in step S2131. This is because the CPU 241 controls the variable display of the pattern by sequentially receiving the variation pattern specification command and the decorative pattern specification command.

FIG. 43C shows the processing S2130b when the design designation command is taken in as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 first checks in step S2132 whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it has not been received, the processing ends as it is.
When the decorative design designation command is received, if the variation pattern designation command has already been received, the flow advances to step S2133 to first register the scenario for the operation of correcting the origin of the character product. Then, in step S2134, the symbol variation flag is set. The symbol variation flags are respectively provided corresponding to the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and each flag indicates the variation state. For example, a 2-bit first special symbol variation flag FZ1, a second special symbol variation flag FZ2, and a normal symbol variation flag FZ3 are prepared, each of which indicates during variation, during stop (hit), during stop (loss). Here, with the start of fluctuation, the corresponding symbol fluctuation flag (any one of FZ1, FZ2, and FZ3) is set to a value indicating "in fluctuation".
In the case of a hit, the symbol variation flag is set to a value indicating "stopped (hit)" for a predetermined time at the end of the symbol variation, and then a value indicating "stopped (lost)" until the symbol variation starts. is set to
In step S2135, the CPU 241 performs fluctuation start processing. After that, the variation pattern specification command is deleted in step S2136 in response to the start of variation.

FIG. 43D shows processing S2130c when a power-on command is received as command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2137. For example, it clears the storage areas such as the contents of the command reception/transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers.
Then, in step S2138, an error cancellation command is transmitted, in step S2139, the role product error information is cleared, in step S2140, the role product operation is stopped, in step S2141, the scenario for turning on the power is registered, and in step S2142, the power is turned on to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. Commands are set sequentially.

FIG. 43E shows processing S2130d when a RAM clear command is received as command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2143. For example, it clears the storage areas such as the contents of the command reception/transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers.
Then, in step S2144, an error cancellation command is transmitted, and in step S2145, RAM clear error setting and error notification timer setting are performed. Further, in step S2146, the information on the lottery process in the RAM 243 is cleared, and in step S2147, the information on the scenario is cleared. Then, in step S2148, a power-on initial display (RAM clear) command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is set.

An example of processing in response to command reception has been described above.
The processing of steps 2022 to S2024 in FIG. 41 as the processing in response to the above command reception is started only during the period when the V blank interrupt counter=0 in this example.

Subsequently, the CPU 241 checks the scheduler update flag in step S2030 of FIG. 41 and branches the process. Here, the processing of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed only when the scheduler update flag is off.
Then, in step S2031, the frame update flag is turned on.
Since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2006 immediately after the start of the frame, steps S2031 to S2034 are performed when the process first proceeds to step S2030 in the current frame period. Also, since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024, steps S2031 to S2034 are performed even when a command is received.

In step S2032, the CPU 241 performs processing for executing the scenario scheduler. This is update processing of scenario registration information. For example, for information registered in the scenario channel sCH with a waiting time (delay) of 0, processing corresponding to the registered data is executed. That is, the process corresponding to the scenario number specified in the main scenario table is performed. The main scenario execution line (mcIx), sub-scenario execution line (scIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx), etc. are also updated.
In step S2033, the CPU 241 performs sound scheduler execution and output processing. This is a process of updating sound data registration information according to sound sub-scenarios specified in the scenario table, and a process of outputting a sound control signal based on the sound data registration information. The CPU 241 causes the sound controller of the effect control section 24 to output sound according to the progress of the current scenario.

In step S2034, the CPU 241 executes lamp scheduler execution processing.
This is a process of updating the lamp data registration information according to the lamp sub-scenario specified in the scenario table.
For example, the CPU 241 performs the following processing for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. First, compare the main scenario timer (msTm) with the time data (time) of the lamp sub-scenario table. The time data (time) of the lamp sub-scenario table indicates the time at which the line (the line indicated by the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx)) is started. Therefore, if the time of the main scenario timer is equal to or longer than the time data (time), the line is processed.
For example, first, it is determined whether or not the current line is the line in which the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described. If the line does not describe the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND, the CPU 241 acquires the lamp channel dwCH and the lamp number described in that line, and registers the lighting pattern number in the acquired lamp channel dwCH.
Also, the registered lighting number (lmpNew) and the execution lighting number (lmpNo) are set in the area corresponding to the lamp channel dwCH. That is, the lamp number acquired from the corresponding line of the lamp sub-scenario table is set as the registered lighting number (lmpNew), and "0" is set as the execution lighting number (lmpNo). Also, the value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) is incremented by one. As described above, the lamp data registration information is updated to the state in which the lamp effect operation to be executed is registered.

In step S2034, the lamp data registration information is updated as described above, but lamp driving data creation and lamp driving data output based on the updated lamp data registration information are performed in steps S2041 and S2042.

In step S2040, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter is "0", the processes of steps S2041 to S2043 are executed, and if it is "1", these processes are not executed.
In step S2041, the CPU 241 creates lamp drive data. That is, based on the information registered in each lamp channel dwCH of the lamp data registration information, the lamp driving data to be output to the drivers that actually drive various LEDs is generated.
Then, in step S2042, control is performed so that the generated lamp drive data is output to the driver.
In step S2043, the CPU 241 performs key event processing. Then, the process returns to step S2002.
The process of creating and outputting lamp drive data in steps S2041 and S2042 is started only when the V blank interrupt counter=0. That is, these processes are started only during the first half of the frame.

After the V blank interrupt counter becomes 2, that is, when the end of the frame period is detected (S2020:=2), the CPU 241 performs processing corresponding to the end of the frame after step S2050.

First, the CPU 241 executes history display processing in step S2050. This history display process is a process for displaying the above-described setting history confirmation screen Gs on the liquid crystal display device 36 . Details will be described later.

After executing the display process in step S2050, the CPU 241 clears the V-blank interrupt counter in step S2051, turns off the frame update flag in step S2052, and returns to step S2002. Then, as described above, processing for the new frame period is performed.

Together with the processing of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 executes the processing of FIG. 44 as interrupt processing, for example, every 1 ms. That is, the processing in FIG. 44 is processing executed every 1 ms regardless of the frame timing of the display data.
In FIG. 44, the CPU 241 performs WDT pulse generation processing in step S2200. The WDT circuit counts every 1 ms with this WDT pulse.
In step S2201, the CPU 241 performs motor sensor update processing. This is the process of detecting the information of the position detection sensor 82a described above.

In step S2202, the CPU 241 performs device scheduler execution processing. Specifically, the motor data registration information is updated. In step S2203, output processing of motor drive data to the driver of the movable body accessory motor 80c is performed as device scheduler output processing.
That is, the CPU 241 performs motor operation control every 1 ms, which is a time interval about 1/30 of the frame period.

In subsequent step S2204, the CPU 241 performs key input processing. That is, it confirms a signal corresponding to the operation of various operation elements such as the effect button 13 or the like.
The CPU 241 ends the interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 in response to executing the process of step S2204.

The processing examples of the CPU 241 have been described so far. In the above processing examples, the CPU 241 performs various processing in accordance with the display data frame.
FIG. 45 shows various timings for each frame period of display data.
Each frame of display data is referred to as frames FR0, FR1, FR2, . . . For example, frame FR0 is displayed from time T0 to T1, and frame FR1 is displayed from time T1 to T2.
Since the value of the V blank interrupt counter is cleared at step S2051 in FIG. 41, it becomes "0" at the start of the frame and becomes "1" at the middle of the frame (time T0m, T1m, etc.) as shown in the figure. It is cleared immediately after reaching 2".

In the figure, "SL" represents the frame period, and "SLs" represents the start timing of the frame period (hereinafter referred to as "frame start timing SLs"). "CA" means the first half of the frame.

First, as a premise, drawing processing of display data (frame image data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed by the liquid crystal control section 40 based on a liquid crystal control command from the effect control section 24 (CPU 241). This drawing process is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period SL. For example, the drawing of the display data of the frame FR1 is executed during the time T0 to T1, which is the display period of the frame FR0.
Further, in the liquid crystal control unit 40, preloading of data used for drawing is performed. This preloading is performed in a period one frame before drawing processing as preparation for drawing. For example, preloading for drawing display data of frame FR2 is performed during time T0 to T1, which is the display period of frame FR0.
It should be noted that the drawing process and preload start timing are synchronized with the frame start timing SLs as shown.

On the effect control section 24 (CPU 241) side, the processing of steps S2021 to S2043 is repeatedly performed during the frame period indicated by SL.
However, the received command processing (S2022 to S2024) is executed only during the first half of the frame CA. This is because they are executed only when the V blank interrupt counter=0.
42 and 43, the processing load is relatively heavy, and the number of processes increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the command type, it may be necessary to perform a lottery or the like for presentation. In this embodiment, such processing is performed only in the first half of the frame.
For this reason, with respect to the command signal, for example, the command signal received during the period indicated by the dashed line from time T0m to T1m is analyzed during the period from time T1 to T1m.

The lamp data creation/output process (S2241 to S2243) is also executed only in the first half period CA of the frame. This is because these are also executed only when the V blank interrupt counter=0.

[5-2. Display setting history confirmation screen]

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a function of displaying a history of operations related to the setting value Ve (Vd) as a setting operation history. Specifically, as the setting operation history, the history related to the change of the setting value Ve and the history related to confirmation of the setting value Ve (setting confirmation process) are displayed.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as one display mode of the setting operation history.
The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 under the control of the effect control unit 24. Information representing the content and the time of occurrence (in this example, date and time: date and hour and minute) is included.
For setting change, the "content" of the target event includes name information of the type of target event (that is, "setting change") and the setting value Ve after change (corresponding to the setting value Vd that has been set by the setting change process). and numerical information of the set value Ve). The setting confirmation includes name information of the type of target event (that is, "setting confirmation") and numerical information of the setting value Ve at the time of setting confirmation (that is, the setting value Ve confirmed by the user).

The setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example consists of a plurality of pages, and specifically, five pages can be displayed. In this example, 10 items of history information can be displayed on one page, and therefore, a maximum of 50 items (10×5 items) of history information can be displayed.
In this example, the page switching operation on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the cross key 16 (see FIG. 3). For example, each time one of the direction keys of the cross key 16 is pressed, the page is turned by one page.

In the setting history confirmation screen Gs, each piece of history information is assigned a display number. In this example, "1" is assigned to the latest history, and numbers are assigned in ascending order from the latest to the past.
The current page number is also displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (in the figure, the maximum number of pages such as "1/5" is also displayed).

Although not shown in FIG. 46, events to be displayed in the history in this example include various errors in addition to the above-described setting change and setting confirmation. Errors here include various errors other than set value errors, such as door opening errors, supply shortage errors, ball clogging errors, and the like.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed in response to a predetermined operation being performed under a predetermined state. Specifically, the setting history confirmation screen Gs in this example is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 13 during setting confirmation (during execution of setting confirmation processing in step S109). Here, as can be understood from the above description, the setting confirmation process is executed in response to the opening of the front frame 2 and the operation of the setting key when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up. It is assumed that the confirmation screen Gs is displayed in such a state that the front frame 2 is open at the time of activation.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a setting confirmation screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 during setting confirmation. The setting confirmation screen starts to be displayed when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives a setting confirmation command (see S704) from the main control unit 20 side.
In the setting confirmation screen of this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed together with information for notifying the user such as the hall staff that the setting confirmation is in progress (in the figure, the characters "setting confirmation"). Guidance information for the operation required for this is displayed (in the figure, the characters "setting history list", the icon of the effect button 13, and the characters "determine by" correspond).

Here, in this example, as described above, an operation guidance for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the setting confirmation screen, that is, the notification screen during setting confirmation. When a predetermined operation (operation of the effect button 13 in this example) is performed, the setting history confirmation screen Gs shown in FIG. 46 is displayed.
In other words, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives an instruction to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs in a state in which the operation guidance is displayed on the notification screen during setting confirmation.
As a result, the user can grasp two pieces of information, ie, the timing at which the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed and the operation required to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs, only by the process of displaying the setting confirmation screen. can. That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load in presenting information that needs to be notified to the user when displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

Further, the setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example can be changed to all pages regardless of the number of saved history information. For example, even if the number of stored history information is "8" as shown in FIG. 46, all pages from the second page to the fifth page can be displayed according to the page switching operation. In other words, it is possible to display all pages, including blank pages that do not have history information.
This allows the user to intuitively grasp the maximum number of histories that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can hold and display.

FIG. 48 shows an example of history display information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
This history display information is information constructed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 accumulating history information corresponding to each occurrence of a target event for history display in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 .

In the work area of the RAM 243, an area for storing history display information (hereinafter referred to as "history storage area") is defined, and the CPU 241 executes the processing described later (see FIGS. 52 and 53). Then, each time the target event occurs, the corresponding history information is added to the history storage area.
Hereinafter, history information that is added one by one each time a target event occurs is referred to as "individual history information". In this example, since a maximum of 50 histories can be displayed, the history storage area in the RAM 243 is set as an area capable of storing 50 pieces of individual history information from history 0 to history 49. .

As individual history information, as shown in the figure, the "year", "month", "hour", and "minute" information required to display the date and time information of the history and the type of history (setting change, setting confirmation, or error) are displayed. It contains "type" information and "data" information. The "data" information stores the setting value Ve after the setting change and the setting value Ve after the setting confirmation when the "type" is setting change or setting confirmation. is "error", information indicating the error type is stored.

As the history display information, for example, a checksum area and a storage area for the latest history position information are provided in the top area, and the area following these areas is used as a storage area for the individual history information.
The checksum area is an area for storing a sum value calculated from information stored in the entire storage area for individual history information. The role of this sum value will be described later.
The latest history position information is information representing the storage position of the last added individual history information on the RAM 243 .

Here, since the RAM 243 has a relatively high information reading speed, it is desirable to use the history display information held in the work area as described above in order to quickly display the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
However, the RAM 243 is not connected to a backup power source, and cannot retain stored information when the power is cut off. The setting operation history displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is expected to be a history over a relatively long period of time, such as several weeks or a month. If it is used as a storage destination memory, the history information will be lost every time the power is cut off, and the history will not be able to be properly displayed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the memory 244 shown in FIG. The history display information stored in the work area of the RAM 243 is backed up.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining an example of backup operation of history display information as an embodiment.
In this example, the memory 244 is provided with a plurality of areas as areas for backing up the history display information. Specifically, two areas, a first history saving area and a second history saving area, are set in the drawing.
The CPU 241 copies the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 to each of these first and second history storage areas in the memory 244 .

As described above, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed during setting confirmation (that is, immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on again). After Since the history display information in the RAM 243 is cleared (becomes unretainable) when the power is turned off, the CPU 241 displays the history backed up in the first history storage area or the second history storage area of the memory 244 when the CPU 241 is started. information is written back to the history storage area of the RAM 243 . As a result, a state in which appropriate history display information is stored in the RAM 243 can be obtained before the setting history confirmation screen Gs is to be displayed.
Then, the CPU 241 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs based on the history display information stored in the RAM 243 .
As a result, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of properly and promptly displaying the setting operation history.

In this example, on the premise that the history display information in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244, a plurality of history storage areas such as the first and second history storage areas are provided, and a plurality of backups are taken. and
By making a plurality of backups of the history display information in this way, it is possible to improve the display resistance of the setting history confirmation screen Gs against corruption of data stored in the memory 244 . That is, even if data corruption occurs in a certain history storage area, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed using history display information in other history storage areas. It is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which proper history information display becomes impossible due to this.

Here, in this example, copying (backing up) of the history display information to the memory 244 is executed each time new history information (individual history information) is added to the history display information in the RAM 243 . That is, when new individual history information is added to the history display information of the RAM 243 in response to the occurrence of the target event, the history display information after the addition is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244. Copy each.

For example, it is conceivable that the history display information is copied to the memory 244 at regular time intervals. If this happens, the power will be cut off without the latest history being reflected in the history display information in the memory 244, and when the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed at the next startup, the latest history will not be displayed. obtain.
On the other hand, if a copy is made each time the history is added as described above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the stored contents of the history are inconsistent between the RAM 243 and the memory 244 due to an unexpected power failure. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of display problems of history information.

Note that copying to the memory 244 each time individual history information is added is merely an example, and copying can be performed at other timings, such as copying each time the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. be.

FIG. 50 shows an example of processing for adding individual history information to history display information.
In this example, the storage area of the individual history information in the RAM 243 is a ring buffer area capable of holding 50 pieces of individual history information.
Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 50A, in a state where 50 pieces of history t0 to history t49 are stored as individual history information, new individual history information as history t50 should be added. Suppose
In this state, the latest history position indicated by the latest history position information is the storage position of the individual history information as the history t49 as shown in the drawing.

When adding the individual history information as the history t50, first, as shown in FIG. 50B, the CPU 241 updates the latest history position to the next position, that is, the storage position of the history t0. Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, the individual history information of the history t50 to be added is stored in the individual history information storage position indicated by the latest history position (that is, the history t0 is overwritten).
As a result, when new individual history information is added while the maximum number of individual history information is retained, the oldest individual history information is overwritten with the latest individual history information. The individual history information storage area holds 50 items of individual history information from the latest to the past. In other words, the number of pieces of individual history information to be held does not exceed the upper limit of 50 pieces (required for display).

In this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed based on the history display information in which the individual history information is stored in the form of the ring buffer.
When the individual history information is stored in the form of a ring buffer, the latest history position is managed, and the newest order or the oldest order of each history information is automatically grasped by the storage position of each history information based on the latest history position. will be Therefore, when the history list is displayed in new order or old order as the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is not necessary to specify the new order or old order of each history information by referring to the time information included in each history information. . In other words, it is possible to reduce the processing load in displaying the history as a list in order of newest or oldest.

Here, in this example, the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is executed only on the condition that the setting is being checked. Do not display the screen Gs.
Since the setting value Ve may be changed during the setting change, displaying the history of the setting change while the setting is being changed may confuse the user, which is undesirable.
By not displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs during the setting change, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the history display of the setting value Ve.

Next, the processing for realizing the operation related to the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG.
FIG. 51 is a flow chart of the power-on history information initial setting process (S2001). This process is a process executed by the CPU 241 as part of the effect control main process described in FIG. The process of S2001 is executed. As described above, the processing in step S2001 is processing for retaining in the RAM 243 information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In FIG. 51, in step S2301, the CPU 241 performs processing for transferring history display information in the first history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work (RAM 243). Here, if an event subject to history display has occurred at a stage prior to this activation, the memory 244 is subjected to history information update processing in step S2160, which will be described later (FIG. 53: Especially in step S2406), history display information is stored in each of the first and second history storage areas. In the process of step S2301, among the history display information stored in the memory 244, the history display information in the first history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area.

In subsequent step S2302, the CPU 241 determines whether there is an abnormality in the sum value of the first history storage area (checksum processing). That is, for the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 from the first history storage area as described above (hereinafter referred to as "first history display information"), the storage value of the entire individual history information storage area and determines whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the first history display information.
The sum value in the checksum area is calculated from the stored value in the individual history information storage area by the process of step S2405 in the history information update process (FIG. 53) of step S2160 when backing up the history display information to the memory 244. Therefore, by judging match/mismatch of the sum values in the checksum processing in step S2302, it is possible to judge whether the stored values in the entire storage area of the individual history information match/mismatch with those at the time of backup. is. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the backed up history information (for example, whether there has been unauthorized rewriting or the like).

If it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values match, that is, that the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initialization processing in step S2001. That is, if the history information backed up in the first history storage area of the memory 244 is normal, the state in which the history information in the first history storage area is held in the RAM 243 continues. That is, the history display process (FIG. 54) of step 2050, which will be described later, is executed based on the history information in the first history storage area held in the RAM 243 in this way.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values do not match, that is, that the sum value is abnormal, the CPU 241 performs processing to transfer the history display information in the second history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work in step S2303. . That is, the history display information in the second history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area (that is, the history display information in the first history storage area stored in step S2301 is overwritten).

Next, in step S2304, the CPU 241 determines whether there is an abnormality in the sum value for the second history storage area. In other words, for the history display information in the second history storage area stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 as described above (hereinafter referred to as “second history display information”), the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information and determines whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the second history display information. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the history information backed up in the second history storage area.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values match, that is, that the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initial setting processing in step S2001. That is, if the history information in the second history storage area stored in the RAM 243 is normal, the state in which the history information in the second history storage area is held in the RAM 243 continues. history display processing (FIG. 54) is executed based on the history information.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values do not match, that is, that the sum values are abnormal, the CPU 241 advances to step S2305 to clear the history display information, and finishes the initialization processing in step S2001. In the clearing process of step S2305, along with the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243, the history display information stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244 are also cleared.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing processing for updating history information in response to the occurrence of an event subject to history display.
The target events in this example are setting change, setting confirmation, and error occurrence, and the CPU 241 updates history information according to the occurrence of these events based on the effect control command from the main control unit 20 side. is set to run. Specifically, regarding setting change and setting confirmation, the history information is updated according to reception of a setting change end command, a setting value command, and a setting confirmation command from the main control unit 20 (see FIG. 52A). For errors, the history information is updated (see FIG. 52B) according to the reception of various error commands from the main control unit 20 side.
In this example, each process of FIGS. 52A and 52B is executed as one of the command processes (see FIG. 43) of step S2130 described above.

FIG. 52A shows setting-related command processing S2130e corresponding to setting-related commands, which are commands related to setting change and setting confirmation.
First, the CPU 241 confirms whether any one of the setting confirmation in-progress command, the setting confirmation end command, the setting change command, the setting change in-progress command, and the setting change end command is received by the processing of steps S2150 to S2154.
Specifically, in step S2150, it is determined whether or not a setting-confirming command has been received, and if the setting-confirming command has not been received, in step S2151, it is determined whether or not a setting-confirmation end command has been received. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2152 whether or not the setting change command has been received. determine whether If the setting change in progress command has not been received, it is determined in step S2154 whether or not the setting change end command has been received.

Here, regarding step S2150, the setting confirmation command includes the notification information of the setting value Ve as described with reference to FIG. It is determined whether or not a command including any of notification information of 1 to 6 has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a command for notifying the set value Ve within the usable range Re, not within the usable range Ru, has been received as the setting confirmation command.
Also, in this example, the setting change time command in step S2152 similarly includes a command for notifying any of the set values Ve (“1” to “6”) within the usable range Re but not within the usable range Ru. Determine whether or not it has been received.
The significance of permitting a command notifying a value not within the usable range Ru but within the usable range Re as to the command notifying the set value Ve in this way will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2150 that the setting confirmation end command (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, the CPU 241 executes setting confirmation scenario registration processing in step S2155, and proceeds to step S2159.
Also, if it is determined in step S2151 that the setting confirmation end command has been received, the CPU 241 executes setting confirmation end scenario registration processing in step S2156, proceeds to step S2159, and in step S2152 changes the setting change time command (setting value "1"). to "6") is received, the process proceeds directly to step S2159.
Further, when it is determined in step S2153 that a setting change in progress command has been received, the CPU 241 executes setting change start scenario registration processing in step S2157, proceeds to step S2159, and determines in step S2154 that a setting change end command has been received. If so, setting change end scenario registration processing is executed in step S2158, and the flow advances to step S2159.
By executing the scenario registration processing in steps S2155, S2156, S2157, and S2158, effect operations corresponding to setting confirmation, setting confirmation end, setting change start, and setting change end are executed.

In step S2159, the CPU 241 determines whether or not a specification designation/setting information command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not either the specification designation command or the set value command has been received. Although not illustrated, the specification designation command is information representing the specifications of the gaming machine 1 transmitted by the CPU 201 of the main control unit 20 at startup (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot or the number of stages of the set value Ve to be used). information to be displayed, etc.). The set value command is a command sent by the CPU 201 in step S808 (FIG. 17) in the main loop pre-processing.
Both the specification designation command and the setting value command have the upper byte of a specific value representing the specification information of the gaming machine 1. In step S2159, it is determined whether or not a command having the upper byte of the specific value has been received. determines whether either the spec specification command or the set value command has been received.

If neither the specification designation command nor the setting value command has been received and it is determined in step S2159 that the specification designation/setting information command has not been received, the CPU 241 ends the setting-related command processing of step S2130e. That is, in this case, the process of storing the set values in the RAM 243 in step S2163, which will be described later, is not executed.

On the other hand, when determining that the specification designation/setting information command has been received, the CPU 241 stores the specification information in the RAM 243 . That is, the upper byte value of the received specification designation command or setting value command is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243 .

In step S2161 following step S2160, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the setting is undefined. That is, it is determined whether or not the received spec designation/setting information command is a spec designation command instead of a setting value command. Here, in this example, the lower byte of the spec specification command is "0FH", and the lower byte of the setting value command is a value corresponding to the setting value Ve. Therefore, in step S2161, it is determined whether the spec designation/setting information command is a spec designation command rather than a setting value command, depending on whether the lower byte of the received spec designation/setting information command is "0FH". (Whether or not the setting is undefined) is determined.

When determining that the lower byte is not "0FH" and that the setting is not undefined (that is, the setting value command), the CPU 241 advances to step S2162 to determine whether the setting information is within the usable range Re. That is, it determines whether the value indicated by the identification data (see FIG. 16) of the setting value Ve included in the received setting value command is within the range of "00" to "05" corresponding to the usable range Re. judge.
When determining that the value indicated by the identification data is within the usable range Re and the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value information in the RAM 243 in step S2163. That is, the identification data is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of RAM 243 .
After executing the storage process in step S2163, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2162 that the setting information is not within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 skips the storage processing in step S2163 and advances the processing to step S2164.
If it is determined in step S2161 that the setting is undefined (that is, the command is a specification designation command), the CPU 241 skips the determination processing in step S2162 and the storage processing in S2163 and advances the processing to step S2164.

Note that the determination processing in step S2162 functions as an abnormality determination processing for the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side. However, the significance of determining whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re rather than the actual usable range Ru as abnormality determination of the set value Ve on the side of the effect control unit 24 will be described later.

In step S2164, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is time to change or confirm settings. This determination is made, for example, if the command determined to have been received in the current setting value related command processing (S2130e) is the first "setting value command" after receiving the "setting change end command" or the "setting checking command". It can be performed as a determination of whether or not it was.

If it is time to change or confirm settings, the CPU 241 advances to step S2165 to set the history type. That is, the above-described "type" value and "data" value are set for the individual history information to be newly added. Specifically, at the time of setting change, the value representing "setting change" is set as the value of "type", and the value representing the current set value Ve (the set value Ve that has been set) is set as the value of "data". set. Also, if it is the time of setting confirmation, the value indicating "setting confirmation" as the value of "type" is set as the value of "data", and the confirmed setting value Ve (the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command) is set. set respectively.

In response to executing the set process in step S2165, the CPU 241 executes history information update process in step S2166.
Note that the history information update process in step S2166 will be described again.

In step S2167 following step S2166, the CPU 241 executes processing for transmitting the set value information to the liquid crystal side. That is, a process of transmitting information representing the set value Ve notified by the set value command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is performed. As a result, the setting value Ve notified by the setting value command, such as the setting value Ve set in the setting change process, can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .
After executing the transmission process of step S2167, the CPU 241 ends the process of step S2130e.

FIG. 52B shows processing S2130f corresponding to an error command.
First, the CPU 241 executes error notification in step S2170. That is, the notification processing (notification processing using a predetermined effect means) is executed according to the error type specified from the received error command.

Next, as history type setting processing in step S2171, the CPU 241 sets the value of "type" to a value representing "error" and the value of "data" to an error number (a value representing an error type) for the individual history information to be newly added. ) respectively, the history information update process of step S2166 is executed, and then the process of step S2130f ends.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of history information update processing in step S2166. The updating process is a process of updating the history display information in the RAM 243 so that the individual history information is added according to the target event that has newly occurred.
First, in step S2401, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the latest history position information is within a specified range (that is, whether or not it is within a range of 0 to 49 in this example). If the latest history location information is not within the specified range (that is, if it is 50 or more), the CPU 241 ends the updating process in step S2160. That is, in this case, since there is an abnormality in the latest history position information, the history display information is not updated.

If the latest history position information is a value within the specified range, the CPU 241 advances to step S2402 to update the latest history position information to the value of the next position. The update of the value of the latest history position information here is performed within the range of 0 to 49, and as understood from the description of FIG. is set to "0" (that is, the value is cyclically incremented within the range of 0 to 49).

Next, in step S2403, the CPU 241 acquires the time information (year, month, day, hour, minute) of the RTC function unit, and in step S2404, performs processing for saving the history information in the area indicated by the latest history position information. That is, the individual history information including the acquired time information and the "type" and "data" information set in the corresponding processing of steps S2165 and S2171 described in FIG. stored in the storage area of

As the individual history information, it is also possible to store (display) the power-on time from the power-on instead of the time information by the RTC. As a result, in a gaming machine that does not have an RTC function unit, it is possible to display information that can specify the occurrence time of the target event as history information.

In step S2405 following step S2404, the CPU 241 calculates the sum value of the history information of the internal work and saves it in the checksum area. That is, for the history display information in the RAM 243, the sum value is calculated from the stored values of the entire individual history information storage area including the individual history information newly added in step S2404, and the sum value is used as the history display information. stored in the checksum area in

Further, in subsequent step S2406, the CPU 241 performs processing to transfer the internal work history display information to the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, and finishes the update processing in step S2160.
As a result, new individual history information is added, and history display information including a sum value reflecting the addition of the individual history information is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, respectively.

Here, as can be understood from the above description, in this example, when the history information stored in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244, a sum value is calculated from the history information stored in the RAM 243, and the sum value is calculated. The history information stored in the RAM 243 is stored in the memory 244 .
As a method of calculating a sum value for determining abnormality of backup information and storing it in the memory 244, first, only the history information stored in the RAM 243 is copied to the memory 244, and then stored in the memory 244 by the copy. It is also conceivable to calculate a sum value from the history information obtained and store the sum value in the memory 244 . However, in that case, if a portion of the history information from the RAM 243 to the memory 244 fails to be copied, the sum value itself becomes a correct value. In reality, inaccurate history information is backed up, and there is a risk of inducing display problems in the history information.
With the above method of copying the history information and the sum value, if the copying of the history information to the memory 244 fails, the checksum process will determine that the history information is abnormal. Since it is possible to prevent the history information stored in 244 from being used for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent incorrect history information from being displayed.

Next, processing for displaying history information based on the history display information held in the RAM 243 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart of history display processing (S2050). As can be understood from the previous description of FIG. 41, this history display process is executed once per frame period in this example.

In FIG. 54, in step S2501, the CPU 241 determines whether setting confirmation is in progress. Whether or not the setting confirmation is in progress can be determined by whether or not the above-described setting confirmation command is received.
If the setting confirmation is not being performed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process of step S2050. As described above, in this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed only during setting confirmation.

On the other hand, if the setting is being checked, the CPU 241 checks the history display flag in step S2502. This history display flag is an identifier (initial value is OFF) that is set to ON in step S2504, which will be described later. ON indicates that the history is being displayed, and OFF indicates that the history is not being displayed.
At the stage where the display start condition of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is not met, the history display flag is off, so the CPU 241 advances the process from step S2502 to step S2503.

In step S2503, the CPU 241 determines whether or not a display instruction operation has been performed. As described above, in this example, the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the effect button 13, and the CPU 241 determines whether the effect button 13 is operated or not in step S2503.

As can be understood from the description of steps S2501 to S2503 so far, the CPU 241 accepts a display instruction operation for the setting history confirmation screen Gs on condition that setting confirmation is in progress.

In step S2503, if there is no display instruction operation, the CPU 241 ends the history display processing in step S2050.
On the other hand, if there is a display instruction operation, the CPU 241 sets (turns on) the history display flag in step S2504, and sets the display page identifier P to "0" in the following step S2505. The display page identifier P is a value for identifying the display page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In response to executing the processing of step S2505, the CPU 241 executes history information screen creation processing in step S2508. Then, the history display process in step S2050 ends.
The history information screen creation process in step S2508 is a process for transmitting information necessary for screen display of the page indicated by the display page identifier P to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. That is, when step S2508 is executed following step S2505, information necessary for screen display of the first page (P=0) is transmitted.
Details of the history information screen creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the history display flag is ON (that is, the state after the first page has already been displayed), the CPU 241 advances to step S2506 to determine whether or not there is a page switching operation. judge. That is, in this example, it is determined whether or not any direction instruction key of the cross key 16 has been operated.
If there is a page switching operation, the CPU 241 advances to the history information screen creation process in step S2508.

Here, the history information screen creation processing in step S2508 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In FIG. 55, first, in step S2601, the CPU 241 calculates the head position Idx of history display. That is, the position (position on the RAM 243) of the storage area of the individual history information to be displayed at the head position of the page to be displayed from now on is calculated as the head position Idx. Specifically, the leading position Idx is calculated by “latest history position−P×α” (where α is the number of individual history information displayed per page: “10” in this example). For example, when displaying the first page (P=0), the head position Idx is obtained as "latest history position" from "latest history position-0×α". Alternatively, when displaying the third page (P=2), the head position Idx is obtained as "latest history position-2α".

In step S2602 following step S2601, the CPU 241 sends a page number as a command. That is, the information of the page number specified by the page identifier P (that is, the page number of the page to be displayed) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control section 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the display number to "1" in step S2603, and performs processing in steps S2604 to S2610 to display information necessary for screen display of the page to be displayed (specifically, individual history information and its display number). is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40 .
First, in step S2604 following step S2603, the CPU 241 refers to the history information of the area indicated by the start position Idx. That is, the stored information in the area indicated by the leading position Idx in the history storage area (information for history display) of the RAM 243 is referred to.

Next, in step S2605, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is history information, that is, whether or not individual history information is stored in the area indicated by the leading position Idx.
If it is determined that individual history information is stored and there is history information, the CPU 241 executes command transmission processing for the display number in step S2606, and then executes command transmission processing for history information in step S2607. That is, the individual history information acquired from the area indicated by the display number and the head position Idx is sent to the liquid crystal control section 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

In step S2608 following step S2607, the CPU 241 updates the head position Idx to a value corresponding to the storage area of the previous individual history information (Idx←Idx−1). This update process is executed so that the value of the start position Idx is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to 49 (that is, when the start position Idx is "0", it is updated to "49").

Further, in subsequent step S2609, the CPU 241 increments the display number by 1, and in step S2610 determines whether or not transmission processing for one page (transmission of individual history information and display number) has ended. This determination can be realized, for example, by determining whether or not the display number value is equal to or greater than α.

If the transmission process for one page has not ended, the CPU 241 executes the processes of steps S2604 to S2610 again. As a result, when one page of individual history information is stored, the process of transmitting the individual history information and its display number is repeated until the transmission process of one page is completed. If the stored individual history information is less than one page, transmission of the individual history information and its display number are performed only for the stored individual history information (see S2605).

Even if the individual history information is not stored in the area indicated by the head position Idx (that is, even if the stored value is "0"), the individual history information with "0" is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side as it is. It can also be sent by command. In this case, on the side of the liquid crystal control unit 40, for individual history information for which such a liquid crystal control command with "0" is received, a display indicating no history (for example, "- ---" display) is performed.
According to this method, the determination processing in step S2605 can be omitted.

Further, when transmitting the individual history information to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S2607, after determining whether or not the individual history information to be transmitted is history information on setting changes (setting change history information), In the case of the setting change history information, it is also possible to check the abnormality of the set value Ve included in the history information. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re (whether or not it is outside the range of "0" to "5").
If the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is instructed to display an abnormality. Send. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that the setting value Ve in the corresponding individual history information is found to be abnormal (for example, displaying an "E" mark indicating an error). That is, it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.
Alternatively, if an abnormality is found in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the information on the set value Ve included in the individual history information may not be transmitted. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, the setting value Ve of the individual history information in which the setting value Ve is found to be abnormal can be prevented from being displayed, and the fact that the setting change history is not normal can be notified.

When the CPU 241 determines in step S2610 that the transmission process for one page has ended, it ends the history information screen creation process in step S2508.
It should be noted that when the transmission process for one page is completed, a liquid crystal control command to that effect can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control section 40 side.

Here, in response to receiving the various liquid crystal control commands transmitted by the above processing, the liquid crystal control unit 40 displays one page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the mode as illustrated in FIG. The image display operation by the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled so that screen display is performed.

The description returns to FIG.
If the CPU 241 determines in step S2506 that the page switching operation has not been performed, it determines in step S2509 whether or not there is an end instruction operation, that is, whether or not there is an instruction to end the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs. In this example, the end instruction operation is the operation of the effect button 13, and therefore the CPU 241 determines whether or not the effect button 13 is operated in step S2509.

When determining that the effect button 13 has not been operated and the end instruction operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 finishes the history display process of step S2050. As described above, the history display process in step S2050 is performed once per frame period, and the processes after step S2501 are performed again in the next frame period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2509 that the end instruction operation has been performed, the CPU 241 clears (turns off) the history display flag in step S2510, sets the demo screen display command in step S2511, and then displays the history in step S2050. Finish the display process.
Note that the process of step S2511 is the process of setting the liquid crystal control command for instructing the liquid crystal control unit 40 to display the demo screen for waiting for customers as described above in the command buffer.

Here, according to the above process, when there is no individual history information for a certain page, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is only notified of the page number (S2602), and the individual history information and its display number are notified. is not sent.
When the page number is transmitted but the individual history information and the display number are not transmitted, the liquid crystal control unit 40 displays the page number information of the page and each display number as the screen of the corresponding page. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays a screen indicating that there is no individual history information (for example, the notation of "----" in FIG. 38).
As a result, it is possible to display all pages including so-called empty pages that do not have history information. That is, regardless of the number of saved history information, it is possible to transition to all pages.

Note that it is possible not to display pages that do not have individual history information at all. In this case, the CPU 241 determines in step S2605 (FIG. 55) that there is no history information when the display number is 1, so that the liquid crystal control unit 40 does not display the current display page P. All you have to do is give instructions.

As can be understood from the processing of FIGS. 54 and 55, in this example, when the individual history information to be displayed is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, it is assumed that the individual history information is individually transmitted one by one. there is
Thereby, individual history information can be transmitted by a command.
Therefore, program design on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side can be facilitated.

In the above example, the history information of the corresponding page is sent each time the page is switched. A page switching command may be transmitted to the side to instruct switching of the display page.

[5-3. Regarding the data type of the setting value in the embodiment]

Here, in the RAM 243 of the effect control unit 24, an area for storing the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command or the setting value command from the main control unit 20 (hereinafter referred to as "notified setting value storage area A1") ) and a storage area (hereinafter referred to as “history set value storage area A2”) for setting values Ve constituting part of the individual history information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs. .
And in this embodiment, in the operation program of the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24, the program variable of the setting value Ve stored in the notification setting value storage area A1 (hereinafter referred to as "notification setting value Pv1") and the history setting value The type (data type) of the program variable (hereinafter referred to as "history set value Pv2") of the set value Ve stored in the storage area A2 is the same. Specifically, in this example, by setting the type of the notification set value Pv1 and the history set value Pv2 to be the same “unsigned 8-bit”, the number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the history set value storage area A2 can be set to It matches the number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the value storage area A1.
Thus, it is possible to prevent omission of information when storing the set value Ve stored in the notification set value storage area A1 in the history set value storage area A2 (see S2163 to S2166 in FIG. 52A). That is, since the number of bits of the history setting value Pv2 is smaller than the number of bits of the notification setting value Pv1, the setting value Ve acquired from the notification setting value storage area A1 cannot be properly stored in the history setting value storage area A2. It is possible to prevent this, and it is possible to ensure that accurate information is displayed as the setting history information.

FIG. 56 exemplifies numerical values of the set value Ve that can be represented by "unsigned 8 bits" as described above.
By using 8 bits, six values from "1" to "6" can be represented as the set value Ve as shown in the figure, and values larger than "6", in other words, abnormal values outside the usable range Re can be expressed. possible to express.
In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store an abnormal value other than the value of the usable range Re as the set value Ve, so that when an abnormality occurs, the cause can be easily identified. ing.

[5-4. Set value suggestion effect]

The effect control unit 24 is configured to be able to execute control for causing a set value suggesting effect to suggest the current set value Ve to the player.
The effect control unit 24 of this example provides such set value suggestive effect as the following: a suggestive effect by the left symbol, a suggestive effect by the mini character notice, a suggestive effect at the end of the big hit, and a suggestive effect by the SU (step-up) notice. Performs control for manifesting effects.

(Suggestive production by left pattern)

First, the suggestion effect by the left pattern will be explained. The left pattern referred to here means the “left” decorative pattern among the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the left symbol lottery process for lottery for the content of the left symbol.
First, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not it is the special mode 1 in step S2701. That is, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a predetermined mode as "special mode 1".
If it is not the special mode 1, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is the special mode 2 in step S2702. It is determined whether or not the prefetch effect controlled in the mode is won.

In step S2703, if the consecutive reach prefetch is not won, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in the predetermined area (notification setting value storage area A1 described above) of the RAM 243 as the setting value information acquisition process of step S2705. Then, in step S2706, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the set value information, and in subsequent step S2707, the content of the left symbol is determined based on the lottery value.

Here, FIG. 58 shows an example of the left symbol lottery table used in step S2707, and FIG. 59 shows an example of the left symbol lottery offset table used in step S2706. These tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the left symbol lottery table, the winning probability for each symbol content to be selected (in this example, 10 types of symbol content from symbol 0 to symbol 9) is "1" to "6". is determined for each set value Ve of . In the drawings, the value representing the probability of winning is represented by the distribution value on the premise that the random number for the lottery can take 10000 different values from 0 to 9999, but the values shown in FIGS. As in the case, the threshold value for the lottery random number is actually stored. This point also applies to each table shown in FIGS. 63, 65, 68, 72 and 74 which will be described later.

In the left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 59, a corresponding offset value is stored for each set value Ve of "1" to "6". Specifically, "0" for set value Ve "1", "1" for set value Ve "2", "2" for set value Ve "3", and set value Ve " "3" is stored for the set value Ve "4", "4" is stored for the set value Ve "5", and "5" is stored for the set value Ve "6".

At step S2706 in FIG. 57, an offset value corresponding to the current set value Ve obtained at step S2705 is obtained according to the offset table for the left symbol lottery shown in FIG. Then, in step S2707, among the lottery tables for each set value Ve in the left symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 58, the lottery table at the position (address) specified by the offset value acquired in step S2706 is selected. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the set value "1" located at the top of the left symbol lottery table (that is, stored in the address with the smallest number) is set to the offset value "1". If the offset value is "2", the set value "2" located second from the top in the left symbol lottery table is selected, and if the offset value is "2", the set value " The lottery table stored in the position specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table No. 3.

Through the series of processes described above, if the current state does not correspond to either the first special mode or the second special mode, and if the continuous reach look-ahead is not elected, the winning probability based on the set value Ve is used for the left symbol. Content will be selected. In other words, the appearance rate of the left symbols 0 to 9 differs depending on the set value Ve, and thus the set value suggesting the type of the set value Ve to the player according to the appearance rate of the specific symbol content of the left symbol. Suggestion production is realized.

As shown in FIG. 57, if the CPU 241 determines in step S2701 that the mode is the first special mode, the CPU 241 skips steps S2702 to S2708 and ends the series of processes. In other words, under the first special mode, the lottery for the design content of the left design is not performed.
In addition, when it is determined that it is the second special mode in step S2702, and when it is determined in step S2703 that the continuous reach prefetch is won, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2704, without referring to the setting value Ve. An offset value is obtained from the offset table, and the process advances to table selection processing in step S2707. That is, in this case, the offset value of "0" in the left symbol lottery offset table is acquired (S2704), and the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected from the left symbol lottery table (S2707). . Therefore, under the second special mode, under the continuous reach look-ahead winning state, the lottery for the left symbol content is performed with a fixed winning probability that does not depend on the set value Ve. In other words, the setting value suggesting effect using the left symbol is not performed.

In addition, as described above, in this example, the setting value suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed under the state of continuous reach prefetch winning. It is possible to prevent the design content of the left design selected in step from becoming inconsistent with the design content.

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process.
First, in this another example, a table shown in FIG. 61 is prepared as a left symbol lottery offset table stored in the ROM 242 . 59 is stored as a first left symbol lottery offset table (FIG. 61A), and a second left symbol lottery offset table different from the first left symbol lottery offset table is stored. A table is stored (FIG. 61B).
In the second left symbol lottery offset table, the same offset value ("2" in this example) is stored for the set values Ve of "1" to "6".

In the left symbol lottery process shown in FIG. 60, the processes of steps S2710 and S2711 are executed in place of the process of step S2704 shown in FIG. The difference is that
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the setting value information in step S2710, and acquires the offset value from the second offset table based on the setting value information in the subsequent step S2711. , the process advances to lottery table selection processing in step S2707.
Since the offset value acquired in step S2711 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve in the selection process of step S2707 in this case.
In this another example, the first left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 61A is used as the offset table in step S2706.

In this way, in the second special mode, a fixed offset value is acquired without referring to the set value Ve as a method for performing the left pattern lottery that does not depend on the set value Ve corresponding to the continuous reach look-ahead winning. The method is not limited to this method, and a method of referring to an offset table storing the same offset value for each set value Ve as shown in FIG. 61B and selecting the same lottery table regardless of the set value Ve can be adopted. can also

(Suggestion production by mini character notice)

FIG. 62 is a flow chart of the mini-character advance notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241 .
First, as a premise, in the gaming machine 1 of the present example, two types of mini-character advance notice effects, a first mini-character advance notice effect and a second mini-character notice effect, can be displayed. It should be noted that, regarding the first mini-character announcement effect and the second mini-character announcement effect, the lottery process itself for determining whether or not to make the announcement effect appear has already been executed as a separate process from the process shown in FIG.
In this example, the first mini-character foretelling effect is not an effect suggesting the set value Ve, but an effect for suggesting the set value Ve can be produced as the second mini-character forewarning effect.

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 determines in step S2801 whether or not the mini-character announcement effect has been won. If the mini-character advance notice effect is not won, the CPU 241 ends the mini-character advance notice lottery process in FIG. 62 without executing the series of processes described below.

If the mini-character notice effect has been won, the CPU 241 determines in step S2802 whether or not the content of the win is the first mini-character notice.
If the CPU 241 determines that the first mini-character announcement effect has been won and the winning content is the first mini-character announcement, the CPU 241 performs the variation pattern information acquisition process in step S2803. After performing the process of acquiring the variation pattern information, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the winning variation pattern in step S2804, and the process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed in subsequent step S2805. .

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first mini-character advance notice lottery table used in step S2805, and FIG. 64 shows an example of the first advance notice offset table used in step S2804. These tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
In the first advance notice offset table shown in FIG. ”), an offset value is defined for each. In this example, the short fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s", and the reach fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "normal reach", super reach fluctuation The pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4". has an offset value of 2, respectively.

In the first mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 63, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared that determine the distribution of the winning probability for each content of the first mini-character advance notice. In this example, there are 5 types of content for the first mini character notice: "none", "pending change explanation", "strong notice explanation", "variable mode explanation", and "character introduction". Three types of tables, Table 1 to Table 3, are prepared, which determine the allocation of the winning probability to the content.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2804, the offset value is acquired from the first notice offset table shown in FIG. 64 based on the information of the winning variation pattern specified from the acquired variation pattern information, In the selection process, a lottery table is selected from the first mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 63 based on the offset value. Specifically, in this example, when the winning variation pattern is a short variation pattern and 0 is obtained as the offset value, Table 1 is selected. Also, if the winning variation pattern is a reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as an offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as an offset value, table 3 is selected.

In step S2806 following step S2805, the CPU 241 determines the content of the first mini character announcement based on the selection value, and ends the mini character announcement lottery process shown in FIG. That is, the content of the first mini-character announcement is determined according to the distribution value in the table selected from tables 1-3.
In this way, the first mini-character advance notice effect is not effected according to the set value Ve, but is effected according to the variation pattern.

Also, if the CPU 241 determines in the preceding step S2802 that the winning content is not the first mini character announcement, it acquires setting change information in step S2807, and determines whether or not the setting has been changed in the following step S2808. That is, the latest individual history information among the individual history information stored for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs described above is acquired, and whether or not the "type" information in the individual history information is "setting change" is determined. determine whether

If a negative result is obtained in step S2808 that the "type" information is not "setting change" and the setting has not been changed, the CPU 241 advances to step S2809 to execute setting value information acquisition processing. In step S2810, an offset value is obtained from the offset table based on the set value information, in subsequent step S2811 processing is performed to select a lottery table based on the offset value, and in step S2820 a second mini character announcement is made based on the lottery value. Determine content.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the second mini character notice lottery table used in step S2811, and FIG. 66 shows an example of the second notice offset table used in step S2810 (these tables are also stored in the ROM 242). (stored in a predetermined area of ).
In the second advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, an offset value is defined for each set value Ve. In the second notice offset table of this example, the offset values are set not only for the set values Ve "1" to "6", but also for the values "for raising" and "for lowering". Yes, but more on that later.

In the second mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 65, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared that determine the distribution of the winning probability for each content of the second mini-character advance notice. In this example, the content of the second mini character notice is "none", "explanation of game nature", "explanation of setting suggestion 1", "explanation of setting suggestion 2", "explanation of setting suggestion 3", "explanation of setting suggestion 4", and "explanation of setting suggestion 5". As a lottery table, a table that determines the distribution of the winning probability for these contents is set for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" and "for raising" and "for lowering" A total of 8 types are available.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2810, the offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S2809 is acquired from the second notice offset table shown in FIG. , a lottery table is selected from the second mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG.
Then, in the determination processing in step S2820 following step S2811, processing for determining the content of the second mini-character announcement according to the selected lottery table is performed.

If the CPU 241 obtains an affirmative result that the above-mentioned "type" information is "setting change" in step S2808 and that the setting has been changed, the CPU 241 advances to step S2812 to obtain the previous and current set value information. is obtained, and in the following step S2813, it is determined whether or not the set value is higher than the previous time.
That is, the setting value Ve information included in the individual history information stored at the time of the previous setting change among the individual history information whose “type” information is “setting change” and the “notification setting value storage area A1” of the RAM 243 and the information of the set value Ve stored in , and it is determined whether or not the latter set value Ve is larger than the former set value Ve.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2813 that the latest set value Ve is not greater than the previous set value Ve and the set value is not higher than the previous set value, the CPU 241 advances to step S2814 to perform the first set value Ve. A selection value is obtained, and in subsequent step S2815 an offset value is obtained from the offset table based on the first selection value. That is, the offset value is obtained from the second advance notice offset table in FIG. Here, the first selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to "for lowering" shown in FIG. An offset value corresponding to "for lowering" is obtained from the offset table.
Then, in step S2816 following step S2815, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, selects a table corresponding to "lowering" from the second mini-character advance notice lottery table in FIG. , the process advances to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini-character announcement effect when the setting value Ve is changed to lower the set value Ve is determined based on the "lower" lottery table.

On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S2813 that the set value is higher than the previous time, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2817 to acquire the second selection value, and in subsequent step S2818, based on the second selection value Get the offset value from the offset table. The second selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to "for raising" shown in FIG. An offset value corresponding to "for raising" is acquired.
Then, in step S2819 following step S2818, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, selects a table corresponding to "for promotion" from the second mini-character advance notice lottery table in FIG. , the process advances to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the contents of the second mini-character announcement effect when the setting is changed to raise the set value Ve are determined based on the "for raising" lottery table.

According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, in this example, the winning probabilities of the notice contents "none", "explanation of game characteristics", "explanation of setting suggestion 1", "explanation of setting suggestion 2", and "explanation of setting suggestion 3" are "for raising" and " However, the probability of winning is different between "for raising" and "for lowering" for "setting suggestion explanation 4" and "setting suggestion explanation 5". Regarding "setting suggestion explanation 4", the winning probabilities of setting values Ve "1" to "6" and "for lowering" are all set to "0", while the winning probabilities of "for raising" are other than "0", Specifically, in this example, it is set to "1000/10000", and therefore, "setting suggestion explanation 4" is an advance notice content that can appear only in the case of "for raising". In addition, with respect to the "set suggestion explanation 5", the set value Ve "1" to "6" and the winning probability of "for raising" are all set to "0", while the winning probability of "for lowering" is "0". ("1000/10000" in this example), and accordingly, "setting suggestion explanation 5" is an advance notice content that can appear only in the case of "for lowering".

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 finishes the mini-character advance notice lottery process in response to executing the determination process in step S2820.

Here, in determining whether or not the set value is higher than the previous one in step S2813, the set value Ve stored in the "history set value storage area A2" in the RAM 243 and the "notification set value storage area At this time, an area ( A "previous set value storage area A3") may be provided.
In this case, the memory 244 stores the previous setting value Ve separately from the setting history information. The value written in the memory 244 can be read out to the "previous set value storage area A3" when the power is turned on.
As for the lottery for the effect, the increase/decrease is determined by comparing the values of the "previous set value storage area A3" and the "notified set value storage area A1".

In step S2813, if the previous and current set values Ve are the same, the second mini-character notice lottery table is referenced with the current set value Ve stored in the "notification set value storage area A1" as an offset. can be considered.

(Suggestion production by jackpot end production)

FIG. 67 is a flow chart of the jackpot effect lottery process executed by the CPU 241 .
The lottery process shown in FIG. 67 is a process of lottery based on the set value Ve for the content of the jackpot end INT (interval) effect that appears in response to the execution of the specified number of rounds of the round game. Specifically, a background image is selected by lottery in the INT effect at the end of the big hit.
Here, for the sake of explanation, it is assumed that the types of hits are three types of "3R probability variation", "9R probability variation", and "3R time saving".

First, in step S2901, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the winning type is "3R probability variation". The type of winning is notified by, for example, a decorative design designation command transmitted from the main control unit 20. FIG.
If the hit type is not "3R probability change", the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2902 to determine whether the hit type is "9R probability change". The big hit performance lottery processing is finished. That is, when the hit type is "3R short working hours", setting suggestion by the jackpot end INT effect is not performed.

When the hit type is "3R probability variation" in step S2901, and when the hit type is "9R probability variation" in step S2902, respectively, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2903 and determines whether the probability variation is in progress determine whether or not This corresponds to judging whether or not the hit of this time is the hit of Renso (whether or not it is the first hit).

If it is determined that the probability is not changing, that is, it is the first hit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2904 to execute set value information acquisition processing, and acquires the offset value from the first offset table based on the set value information in step S2905. Then, in the following step S2906, processing for selecting a lottery table based on the offset value is performed. Further, the CPU 241 advances to step S2910 to determine the suggested element during the big hit end INT based on the lottery value.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a lottery table for lottery of jackpot end INT suggestion elements used in step S2906 (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot end INT suggestion element table"), and FIG. Examples of offset tables are shown (these tables are also stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242).
In the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, an offset value is defined for each set value Ve. Specifically, offset values of "0" to "5" are determined for set values Ve "1" to "6" as shown in the drawing.

In the jackpot end INT suggestive element table of FIG. 68, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared which determine the distribution of the winning probability for each content of the jackpot end INT effect. In this example, the background image in the jackpot end INT effect is used for the setting suggestion, and as shown in the figure, there are a total of 13 types of contents: "none (no predetermined background image)" and "background 1" to "background 12". are prepared, and as the lottery table, a plurality of tables are prepared that determine the distribution of winning probabilities for these contents.
In the jackpot end INT suggestive element table of this example, as these lottery tables, six that determine the distribution for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" are stored in order from the upper layer side, and for the lower layer side, Further, there are stored six values that define allocation for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6". The six lottery tables on the upper layer side are tables that define the allocation for each set value Ve corresponding to the first win, and the six lottery tables on the lower layer side determine the allocation for each set value Ve that corresponds to the consecutive game. It is said that

In FIG. 67, in the acquisition process of step S2905, the offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S2904 is acquired from the first offset table shown in FIG. Then, a lottery table is selected from the jackpot end INT suggestion element table shown in FIG. At this time, in the first offset table, the offset value for the set value Ve is in the range of "0" to "5", so in the selection process of step S2906, a lottery is drawn from six upper layers in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. A table is selected. In other words, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve is selected from among the lottery tables corresponding to the first win.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed following step S2906, the process of determining the background (may be absent) as a suggestive element during the jackpot end INT according to the selected lottery table is performed.

Also, in step S2903, when it is determined that the probability is changing, that is, it is the time of continuous residence, the CPU 241 advances to step S2907 to execute setting value information acquisition processing, and then in step S2908 based on the setting value information. to acquire the offset value from the second offset table, and in subsequent step S2909, processing for selecting a lottery table based on the offset value is performed, and determination processing in step S2910 is performed.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the second offset table (also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242 as the second offset table) used in step S2908.
As shown, in the second offset table, offset values "6" to "11" are defined for the set values Ve "1" to "6".
Therefore, in the acquisition process of step S2908, a lottery table is selected from among the six lower layer side in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table, that is, a lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve from among the lottery tables corresponding to the time of consecutive residences. is selected.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed subsequent to step S2909, the process of determining the background (may be absent) as a suggestive element during the jackpot end INT according to the lottery table selected in step S2909 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this example, the lottery table stored on the upper layer side corresponding to the first win has a distribution value of 0 for the background 7 to background 12, and the lottery table corresponding to the consecutive game on the lower layer side. , the sorting value for background 1 to background 6 is set to 0. As a result, the backgrounds 1 to 6 do not appear at the time of consecutive games (they do not appear as setting suggestion elements), and the backgrounds 7 to 12 do not appear at the first time.

The CPU 241 finishes the big hit effect lottery process shown in FIG. 67 in response to executing the determination process of step S2910.

Here, as described above, offset tables (FIGS. 69 and 70) defining different offset values for the common set value Ve are provided, and these offset tables are selectively used according to the conditions to end the jackpot as shown in FIG. By performing a lottery using the INT suggestive element table, when performing a lottery different for each condition as a setting suggestive element lottery, the table reference processing can be made common processing, and the program capacity can be reduced. can.

(Suggestion production by SU notice)

Next, the suggestion effect by the SU notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77. FIG.
The SU notice effect is a kind of notice effect for notifying the possibility of controlling to an advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and is an effect having one to a plurality of steps of notice steps. In other words, it is a stage announcement effect having stages.
In this example, the content of the SU advance notice effect, specifically, the effect suggesting the set value Ve can be produced using the background image.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the SU advance notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241. FIG.
First, the CPU 241 performs a process of acquiring information of a winning variation pattern based on the above-described decorative design designation command, for example, as the variation pattern information acquisition process of step S3001. Next, in step S3002, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value from the offset table based on the winning variation pattern, selects the lottery table based on the offset value in step S3003, and selects the lottery table based on the lottery value in step S3004. and determine the contents.

FIG. 72 shows an example of the SU effect table used in the selection process of step S3003, and FIG. 73 shows an example of the SU stage lottery offset table used in the acquisition process of step S3002 (these tables are also given in the ROM 242). stored in each area).
In the SU stage lottery offset table shown in FIG. 73, similarly to the first notice offset table shown in FIG. ), the offset value is determined for each super reach fluctuation pattern ("SP reach P"), and in this example, 0 for the short fluctuation pattern, 1 for the reach fluctuation pattern, and 2 offset for the super reach fluctuation pattern Each value is defined.

In the SU effect table of FIG. 72, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared that determine the distribution of the winning probability for each lottery object related to the SU notice effect. In this example, the lottery target as SU notice effect "none" and each lottery as SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) Three types of lottery tables are prepared, each of which defines a distribution value for each object (“Table 1,” “Table 2,” and “Table 3” in the figure). Here, the brackets such as (white frame) attached after SU1 to SU5 representing the SU stage mean the content of the SU notice effect, specifically the type of background image, for example (white frame) A background image with a white frame, and (character A) and (character B) each mean a background image including an image of a specific character.
In the SU effect table, "table 1", "table 2" and "table 3" are stored in order from the upper layer side.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3002, the offset value is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 73 based on the information of the winning variation pattern, and in the selection process of step S3003, the table shown in FIG. 72 is based on the offset value A lottery table is selected from Specifically, in this example, when the winning variation pattern is a short variation pattern and 0 is obtained as the offset value, Table 1 is selected. Also, if the winning variation pattern is a reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as an offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as an offset value, table 3 is selected.
Then, in step S3004 following step S3003, the CPU 241 selects the stored value (lottery value) of the table selected from the tables 1 to 3 and the random value for the lottery, and the SU announcement effect "none". , SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), or SU5 (character B). That is, it determines the stage and content of the SU.

In addition, according to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 72 (in this case also, the random number for the lottery can take 10000 ways from 1 to 9999), in the table 1 corresponding to the short fluctuation pattern, the SU notice effect "No ” has the highest winning probability, followed by SU1 (white frame). ) has a winning probability of 0.
In table 2 corresponding to the reach fluctuation pattern, SU5 (character B), SU4 (character A), SU notice effect "none", SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame) in that order Gradually increase your odds of winning.
In table 3 corresponding to the super reach fluctuation pattern, the winning probability of SU5 (character B) is the highest, and thereafter SU4 (character A), SU3 (white frame), and SU notice effect "none" gradually in order. The winning probabilities are lowered, and the winning probabilities of SU1 (white frame) and SU2 (white frame) are the lowest.

After executing the process of step S3004, the CPU 241 determines in step S3005 whether or not SU3 or higher has been won. That is, it is determined whether or not any of SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) has been determined in step S3004.
If SU3 or more is not won, the CPU 241 ends the SU advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. That is, in the case where SU2 or lower is won, the processing for replacing the content of the SU notice effect, which will be described below, is not performed.

On the other hand, if SU3 or higher has been won, the CPU 241 advances to step S3006 to determine whether or not the previous SU3 danger was lost. That is, the SU notice effect that appeared last time is an SU notice effect of SU3 or higher in which the background is replaced with the background of the danger pattern frame by content replacement using the SU3 replacement table described later, and the SU notice effect is the target of the notice. It is determined whether or not a determination result of a failure is obtained in the symbol variation display game.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the previous SU3 danger was lost, the CPU 241 advances to step S3007, acquires the offset value from the offset table without referring to the set value, and then draws a lottery table based on the offset value in step S3008. is selected, and in step S3012, the content of replacement for SU3 is determined based on the lottery value.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the SU3 replacement table used in the selection process of step S3008, and FIG. 75 shows an example of the SU3 replacement offset table used in the acquisition process of step S3007 (these tables are also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242). stored respectively).
In the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, an offset value is determined for each set value Ve. "5" is defined.
In the SU3 replacement table shown in FIG. 74, a lottery table is prepared for each set value Ve, which defines a sorting value for each replacement content of "default", "red", and "danger". Here, "default" means that the frame in the background is not replaced, and "red" and "danger" mean that the frame is replaced with red and danger patterns, respectively.
As shown in the figure, in the SU3 replacement table, the lottery table with the set value Ve "1" is stored in the highest layer, and thereafter, the lottery table with the larger set value Ve is stored in the lower layer. there is

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3007, the offset value is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75 without referring to the set value Ve. That is, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" in the offset table. Then, in the selection process of step S3008, a lottery table is selected from the SU3 replacement table based on the offset value "0" thus acquired. Specifically, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" stored in the highest layer in the SU3 replacement table is selected.
Then, in the decision processing of step S3012 that is executed following step S3008, the replacement content is decided from among "default", "red" and "danger" based on the lottery table thus selected.

Here, according to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table with the highest winning probability of "default" is selected by performing the processing of steps S3007→S3008→S3012. That is, the lottery table with the lowest possibility of replacement is selected. As a result, when SU3 danger was missed last time, it becomes difficult to perform the SU announcement effect by SU3 danger again.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the preceding step S3006 that the previous SU3 danger has come off, the CPU 241 executes set value information acquisition processing in step S3009, and then acquires an offset value from the offset table based on the set value information in step S3010. Then, in subsequent step S3011, a lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and in step S3012, processing for determining the replacement contents of SU3 is performed based on the lottery value.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of step S3010, the offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S3009 is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. A lottery table based on the obtained offset value is selected from the replacement table. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the set value Ve "1" stored in the top layer position is selected, and if the offset value is "1", it is stored in the position next to the top layer position. The lottery table stored at the position (address) specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table with the set value "2".
Then, in the decision processing in step S3012 in this case, the replacement content is decided from among "default", "red" and "danger" based on the lottery table selected in step S3011.

According to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 74, in the SU3 replacement table in this case, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of "default", while the higher the "red" setting, the higher the winning probability. It is As for "Danger", the probability of winning is lower than that of "Danger" and "Red" regardless of the setting value Ve, and the probability of winning is highest when the setting value Ve is the maximum setting of "6". has been In this example, the winning probability of "Danger" is the same for the set values Ve "1" to "5", and the winning probability is increased only for the set value Ve "6".

The CPU 241 finishes the SU advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. 71 in response to executing the determination process of step S3012.

As can be understood from the series of processes described above, in the present embodiment, the "stage" of the SU notice effect (stage notice effect) can be determined based on the variation information, and the "content" of the SU notice effect is set to the set value Ve. can be determined based on Specifically, in this example, the "contents" of the SU notice effect can be determined by replacement.

As for the setting suggestion using the staged announcement performance, if the stage of the staged announcement performance is determined based on the set value, the staged announcement performance will be difficult to develop, and it will be difficult to enhance the performance effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the step notice effect can be determined according to the variation information, and the details of the step notice effect can be determined based on the set value.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the development of the staged advance notice performance from becoming difficult when realizing the set value suggestion performance using the stepped advance notice performance, and to enhance the performance effect.

Usually, a game machine is equipped with multiple types of notice effects, but among them, all of the notices having stages as the content of the notice effects may be configured as described above, or only some of the notices may be implemented as described above. You may make it become such a structure. Further, in order to enhance the performance interest, some of the notices may be configured so that the "step" is determined based on the set value Ve and the "content" is determined based on the variation information. By doing this, it is possible to give different features to the notices, and to improve the production interest.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing another example of SU advance notice lottery processing.
First, in this another example, the table shown in FIG. 77 is prepared as the SU3 replacement offset table stored in the ROM 242 . 75 is stored as a first offset table for SU3 replacement (FIG. 77A), and a second offset table for SU3 replacement, which is different from the first offset table for SU3 replacement, is stored. (Fig. 77B).
In the second offset table for SU3 replacement, the same offset value (“0” in this example) is stored for the set values Ve of “1” to “6”.

The SU advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. 76 is different in that the processes of steps S3020 and S3021 are executed instead of the process of step S3007 shown in FIG.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the setting value information in step S3020. is obtained, and the process proceeds to the lottery table selection process in step S3008.
Since the offset value acquired in step S3021 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve in the selection process of step S3008 in this case. Specifically, in this example, since the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected, the lottery table in which content replacement is least likely to occur is selected as in the processing example of FIG. become.
In addition, in the acquisition process of step S3010 in this case, the first offset table for SU3 replacement shown in FIG. 77A is used as the offset table.

As described above, the method for selecting the same lottery table without depending on the set value Ve is not limited to the method of obtaining a fixed offset value without referring to the set value Ve. A method of selecting a lottery table based on an offset value acquired from an offset table storing the same offset value for each set value Ve can also be adopted.

Here, it is conceivable to perform the lottery for the SU advance notice effect in the following manner.
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of a lottery mode example of the SU advance notice effect in the embodiment.
First, in the drawing, developments M06J-1, M06J-2, and M06J-3 shown at the lower left of the upper table mean the following developments, respectively.

M06J-1: Staying in a specific background mode, and not winning the pre-reading notice (pre-reading effect), but winning the target SU notice (fireworks launch SU notice)

M06J-2: Staying in a specific background mode and running a pre-reading notice and winning the target SU notice

M06J-3: While staying in a specific background mode, the change wins the target change and target SU notice of the pre-reading notice

In development M06J-1, lottery for target SU notice is performed based on table TBL1. Further, in development M06J-2 and development M06J-3, a lottery for target SU notice is performed based on table TBL2 and table TBL3, respectively.

In development M06J-1, development M06L-1 is the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL1, and the case where SU5 is won.
Further, in expansion M06J-2, the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL2, and the case where SU5 is won is assumed to be expansion M06L-2.
Furthermore, in expansion M06J-3, the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL3, and the case where SU5 is won is assumed to be expansion M06L-3.
In addition, in these developments M06L-1 to M06L-3, when SU5 is won, a lottery based on tables TBL4, TBL5, and TBL6 is performed for the contents of SU5.

The table at the bottom of FIG. 78 illustrates a lottery method for content replacement (background replacement) of SU3 for each development of M06L-1 to M06L-3.
As shown in the figure, in deployment M06L-1, it is determined whether or not there was a previous danger (see step S3006). If it is out of danger in the previous time, there is no branching for each set value Ve, and replacement contents are selected based on the table TBL4.
On the other hand, if there is no deviation due to the previous danger, the lottery method branches for each set value Ve. Specifically, replacement contents are randomly selected using different tables (tables TBL5 to TBL10 in the figure) for each set value Ve of "1" to "6".

Further, in expansion M06L-2 and expansion M06L-3, there is no branching depending on whether or not the previous danger has come off, and there is no branching based on the set value Ve, and replacement contents are selected based on tables TBL11 and TBL12 as shown.

In the lottery method described above, it is possible to suggest setting by SU notice in the state of non-winning in the look-ahead effect as deployment M06J-1.
As a result, in fluctuations with low hit expectations that are not so much as to look ahead, and fluctuations that do not execute look-ahead effects toward the look-ahead target fluctuations, the role of SU notice is used for the purpose of suggesting the reliability of the fluctuation. It can be used to suggest a setting instead.

Also, in the state where the look-ahead effect is being executed as the development M06J-2, setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed.
If you are running a look-ahead effect using multiple fluctuations, and if you win the SU notice in the middle of the look-ahead fluctuation, you are doing a look-ahead that suggests the winning expectation toward the target fluctuation of the look-ahead. Since it is medium, it is not used for the purpose of suggesting the setting as a role of SU notice. In other words, the look-ahead notice suggests the degree of expectation for winning towards the target change, and the player's interest is focused on it. We are trying to prevent confusion.

Furthermore, even in the state where the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect as development M06J-3, setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed.
In this case, since the change is a predictive target change and a change with a high probability of winning, the role of SU notice should be used for the purpose of suggesting the reliability of the change, and not for the purpose of suggesting the setting. By doing so, we are trying to prevent players from getting confused.

As the lottery method described above, development M06L-1, development M06L-2, and development M06L-3 are adopted, but any one of them may be adopted, or any combination thereof may be adopted. good.
Regarding deployment M06L-2, if there are multiple types of pre-reading effects, it is configured so that setting suggestions by SU notice are not performed only during execution of specific pre-reading effects (eg, full-screen pre-reading effects, etc.), and other During the execution of the look-ahead effect (eg, pending change notice, etc.), setting suggestions may be made by SU notice.
With respect to development M06L-3, if there are multiple types of pre-reading notices, setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed in a state where the change is a target change of a specific pre-reading effect (eg, pre-reading notice of full screen system, etc.) , and in a state in which the change is a target change of another look-ahead effect (eg, pending change notice, etc.), it may be configured to perform setting suggestion by SU notice.
Also, if the variation is a hit variation, the setting suggestion is not performed by the setting suggestion notice including the setting suggestion element such as the above-mentioned SU notice, and if the variation is a loss variation, the setting suggestion is not performed. may be configured to do so.

Here, in the method of the SU advance notice lottery of this example described above with reference to FIGS. The content of the SU notice is drawn based on the table corresponding to the current setting value, and if the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed, a specific table (a table specified without being based on the setting value) is selected from among the plurality of tables. Based on this, the contents of the SU announcement are drawn by lottery.
In such a lottery method, when the setting suggestion by the SU notice is performed, the notice content of the SU notice is determined based on the set value Ve, and when the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed, the notice content of the SU notice is determined by the set value. In other words, it is a method of making decisions without being based on Ve.
If this is applied to the developments M06J-1 to M06J-3 described above, it can be said that the game machine 1 of this example performs the SU advance notice lottery as follows.
First, the comparison between the developments M06J-1 and M06J-2 described above can be rephrased as follows.
That is, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, if the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed (development M06J-2), the variable display of the symbol is performed. can be determined without based on the set value Ve, and on the other hand, when performing the variable display of the pattern, the variable display of the pattern performed after the variable display of the relevant pattern is targeted. In other words, when the read-ahead performance is not executed (development M06J-1), the announcement content of the SU announcement for the variable display of the pattern can be determined based on the set value Ve.

Further, the comparison between the developments M06J-1 and M06J-3 described above can be rephrased as follows.
That is, when the pre-reading effect for the predetermined symbol variable display is executed (development M06J-3) before the predetermined symbol variable display is performed, the predetermined symbol variable display is performed. The notice content of the target SU notice can be determined without being based on the set value Ve, and on the other hand, before the variable display of the predetermined symbols is performed, a look-ahead effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbols is performed. If it is not executed (development M06J-1), it can be rephrased that the content of the previous notice of the SU notice for the variable display of the predetermined pattern can be determined based on the set value Ve.

With the lottery method as described above, it is possible to prevent setting suggestions by SU notice in a state in which a look-ahead performance is being executed or a state in which the change is a target variation of the look-ahead performance.
Therefore, player confusion can be prevented.

Here, it is also possible to implement the setting suggestion by means of a predetermined announcement effect such as an SU announcement by the following method. That is, a "predetermined effect", which is an advance notice effect including an element (for example, a specific background such as a danger pattern) that suggests the set value Ve, is prepared, and whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is set to the set value Ve. will be determined based on Specifically, for example, by performing a lottery using a table configured such that the higher the setting, the more easily the predetermined effect appears, it is possible to suggest the setting of the high setting.
On the other hand, when the setting suggestion is not performed, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is determined regardless of the set value Ve. Specifically, for example, by making a decision not to execute the predetermined effect regardless of the set value Ve, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being performed.

In this way, if it is determined based on the set value Ve whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, setting suggestion by the predetermined effect can be performed. On the other hand, by determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect without being based on the set value Ve, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed.
If this is applied to each of the cases of "suggest setting" and "not suggest setting" in developments M06J-1 to M06J-3 described above, the gaming machine 1 of this example has the following configuration. can do.
First, in the comparison between the development M06J-1 and the development M06J-2, when performing the variable display of the symbols, a look-ahead effect is executed for the variable display of the symbols performed after the variable display of the relevant symbols. In the case (development M06J-2), it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the variable display of the relevant symbol without being based on the set value Ve, and when performing the variable display of the relevant symbol, If the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol that is performed after the variable display of is not executed (development M06J-1), set whether to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol. It is configured such that it can be determined based on the value Ve.

Further, in the comparison between the above-described deployment M06J-1 and deployment M06J-3, the case where the look-ahead effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed (deployment In M06J-3), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbols without being based on the set value Ve, and before the variable display of the predetermined symbols is performed. , When the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbols is not executed (development M06J-1), the set value Ve determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbols. It is a configuration that can be determined based on.

By adopting these configurations, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in the state where the prefetch effect is being executed or the change is the target change of the prefetch effect.
Therefore, player confusion can be prevented.

Here, in the above, regarding the determination of the content of the notice of the predetermined effect and the determination of whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, if the pre-reading effect is being executed or if the change is the target change of the pre-reading effect In the above example, these determinations are made without being based on the set value Ve. In the case where the look-ahead effect is being executed or the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect, it is sufficient that the ratio of setting suggestion by the predetermined effect is reduced.
Therefore, regarding the determination of the content of the notice of the predetermined effect and the determination of whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed, and whether the change is the target change of the prefetch effect. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the ratio of making decisions based on the set value Ve is varied according to the conditions. Specifically, the configurations are the following (c1) to (c4).

(c1)
The ratio of determining the announcement contents of the predetermined performance targeting the variation based on the set value Ve is made different between when the look-ahead performance is being executed and when the look-ahead performance is not being executed.
(c2)
A ratio for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined performance targeting the variation is made different between when the look-ahead performance is being executed and when the look-ahead performance is not being executed.

(c3)
The ratio of determining the announcement contents of the predetermined performance targeting the variation based on the set value Ve is made different between when the variation is the target variation of the look-ahead performance and when the variation is not the target variation of the look-ahead performance.
(c4)
A ratio of determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect targeting the change based on the set value Ve in the case where the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect and the case where the change is not the target change of the look-ahead effect make different.

In these configurations, when the variation is the target variation of the look-ahead effect or when the look-ahead effect is being executed, a predetermined It is possible to reduce the ratio of setting suggestion by production.
Therefore, player confusion can be prevented.

It should be noted that the "percentage" in the configurations (c1) to (c4) includes "0". That is, taking the configuration (c1) as an example, it also includes determining the content of the advance notice of the predetermined effect without being based on the set value Ve when the look-ahead effect is being executed.

In the non-winning state of the pre-reading notice, if there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, it may be configured so that the content of the notice can be determined based on the set value Ve for all the setting suggestion notices. For only some setting suggestion advance notice such as advance notice, the content of the notice may be determined based on the set value Ve.
In addition, in the non-winning state of the pre-reading notice, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices, it may be configured so that all setting suggestion notices can be executed, or only some setting suggestion notices such as SU notice It may be configured to be executable.

In addition, in the state where the pre-reading notice is being executed (eg, when performing a lottery for each notice at the start of the fluctuation, when the pre-reading notice is executed with the fluctuation after the fluctuation as the target, etc.) If there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, it may be configured such that the content of the notice can be determined for all the setting suggestion notices without being based on the set value Ve, or some setting suggestion notices such as the SU notice may be configured. Only for (eg, setting suggestion notice of a type that can be executed before reach), the content of the notice may be determined without being based on the set value Ve.
Furthermore, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices in the state where the prefetch notice is being executed, it may be configured not to execute all setting suggestion notices, or some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices (eg : It may be configured so that it is not executed only for setting suggestions that can be executed before reach.

Further, in a state where the change is the target change of the pre-reading notice, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices, the content of the notice for all setting suggestion notices can be determined without being based on the set value Ve. Alternatively, only for some setting suggestion notice such as SU notice (eg, setting suggestion notice of the type that can be executed before reaching), the notice content can be determined without being based on the setting value Ve. You may
Furthermore, in the state where the change is the target change of the pre-reading notice, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices, it may be configured not to execute all setting suggestion notices, or some setting suggestions such as SU notice It may be configured so as not to execute only the notice (for example, setting suggestion notice of the kind that can be executed before reach).

Further, when the contents of the advance notice of the setting suggestion advance notice are determined without being based on the set value Ve, the contents of the advance notice may be determined using a specific lottery table. At that time, it is desirable to determine the content of the notice from the lottery table based on the variation pattern information of the variation and the information on winning and losing. In addition, in the state where the pre-reading notice is being executed or the state where the pre-reading notice target is changed, when the content of the setting suggestion notice is determined without being based on the set value Ve, a common specific lottery table is used for each. may be used, or different lottery tables may be used for each. Further, when there are a plurality of setting suggestion advance notices, the content of the notice differs depending on the type of setting suggestion advance notice, so it goes without saying that there is a lottery table for each setting suggestion advance notice.

[5-5. Regarding the difference in the range of setting values that the main control unit and the production control unit correspond]

Here, as can be understood from the various lottery processes of the effect control unit 24 described above, the effect control unit 24 determines that the set value Ve is within the actual usage range Ru ("1", "2", and "6" in this example). ), if the value is within the usable range Re (“1” to “6”), the effect lottery is performed normally without causing an error.

On the other hand, the main control unit 20 cannot execute at least specific processing related to the progress of the game unless the set value Ve is within the actual use range Ru. For example, in the jackpot random number determination process (S1502) described with reference to FIGS. It becomes impossible to obtain a proper judgment reference value TH and setting difference information from the random number judgment table for judging a big hit, and the judging of a big hit cannot be properly executed.

The difference in correspondence to the setting values of the main control section 20 and the effect control section 24 as described above can be expressed as follows.
That is, the main control unit 20 can set any one setting value out of N (N is a natural number equal to or greater than 2) types by the setting change process (step S115), and based on the N types of setting values , the first process relating to the progress of the game operation can be executed.
On the other hand, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process related to the progress of the effect operation based on M types of setting value information, which is more than N types, regarding the setting value information related to the setting values received from the main control unit 20. It is said that

As a result, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the set value, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process related to the progress of the effect operation up to the M stage. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of stages of the set value while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24, as described with reference to FIG. Regarding the setting value information as the middle command and the setting change command, it is possible to analyze not three types of setting value information corresponding to the actual use range Ru, but six types of setting value information corresponding to the usable range Re. ing.
Specifically, for these setting confirmation command and setting change command, it is possible to receive a command including any of the identification data "1" to "6" in steps S2150 and S2152. command can be analyzed.

That is, if the three types of set values Ve corresponding to the usage range Ru are N types of set values that can be set in the setting change process, the effect control unit 24 has M types of set values, which are more than N types. It is configured so that information can be analyzed.

As a result, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the set value Ve, the effect control unit 24 can analyze the set value information up to M stages. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of setting values to be used while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24, when the setting value Vd set in the setting change process on the main control unit 20 side and the setting value analysis information based on the analyzed setting value information correspond ( For example, if the set value Ve indicated by the set value Vd and the set value Ve indicated by the set value analysis information match), even if they do not correspond, predetermined processing (various effect lottery processing described in FIGS. 57 to 77) is performed. configured to run.

As a result, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the set value Ve, the effect control unit 24 can execute processing up to the M stage, and the program of the effect control unit 24 does not need to be rewritten up to the M stage. It becomes possible to
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of stages of the set value Ve while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

Here, according to the process of FIG. 52A, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the setting change end command has been received in step S2154, the setting value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is within the appropriate range. Without confirming whether or not there is (see step S2162), setting change end scenario registration processing is executed in step S2158.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance control section 24 from notifying the abnormality of the set value when the main control section 20 is about to normally end the setting change process. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the main control unit 20 advances the subsequent game operation in response to the normal end of the setting change process even though the effect control unit 24 side is performing the abnormality notification, and the game is performed. It is possible to prevent people from feeling uneasy.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is within the usable range Re in step S2162, and if it is within the usable range Re The received setting value Ve (identification data described above) is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, the above-described "report setting value storage area A1"), and if it is outside the usable range Re, the received setting value Ve is stored in the RAM 243. I assume not.
When the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243. However, in this embodiment, the "set value command" is transmitted at a plurality of timings other than when the setting is changed. is transmitted at least when power is restored (S808 when power is restored) and when fluctuation starts (S1411). Appropriate set values Ve can be stored in the RAM 243 .

The set value command can also be sent during the customer waiting demo, at the start or end of a big win or a small win, at the start of a round game, at the start of INT between rounds, etc., in addition to the timings exemplified above.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the set value Ve is within the usable range Re, it is stored in the RAM 243 as it is even if it is not within the usable range Ru. Like the lottery processing (FIGS. 57 to 77, etc.) related to various effects, in the present embodiment, the lottery processing corresponds to the set value Ve of the usable range Re, so the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Ru. Even if it is not, a bug does not occur in the effect lottery process.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, (See step S2404 in FIG. 53).
However, even if the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the history set value storage area A2 in this way, it is not possible to check for an abnormality in the set value Ve during the transmission process in step S2607 (FIG. 55). Thus, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate setting value Ve outside the usable range Re from being displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
As described above, as the abnormality confirmation process at this time, after determining whether or not the individual history information to be transmitted is history information on setting changes (setting change history information), In some cases, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve included in the history information is outside the usable range Re. If the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, liquid crystal control is performed. The instruction information of the abnormal display is transmitted to the unit 40 . As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that the setting value Ve in the corresponding individual history information is found to be abnormal (for example, displaying an "E" mark indicating an error).

<6. Modified example of setting-related command processing and setting value conversion>

Here, in the above, the setting value Ve set in the setting change process (S115) shown in FIG. 10 (the setting value Ve saved in step S416) is set in the main loop pre-processing (S119) shown in FIG. Although the example of transmitting to the production control unit 24 side by the value command (S808) was given, the set value Ve set by the setting change process can also be transmitted to the production control unit 24 by a command at the end of the setting change. Specifically, in the embodiment, the setting change end command is transmitted (S605, S606) in the RAM clearing process (S116) shown in FIG. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a “setting change completion command” containing the setting value Ve set in the setting change process is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 .

Further, in the process of FIG. 52A described above, the process (S2163) in which the effect control unit 24 stores the set value Ve in the RAM 243 can be executed each time a set value command from the main control unit 20 is received. However, the process of storing the set value Ve in the RAM 243 may be performed only when the setting is changed.
When the setting value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 only when the setting is changed in this way, when the setting value Ve is outside the usable range Re as in the processing shown in FIG. is not stored (route from S2162 to S2164), the set value Ve will not be set in the RAM 243 .
Therefore, in this case, if the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, a value representing the set value Ve "1" (in other words, a value representing the lowest level of the set value Ve) is stored in the RAM 243. While preventing an abnormal setting value Ve from being set in the RAM 243, it is also possible to prevent the setting of the setting value Ve from being stopped.

FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of setting-related command processing S2130e as a first modified example, including storage of the lowest level value as described above.
The setting-related command process S2130e as the first modification corresponds to the case where the main control unit 20 transmits the set value Ve set in the setting change process to the production control unit 24 side by the above-described "setting change completion command". It is considered to be processed.
The difference from the process shown in FIG. 52A is that the reception determination process of the setting change end command in step S2154 is omitted, the process of steps S2159 to S2161 and the process of step S2164 are omitted, and step S2181. processing is added.

In the processing shown in FIG. 79, the CPU 241 first performs reception determination processing of the “setting change completion command” in step S2180. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command including notification information (identification data) of any of setting values Ve "1" to "6" has been received as a "setting change completion command".
If it is determined in step S2180 that the "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has not been received, CPU 241 advances the process to step S2150. In this case, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2153 in response to obtaining a negative result in step S2151. Also, if a negative result is obtained in step S2153, the CPU 241 ends the series of processes shown in FIG.
Furthermore, in this case, the CPU 241 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 79 in response to execution of each scenario registration process in steps S2155 to S2157.

On the other hand, when determining in step S2180 that a "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, CPU 241 executes setting change end scenario registration processing in step S2158.
As a result of the determination process in step S2180, if the setting value Ve included in the received "setting change completion command" is within the usable range Re of "1" to "6", then in step S2158 the setting change end scenario is determined. be registered. That is, even when the unused set value Ve within the usable range Re is received, an effect is performed to notify the end of the setting change.

In response to executing the scenario registration process in step S2158, the CPU 241 determines in step S2162 whether or not the setting information is the usable range Re.
Then, if the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value information in the RAM in step S2163, and proceeds to the history information updating process in step S2166.
On the other hand, if the setting information is not within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value "1" in the RAM 243 in step S2181, and proceeds to the history information updating process in step S2166.

By the processing as the first modified example as described above, in response to the case where the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 only when the setting is changed, if the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, the RAM 243 stores a specific value ( In this example, "1") can be stored.

Note that when a specific value (“1”) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 243 (“notification setting value storage area A1” described above) as in the first modification described above, the setting value in the setting history information A specific value (“1”) may also be stored for Ve (that is, the “history setting value storage area A2” described above).
Alternatively, an abnormal value may be stored in the setting history information.
By storing the abnormal value in the setting history information, it becomes possible to store the fact that the setting value Ve is abnormal as the history information while performing the game lottery based on the specific value.

Here, when the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243, it is possible to determine whether the set value Ve is within the usable range Ru instead of whether it is within the usable range Re.
For example, when the set values Ve to be used are "1", "2", and "6" as in this example, first, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re. If the value is within the possible range Re, it is further determined whether or not the set value Ve is an unused value (one of "3", "4", and "5").
At this time, if the set value Ve is not an unused value, the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 as it is. On the other hand, if the set value Ve is an unused value, it is conceivable to store a specific value (“1”) in the RAM 243 . Alternatively, if the set value Ve is an unused value, the set value Ve can be corrected to a value within the use range Ru and stored in the RAM 243 . For example, when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2", and when it is "5", it is corrected to "6".

FIG. 80 shows a flowchart of setting-related command processing S2130e as a second modification including correction of the set value Ve as described above.
The difference from the process shown in FIG. 79 is that the processes of steps S2182 and S2183 are added.
In this case, in response to determining in step S2162 that the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2182 to determine whether or not the setting information is an unused value. Specifically, in this example, it is determined whether the set value Ve is any one of "3", "4", and "5" (any one of "02H", "03H", and "04H").
When determining that the setting information is not an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2163 and stores the setting information in the RAM 243 . On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information is an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2183 and stores the correction value in the RAM 243 with reference to the setting value correction table. Specifically, in this example, a set value correction table (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242) is referred to, and when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2", and "5" is corrected. When the value is "6", the corrected set value Ve is stored in the "report set value storage area A1" of the RAM 243. FIG.

Here, in the description so far, the main control unit 20 uses the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. Although an example of conversion to the value Ve was given, the main control unit 20 transmits the information of the setting value Vd to the production control unit 24 without performing conversion using the setting value offset conversion table, and sets it on the production control unit 24 side. A configuration for converting the value Vd can also be adopted.
FIG. 81 shows an example of a set value conversion table to be used on the effect control section 24 side in this case. Here, it is assumed that the level of the setting value Ve and the values to be used are uniquely determined by the spec information of the gaming machine 1 .

As shown in the figure, in the setting value conversion table, the information of the setting value Vd transmitted by the main control unit 20 side, specifically, the conversion table storing the conversion values for each of "0" to "5" is stored in the specification (Fig. There are 4 types of "Spec 1" to "Spec 4").

In this case, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) selects the corresponding conversion table from the setting conversion table based on the information of the spec specified by the spec specifying command described above, for example, and sets the setting value Vd received from the main control unit 20. is converted based on the selected conversion table.
Here, "spec 1" has six levels of settings, and the main control unit 20 in this case uses "0" to "5" as the set value Vd. "Spec 2" and "Spec 3" are set in two steps and three steps, respectively, and the main control unit 20 uses "0", "1", and "0" to "3" as the set value Vd, respectively. "Spec 4" is "no setting", and in this case, "0" is stored as the conversion value for each set value Vd as shown.

By adopting a configuration in which set value conversion is performed on the effect control unit 24 side as described above, the processing load on the main control unit 20 side can be reduced.

<7. Other Modifications Related to Setting Values>

Here, the information displayed on the setting history screen Gs is not limited to the information illustrated in FIG. For example, a set value may indicate how long the game has been played. Specifically, the date and time from when a certain set value is set until the next change may be displayed. Also, the date and time from when the power is turned on to when the game is played with a certain set value until the power is turned off may be displayed. Further, when the setting value is determined to be an abnormal value, the date and time from when the setting value is determined to be abnormal to when the normal setting value is set may be displayed. Also, originally, the setting value does not change during the game, and the setting value does not change from normal to abnormal, but if the setting value changes even during the game due to noise or goto behavior, , the date and time may be stored and displayed as a history display. In addition, the number of times the RAM clear processing and the backup restoration processing have been performed and the date and time information may be similarly displayed. Also, the timing for displaying the history display may be, for example, while the setting change process is being performed, other than while the setting confirmation process is being performed. Furthermore, the history may be displayed when a predetermined operation input is performed even during a game.

In the above, an example was given in which the history information is saved in the internal work (work area of the RAM 243) according to the occurrence of the target event of the history display, and the history information saved in the internal work is immediately stored in the memory 244. However, the timing for storing the history information of the internal work in the memory 244 is to refer to the elapsed time stored in the internal work and store (copy) it in the memory 244 when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed. is also possible.

In addition, regarding the setting history confirmation screen Gs, even after the display is finished in response to the end instruction operation, if the predetermined display condition such as setting confirmation (or setting change) is satisfied, display instruction is given again. It can be displayed any number of times according to the operation. Alternatively, if the setting history confirmation screen Gs has already been displayed a predetermined number of times, such as once, under conditions that satisfy a predetermined display condition, the setting history confirmation screen Gs will not be displayed even if the display instruction operation is performed again. can also be disabled.
Also, it is desirable to hide the performance display monitor that displays the base value while the history information is being displayed. Further, the volume/light amount adjustment may be configured to be effective even while the history information is being displayed. At this time, although the adjustment is effective, it is desirable not to display the content of the adjustment on the display means.
Also, the contents and status of the performance display monitor may be displayed on the liquid crystal, in which case it is desirable to display them at a position that does not overlap with the history information. In addition, the volume/light amount may be configured to be non-adjustable. In this case, there is no fear that the history information and the display overlap, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen configuration is increased.

In addition, it is desirable not to execute the initializing operation of at least the movable body on the board side while the history information is being displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board-side movable body from moving to the front side of the display means and hindering the visibility of the display screen. Similarly, the movable body on the frame side may also be set so as not to perform the initializing operation. However, the movable body on the frame side may be initialized if there is no possibility of obstructing the display screen. In this case, for example, the initializing operation of the vibrating means mounted on the operating means, or the initializing operation of the air ejecting means for ejecting air may be performed. As a result, the initializing operation of the movable body on the frame side can be finished first, so that after the display of the history information, that is, after the setting confirmation process (or setting change process) is finished, the movable body on the board side can be moved. It is efficient because it only needs to initialize the body. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initialization operation may be performed for all movable bodies after the history information is displayed.

In addition, when the setting value change operation is performed in a state where the harness connecting the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 is disconnected, the main control unit 20 performs processing based on the changed setting value. On the other hand, since the performance control unit 24 cannot know the information, it cannot be stored and displayed as history information. Therefore, by changing the setting value with the harness disconnected, turning off the power once, and then turning on the power again with the harness reconnected, the setting value can be changed without leaving traces of the changed setting value. I can do it. In order to prevent this, when the power is turned on, information on the setting value is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 transmits the information on the stored setting value and the information transmitted from the main control unit 20. If a contradiction is found by comparing the set value information, the error may be notified using a lamp, a speaker, a liquid crystal, or the like.
Also, in this case, the effect control unit 24 side may be set to a game stop state, and even if a command related to the game is transmitted from the main control unit 20, it is configured not to perform processing based on it. You may In addition, when the effect control unit 24 receives various commands transmitted when executing the setting change process or the RAM clear process, the main control unit 20 side determines that the setting change process has been performed normally again. Judgment is made, and the newly determined set value is stored, and error notification is interrupted/cancelled (contradiction occurrence ⇒ error notification ⇒ power off ⇒ setting change in progress (no error notification) ⇒ setting change completed (no error notification)) You may make it In addition, when the power is turned on for the first time, there is no information about the setting value on the effect control unit 24 side. , it is desirable to configure so that error notification is not performed.

Further, as the set value suggesting effect, an operation effect using an operation means that can be operated by the player can be used. Specifically, as operation means that can be operated by the player, a first operation means (e.g. PUSH button) and a second operation means (e.g. pato button) are provided. It may be a separate operation device, or a common operation device that can change between the first mode and the second mode), only the operation of the first operation means is effective It may be configured such that a setting suggestion advance notice suggesting the current setting value Ve is executed when the first operation means is operated during the operation valid period. Also, if the player does not operate the first operation means during the first operation valid period, the setting suggestion notice may not be executed. Further, when the setting suggestion notice is not executed, an effect different from the setting suggestion notice (eg, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the hit of the variation) may be executed. In addition, even if the setting suggestion notice is executed, in addition to the setting suggestion notice, a production different from the setting suggestion notice (for example, a production that suggests the degree of expectation for the hit of the variation, etc.) can be configured to Also, if the second operation means is operated during the first operation valid period, the operation of the second operation means is not valid, so it is the same as when the first operation means is not operated. can be handled.

The second operating means may also have the same configuration as the first operating means described above.
Further, when the degree of expectation that the variation will be a hit is higher when the operation effect by the second operation means is executed than when the operation effect by the first operation means is executed, the operation by the second operation means It may be configured such that the setting suggestion notice is executed in the effect, and the setting suggestion notice is not executed in the operation effect by the first operating means. Further, it may be configured such that the setting suggestion notice is executed in the operation presentation by the first operation means, and the setting suggestion notice is not executed in the operation presentation by the second operation means.

In a specific operation rendering in which both operations of the first operating means and the second operating means are valid, if the first operating means is operated, the setting suggestion notice is executed, and if the second operating means is operated However, it may be configured not to execute the setting suggestion notice. Moreover, it is good also as a reverse structure.
In addition, during the valid operation period of the specific operation effect, an image simulating either the first operation means or the second operation means is displayed on the display means, and the player is instructed which operation means to operate. In that case, when an image simulating the first operation means is displayed, the setting suggestion notice is executed when the first operation means is operated, and the second operation means is operated. The configuration may be such that the setting suggestion notice is not executed when the Further, when an image simulating the first operation means is displayed, the setting suggestion notice may be executed when the second operation means is operated.
In addition, regarding the specific operation effect, the relationship between the case where the setting suggestion notice is executed after the operation and the case where it is not executed, and the relationship between the setting suggestion notice and the effect different from the setting suggestion notice are the same as in the case of the operation effect described above. You may make it become a structure.

Also, the presentation mode of the operation presentation may be configured to vary according to the set value Ve. For example, during the effective period of operation of the operating means, the effect means may be used to execute an operation prompting effect using a display, sound, or lamp to prompt the operation, and the content of the operation prompting effect may be changed according to the set value Ve. It may be configured as Specifically, the minimum set value (example: setting 1) is denied by executing an operation promotion effect that appears only when the setting value Ve is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (example: setting 2 to 6). It is possible to notify that. In addition, by executing an operation prompting effect that appears only when the set value Ve is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, setting 6), it is possible to notify that the maximum setting value (eg, setting 6) is reached. .

Further, among the operation effects, the above-described embodiment may be used in the win-lose operation effect which is performed at the end of the ready-to-win effect and notifies the win-loss of the variation. In this case, the contents of the operation prompting effect may be changed according to the set value Ve only when the win/lose result is a win. Also, only in the case of a failure, the content of the operation prompting effect may be changed according to the set value Ve. In addition, only in the case of a win that shifts to a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player after the win, the content of the operation promotion effect may be changed according to the set value Ve.

<8. Summary so far>

As described above, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state. Determination means (step S1502: big hit random number determination process), prefetch determination means (step S1309: prefetch determination process) that determines whether or not to control in an advantageous state before determination by the determination means (step S1309: prefetch determination process), determination of prefetch determination means Based on the result, before the variable display of the pattern to be judged is performed, a look-ahead effect execution means (a performance control unit 24 and a liquid crystal display) capable of executing a look-ahead effect that notifies the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state Effect means such as device 36, optical display device 45a, sound generator 46a, etc.), and effect execution means (effect control unit 24, the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, the sound generation device 46a, etc.), and the set value (Ve) representing the stage of the probability of whether or not to control to an advantageous state can be set. means (step S115: setting change processing);
The advance notice effect includes a predetermined effect (for example, an SU notice effect), and when performing the variable display of the symbols, a look-ahead effect targeting the variable display of the symbols performed after the variable display of the relevant symbols is executed. In this case, it is possible to determine the contents of the advance notice of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the relevant pattern without being based on the set value, and when the variable display of the pattern is carried out, it is carried out after the variable display of the relevant pattern. When the look-ahead performance for the variable display of the pattern is not executed, the contents of the advance notice of the predetermined performance for the variable display of the pattern can be determined on the basis of the set value.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed while the look-ahead effect is being executed.
Therefore, player confusion can be prevented.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and includes the above-described determination means, look-ahead determination means, and look-ahead effect execution. means, effect executing means, and setting means, and the advance notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and when performing the variable display of the symbols, the target is the variable display of the symbols performed after the variable display of the relevant symbols. When the read-ahead performance is executed, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the predetermined performance for the variable display of the pattern without being based on the set value, and when the variable display of the pattern is performed, the pattern is displayed. If the pre-reading effect for the variable display of the pattern that is performed after the variable display is not executed, it is possible to decide based on the set value whether to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the pattern. and

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed while the look-ahead effect is being executed.
Therefore, player confusion can be prevented.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and includes the above-described determination means, look-ahead determination means, and look-ahead effect execution. means, effect executing means, and setting means, and the advance notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and the anticipatory effect targeted for the variable display of the predetermined symbols before the variable display of the predetermined symbols is performed. is executed, the content of the advance notice of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbols can be determined without being based on the set value, and before the variable display of the predetermined symbols is performed, the predetermined When the read-ahead performance targeting the variable display of the pattern is not executed, the contents of the advance notice of the predetermined performance targeting the variable display of the predetermined pattern can be determined based on the set value.

Thus, in a state where the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect.
Therefore, player confusion can be prevented.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and includes the above-described determination means, look-ahead determination means, and look-ahead effect execution. means, effect executing means, and setting means, and the advance notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and the anticipatory effect targeted for the variable display of the predetermined symbols before the variable display of the predetermined symbols is performed. is executed, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbols without being based on the set value, and before the variable display of the predetermined symbols is performed. , When the look-ahead performance for the variable display of the predetermined symbols is not executed, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the predetermined performance for the variable display of the predetermined symbols based on the set value. It is.

Thus, in a state where the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect.
Therefore, player confusion can be prevented.

<9. Suggestion effect on set value>

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the suggestive effect regarding the set value can be appropriately performed. The suggestive effect regarding the setting value is an effect or the like that allows the player playing the gaming machine 1 to guess the setting value Ve set in the gaming machine 1 . In the following description, the value (range) of the set value Ve is not the value (0 to 5) used corresponding to the set value inside the gaming machine 1, but the worker or player who sets the set value. A value (1 to 6) that can be grasped is used.

As the setting value suggestion effect, in addition to the effect that makes it possible to guess the set value Ve (set value suggestion effect), there is also a effect that makes it possible to guess whether the set value Ve has been changed (set value change suggestion effect). directing) are also included. Specifically, whether the set value Ve set on the previous day for a certain game machine 1 remains the same set value Ve on the current day without being changed, or the set value Ve on the previous day is changed and a new set value Ve is used. This is an effect that makes it possible to guess whether the set value Ve (including the case where the set value 4 is retyped to the same set value 4) has been set.

In the case of performing an effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value Ve as the setting value suggesting effect, in addition to suggesting that the setting value Ve is 6 or 5, the setting value Ve is suggested with a certain range. It is conceivable to suggest possible values.
Specifically, an effect suggesting that the set value Ve is an even number (any of 2, 4, or 6) or an effect suggesting that it is an odd number (any of 1, 3, or 5) can be considered. be done. Also, an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is any one of 4 to 6 may be used. As an example of suggesting a wider range, there may be an effect suggesting that the set value Ve is other than 1 (that is, any of 2 to 6).

In the suggestive effect regarding the set value, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 performs an effect using sounds, lights, liquid crystals, movable accessories, buttons, and the like. Specifically, sound production using the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46 provided in the game machine 1, light production using the light display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, liquid crystal display device 36, etc. These include image presentation, visual presentation using movable accessories, and sensory presentation using presentation buttons 13, wind pressure devices, and the like.

By using such a setting value suggestive effect, the player can estimate what kind of setting value Ve is applied to the gaming machine 1 in which the game is being played. It can be used as a judgment material when selecting. By using such information when selecting a gaming machine, the player can be more advantageous than randomly selecting a gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 1 that is easily selected by the player.
Also, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of appropriately guessing the setting of the gaming machine 1 and the pleasure of selecting the gaming machine 1 based on the suggestive effect regarding the setting value.

FIG. 119 shows the relationship between the types of suggestive effects related to set values and the execution timings of the suggestive effects. FIG. 82 shows the "type of suggestive effect related to set value" shown in FIG. 119, and FIG. 83 shows the "type of execution timing" shown in FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 84 shows the portion of "execution of effect (o/no mark)" in FIG.

[9-1. type of performance]

Types of suggestive effects (hereinafter simply referred to as "suggestive effects") relating to set values implemented in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described (FIG. 82).
In FIG. 82, 21 types of suggested effects indicated by effects 01 to 21 are described. Each suggestion effect has columns of "type", "relevant/other", and "effect means".
As the "type", there are provided three kinds of "setting value suggesting effect", "set value change suggesting effect", and "big hit notice effect". The "set value suggesting effect" and "set value change suggesting effect" are as described above. The ``big hit notice performance'' is originally a notice performance for notifying whether or not a big win is expected. It is.

The difference between "relevant / other" is "relevant" if the suggestive effect is related to the relevant symbol variation display game, and "relevant" if it appears regardless of the symbol variation display game. Other”.

The 'rendering means' determines which of the rendering means is used to perform the suggestive rendering. If the "sound" is marked with a circle, a sound effect using the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46 is executed, and if the "light" is marked with a circle, the decorative lamp 45 or If a light effect using the optical display device 45a including various LEDs is executed, and a circle is written in the "liquid crystal", an image effect using the liquid crystal display 36 or the like is executed, and a circle is displayed in the "movable body". If the mark is described, a visual production using a movable accessory or the like is executed, and if the "button" is marked with a circle, a sensory type effect using the production button 13, a wind pressure device, or the like is performed. A performance is performed.
A specific example of each effect will be described later.

[9-2. performance timing]

Next, the timing at which the suggestion effect can be performed will be described with reference to FIG.
First, 42 types of suggestive effect timings indicated by timings 01 to 42 are roughly divided into three types of "waiting for customers", "fluctuations" and "big hits".
The suggestive effect that is performed while waiting for customers is further divided into the types of "initialize", "operation notification", "demo", and "menu screen" as detailed execution timings. ) and the initialization of board accessories (timing 02).

Here, the frame accessory is a movable accessory provided in the "frame". The "frame" includes the front frame 2, the outer frame 4, the glass door 6, the front operation panel 7, and the like.
Also, the board accessory is a movable body accessory provided on the "board". A “board” includes the game board 3 .

Execution timings of the suggestive effects performed in the "operation notification" are divided into menu notification (timing 03) and volume/light amount notification (timing 04). For example, after the special symbol variation display game is finished with the number of reserved balls set to 0, the liquid crystal display device 36 is notified when no prize is won in the starting port 34 within a predetermined time such as 5 seconds. , and is realized by displaying an image including words such as "The menu screen will be displayed when the XX button is pressed!"
In addition, the sound volume/light amount notification is a notification effect that is performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 when there is no winning in the upper start port 34 for a predetermined time such as 10 seconds after the menu notification is executed. This is realized by displaying an image including words such as "You can change the volume and light intensity by pressing the XX button!" on the liquid crystal display device 36.

"Demonstration" is the timing during the display of the demo screen described above, and it is further divided into the display of the model introduction (timing 05), the display of the company logo (timing 06), and the display of the immersion alert (timing 07). .

The suggestive effects executed while the "menu screen" is displayed are those that are executed while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08), and those that are executed while the second layer of the menu screen is displayed. It is divided into those executed at (timing 09).
As described above, the execution timings of the suggestive effect executed during "waiting for customers" can be further divided into nine types of timings 01 to 09. FIG.

The initialization start timing (start of timing 01) can be comprehended by the effect control unit 24 by receiving a power-on command from the main control unit 20 . Timings 02 to 04 can be dealt with respectively because the effect control section 24 grasps the time required for initializing the frame role and the time required for initializing the board role.
Also, the demonstration start timing (the start of timing 05) can be grasped by the production control section 24 by receiving a standby screen display command or a demonstration display command from the main control section 20. FIG. Timings 06 and 07 can be dealt with respectively because the effect control unit 24 grasps the time required for the image effect of the model introduction and the time required for the image effect of the company logo.
During display of the menu screen, a signal from the menu button as one of the effect buttons is received in response to the depression of the button. As a result, the effect control unit 24 executes processing for displaying the menu screen on the liquid crystal display device 36 . As a result, the effect control unit 24 can grasp the timings (timings 08 and 09) during display of the first layer and the second layer of the menu screen.

The suggestive effect performed during "fluctuation" is further divided into timings of "before reach", "after reach", and "after end of reach".
"Before reach" includes the timing of winning (timing 10), the timing of low speed fluctuation (timing 11), the high speed fluctuation (timing 12), and one of the decoration patterns, for example, the left pattern is stopped. It is further classified into the first symbol stop time (timing 13), the second pseudo-run (timing 14), the third pseudo-run (timing 15), and the fourth pseudo-run (timing 16). In addition, although the number of pseudo-runs is four times as an example, there may be five or more pseudo-runs. In that case, an effect timing at which the suggestive effect can be executed is added as appropriate.

The "after reach" is, for example, when the left symbol is stopped and the right symbol is stopped, that is, when the second symbol is stopped, that is, when the reach is generated (timing 17), and after the normal reach is generated, for example, the middle symbol is stopped. There is a time (timing 18) during which the winning performance is executed. Furthermore, as "after reach", the title is being displayed after the occurrence of the first type super reach (timing 19), during the performance of the win (timing 20), and during the stimulating effect to inform whether the effect will develop ( Timing 21), during title display after the occurrence of the second type super reach (timing 22), and during execution of the win-win effect (timing 23).
In addition, in the first type super reach effect, a stimulating effect that informs whether the effect will develop or not may be executed, but if this lottery is won and the effect develops, the second type super will be executed. Reach. That is, the first type super reach is developed and the second type super reach is executed. Here, the 2nd type super ready-to-win is produced with a higher winning expectation than the 1st type super ready-to-win. For example, the above-mentioned super reach 4 is a super reach type having an effect mode that develops from the first type super reach to the second type super reach.

The timing of ``after the end of the ready-to-win'' includes the time of re-lottery performance (timing 24) and the time of stopping all patterns (timing 25), which is the timing at which the middle pattern is stopped while the left and right patterns are stopped, for example.

As can be understood from the above, the execution timings for the suggestive effects executed during the "fluctuation" are further divided into 16 types of timings 10-25.

The timing 10 as the winning (variation start) timing before reach can be grasped by the effect control unit 24 receiving a variation pattern designation command or a decorative design designation command. For each timing of timings 11 to 25, the production control unit 24 determines the chronological development (contents of production) based on the information included in the variation pattern designation command and the decorative design designation command, so it is possible to grasp it naturally. can.

Next, each timing belonging to "during the jackpot" will be described. During the big win includes the normal big win game in which the state does not change to the variable probability state after the big win game, but the variable probability big win game in which the state changes to the variable probability state after the big win game.
Timings belonging to "during the jackpot" are further divided into four types of "during the opening effect", "during the round", "during the ending of pattern A", and "during the ending of pattern B".

The "during the opening effect" can be divided into during the big hit notification effect (timing 26) and during the right hitting instruction (notification) (timing 27).
"During round" is divided into each round (1-7R). As an example, during the 1R game, the battle effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is being performed (timing 28), during the 2R game, the battle effect is being performed (timing 29), and during the 3R game, the battle effect is being performed ( Timing 30) and when over winning occurs (timing 31), during the 4R game during the victory / defeat performance (timing 32), during the 5R game during the short open V round (timing 33), during the 6R game During the character introduction effect (timing 34) and during the 7R game can be divided into during the character introduction effect (timing 35).

Over-winning means that more game balls win the large winning opening 50 than the prescribed winning number which is predetermined as the winning number that can win the large winning opening 50 during one round. . For example, when the prescribed number of winning balls in one round is 10, if the 10th and 11th balls reach the vicinity of the big winning hole 50 at approximately the same time with 9 winning balls, the prize will be over-winning. It could be possible.
That is, the timing 31 is the timing triggered by the occurrence of the over winning.

The victory/defeat performance is, for example, a performance in which characters confront each other on the liquid crystal display device 36, and it is conceivable that a defeat performance is executed in the case of a normal big win and a victory performance is executed in the case of a probability variable big win. In addition, when the game is disguised as a normal big win, but internally it is a variable probability big win, the player may be informed that the variable probability big win game is being played by executing a winning effect.

The V round is a specific round of 1 to 7R, and is a round in which a specific prize winning opening is opened for a predetermined period of time to make the game state after the jackpot game a variable state by winning a game ball. . That is, by winning a game ball into a specific winning hole opened for a predetermined time during a round set as a V round, it is possible to transition to a probability variable state after a big hit game.

As "during the ending of pattern A", at the time of the mode display effect in which the transition mode after the big hit is displayed (timing 36), at the time of displaying the attention of forgetting to take the IC (timing 37), at the time of displaying the company logo (timing 38) can be separated.

In addition, as "during the ending of pattern B", during the mode display effect in which the transition mode after the big hit is displayed (timing 39), during the display of the attention of forgetting to take the IC (timing 40), during the display of the immersion attention (timing 40) It can be divided into a timing 41) and a corporate logo display (timing 42).
As described above, at 42 kinds of timings indicated by timings 01 to 42, each suggested effect of the preceding effects 01 to 21 can be executed. In the following, specific presentation modes will be exemplified and explained.
It should be noted that the battle effects and victory/defeat effects that are executed in each round are only examples, and the effects need not always be executed in this manner. Further, the number of rounds (1 to 7R) is also an example, and a normal jackpot or a probability variable jackpot that allows a game of 1 to 10R may be used.

The start timing of the big win, that is, the timing 26 as the start timing of the opening effect can be grasped by the effect control section 24 by receiving the big win start command. As for the timing 27, the arrival of the timing 27 can be known naturally because the performance control unit 24 grasps the time required for the big hit notification performance.
Timings 28 to 35 as the start timings of 1R to 7R can be grasped by the presentation control section 24 receiving a round start command and a round end command from the main control section 20 .
For each timing (timings 36 to 38) belonging to the ending of pattern A and each timing (timings 39 to 42) belonging to the ending of pattern B, a jackpot end command is received from the main control unit 20, The production control unit 24 can grasp this.

[9-3. Production example]

FIG. 84 exemplifies the relationship between 19 types of suggestive effects (effects 01 to 19) and 42 types of timings (timings 01 to 42). A circle mark in the drawing indicates that a suggestive effect is performed. Specifically, the effect 01 can be executed at timings 02-09.

(Direction 01)

As a specific example of the production 01, a suggestive production using a frame accessory can be considered. For example, a set value suggesting effect is performed in which the frame accessory vibrates. The timings are timings 02 to 09, and are executed in the gaming machine 1 in the state of "waiting for customers".
The game machine 1 detects that the player has touched an operator such as a button for the game machine 1 set to "waiting for customers", and draws a lottery as to whether or not the performance 01 can be executed. When the player wins the lottery, a suggestive effect as the effect 01 is executed.
Here, the higher the set value Ve is set, the higher the winning probability regarding whether or not to execute the performance 01 is set, so that the player's willingness to play the game machine 1 on which the performance 01 is executed can be enhanced.

FIG. 85 shows a flowchart of an example of a specific processing flow.
The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) determines whether or not the current timing is appropriate for executing the effect 01 in step S3101. That is, if the current situation is at any of the timings 02 to 09 (S3101: Y), the process proceeds to the following step S3102. end the processing of

In step S3102, the effect control unit 24 executes a branching process depending on whether the execution flag is 0 or not. As for the execution flag, "0" indicates that the effect 01 has not been executed, and "1" indicates that the effect 01 has already been executed.

Each process for the suggested effect 01 shown in FIG. 85 can be executed at appropriate places in, for example, the effect control main process (FIG. 41) and the effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 44). In this case, after executing the processing from step S3101 shown in FIG. 85, the processing from step S3101 is executed again after several milliseconds. That is, for example, the series of processing shown in FIG. 85 can be executed many times until the gaming machine 1 that has transitioned to the customer waiting state once transitions from the customer waiting state to another state. sexuality arises. If the process of FIG. 85 is executed at intervals of several milliseconds, and the lottery for execution of the effect 01 is won each time, the effect 01 will be executed all the time. The accessory will continue to vibrate continuously, resulting in a suggestion performance 01 that is not appropriate for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the execution flag is "0" in step S3102, and if it is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3103. Do the process to change. If the execution flag is "1" (S3102: N), the process of FIG. 85 is terminated without performing subsequent processes. As a result, the effect 01 as the suggestive effect can be prevented from occurring excessively, and can be displayed appropriately.

Note that each process shown in FIG. 85 does not include the process of resetting the execution flag to "0". The execution flag is reset to 0, for example, when it is determined that the state of waiting for a customer will transition to another state. For example, when a variation pattern designation command is received from the main control unit 20, it is determined that the state of waiting for a customer will be exited. Set "0". As a result, when the state transitions to the customer waiting state again, the process shown in FIG. 85 is executed, and the effect 01 as a suggestive effect can be executed as appropriate. In other words, the effect 01 may be executed only once each time the state transitions to the customer waiting state.

Note that the execution flags also appear in each suggestive effect described below, but each suggestive effect has a different execution flag. That is, the execution flag used for the effect 01 and the execution flag used for the effect 02 are different flags.
In addition, the game machine 1 does not have execution flags for suggestive effects that are not implemented. When there is only one suggestive effect implemented in the gaming machine 1 (for example, when the gaming machine 1 is capable of executing only the effect 01 as the suggestive effect), it is sufficient to have one execution flag. , needless to say, there is no need to consider the fact that each effect has a different execution flag.

The effect control unit 24, which sets the execution flag to 1, determines whether or not the manipulator that triggers the effect 01 is operated in the following step S3104. In the present embodiment, the manipulator that serves as an activation trigger is, for example, the effect button 13 or the like.

If the manipulator is not operated (S3104: N), the effect control section 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG.
In addition, when the manipulator is operated (in the case of S3104: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the setting value Ve from the RAM 243 or the like in subsequent step S3105, and performs a lottery according to the setting value Ve in step S3106. . The winning probability corresponding to the set value Ve for the effect 01 is stored in the ROM 242 or the like in the form of a table, for example. Each table used in subsequent effects is also stored in the ROM 242 or the like, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, in step S3107, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery as to whether or not the effect 01 can be executed has been won. If the selection is lost (S3107: N), the effect control unit 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG. When winning (in the case of S3107: Y), the effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for vibrating the frame accessory in order to execute effect 01 in step S3108, and executes suggestive effect 01 shown in FIG. End the process.

As described above, once the suggestive effect as the effect 01 is executed, the lottery is not performed again until the game machine 1 is played and the state is again changed to "waiting for customers". The suggestion effect as 01 is not performed.
As a result, the processing load of the gaming machine 1 related to the execution of the lottery and the effect 01 is reduced.

Note that the effect 01 is not displayed during the period of the timing 01 when the initialization process of the frame role is executed. This is because during the initialization process of the frame role used in production 01, there is a moment when the variables necessary for driving the frame role are in an inconsistent state. This is because there is a possibility that the game machine 1 will not operate normally due to the performance. That is, if the production 01 is a suggestive production such as vibrating the frame role, it is not executed during the initialization period (timing 01) of the frame role, thereby preventing the occurrence of troubles. .

(Direction 02)

A suggestive effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 can be considered as a specific example of the effect 02 . As for the content of the effect, for example, a certain score is displayed, and the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the score such as 100 points (out of 100 points) is displayed.

The suggestive effect as the effect 02 is executed in the gaming machine 1 in the state of "waiting for customers" or in the gaming machine 1 in the state of "before reach".
As an example, in the table shown in FIG. 84, the suggestive effects as the effect 02 are the sound volume/light amount notification (timing 04), the display of the model introduction (timing 05), and the display of the company logo in the state of "waiting for customers". (Timing 06) and during the display of immersive attention (timing 07), and while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08) in the state before reaching, which is still fluctuating, the trigger for the start of fluctuation It can be executed at the time of winning (timing 10), the time of low speed fluctuation (timing 11), and the time of high speed fluctuation (timing 12).

It should be noted that the menu notification (timing 03) is an effect that is executed when no winning to the starting port 34 occurs within a predetermined time such as 5 seconds when the number of pending balls is 0, for example. is playing (that is, while the shooting operation handle 15 is being held). In particular, when the game is played for a long time, there is a high possibility that the timing of the menu notification will come several times during the game.
The menu notification is an effect that makes the player recognize that the game ball is not constantly entering the upper starting port 34, and even if the suggestive effect as the effect 02 is performed at such timing, the player will not be notified. It is not known whether the effect will be effective or not, and there is a risk that the effect may lead to a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, at the timing of the menu notification, which is the timing 03, the main suggestive effect, which is the effect 02, is not performed.

In addition, the sound volume/light amount notification (timing 04) is an effect that is executed when no winning to the upper starting port 34 occurs for a relatively long period of time such as 15 seconds when the number of held balls is 0. Therefore, it is less likely to be executed while the player is playing. That is, there is a high possibility that the player is taking a rest with his hand off the shooting operation handle 15 . Therefore, it is possible to expect the effect of returning the player to the game state by performing the main suggestion effect at such timing.

When the suggestive effect as the effect 02 is performed while waiting for a customer, it may be executed in response to the player touching the effect button 13 or the like. This assumes that the player accidentally touches the effect button 13 or the like of the game machine 1 while checking each machine while walking along the aisle in order to decide which game machine to play.
When the suggestive effect as the effect 02 is performed at such a timing, the point display on the liquid crystal display device 36 presented to the player by this suggestive effect contains an element of the player's trial of luck (or acceptance). there is That is, the player performs an operation for generating the effect 02 on each gaming machine 1 equipped with the main effect 02, and the player selects the game machine 1 in which the points displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 are high points. It is conceivable to start the game as auspicious.

In view of such a situation, while the first layer of the menu screen is being displayed (timing 08), it is a timing that can be reached by the player performing only one operation, so this suggestive effect is executed. It can be said that the timing is suitable for
On the other hand, while the second layer of the menu screen is being displayed (timing 09), it is a timing that cannot be reached unless the player performs two or more operations. There is a possibility that the timing is not suitable for
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the suggestive effect as the effect 02 is not executed at timing 09 .

An example of a specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG.
Effect control unit 24, first in step S3111, determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for execution of effect 02. That is, if the current situation is any of the timings 04-08 and 10-12, the process proceeds to step S3112, otherwise the series of processing shown in FIG. 86 ends.

If there is no problem with the timing of executing the effect 02, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is 0 in step S3112.
The execution flag is set to "1" when the effect 02 has already been executed, and is set to "0" when it has not been executed. The execution flags in the subsequent performances have the same meaning, and are set to "1" when executed, and set to "0" when not executed.

If the execution flag is "1", the effect control section 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG.
On the other hand, when the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3113, acquires the set value Ve in the following step S3114, and responds to the set value Ve in step S3115. hold a lottery. Thereby, it is determined whether or not to execute the effect 02. Incidentally, in the lottery, not only whether or not to execute the effect 02 but also the number of points to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when executing is selected. Which number of points is likely to win depends on the set value Ve as described above.
The winning probability and the number of points to be displayed for the effect 02 based on the set value Ve are stored in the ROM 242 as a table, for example.

The effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the previous lottery result is won in the following step S3116, and ends the process when the lottery is lost.
When the execution lottery of the production 02 is won, the production control unit 24 transmits a command to the production control unit 40 in step S3117.
As a result, the points are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the suggestion effect as the effect 02 is realized in the game machine 1. - 特許庁

A specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 123 . FIG. 123 is arranged in chronological order from top to bottom of the drawing. The time chart describes the transition of the game state of the gaming machine 1 from the state immediately before the customer waiting to the customer waiting. Also, the time required from transitioning to customer waiting to transitioning to each state is described. For example, when transitioning to waiting for customers, first, waiting for the start of fluctuation is started, and the liquid crystal display device 36 becomes a pattern stop image state. After the symbol stop state continues for 15 seconds, the control for performing the operation notification is started, and an image showing the menu notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. FIG. After another 15 seconds have passed, an image showing the sound volume/light amount notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

FIG. 123 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in each state. Reference numerals (a) to (f) are assigned to each image to indicate the corresponding relationship with each state.

A specific example of executing the effect 02 in the gaming machine 1 in which each image shown in FIG. 123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 will be described. For example, while a symbol still image such as image (a) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, or while a menu notification or volume/light amount notification such as image (b) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. While you are in, the setting value suggestion effect is not performed.
However, when the player presses the effect button 13 in order to display the menu screen in the state where the menu information is being displayed as shown in the image (b), the set value suggesting effect is performed.

123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, when the player presses the effect button 13, the first layer of the menu screen such as the image (g) in FIG. It is displayed on the display device 36 . That is, the timing at which the image (g) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is timing 08 shown in FIG.

In the image (g), a score of "72 points" is displayed together with a menu that can be selected by the player using the manipulator. As described above, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the score displayed.

(Direction 03)

A specific example of the effect 03 is a suggestive effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 while the customer is waiting and the demo screen is being displayed. In this embodiment, timings 05 to 07 are set during the demonstration screen display.
For example, the appearance probability of a specific image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 while the demonstration screen is being displayed increases as the set value Ve increases. Therefore, it is possible to decide whether or not to play the gaming machine 1 based on whether or not the specific image effect appears.
In particular, by executing the image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 while the demo screen is being displayed, it is possible to motivate the player to play even if the game machine 1 is not in the middle of a game, so that the seat becomes vacant. It is possible to reduce the number of gaming machines 1 used, and to increase the operating rate of the gaming machines 1.例文帳に追加

Moreover, such an effect with a setting difference may be displayed after a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation display games have been performed after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Specifically, until 500 decorative symbol variation display games are completed, the image effect is executed at a constant probability regardless of the set value Ve, and after 500 decorative symbol variation display games are completed, the demo screen is displayed. , the image effect with a different appearance rate depending on the set value Ve may be executed. Further, the specific image effect may not appear until 500 decorative symbol variation display games are completed.
With such a configuration, even if the gaming machine 1 is left after being played for a certain period of time (after at least 500 decorative symbol variation display games have been executed), the demo screen can be displayed during the display of the demo screen. By executing the image effect, the player's desire to play can be aroused, and the gaming machine 1 can be put back into operation.

An example of a specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 87 shows an example (S2130f) of each command process (S2130) in the command handling process (S2106) of FIG. It is a thing.
Specifically, the effect control unit 24 performs a process of setting the execution flag to "1" in step S3121. This execution flag is provided separately from the execution flag in each of the effects described above. Similar execution flags are used in subsequent effects (each effect after effect 04), but different flags are used for the respective effects.
Although not shown in FIG. 87, the execution flag for effect 03 is written back to "0" at the timing when the demonstration screen display ends. Specifically, the flag is written back to "0" when, for example, a decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36 by winning a game ball in the upper starting port 34. FIG.

Subsequently, in step S3122, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the number of special symbol variation display games executed after power-on is 500 or more. If the number of special symbol variation display games executed after power-on is less than 500, the effect control section 24 transmits a command for normal demo screen display to the liquid crystal control section 40 in step S3127. As a result, a normal demonstration screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 instead of the suggestive effect.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of special symbol variation display games is 500 or more, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3123, and performs a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3124. In the lottery process, the winning probability is set higher as the set value Ve is higher.

Next, in step S3125, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the player has won the previous lottery. 40. On the other hand, if the previous lottery was lost, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for normal demonstration screen display in step S3127.

By performing the above-described processing, any demonstration screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player visually recognizes the type of the demonstration screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, thereby determining the set value Ve. Estimation is possible.

(Direction 04)

A specific example of the effect 04 is a suggestive effect generated when a game ball wins a prize (timing 10), an effect of moving a movable accessory, and the like. In addition, even when winning a prize, it is executed only when winning a prize, which is the first variation start timing after the power is turned on. Further, the type of effect is set as "setting value change suggesting effect".
That is, the player plays the gaming machine 1 in which the decorative symbol variation display game has not been performed even once after the opening of the hall, and by confirming whether or not the effect 04 occurs, the set value Ve of the previous day is increased. It can be estimated whether the setting value Ve has been changed to a new setting value Ve or whether the setting value Ve of the previous day has been left unchanged without being changed.

By making such an effect 04 executable, it is possible to create a situation in which even a gaming machine 1 with a low ball rate the previous day is likely to be selected as a game target. That is, the operating rate of the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

Note that the effect 04 may be configured to always occur at the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game after changing the set value Ve (that is, at the time of the first winning).
Further, for example, when the set value is changed from 4 to 4, the effect 04 may be executed, or the effect 04 may not be executed because the set value Ve is the same. may be
Further, as a configuration opposite to the configuration described above, the effect 04 is generated at the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game after the power is turned on without changing the set value Ve. good too.
Note that the button may be treated as a movable accessory that can vibrate, and the effect 04 may be executed by vibrating the button.

An example of a specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. Incidentally, although this is only an example, when the effect control unit 24 receives the decorative design designation command from the main control unit 20, a process for causing the effect 04 to appear (S2130b) is executed.
In this example, the process for executing the effect 04 is added to the process (FIG. 43C) executed when the effect control unit 24 receives the decorative design designation command. Accordingly, details of the portion described using FIG. 43C are omitted to avoid duplication.
By executing steps S2132 to S2136, the effect control unit 24 confirms receipt of the variation pattern designation command, registers the scenario for correcting the character origin, sets the pattern variation flag, performs variation start processing, and deletes the variation pattern designation command. I do.

Subsequently, in step S3131, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the special symbol variation display game is the first variation after the power is turned on.
If it is the first change after the power is turned on (S3131: Y), the effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for executing effect 04 for moving the movable body accessory in subsequent step S3132.
On the other hand, if it is not the first change after power-on (S3131:N), the effect control section 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG.

(Direction 05)

As a specific example of the effect 05, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 and a sound effect using the sound generator 46a are executed. At each of the timings 10 to 13 before reach, for example, in the conversation between the characters appearing in the image rendering executed in the game machine 1, the normal dialogue is changed to the specific dialogue for suggestive rendering with a predetermined probability. The suggested production changed to is executed. The predetermined probability may be different depending on the set value Ve (that is, the higher the set value, the higher the predetermined probability), or the same probability regardless of the set value Ve. When the same probability is set, a suggestive effect may be provided in which the contents of the lines and the like change depending on the set value Ve.

It is determined whether or not to perform the effect 05 each time the decorative pattern variation display game is started, and it is appropriately executed according to the determination result, so that it is possible to appropriately determine whether to continue the game of the gaming machine 1. can be provided to the player.

An example of specific processing contents is shown in FIG.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3141 whether the timing is suitable for executing the effect 05, that is, whether it corresponds to any of the timings 10 to 13.
If it is determined that the timing is not appropriate (S3141: N), the effect control unit 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing is appropriate (S3141: Y), the effect control unit 24 checks whether the execution flag is "0" in step S3142, and if the execution flag is not "0", the process is performed. finish.
When the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets "1" to the execution flag in step S3143, and performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute effect 05 in subsequent step S3144. In this example, the effect 05 as the suggestive effect is executed with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 branches the process in step S3145 depending on whether or not the lottery is won. If the election is lost, the effect control unit 24 terminates each process shown in FIG. Make appropriate conversation choices. In conversation selection, one is selected from a plurality of conversations with different selection probabilities according to the set value Ve. For example, three types of conversations, conversation 1, conversation 2, and conversation 3, are prepared as a plurality of conversations, and with a set value of 1, conversations 1 to 3 are selected with probabilities of 65%, 30%, and 5%, respectively. With a set value of 6, conversations 1 to 3 are selected with probabilities of 10%, 15%, and 75%, respectively.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the set value is likely to be 6 when the conversation 3 can be visually recognized, and the set value 1 is likely to be set when the conversation 1 is visually recognizable. Recognize that there is a high probability

(Direction 06)

As a specific example of the effect 06, a suggestive effect is performed using an optical display device 45a such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device at each timing (timings 10 to 25) during fluctuation. Specifically, an effect is produced by lighting the optical display device 45a for a certain period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the emission color is changed according to the set value Ve. The setting value Ve may uniquely determine the emission color, or the setting value Ve may be configured so that the emission color that is likely to be selected differs.
Further, when the game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of light sources such as LEDs as the light display device 45a, the light source used for the effect may be changed according to the set value Ve, or different light sources may be used for the effect depending on the set value Ve. You can configure it to be easy.
Moreover, not only the light source used for the effect may be changed by the setting value Ve from among various LEDs provided as the light display device 45a, but also the emission color may be changed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned fixed time may be changed by the set value Ve. In addition, it may be configured such that light emitting effect is performed at a plurality of timings among timings 10 to 25 during one variation, and the number of times of effect during one variation is changed according to the set value Ve. Specifically, in the case of a setting value of 1, the lighting effect is likely to be performed at 1 to 3 timings out of timings 10 to 25, and in the case of a setting value of 6, 6 to 8 locations out of timings 10 to 25. It is configured so that the light emitting effect is easily performed at the timing of . Of course, an effect may be obtained by further combining the above-described emission colors and the number of the optical display devices 45a used for the effect.

As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation, as more light emission effects are performed during one variation. Therefore, even if an effect with a low degree of expectation is being executed during the change, when the suggestive effect as the effect 06 appears, the player can continue the game without losing interest.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that, depending on the case, the detailed description of the processing similar to that of each example of effect thus far will be omitted.
The effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is suitable for executing effect 06 in step S3151, and determines whether or not the execution flag is "0" in step S3152.
If it is determined that the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3153, acquires the set value Ve in step S3154, and sets the set value in step S3155. A lottery is held according to Ve.

In this lottery, based on the set value Ve, which light source is to be used, what kind of display mode (lighting pattern such as blinking once or blinking twice), etc. are determined.
In the lottery, there may be a lottery result that none of the light sources is turned on (=failed).

Subsequently, in step S3156, the effect control unit 24 branches based on the result of the lottery, and in the case of winning, executes scenario registration for light effect in step S3157.
Through such processing, the effect 06 as the suggestive effect is executed.
Note that the execution flag changed to "1" in step S3153 is cleared to "0" when the timing is completed. For example, when the effect 06 is executed at timing 10, which is the timing of winning (variation start), and the execution flag is changed to "1", the period as timing 10 ends and the next phase (for example, timing 11) , the execution flag is returned to "0". As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect 06 again at the timing 11 .

(Direction 07)

As a specific example of the effect 07, the timing (timing 13) at which the first decorative pattern among the left, middle, and right decorative patterns stopped and displayed in a specific area on the liquid crystal display device 36 stops. , the timing of the second and third quasi-runs (timings 14 and 15), and the timing (timing 16) at which the second decorative pattern is stopped, the type of the stopped decorative pattern corresponds to the set value Ve. Perform a suggestive production that will be.
For example, when the set value is 6, the probability that the reach effect (reach variation pattern) in which both the first decorative pattern stopped and the second stopped decorative pattern are set to 6 is executed is different. It is set higher than the set value (1 to 5).

Also, in a state where the ready-to-win effect is not executed (that is, through the normal variation pattern) but all the three decorative patterns are stopped, a specific arrangement order (for example, the left pattern is 1, the middle pattern is 2, and the right pattern is 3). The suggestive effect may be performed by making the rate of appearance of the decorative pattern) different depending on the set value Ve.
Even if the result of the ready-to-win effect is off, if the stop mode is such that a high set value is expected, the player's desire to play the game is not lost.

Further, when all the decorative symbols are stopped through the ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved, a difference corresponding to the set value Ve may be provided in the appearance rate of the decorative symbols that have resulted in the big win. For example, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that three decorative patterns imitating 6 will result in a big win.
Even if the type of win is unwilling to the player, if the stop mode is such that a high set value is expected, the player's desire to play the game is not lost.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 shows an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command handling process (S2106).
First, the effect control unit 24 executes each process of steps S2132 to S2134. Since these processes have already been described, a detailed description is omitted.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3161, and executes fluctuation start processing in subsequent step S3162.

The fluctuation start processing in this example is performed based on the set value Ve. That is, it is determined whether or not to perform a lottery for the variation pattern based on the set value Ve (that is, it is determined whether or not to include the set value suggestion in the variation pattern), and if it is determined to include it, it is based on the set value Ve A variation pattern lottery is performed, and processing (such as scenario registration and command transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 40) for starting the variation pattern selected as a result of the lottery is performed.
As a result, for example, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, the decorative symbols corresponding to the set value Ve are tense. Further, when displaying a state in which three decorative symbols are arranged to notify a big hit, the decorative symbols corresponding to the set value Ve are stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the lottery for the variation pattern using the set value Ve is not necessarily performed in the ready-to-win performance or the big hit notification performance. Therefore, part of the ready-to-win effect and the big-hit notification effect is performed by lottery for a variation pattern that does not depend on the set value Ve. In this case, a variation pattern is selected by lottery based on the contents of the variation pattern specification command and the decorative design specification command received from the main control unit 20 without using the set value Ve.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136, and ends the series of processes shown in FIG.

(Direction 08)

As a specific example of the production 08, in the "normal fluctuation 4s", which is the shortest production among the loss fluctuation patterns, the higher the set value, the larger the number of the decorative pattern that is stopped. The variation pattern of "Normal variation 4s" is one aspect of the suggestive effect.
Also, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the decorative pattern corresponding to the value of the set value Ve is easily stopped. Specifically, if the set value is 3, the decorative pattern imitating 3 is likely to stop.

In addition, in the variation pattern of deviation via normal reach, it may be a mode in which similar decorative symbols are likely to stop.
The execution timing of the suggestive effect includes the time when the second symbol is stopped (timing 17) and the time of the hit-depressing effect when the normal reach occurs (timing 18).

In the effect 08, depending on the mode of the decorative pattern to be stopped even if the variation pattern is not correct, a high set value of expectations can be obtained, and it is possible to prevent the decline of the willingness to play.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. Note that description of each process in steps S2132 to S2134 is omitted.
The effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3161, and performs fluctuation start processing in subsequent step S3162.
In the fluctuation start process, when the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation 4s" that does not include the ready-to-win effect, the decoration stop pattern is determined according to the set value Ve, and the scenario registration and the liquid crystal control unit 40 are performed accordingly. commands are sent to the
As a result, the decorative pattern selected according to the set value Ve is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 36 so that the player can guess the set value Ve.

(Direction 09)

As a specific example of the effect 09, during the title display of the first type super reach (timing 19) and during the title display of the second type super reach (timing 22), a danger pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as one of the title images. When a special image (an image with a high expected value) is displayed, the odds of winning the jackpot are different according to the set value Ve.
Not only the liquid crystal display device 36, but also the sound generator 46a, the optical display device 45a, and the like are used for this suggestive presentation.
For example, the higher the set value Ve, the lower the probability of winning after the suggestion effect appears.

Further, although the set values 2 to 6 have the same probability of winning the big win, the probability of winning the big win may be set to 100% for the set value 1. - 特許庁That is, when a special image such as a danger pattern is displayed as a title image but the game is not a big hit but a loss, the player may lose motivation to play. Since the possibility of the set value being 1, which is disadvantageous to the player, disappears, it is possible to prevent the decrease in motivation to play and to improve the motivation to play. That is, even if the result of the lottery is a big win or a loss, it is possible to increase the desire to play the game.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. Note that description of each process of steps S2132 to S2134 and S2136 is omitted.
After acquiring the set value Ve in step S3161, the effect control unit 24 executes a variation start process based on the set value Ve in step S3162.
In the fluctuation start process, a lottery for an effect mode corresponding to the set value Ve is performed.
For example, when the set value Ve is 1 and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "lost", the lottery is carried out so as to display the title in another mode without displaying the title of the danger pattern.
Further, when the set value Ve is 6 and the result of the jackpot lottery is "lost", a lottery with a possibility of selecting the title display of the danger pattern is performed.

For example, it can be realized by using a table as shown in FIG. For the first type Super Reach, for example, three types of title screens, title 1, title 2, and title 3 (danger pattern), are prepared. Title 2 has higher reliability (possibility of winning the jackpot lottery) than Title 1, and Title 3 has higher reliability than Title 2.

Fig. 92 shows the distribution probabilities of titles 1, 2, and 3 when the jackpot lottery is lost and the first type super reach is executed (when the lottery for whether or not to execute the first type super reach is won). is shown. Specifically, the numerical value of the numerator when the denominator is 65536 is described, and the deviation, set value Ve = 1, 45536 described in the column of title 1 appears with a probability of 45536/65536 showing. In addition, the rightmost column is the appearance rate of title 3, which is calculated in consideration of the probability of winning each jackpot according to the set value Ve, the probability of appearance of the first type super reach, and the like. For example, if the set value Ve = 2, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery, winning the execution of the first type super reach, and winning the title 3 where the danger pattern appears is 1.5e-6 ( 1.5×10^-6).

As can be seen from FIG. 92, the reliability (expectation of winning the jackpot lottery) when title 3 including the danger pattern as the first type super reach appears on the liquid crystal display device 36 is higher than the set value of 6. The set value 1 is set higher.
That is, as described above, when a special image such as a danger pattern is displayed as a title image at the set value 1, a big hit determination performance is provided, and at a set value 6, the same performance is not a big win determination performance.

(Direction 10)

As a specific example of the effect 10, the rate of appearance of a specific reach (for example, the first type super reach or the second type super reach) is changed depending on the value of the set value Ve.
The performance timings are the timings (timings 19 to 21) related to the first type super reach and the timings related to the second type super reach (timings 22 and 23).
Not only the liquid crystal display device 36, but also the sound generator 46a, the optical display device 45a, and the like are used for this suggestive effect.

For example, at least one of a plurality of reach modes as the first type super reach has a different appearance rate according to odd/even of the set value Ve. Also, the higher the super reach appears in succession, the higher the possibility of the high set value.
As a result, even if the Super Reach appears and does not come off, the high set value of expectations is heightened by the continuous appearance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation for playing the game.

A specific processing example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command handling process (S2106).
The effect control unit 24 executes each process of steps S2132 to S2134. A detailed description of each process is omitted. Subsequently, in step S3171, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the special symbol variation display game to be performed from now on is the first type super ready-to-win. This information can be obtained by analyzing the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20 .

If it is the first type super reach (S3171: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3172, and determines whether or not the set value Ve is an even number in subsequent step S3173.
If it is an even number (S3172: Y), the effect control unit 24 selects a table for even numbers (step S3174). Moreover, when it is an odd number (S3172: N), the effect control unit 24 selects a table for odd numbers (step S3175).

Next, the effect control unit 24 performs lottery for determining the effect mode (variation mode) based on each table in step S3176, and starts variation in step S3177 based on the effect mode selected as a result of the lottery. Specifically, a process of transmitting a command for executing the decorative symbol variation display game to the liquid crystal control unit 40, a process of registering a scenario for performing each effect using the speaker 46, the optical display device 45a, etc. is executed in step S3177.

Also, in step S3171, if the special symbol variation display game to be performed from now on is not the first type super reach (S3171: N case), the effect control unit 24 performs processing and lottery according to the variation mode to be executed in step S3178. , and variation is started in step S3177.

After starting the variation, the effect control unit 24 executes deletion processing of the variation pattern designation command in step S2136.

In this way, by selecting different tables depending on whether the set value Ve is even or odd (steps S3174 and S3175), it is possible to differentiate between the variation mode that tends to appear for even numbers and the variation mode that tends to appear for odd numbers. . As a result, the player can guess the set value Ve through the behavior of the gaming machine 1 .

(Direction 11)

As a specific example of the effect 11, a suggestive effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 and the effect button 13 is performed during execution of the win-lose effect in the second type super reach. For example, when the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an image instructing the pressing of the performance button 13 as one of the win-win performances, an image is displayed depending on whether or not the promotion performance serves as a suggestive performance. are different (for example, the wording indicating button press is different).
The fanning performance as a suggestive performance is configured to appear only at a set value of 6, for example, with a probability of 100% for a variable probability big hit.

In this case, by the appearance of the stimulating effect as the suggestive effect, it is ensured that a jackpot such as a probability variable 10R is won, and the set value Ve is 6, which is the highest set value. It is possible to remarkably improve the desire to play.
It should be noted that the term "determined" of the set value here does not mean that the value that was previously indeterminate inside the gaming machine 1 is determined at this moment, but that the value is determined as an already existing value inside the gaming machine 1. This means that the set value Ve that has been set becomes clear to the player, and it means that the set value Ve that has been estimated for the player is fixed. In addition, not only when the assumed set value Ve is narrowed down to one number, but also when it is narrowed down to a number other than a specific number, it is described as "confirmed". Specifically, it is used such as "confirmed to be an odd number" or "confirmed to be 2 or more". When using the word "determined" in the following description, it is used with the same meaning.

It should be noted that it is not essential to determine that the set value is 6. For example, it may be configured to determine that the set value is any one of the set values 4 to 6, or may be configured to determine that the set value is not 1. It is also conceivable to In addition, even if it is not confirmed, the high set value may be a presentation that suggests that the image is intense.

Concretely, an example of executing an effect in which lines are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as the winning effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 94A is a table showing lines 1 to 4 that can be selected for each set value Ve. When the set value Ve is 1, either speech 1 or speech 3 is selected and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 . Also, when the set value Ve is 2, the line 1 is selected (that is, the lines 2 to 4 are not displayed).

Since the line 1 is selected regardless of the set value Ve, it does not provide a suggestive effect. Dialog 2 can be selected only when the set value Ve is 6, and when the effect is selected, the set value Ve is determined to be 6.
Line 3 can be selected when the set value Ve is 1, 3, or 5, and it is determined that the set value Ve is an odd number. Also, the line 4 can be selected when the set value Ve is 4, 5, or 6, and it is determined that the set value Ve is 4 or more.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 94B. Note that detailed description of the above-described processing is omitted as appropriate.
The effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for executing effect 11 in step S3181, and determines whether or not the execution flag is "0" in subsequent step S3182.
When the timing is appropriate for executing effect 11 and the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3183, and sets the set value in step S3184. Ve is obtained, and branch processing according to the set value Ve is performed in subsequent step S3185.

If the set value Ve is 1 or 3, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the lines 1 and 3 in step S3186. At this time, the speech 3 may be less likely to be selected than the speech 1 (that is, the selection probability is low).
When the set value Ve is 2, the effect control unit 24 selects the line 1 in step S3187.
When the set value Ve is 4, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the lines 1 and 4 in step S3188.
When the set value Ve is 5, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the lines 1, 3, and 4 in step S3189.
When the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the lines 1, 2 and 4 in step S3190.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3191.

(Direction 12)

As a specific example of the production 12, a suggestive production is performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 at the time of re-lottery production (timing 24) after winning the big win. At this time, the appearance probability of the decorative pattern before the re-lottery and the appearance probability of the decorative pattern after the re-lottery are changed according to the set value Ve.
For example, as a re-lottery effect, from a state in which decorative patterns (for example, 2, 4, 6, 8) indicating a "normal jackpot" that does not transition to a variable probability state after the jackpot is complete, a "variable jackpot" that transitions to a variable probability state after the jackpot is completed ” (for example, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9). If the set value Ve is 6, the probability of changing to the decorative pattern of 7 is increased.

In such a game machine 1, even in the case of being promoted to the ``probability variable big hit'' through the re-lottery performance, the player is happy and sad depending on whether the pattern changes to 1 or 7. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect with high game interest.

A specific processing example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 shows an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command handling process (S2106).
After executing the processes of steps S2132, S2133, and S2134, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of drawing a lottery for the variation mode of decorative symbols based on the hit type and variation pattern in step S3201.
By the time the processing of step S3201 is executed, the effect control unit 24 has received the decorative pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command from the main control unit 20. Therefore, as described above, the effect control unit 24 has acquired information on the hit type (distinction between loss, normal 4R, probability variation 10R, etc.) and variation pattern (normal 4s, super reach 1, etc.). In step S3201, by using these pieces of information, a lottery is drawn as to what type of decorative symbol variation display game is to be performed on the liquid crystal display device 36. FIG.

Subsequently, in step S3202, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the variation mode selected as a result of the previous variation mode lottery includes re-lottery. When it is the variation mode which does not execute re-lottery, production control section 24 does the processing which makes fluctuation start with step S3205, executes deletion of fluctuation pattern specification command with step S2136.

On the other hand, when it is the variation mode which performs re-lottery, the production|presentation control part 24 acquires the setting value Ve by step S3203, and performs the process according to the setting value Ve by following step S3204. Specifically, a lottery process is performed for decorative symbols to be stop-displayed to the player before the re-lottery and decorative symbols to be presented to the player after the re-lottery according to the set value Ve.

A specific description will be given with reference to FIG.
FIG. 96 is an example of a table used for lottery of decorative symbols to be stop-displayed to the player via the liquid crystal display device 36. FIG. In the re-lottery production, there is a production mode in which the display on the liquid crystal display device 36 is changed from a decorative pattern indicating "normal jackpot" as a promotion success pattern to a decorative pattern indicating "probability variable jackpot", and a promotion failure pattern "normal". A performance mode is prepared in which the decorative pattern indicating the "big win" is displayed again to the same decorative pattern indicating the "normal big win". FIG. 96 is a table referred to when executing the promotion success pattern. Numerical values in the figure indicate the selection probability of each decorative pattern, and the unit is %.

As illustrated, the decorative pattern is selected according to the set value Ve. For example, when the set value Ve is 1, the decorative symbols before the re-lottery have a 60% probability of selecting "2", a 20% probability of selecting "4", and a "6". The probability is 10%, and the probability that "8" is selected is 10%. Further, when the set value Ve is 1, the decorative pattern after re-lottery has a 70% probability of selecting "1", a 10% probability of selecting "3", and selects "5". The probability is 10%, the probability that "7" is selected is 5%, and the probability that "9" is selected is 5%.
That is, when the set value Ve is 1 and the promotion success pattern is displayed as the re-lottery effect, the effect mode in which the decorative symbol "2" is changed to "1" is most likely to be selected.
As can be understood from FIG. 96, the decorative symbols that are likely to be selected before and after the re-lottery differ according to the set value Ve.

Returning to the description of FIG.
The effect control unit 24, which has completed the lottery for the decorative symbols corresponding to the set value Ve, performs processing for starting variation in step S3205, and deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136. In the processing for starting the variation, as described above, the command for executing the decorative symbol variation display game is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40, and each effect using the speaker 46, the optical display device 45a, etc. is performed. Executes processing such as registering the scenario.

(Direction 13)

As a specific example of the effect 13, the liquid crystal display device 36 is used to perform a suggestive effect for allowing the player to operate two operators (for example, two effect buttons including the effect button 13).
For example, as shown in FIG. 97A, after a message such as "W device chance!" An image (image 2) including an icon image that has been pressed and a text that guides an operation such as "Press at the same time!" is displayed.
Subsequently, the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (FIGS. 98A and 98B). If the jackpot lottery is won, the same decorative patterns (decorative patterns of 7 in the figure) are aligned as shown in FIG. 98A. will be notified. On the other hand, when the big hit lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. 98B, the failure is reported because the decorative symbols are not aligned.

After the failure is notified as shown in FIG. 98B, the image shown in FIG. 99A or 99B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .
The image shown in FIG. 99A is, for example, an image displayed with the set value Ve being any one of 1 to 6, and is an image that is selected with a high probability. On the other hand, the image shown in FIG. 99B is an image that is displayed with a low probability when the set value Ve is 6, for example, and a specific character image (a character image of a UFO in the figure) is added to the image shown in FIG. 99A. image. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 99A is always displayed when the set value Ve is 1 to 5, and either the image of FIG. 99A or 99B is displayed only when the set value Ve is 6. It is
When the image shown in FIG. 99B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player can understand that the set value Ve is 6, which is the maximum value.

FIG. 99B shows a speaker icon along with an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 . This indicates that when the image effect shown in FIG. 99B is executed, the sound effect by the speaker is also performed at the same time. That is, the player can not only enjoy the performance visually, but also enjoy the performance audibly.
Even a player who misses the image effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 36 can notice the suggestive effect by performing the sound effect using the sound generating device 46a such as a speaker.

The image (FIG. 99B) used for the confirmation performance of the set value 6 is presented to the player when the big win lottery is lost (that is, the timing 25 when all symbols are stopped), and the big win lottery is lost. It is possible to prevent the attenuation of the desire to play and to improve the desire to play, and to realize an effect with a high degree of interest in the game.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for executing the effect 13 in step S3211. That is, the process branches depending on whether or not the present time is the time when all symbols are stopped (timing 25).

If the timing is not appropriate for executing the effect 13, the effect control unit 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the timing is appropriate, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is "0" in subsequent step S3212. If the execution flag is not "0", that is, if it is "1", the effect control unit 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG.
If the execution flag is "0", that is, if the production 13 is not being executed, the production control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3213 and acquires the set value Ve in step S3214.

Subsequently, in step S3215, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery of the effect mode according to the set value Ve and the winning/losing information of the big win lottery. In this lottery, a lottery is made as to whether or not the decorative symbol variation display game using each image shown in FIGS. 97 to 99 is to be executed. Lottery to decide whether to let or not.
As a result of the lottery, if the effects shown in FIGS. 97 to 99 are executed without using the images, the liquid crystal display device 36 ends without executing the subsequent processes shown in FIG.

97 to 99, the effect control unit 24 causes FIG. 97A (image 1) and FIG. 97B (image 2) to be sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in step S3216. command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 .

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the player's operation based on the image 2 is performed in step S3217. That is, the process branches based on whether or not the player has operated an operator displayed as an icon image on the liquid crystal display device 36 .
If the manipulator has been operated, the liquid crystal display device 36 proceeds to the process of step S3219. Moreover, when the manipulator is not operated, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 3 s) has passed in step S3218. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the effect control unit 24 executes the process of step S3217 again. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has passed, the effect control unit 24 proceeds to the process of step S3219.
That is, the effect control unit 24 repeats the processes of steps S3217 and S3218 until the player operates the manipulator or until a predetermined period of time elapses.

In step S3219, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the big hit lottery is won. Win-lose information can be obtained from commands received from the main control unit 20 .
If the jackpot lottery is won, the effect control section 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 98A (image 3) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control section 40 in step S3220.

If the jackpot lottery has been lost, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 to display FIG. It is determined whether or not to display (UFO icon image). It should be noted that whether or not to display a character image has already been determined by lottery in step S3215.

If the character image is not to be displayed, the effect control section 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 99A (image 5) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control section 40 in step S3223.
On the other hand, when displaying a character image, effect control section 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 99B (image 6) on liquid crystal display device 36 to liquid crystal control section 40 in step S3224.

The effect of displaying the image 5 and the image 6 on the liquid crystal display device 36 is the suggestive effect. In other words, the player can guess the set value Ve of the gaming machine 1 from the appearance ratio of the image 5 and the image 6 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the big winning lottery is lost.

(Direction 14)

As a specific example of the effect 14, when all symbols of the decorative symbol variation display game are stopped (timing 25), a suggestive effect such as blinking the logo of the gaming machine 1 is performed.
More specifically, after the cumulative number of rotations after the power is turned on (the number of decorative symbol variation display games played after the power is turned on) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2000 times), a predetermined trigger has arrived. When all symbols of the decorative symbol variation display game are stopped (timing 25) for a specific number of times (for example, 20 times), a suggestive effect such as blinking the logo of the gaming machine 1 is performed. Then, after that, a similar suggestion effect can be executed periodically (for example, every 100 decorative symbol variation display games) for a predetermined period (for example, during 20 decoration symbol variation display games). A predetermined period during which the suggestive effect may be performed (during 20 decorative symbol variation display games) is referred to as a suggestive effect period.

While it is blinking at least once in each suggestive effect period, the set value Ve is rendered to deny that it is 1. - 特許庁In other words, there is a possibility that the set value Ve is 1 when the suggestive effect of blinking the logo or the like does not occur even once during a certain suggestive effect period.
Since the player thinks that the set value Ve may not be 1 while it is blinking once in each suggestive effect period up to that point, the suggestive effect is performed to make the player continue the game. can be the reason for

Also, when the suggestive effect is performed twice in any of the above-mentioned suggestive effect periods (for example, when the suggestive effect is performed twice during the 20 decorative symbol fluctuation display games in a certain suggestive effect period) is configured to determine that the set value Ve is 2 or more. In this case, the player's willingness to play can be improved by the suggestive effect appearing twice in one suggestive effect period.

The predetermined opportunity may be the start of a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation display games, the end of the game, or after a specific effect is performed.
Also, as an effect means, an example using the light display device 45a such as the decorative lamp 45 has been shown, but a sound effect using the sound generator 46a may be substituted, or an effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 may be used. Alternatively, it may be an effect of moving a movable accessory.

Furthermore, the total number of out-balls may be used instead of the cumulative number of rotations after the power is turned on. According to this, in the gaming machine 1 in which the number of winning balls is small and the number of winning balls is small and the possibility of the player stopping the game is high, the timing is earlier than that of the other gaming machines 1. A predetermined opportunity will come, and the possibility of being able to suppress the decline in the desire to play with the gaming machine 1 can be increased.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S3231, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing for executing the effect 14 is appropriate, and in subsequent step S3232 determines whether or not the execution flag is "0".
If the execution timing is inappropriate or if the execution flag is not "0", the effect control unit 24 terminates the processing shown in FIG.

The effect control unit 24 executes a process of changing the execution flag to "1" in step S3233. This prevents the performance 14 as the suggestive performance from being repeatedly executed at the same timing.

The effect control unit 24 branches in step S3234 depending on whether or not the total number of revolutions is 2000 or more. If it is less than 2000 times, the effect control unit 24 terminates each process shown in FIG. When the cumulative number of revolutions is 2000 times or more, the effect control section 24 determines whether or not the last two digits of the cumulative number of revolutions are less than 20 in step S3235. "%" in the figure indicates a remainder operator. That is, the formula "total number of revolutions % 100" represents a formula for obtaining the remainder when the cumulative number of revolutions is divided by 100.

If the last two digits are 20 or more, the effect control unit 24 ends the suggestive effect 14 execution process without executing the subsequent processes.
If the lower two digits are less than 20, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the lower two digits of the cumulative number of revolutions are "00" in step S3236. is set (step S3237).
In effect 14, a suggestive effect can be executed at 20 rotations (2000 to 2019 times) after the cumulative number of rotations reaches 2000 times or more. Moreover, after that, every time the last two digits become "00", the suggestion effect can be executed during the subsequent 20 rotations. At this time, in one set of the suggestive effect executable period of 20 rotations, the number of times the suggestive effect is performed is changed according to the set value Ve. The number of effects set to "0" in step S3237 is a variable that indicates how many times the suggestive effect has been performed in one set of the suggestive effect executable period, and the last two digits of the cumulative number of revolutions are "00". It is reset to "0" each time.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3238, and draws lots to determine whether the effect 14 can be executed based on the number of times of effect and the set value Ve in step S3239.
FIG. 102 shows an example of a table used for the lottery.
The unit of numerical values in the drawing is "%", and indicates the probability of execution of the effect 14 as the suggestive effect (that is, winning probability).
For example, when the set value Ve is 1 and the number of times of presentation is "0", that is, when the presentation 14 has not yet been performed in the suggestive presentation executable period, the presentation 14 is performed with a probability of 2%. Also, when the set value Ve is 1 and the number of effects is 1 to 19, the winning probability is 0%. That is, the effect 14 is executed at most once during one set of the suggestive effect execution period. Therefore, when the effect 14 is executed a plurality of times during one set, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more.

As can be understood from FIG. 102, the higher the set value Ve, the more easily the effect 14 is executed. Therefore, the player can guess the set value Ve from the appearance frequency of the effect 14 or the like.

Return to FIG. At step S3240, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not to execute the effect 14, ie, whether or not the lottery at step S3239 is won.
If the selection is lost, the effect control unit 24 terminates the suggestive effect 14 execution process of FIG. 101 .
In the case of winning, the effect control unit 24 adds 1 to the number of times of effect in step S3241, transmits a command for effect 14 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3242, and registers the scenario for effect 14 in step S3243. I do.

(Direction 15)

A specific example of the effect 15 is a suggestive effect performed when over winning occurs during each round game (timings 28 to 35) during a big win.
For example, when an over-winning occurs in each round, a sound effect different from usual is performed. The higher the setting value of the gaming machine 1, the higher the probability of performing different sound effects. Furthermore, when the different effects are executed in Round 4 and Round 5, setting 2 or higher is confirmed.

By implementing such an effect 15 in the game machine 1, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the suggestive effect will be executed even during a normal jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game machine 1 with a high degree of game interest.

In addition, instead of the sound production, a light production using the light display device 45a may be performed.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 103A. Note that FIG. 103A is an example (S2130g) of each command process (S2130) in the command correspondence process (S2106), which is executed when the effect control unit 24 receives a large winning opening winning command from the main control unit 20. This is an example of processing performed. In addition, in FIG. 103A, processes other than the process related to the effect 15 as the suggestive effect are omitted.
First, the effect control unit 24 receives a large winning opening winning command from the main control unit 20 to execute a series of processes shown in FIG. 103A. This command is issued from the main control unit 20 in response to the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening 50 which is opened for a predetermined time in each round game in the jackpot game.
The effect control unit 24 that has received the command performs a process of adding 1 to the big winning counter in step S3251. This counter is a variable for counting the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 50 during each round game, and is cleared to "0" when each round game is started.

Subsequently, in step S3252, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the value of the big winning counter is greater than the winning upper limit number. The upper limit of the number of winning balls is the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed during one round, and when the number of winning balls reaches that number, the big winning opening 50 is closed. However, there is some error between the timing when the number of winning balls reaches the upper limit number and the timing when the big winning opening 50 is closed. In some cases, such as when winning into the mouth 50, more winning balls than the upper limit may be permitted (so-called over-winning).
In step S3252, it is determined whether or not the winning balls related to the command received this time are more winning balls than the upper limit number.

If the current winning to the big winning opening 50 is an over winning (S3252: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3253, and whether or not to execute effect 15 in subsequent step S3254. to draw a lottery.
In this lottery process, the probability of winning varies depending on the set value Ve. For example, lottery is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 103B. In this example, as shown in FIG. 103B, in the first round, a setting value of 1 produces a special sound effect with a probability of 10%, and a setting value of 6 produces a special sound effect with a probability of 60%. .
In addition, in the fourth and fifth rounds, the winning probability of set value 1 is set to 0%, and when effect 15 occurs, set value 2 or more is determined.

The effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the lottery is won in step S3255. When executing the effect 15, the effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for outputting a special sound in step S3256.
On the other hand, in the case of losing (S3255: N), or if the current winning is not over winning (S3252: N), the effect control unit 24 registers a scenario for outputting a normal sound in step S3257. .

In the above example, the effect control unit 24 also manages the number of winning balls during the round. The effect control unit 24 may be configured to receive from the unit 20 . In that case, the big winning counter held by the effect control section 24 becomes unnecessary, and only the value of the upper limit number of winnings may be held. In addition, in order that the effect control unit 24 does not need to hold the value of the winning upper limit number, a large winning opening winning command including information as to whether or not the winning ball corresponds to an over winning may be received. . In this case, the effect control unit 24 does not need to perform the process of step S3251, and instead of step S3252, it may perform the process of determining whether or not the big winning opening winning command is due to over winning.

In the above description, a lottery is performed to determine which of the normal sound effect and the special sound effect is to be executed when the player wins an excessive prize, but other examples are also conceivable.
For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a special sound effect can be selected at the timing when the big winning counter reaches a predetermined number in a specific number of rounds. Specifically, at the timing when the big prize counter reaches 5 in the 4th round, a lottery is drawn according to the set value Ve as to whether or not to execute a special sound effect, and if the winner is selected, the special sound effect is executed. , and when the winner is defeated, a normal sound production is performed. The production 15 may be in such a mode.
In addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which the non-sound effect and the presence of sound effect are selected according to the result of the lottery. That is, when a prize is won in the big prize winning slot 50, normally there is no sound effect, and the sound effect can occur only at a specific timing (for example, the timing when the big prize winning counter reaches 5 in the fourth round). may be configured.

(Direction 16)

As a specific example of the effect 16, the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed at the start of the ending after all the round games in the big win are finished, that is, at the time of the mode display effect (timings 36 and 39) in which the transition mode after the big win is displayed. An image effect is performed to display a specific image different from usual on the top.
The normal image is, for example, an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the current number of consecutive jackpots, and is an image that notifies the gaming state. On the other hand, a specific image is, for example, an image in which a specific character image is superimposed on the normal image. An image effect as the effect 16 is executed only when a lottery as to whether or not to display a specific image different from usual is won.

The specific image effect is, for example, an effect suggesting that the set value Ve is not 1 (that is, an effect that makes the player recognize that the set value Ve is determined to be 2 or more).

Specific processing contents will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, FIG. 104 is an example (S2130h) of each command process (S2130) in the command correspondence process (S2106), and is executed in response to the fact that the effect control unit 24 receives a jackpot end command from the main control unit 20. It is an example of processing.
The jackpot end command is a command issued when all the round games executed during the jackpot game are finished. Each process for outputting an image effect is executed.
In addition, in FIG. 104, the parts other than the part related to the effect 16 are omitted.

At step S3261, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve, and at subsequent step S3262, draws lots as to whether or not the effect 16 as the suggestive effect can be executed.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 performs branch processing according to the lottery result in step S3263.
If the lottery is won (S3263: Y), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying a special image to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3264. As a result, an image as shown in FIG. 105B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, for example.
On the other hand, if the lottery is lost (S3263: N), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for normal image display to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3265. As a result, for example, an image as shown in FIG. 105A is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. FIG.

If an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 and a sound effect or light effect is to be performed, processing for scenario registration is also performed along with steps S3264 and S3265.
For example, FIG. 105B shows a speaker icon along with an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 . This indicates that, similarly to FIG. 99B, when the image presentation shown in FIG. 105B is executed, the sound presentation by the speaker is also performed at the same time.

Also, the UFO icon drawn in the image of FIG. 105B has the same effect (concentrated line effect) as the UFO icon drawn in the image of FIG. 99B. The image presentation in which the same UFO icon is added with the same effect drawing may mean that the content of the suggestion is the same. For example, in the image effect shown in FIG. 99B, the setting value Ve is used for the effect of confirming that it is 6, so that the player sees the UFO icon with the concentration line as the setting value 6 fixed effect. It can give you a sense of what it is. Then, an image (for example, FIG. 105B) using the UFO icon in the same drawing mode has only the effect of confirming that the set value Ve is 6, thereby preventing the player from misunderstanding the content of the suggestion. It is possible to notify appropriately without

This is not limited to image production. Specifically, FIG. 99B shows that the sound effect is executed simultaneously with the image effect, and similarly, FIG. 105B also shows that the sound effect is executed. It is desirable that the sound effect executed at this time be similar (for example, the same voice or sound effect is output). By setting the sound effect to a similar effect mode, it is possible to notify the player of the correct suggestive content without misunderstanding the player.
Of course, the same applies not only to sound effects but also to light effects using LEDs and the like. In other words, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding of the content of the suggestion by using the same LEDs for sound production or by using the same mode of light emitting colors of the LEDs.
Also, the same suggestive content may be indicated when the combination is the same. For example, when a UFO icon with a concentration line appears, but the sound effect at that time is different, the suggestive content may be different. That is, when both the UFO icon and the sound effect are in the same effect mode, the suggestive effect may be the same suggestive content.

Another example of effect 16 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 shows an example of state transition different from FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 126, after the round game (final R release) of the last round during the big win game, the big win end interval effect is executed after the inter-round interval. Furthermore, after that, the immersion attention alert and the IC forgetting attention alert (similar to timing 40 and timing 41 shown in FIG. 83) are executed, after which the company logo (corresponding to timing 42 in FIG. 83), highly accurate/normal suggestion Screen display (corresponding to timing 39 in FIG. 83) is sequentially executed.
In addition, each round game is set as the second winning game section (accessory continuous operation period), and the ending period is set as the third winning game section. In addition, the opening period (fanfare period) is set as the first hit game section.

As a first example of the execution period of the setting value suggesting effect, the setting value suggesting effect, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36, is executed from the start of the jackpot end interval effect to the final phase of the big win game, that is, until the end of the high-accuracy/normal suggesting screen display. An image effect is executed in which a specific pattern is superimposed on the

Further, as a second example of the execution period of the set value suggesting effect, the image effect is executed from the start of the jackpot end interval effect until the display of the corporate logo is finished.

Furthermore, as a third example of the execution period of the setting value suggesting effect, the image as the set value suggesting effect is displayed not only during the ending period of the big win game, but also during the section before the ending period, that is, during the execution of the final round of the big win game. A performance is performed.

In any of the first, second, and third examples of the execution period of the setting value suggesting effect, the setting value suggesting effect appears for a period longer than at least half of the ending period (20 seconds). is configured as
In this way, it is desirable that the set value suggesting effect is displayed for a predetermined period or longer. Also, when the set value suggestion effect is performed during the ending period (third winning game section) or the fanfare period (first winning game section), and when those sections end in a relatively short time, As in the third example of the execution period of the setting value suggesting effect, the setting value suggesting effect may appear from the second winning game section (or for a while after entering the second winning game section). . In addition, it appears for a while (for example, n seconds or until n times of the symbol variation display game is completed) after the end of the ending section, that is, after the high probability or low probability (normal) game is started. It may be configured as

The setting value suggesting effect is not executed so many times as compared with the jackpot suggesting effect. This is because the winning result of the jackpot lottery is generated each time the jackpot lottery is performed, and the notification frequency is naturally high, whereas the set value is not changed during the day's game. (or remarkably less), and there is a high possibility that once the notification is made, further notification will be meaningless.
However, if the set value suggestion by the few set value suggesting effects is overlooked, the player has to wait for the next appearance of the set value suggesting effect with a low frequency of appearance, which is a significant disadvantage for the player. may occur. For this reason, it is desirable that the setting value suggesting effect is performed over a certain amount of time, that is, the suggested content is presented.

Also, the timing at which the final round is completed during the jackpot game (that is, the ending period) is also the timing at which the player's interest in the gaming machine temporarily fades. However, at this timing, an image effect is performed to call attention to the immersion or forgetting to take out the IC. That is, even if such a warning is given at a timing when the player's interest is fading, there is a possibility that the effect will be diminished.
However, in the gaming machine 1 in this example, since the image effect as the set value suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, the image effect for calling attention of various kinds while keeping the player's interest high. can be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play and improve the effectiveness of each alert.

(Direction 17)

As a specific example of the effect 17, during the ending of pattern A (that is, timings 36 to 38), a suggestive effect using the sound generator 46a is performed with a predetermined probability. For example, when the suggestive effect is performed, one of a plurality of types of voice data (speech data) is selected and output. There are, for example, five types of voice data, and the suggestive contents differ depending on the respective voice data.

FIG. 106A shows the correspondence relationship between selected audio data and suggested content.
As shown in the figure, when voice data 1 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more, and when voice data 2 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is an even number. Then, when the voice data 3 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is an odd number. Further, when the voice data 4 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 3 or more, and when the voice data 5 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 6.

A specific flow of processing will be described with reference to FIG. 106B.
First, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3271 whether or not the timing for executing effect 17 is appropriate, and in step S3272 determines whether or not the execution flag is "0".
If the timing is not appropriate or if the execution flag is "1", the effect control unit 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG. 106B.

When the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets "1" to the execution flag in step S3273, and executes the effect 17 as a suggestive effect in the subsequent step S3274. lottery whether or not.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery is won in step S3275. If it has been defeated (S3275: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 106B. On the other hand, when winning (in the case of S3275: Y), the effect control unit 24 executes branching processing according to the set value Ve in step S3276.

When the set value Ve is 1, the effect control unit 24 selects the voice data 3 in step S3277. When the set value Ve is 2, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the voice data 1 and the voice data 2 in step S3278. When the set value Ve is 3 or 5, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the voice data 1, the voice data 3 and the voice data 4 in step S3279. When the set value Ve is 4, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the voice data 1, the voice data 2 and the voice data 4 in step S3280. When the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the audio data 1, the audio data 2, the audio data 4 and the audio data 5 in step S3281.
In each selection process of steps S3277 to S3281, a lottery process based on a predetermined probability is performed. That is, it is a process of selecting one of the options based on a predetermined probability. Note that each option does not need to have the same ease of selection. For example, when the set value is 6, one of audio data 1, audio data 2, audio data 4, and audio data 5 is selected. may be configured to

The effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for outputting the selected audio data in step S3282. As a result, the audio data corresponding to the set value Ve is selected and output, thereby allowing the player to guess the set value Ve.

In the game machine 1 configured to execute the performance 17, even if the player's willingness to play is likely to be diminished by winning the normal jackpot instead of the probability variable jackpot, the player's desire to play is likely to be reduced during the ending of the pattern A. Since the player can have a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the suggestive effect will be executed, it is possible to prevent the desire to play from diminishing.

(Direction 18)

As a specific example of the effect 18, for example, at timings 36 to 42 during which the probability variable state is transitioned to the probability variable state after the big hit game, the effect button 13 when an effect is performed to notify the transition to the probability variable state. and the like are operated, the sound effects to be executed are varied. For example, in the case of performing a sound production in which a blessing voice is played to congratulate the transition to the variable state, four types of the blessing voice are prepared (Fig. 107A).

When the congratulatory voice 1 is used, it is not possible to know which value the set value Ve is. That is, it is a non-suggestion effect. For example, in most cases, the congratulatory voice 1 is selected. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration when the suggestive effect described below is performed without selecting the congratulatory voice 1.例文帳に追加
When the blessing voice 2 is used, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more. When the congratulatory voice 3 is used, it is determined that the set value Ve is 4 or more. Also, when the congratulatory voice 4 is used, the set value Ve is determined to be 6.

A flowchart for specific processing is shown (FIG. 107B). FIG. 107B shows an example (S2130h) of each command process (S2130) in the command handling process (S2106). Moreover, FIG. 107B shows only the processing related to the execution of the effect 18, and actually, the effect control unit 24 also performs various kinds of processing (not shown).
At step S3291, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the mode to be shifted after the end of the big hit game is the variable probability state. The transition mode can be specified by the jackpot end command, for example, as described above.
If it is not in the variable probability state (S3291: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG.
When the transition mode is the variable probability state (S3291: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the setting value Ve in step S3292, and performs branch processing based on the setting value Ve in subsequent step S3293.

When the set value Ve is 1, the effect control unit 24 selects the blessing voice 1 in step S3294. If the set value Ve is 2 or 3, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the blessing voice 1 and the blessing voice 2 in step S3295. When the set value Ve is 4 or 5, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the blessing voice 1, the blessing voice 2, and the blessing voice 3 in step S3296. When the set value Ve is 6, the production control unit 24 selects any one of the blessing voice 1, the blessing voice 2, the blessing voice 3 and the blessing voice 4 in step S3297. Each selection process is synonymous with performing a lottery process based on a predetermined probability set in advance.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 executes scenario registration for outputting the selected blessing voice in step S3298.
It should be noted that each of the blessing voices to be selected does not have to have the same ease of selection.

(Direction 19)

As a specific example of the effect 19, at the timings 36 to 42 during the big win, for example, when notifying that the state will be changed to the time saving state after the big win game, the light effect using the optical display device 45a or the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed. A suggestive effect is performed by performing an image effect using the image.
As an example, if there is a movable role to be moved at any of the timings 36 to 42 to notify that the transition to the time saving state will be performed, it is mounted on the movable role in the suggestive effect. An effect is performed in which the light display device 45a (such as an LED) is illuminated. At this time, a suggestive presentation is performed depending on what color the light source of the optical display device 45a should be illuminated.

For example, there are five colors of light: blue, green, yellow, red, and rainbow. A “rainbow” is a light emission mode in which a plurality of light emission colors are sequentially changed at regular time intervals such as 0.2 seconds.
FIG. 108A shows an example in which the selection probability of each color differs according to the set value Ve. As shown in the figure, the emission pattern that emits light in rainbow colors is the least likely to be selected regardless of the set value Ve, but the higher the set value Ve is, the more likely it is to be selected. In addition, blue is more likely to be selected as the set value Ve is lower. As can be seen from the figure, blue has the lowest expected value, and green, yellow, red, and rainbow have higher expected values at high settings in that order. That is, for the player, the effect is such that the desire to play increases in the order of blue, green, yellow, red, and rainbow.
A flowchart for specific processing is shown (FIG. 108B). FIG. 108B shows an example (S2130h) of each command process (S2130) in the command handling process (S2106). Also, in FIG. 108B, only the processing related to the suggestive effect is extracted and shown.
At step S3301, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the transition mode after the big hit game is the time saving state.
When not shifting to the time saving state (S3301: N case), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 108B. On the other hand, when shifting to the time saving state (in the case of S3301: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the setting value Ve in the following step S3302, and performs a lottery according to the setting value Ve in step S3303. The lottery is based on the table shown in FIG. 108A.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for realizing the effect 19 as the suggestive effect in step S3304.

(Direction 20)

Effects 20 to 21 are suggestive effects executed at timings not shown in FIG. Effect 20 is a effect executed during the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state. Specifically, during the time-saving state (that is, during the transition to the normal state, or until the transition to the jackpot game), a specific character appears on the liquid crystal display device 36. be. The character image once made does not disappear during the game in the time-saving state, and is kept superimposed on the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as another image effect.
In addition, the number of characters on the liquid crystal display device 36 can be increased as the game is played in the time saving state, and the number of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is finally increased. The set value Ve can be estimated in accordance with .

A specific flow of processing will be described with reference to FIG. 109A. A series of processes shown in FIG. 109A are appropriately executed as shown in FIG. 109A, for example, at the timing when the decorative symbol variation display game is started in the time saving state, or at the timing when all symbols are stopped. Further, it may be executed for each special symbol variation display game in the time saving state, or may be executed for each five special symbol variation display games.

First, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3311 whether or not the timing for executing the effect 20 as the suggestive effect is appropriate. If the timing is not appropriate (S3311:N), the effect control unit 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG. 109A.
If the timing is appropriate (S3311: Y), the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is 0 in subsequent step S3312.

If the execution flag is 1 (S3312: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the process. If the execution flag is 0 (S3312: Y), the effect control unit 24 sets 1 to the execution flag in subsequent step S3313. The execution flag is reset to 0, for example, each time a special symbol variation display game is started. That is, the execution flag is a flag for preventing the effect 20 from being executed multiple times in one variation display game.

At step S3314, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery according to the set value Ve and the appearance counter CNT. The appearance counter CNT is the number of characters to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and while the time-saving state continues as described above (that is, until transition to another game state), the appearance counter CNT is maintained at the current state or only increased, and decreased. It is assumed that there is nothing to do. Although not shown, the appearance counter CNT is cleared to "0" when transitioning from the time saving state to another state.
FIG. 109B is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the lottery process according to the set value Ve and appearance counter CNT.

As shown in the figure, when the appearance counter CNT is 0, the winning probability in one lottery opportunity is set to be low. I was thinking about it.
As can be seen from the figure, when the appearance counter CNT is 3, the winning probability is 0%. Furthermore, in the setting values 1 to 3, the maximum number is two. That is, when three character images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player can recognize that the set value Ve is 4 or more.

Returning to the description of FIG. 109A.
After the lottery based on the table is performed, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery is won in step S3315. If the lottery has been won (S3315: Y), processing is performed to add 1 to the appearance counter CNT (S3316), and a command for image output corresponding to the appearance counter CNT is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40. (S3317).
On the other hand, if the selection has been rejected (S3315: N), the process advances to step S3317 with the appearance counter CNT unchanged, and a command for image output according to the appearance counter CNT is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40. FIG.
The command transmitted in step S3317 is a command based on the image effect that appears in the decorative symbol variation display game at that time, and is different if the image effect is different.

(Direction 21)

As a specific example of the effect 21, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed as a suggestive effect during a predetermined time after the store opens, in the evening, or at a specific time such as just before the store closes.
When the game machine 1 is provided with an RTC function unit, the time zone of opening, evening, and just before closing is grasped based on the current time obtained by the RTC function. In addition, if the opening time and closing time differ depending on the store or region, the gaming machine 1 may be configured so that the opening time and closing time can be set.

Further, when the game machine 1 is not provided with the RTC function unit, the respective time zones may be indirectly grasped from the number of game balls discharged from the out port 49 .
Specifically, when a jackpot lottery is won between the generation of the first out ball after turning on the power and the generation of the 1000th out ball, a specific performance appears as a suggestive performance at the opening of the store. In addition, when a jackpot lottery is won between the occurrence of the 25000th out ball and the occurrence of the 26000th out ball, a specific performance appears as a suggestive performance in the evening. Furthermore, when a jackpot lottery is won between the generation of the 40000th out ball and the generation of the 41000th out ball, a specific performance appears as a suggestive performance just before closing.
In this case, the player may be notified that it is a time zone in which a specific effect can appear as a suggestive effect.

In other words, the specific effect that appears by lottery with a certain probability at other times appears as a suggestive effect in which the likelihood of appearance changes according to the set value Ve in each of the above sections. Become. It should be noted that it may be a dedicated effect for a suggestive effect that does not appear outside of the above time slots.
A specific effect that appears as a suggestive effect when the store opens, a specific effect that appears as a suggestive effect in the evening, and a specific effect that appears as a suggestive effect just before closing may be different effects, or the same. It may be considered as a performance.
Further, the liquid crystal display device 36 may display only an image for a specific effect as a suggestive effect, or an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as another image effect (unrelated to the suggestive effect). An image (a small image such as an icon, etc.) presented as the suggestive effect may be superimposed on the above.

A specific flow of processing will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 110 is an example of a flowchart for the case where the RTC function unit is provided in the gaming machine 1 .
First, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing for executing the effect 21 is appropriate in step S3321. In this process, for example, it is determined only whether or not it is a predetermined timing in the special variation display game. Specifically, if the effect 21 is to be executed at the timing of the start of variation in the special variation display game, it is determined whether or not the timing is now.

If the timing is appropriate (S3321: Y), the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is 0 in step S3322.
If the timing is not appropriate (S3321:N) or if the execution flag is 1 (S3322:N), the effect control unit 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG.

If the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is 0, the effect control unit 24 performs processing of setting the execution flag to 1 in step S3323, and performs processing of acquiring the RTC value in subsequent step S3324.
Next, in step S3325, the effect control unit 24 determines from the obtained RTC whether or not the current time is in a specific time zone, that is, whether it is a time zone corresponding to opening of the store as described above.
If the current time is specific (S3325: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3326, and performs a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3327. Specifically, for example, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability.

On the other hand, if the current time is not the specific time (S3325: N), the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery effect that wins with a certain probability in step S3328. That is, the prize is won with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

After step S3327 or S3328, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the lottery of the effect 21 is won in step S3329.
When winning (S3329: Y), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3330 to cause an image effect as the effect 21 to appear.
On the other hand, if the selection is lost (S3329:N), the effect control unit 24 terminates the series of processes shown in FIG. 110 without transmitting the command.

As can be understood from the description, the effect 21 appears as an image effect that is not a suggestive effect if the lottery is won as a result of the lottery with a certain probability in step S3328. Also, in the event that a lottery is won as a result of the lottery corresponding to the set value Ve in step S3327, an image effect as a suggestive effect will appear.

As described above, by executing the image performance as the suggestive performance just before the opening of the store, the game of the player can be promoted immediately after the opening of the store, and the operating time of the game machine 1 can be improved. In addition, by executing an image effect as a suggestive effect just before the store closes, the game can be continued by the player until the store closes, and the operating time of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. In addition, as a result, it is also possible to promote games when the store opens on the next day.

(Summary of each production)

If the above-mentioned 21 kinds of suggestive effects are not to appear at the same time, it can be realized by devising an execution flag used in each suggestive effect. That is, in each execution flag, "0" indicates non-execution, "1" indicates execution, and "2" indicates that execution is in progress. When determining whether or not to execute each performance, it is confirmed that the other suggestive performance is being executed by confirming whether or not the execution flag for the other suggestive performance is "2". can be grasped, it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestive effects from being executed at the same time.
In addition, suggestive effects that may be executed at the same time can be realized by omitting the process of checking the execution flags for the suggestive effects.

As a matter of course, the gaming machine 1 does not have to be equipped with all of the above-mentioned 21 types of suggestive effects.
Also, FIG. 84 is merely an example, and various suggestion effects may be performed at timings not marked with a circle in FIG.

[9-4. Other production examples]

Each of the production examples described above will be described. First, referring to FIG. 111, the operational flow of the gaming machine 1 will be described. Incidentally, the series of operation flow shown in FIG. 111 includes the processing of the main control unit 20, the processing of the effect control unit 24, and the operations by hall staff, players, and the like. Further, the processing shown in FIG. 111 shows an excerpt of the processing that is important for understanding the movement of the gaming machine 1 among the processing executed by the gaming machine 1. It is considered part.

When the hall staff or the like performs a power-on operation (step S4001), the main control unit 20 of the game machine 1 detects the operation and transmits a command to the effect control unit 24, thereby displaying the standby screen on the liquid crystal control unit 40. A command to wait is transmitted, and a standby screen (an image including characters such as Please wait...) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (step S4002).

Subsequently, in step S4003, the main control unit 20 performs branch processing according to whether or not the set value change condition is satisfied (step S104 described above).
When the set value change condition is established, a command is issued from the main control unit 20 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 via the effect control unit 24, thereby informing the liquid crystal display device 36 that the setting is being changed. A screen is displayed (step S4004).

The main control unit 20 confirms whether or not the setting key switch is OFF in step S4006 while receiving the setting change operation in step S4005. That is, by accepting setting change operations until the setting key switch is turned off, it is possible to change the hall staff and the like.
After confirming that the setting key switch is OFF, the main control unit 20 transmits a command via the effect control unit 24 in step S4007, thereby displaying a screen on the liquid crystal display device 36 to inform the end of the setting change. . Furthermore, the effect control unit 24 performs processing to turn on the setting change flag in step S4008.
The setting change flag is changed to "ON" when the setting is changed, and is referred to for determining whether or not to perform the setting value change suggesting effect. A setting change flag is memorize|stored in RAM243 with which the production|presentation control part 24 is provided, for example.
It should be noted that steps S701 to S717 are executed at the timing of steps S4005 and S4006. The process corresponding to step S4007 is the process of step S722 described above.

Subsequently, the main control unit 20 performs RAM clear processing in step S4009, and executes the RAM clear notification mode in step S4010. The RAM clear notification mode is a mode of the game machine 1 realized by the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24, the liquid crystal control unit 40, etc., and uses the liquid crystal display device 36, various lamps (LEDs, etc.), the speaker 46, etc. is realized.

The main control unit 20 that has finished changing the setting realizes the RAM clear notification mode using the effect control unit 24 and the like in step S4009, and executes RAM clear processing in step S4010.
Steps S4009 and S4010 correspond to the processes of steps S116 to S118 described above.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4011 whether the RAM is abnormal or the backup flag is abnormal. If any abnormality has occurred, the main control unit 20 uses the effect control unit 24 to realize an error notification mode (step S4012). The hall staff who recognizes the error notification mode performs, for example, an operation to turn off the gaming machine 1 (step S4013).

If the set value change condition is not satisfied, the RAM is not abnormal, and the backup flag is not abnormal, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4014 whether or not the RAM clear switch is ON. If the RAM clear switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S4009.
On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is OFF, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4015 whether or not the set value confirmation condition is satisfied (step S108 described above).

If the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 20 executes the setting confirmation mode in step S4016. In the setting confirmation mode, an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the setting value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance display unit 97. , which corresponds to step S109 described above.
In step S4017, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the setting key switch is OFF, thereby displaying the setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97 until the setting key switch is turned OFF. continue.
When the setting key switch is turned off, the main control unit 20 transmits a command for normal screen display in step S4018.

After executing either step S4010 or S4018, the processing shown in FIG. 112 is performed.
The main control unit 20 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery probability state is high (step S4019). If it is not highly accurate, that is, if it is lowly accurate (S4019: N case), the effect control unit 24 sets the setting value change suggestion effect lottery flag to ON in step S4020. The setting value change suggestion effect lottery flag is a flag indicating whether or not to perform a lottery process for determining whether or not to perform a set value change suggestion effect. be done. This flag is stored in the RAM 243 included in the effect control unit 24, for example.

When the jackpot lottery probability state is high (S4019: Y), the effect control unit 24 turns off the set value change suggesting effect lottery flag (step S4021) and turns off the setting change flag (step S4022).
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the set value is changed, the jackpot lottery probability state is started from the low probability state. That is, since the high accuracy at the stage of step S4019 means that the setting value has not been changed, the processes of steps S4021 and S4022 are performed so that the setting value change suggesting effect does not appear.
Note that this process is just a precaution, and even if the process of turning off both flags is omitted here, the setting value change suggestion effect will not be executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not to start a big hit game in step S4023. When the power is turned off during the jackpot game, the state of the jackpot game is restored after the power is turned on by the backup return processing. In such a case, the determination result in step S4023 is Y, and the process proceeds to step S4024.
In step S4024, the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 perform processing for displaying a big win screen on the liquid crystal display device 36. FIG.
When starting from the jackpot game state after the power is turned on, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of turning off both the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag and the setting change flag (steps S4025 and S4026), and the process of step S4027. Move to Moreover, also when it determines not to start a jackpot game at step S4023, it transfers to the process of step S4027.

In step S4027, the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 wait until the special symbol variation display game is started. When the special symbol variation display game is started, or when the special symbol variation display game is started due to power failure recovery, the process proceeds to step S4028, and it is determined whether or not the setting value change suggestion effect lottery flag is ON. The effect control part 24 performs the process which determines.

When the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag is ON, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery process as to whether or not to execute the set value change suggestion effect in step S4029.
When the lottery process is won, a set value change suggesting effect is displayed based on the effect mode in which the player wins in subsequent processes.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 turns off the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag in step S4030, and turns off the set value change flag in step S4031.

A decorative symbol variation display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in step S4032 by issuing a command from the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24. FIG.

(Set value change suggestion effect 1)

The suggestive effect regarding whether or not the set value is changed in the effect mode shown in the previous effect 04 is executed, for example, between steps S4031 and S4032. In addition, in the description of the effect 04, an example has been described in which the button is vibrated when the effect 04 as a suggestive effect is executed, whereas the button is not vibrated when the effect 04 is not executed, but other effect modes are also possible. .
For example, at the start of the decorative symbol variation display game for the first time after the power is turned on, it is set so that at least some button vibrations occur. It may be configured to increase the vibration (increase the number of vibrations or the vibration time). Specifically, it can be realized by using a PM-type stepping motor or the like. For example, when executing a set value change suggesting performance 1 as a suggestive performance, the stepping motor is operated in four steps, and when simply vibrating the button instead of the suggestive performance, the stepping motor is operated in two steps.
As a result, even when the setting value change suggesting effect 1 is not executed, the button vibrates, and the player can be given an exhilarating feeling.

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is provided with the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, if the special symbol variation display game for the first time after turning on the power is related to the special figure 2, the setting value change suggestion production 1 need not be implemented. That is, it may be configured such that the setting value change suggestion effect 1 is executed when the first special symbol variation display game for the special symbol 1 after the power is turned on is started.

(Set value change suggestion production 2)

The setting value change suggesting effect 2 appears at the timing when the background image (effect mode) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched. The background image (effect mode) is, for example, the type of scene displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and is the effect mode identified by the player. For example, a "town mode" in which the character is walking in the town is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, a "car mode" is displayed in which the character is in a car, and a character is resting at the beach. "Vacation mode", etc., in which the scene in which you are playing is displayed, is displayed as appropriate. When an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed in each effect mode, an image effect corresponding to each scene can appear. Also, an effect that occurs only in a specific effect mode may be provided.

The timing at which the background image (production mode) is switched may come, for example, for each special symbol variation display game of a certain number of times, or a production mode transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each special symbol variation display game, and the winner is selected. The background image (rendering mode) may be switched depending on the situation.
That is, the setting value change suggesting effect 2 can be generated at a timing different from the timing at which the decorative symbol variation display game is started for the first time after the power is turned on.
In such a case, for example, it can be realized by changing a part of the processing shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 as shown in FIG.

After the set value change suggesting effect lottery flag is turned ON (S4028: Y) and the set value change suggesting effect lottery is executed in step S4029, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery is won in step S4041. branch by
When winning, the effect control unit 24 stores in the RAM 243 or the like the effect mode of the setting value change suggesting effect won in step S4042. From the stored information, it is possible to specify the performance timing and the content of the performance. It should be noted that the information stored here is erased after being used, for example, for execution of the setting value change suggestion effect.

The setting value change suggestion effect 2 is executed at the timing when the background image (effect mode) is switched for the first time after the power is turned on. At that time, a dedicated background image for setting value change suggestion effect 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 . As a dedicated background image, for example, a “pool mode” is used in which a scene in which a character is playing in a pool is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .
The dedicated effect mode is maintained until the next background image switching timing. In other words, it is made difficult for the player to miss the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value Ve has been changed, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

If the lottery in step S4029 is lost, the dedicated background image will not be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 even if the set value Ve is changed.

(Set value change suggestion production 3)

The set value change suggesting effect 3 is a suggesting effect for displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display device 36 under a specific condition until the end of the first big win game after the power is turned on. Further, in this example, the set value change suggesting effect 3 also serves as a set value suggesting effect.

A specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 114 .
FIG. 114A is a diagram schematically showing a specific image displayed as, for example, a result screen for informing the result of the big win game on the liquid crystal display device 36 after the big win game is over.
In the specific image, one character image is displayed in the left half area of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and the other character image is displayed in the right half area. Although not shown, it is assumed that result information such as the number of balls played is displayed in this image.
In the following description, the character image displayed in the left half area is referred to as the "left character", and the character image displayed in the right half area is referred to as the "right character".

When the left character and the right character appear at the same time, they are treated as different characters, and there are patterns in which only one of the left and right characters appears and patterns in which neither character appears.
In this example, a suggestive presentation is provided in which the suggestive contents differ according to the combination of the characters appearing in the left character and the right character and the appearance timing.

FIG. 114B is a diagram showing an example of combinations of left characters and right characters and suggested contents. As shown, there are 14 types of character image appearance patterns (pattern Nos. 1 to 14). "ANY" in the figure means that any character appears, and does not include cases where no character appears. That is, the effect pattern with pattern No. 1 corresponds to the case where there is no left character and some character image is displayed as the right character.

The specific image effect of pattern No. 1 or 2 has the suggestive content of "none" and is a normal image effect that is not a suggestive effect. The background color in this case is "blue".
That is, in a specific image effect after a big hit game, when only one of the left character and the right character appears, the player can understand that the normal image effect is not the suggestive effect.
In addition, since the background color is set to "blue" only in the specific image effects of pattern Nos. 1 and 2, it is possible to simply recognize that the background color is "blue" and not to use the normal image as a suggestive effect. You can understand that it is a performance.

The specific image effects of pattern Nos. 3, 4, and 5 are combinations of main character A or main character B and pets C, D, and E. Also, in any of the image renderings, the content of suggestion is "suggestion of XX". This is different from the suggested content of "○○ confirmed", which will be described later, but it is not confirmed that it is ○○, but it is a content that indicates that it is rich.
Specifically, the specific image effect designated as pattern No. 3 is "suggestion of 4, 5, 6", and is likely to be selected when setting values Ve are 4 to 6, and is selected when setting values Ve are 1 to 3. It is a production pattern that is difficult to play (but the appearance rate is not 0%).
The specific image effects of pattern Nos. 3, 4, and 5 all have a background color of "green." That is, the player can obtain information for assisting the estimation of the set value Ve by the appearance of the specific image effect with the background color of "green".

The specific image effects of pattern Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 have suggested contents of "XX fixed". That is, it is an image effect that appears as a suggestive effect (determined suggestive effect) in which the value of the set value Ve is determined to be one or is determined to be within a certain range. The background color is "gold" or "rainbow", and the player can understand that the setting value Ve is a definite suggestion effect just by looking at the background color.
In addition, the specific image effect shown in pattern No. 6 with the background color of "rainbow" is a suggestive effect in which 6, which is the maximum set value, is fixed, so that it is possible to significantly increase the player's desire to play. Become.

The specific image effect of pattern Nos. 11 and 12 has the suggested content of "○○" negative. That is, it is an image effect (negative suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value Ve is not a certain value. The background color is set to "black" in any of the image effects, and it is possible to recognize that it is some kind of negative suggestive effect just by confirming the background color.

It should be noted that the specific image effects of pattern Nos. 13 and 14 are combinations that do not appear on the game result display screen that is displayed after the end of the big win game. Specifically, it will be described later.

As described above, even a player who does not know the original work such as the work that is the theme of the gaming machine 1, that is, a player who does not recognize the characters such as the main character A and the main character B, It is configured so that it is possible to grasp what kind of suggestive rendering is being performed simply by looking at the background color of a specific image rendering. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to enjoy the image presentation and losing his or her desire to play the game due to the lack of knowledge of the original.

Also, the specific image effect by the table shown in FIG. 114B is configured so that even players who know the original can enjoy it. For example, when "Pet C" appears in the left character or the right character, it is suggested that the set value Ve is likely to be 4-6. That is, when the effect of pattern No. 3 appears, the image effect informs that the set values are likely to be 4 to 6, and when the effect of pattern No. 8 appears, the set value is 4. It is announced that ~6 is confirmed.
Also, when "Pet D" appears, it is suggested that the set value Ve is likely to be an odd number.
Furthermore, when "Pet D" appears in the left character or the right character, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value Ve is an even number.

In this way, even a player who is familiar with the original work can roughly grasp the content of the suggestion according to the character image that appears. Therefore, it is possible to provide an image effect that enhances the interest in the game even to a player who does not know all the details of the table shown in FIG. 114B.

A specific image effect that appears as such a set value suggestive effect appears after the big hit game is over (or after all the round games are over), but there is a possibility that some players may miss the suggestive effect. be. In particular, it is considered that it is easy to overlook when the acquired balls are transferred to the box.

Therefore, the gaming machine 1 is configured to display a combination of character images appearing in the previous specific image effect on the demonstration screen from the end of the big win game to the start of the next big win game.
In the gaming machine 1, there is a payout ranking screen displayed in the demo screen, and a character image is displayed on the payout ranking screen. Until the first big win of the day, the previous day's ranking is displayed, and after the first big win, the current day's ball ranking is displayed.
After the first big win, the character image and background color that appeared in the previous specific image effect (that is, the result screen of the big win game) are reproduced on the winning ball ranking screen. However, the postures (poses) of the character images may be different. In other words, the character image displayed on the winning ball ranking screen can be changed (pattern Nos. 1 to 12) each time the big win game ends.

Here, the image when the ball-out ranking screen is displayed before the first jackpot game will be described.
In this example, the character images of the pattern No. 13 or 14 are displayed on the payout ranking screen until the first big hit game is started.
In pattern Nos. 13 and 14, the main characters A and B appear as character images, and only the appearance positions are different. Both pattern Nos. 13 and 14 appear only before the first big win game after the power is turned on, and basically do not appear after the first big win game unless the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off during the game. It is.
When the image of pattern No. 13 is displayed on the winning ball ranking screen, the content of suggestion is "none". That is, even if the effect appears, the player cannot obtain any information regarding the set value Ve.
On the other hand, when the image of pattern No. 14 is displayed on the winning ball ranking screen, the content of suggestion is "confirm setting change". That is, when the effect appears, it can be grasped that the set value Ve has been changed, so the set value change suggestion effect is provided. That is, the set value change suggestion effect 3 is used as the displayed ball ranking screen effect in this case.
The background color of the images is both "white". This is because the background color is different from that of any of the above-mentioned specific images, and the appearance of the ball payout ranking screen with the background color of "white" provides the player with a suggestive effect on changing the set value. It is possible to grasp

As described above, the demo screen is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when a game ball does not enter the big winning hole 50 or the like for a certain period of time. . Therefore, even a player who misses the specific image effect that appears after the end of the jackpot game can confirm what kind of suggestive effect has been performed. Then, if it is before the first big hit game, the setting value change suggesting performance 3 indicating whether or not the setting value has been changed can be made to appear by one's own hand, and it is possible to confirm it at a desired timing. is.

(Setting value suggestion production 1)

This production example is an example in which the appearance probability of the suggestive production differs depending on the time, conditions, etc., like the production 03 and the production 21 described above. Also, in the production 21, an example using the RTC function has been described according to the flowchart, but here an example using the total number of out balls will be described.
In addition, in this example, the number of jackpot games (a predetermined number of rounds of jackpot games is counted as one, hereinafter referred to as the number of jackpots) is also taken into consideration.

In this example, each time the decorative symbol variation display game is started, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not the suggestive effect is to be executed. A suggestion effect is performed to display an image (which may be a person or may be something like a medal). Of course, the character image that is likely to appear (or the character image that appears) is set differently according to the set value Ve.
In this example, a character image imitating a medal (hereinafter referred to as a "medal character") appears.

A specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 115 .
FIG. 115A is a table showing the appearance probabilities of set value suggestion effect 1 under the condition that the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is 1000 or less. There are a plurality of colors of medal characters appearing in the setting value suggesting effect 1 suggesting effect, and for example, there are five types of copper, silver, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow.
As shown in the figure, at the set value 1, none of the medal characters appear. In other words, when a medal character appears, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more regardless of its color.
Similarly, at the set value 2, silver, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow medal characters may not appear, and only bronze medal characters may appear.
Also, at a setting value of 3, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow medal characters do not appear, at a setting value of 4, danger pattern and rainbow medal characters do not appear, and at a setting value of 5, rainbow medal characters do not appear. It is Combinations with an appearance probability of 0% (for example, a set value of 1, a bronze medal character) also have an appearance probability of 0% in subsequent tables.

In FIG. 115A, the total number of outs is 1 to 1000 and the number of big hits is less than 20, so it corresponds to the state immediately after the opening of the hall. In such a state, the probability of appearance of the bronze medal character is increased more than during the subsequent game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the desire to play immediately after the opening of the hall.
When the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls exceeds 1000 and reaches 6000, as shown in FIG. 115B, the appearance probability of the bronze medal character is lowered. .
Furthermore, when the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is between 6001 and 12000, the appearance probability of silver, gold, danger, and rainbow medal characters increases (FIG. 115C).
When the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is between 12001 and 24000, the probability of appearance of a bronze medal character increases (FIG. 116A).
Also, when the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is 24001 or more, the appearance probability of medal characters of each color is increased (FIG. 116B).

In this way, except for FIG. 115A, which seems to be immediately after the opening of the hall, the appearance probability of each medal character increases as the total number of out-balls increases. That is, as the game time elapses, the suggestive effect for estimating the set value Ve is likely to appear, and it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

Under the condition that the number of big hits is 20 to 30, each appearance probability is set high. The execution of such a large number of jackpot games suggests that a certain number of decorative symbol variation display games have been executed. Furthermore, there is a high possibility that the player has obtained a certain amount of paid-out balls. In such a situation, it is desirable to increase the appearance probability of the medal character and to make the player aware of the appearance of the medal character, thereby motivating the player to continue playing the game.

When the number of big hits is 31 or more, it is conceivable that the number of winning balls increases and the player is playing in a good mood. In such a case, by increasing the appearance probability of the medal character, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.
It should be noted that, if the number of winning balls increases, there is a possibility that the player will have the mentality of stopping while the ball is winning. Even in such a case, by increasing the appearance probability of medal characters as shown in the table of FIG. 117B, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

Also, in this example, the probability of appearance of each effect differs depending on the conditions, but the content of suggestion is the same when the effect appears. Specifically, according to FIG. 115A, when a danger-patterned medal character appears, the setting value 5 or 6 is confirmed. The relationship between the “danger pattern medal character” and the “information (that is, suggested content) that set values 5 and 6 are confirmed” is under other conditions (that is, FIGS. 115B, 115C, 116A, 116B, 117A, and 117B ) does not change. Therefore, the player does not know what conditions the gaming machine 1 is currently under, and instead of "appearance of a medal character with a danger pattern", "it is determined that the set value Ve is 5 or 6". ”, so it is considered to be a suggestive effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the appearance probability is changed so as to narrow down the suggested contents (that is, change in a direction to narrow down the choices of the set value Ve estimated by the player). May be changed.
Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 under the condition A, as shown in FIG. 118A, "appearance of a medal character with a danger pattern" suggests that "the set value Ve is confirmed to be 5 or 6". It is said to be a performance to do. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 under the condition B, as shown in FIG. 118B, the appearance probability of the medal character may increase or decrease to 0%. is changed to an effect suggesting that "it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 6". That is, in the condition B, when the set value Ve is 5, the appearance probability of the effect decreases to 0%, while when the set value Ve is 6, the appearance probability increases.
That is, by changing from condition A to condition B, the accuracy of the information of the notification content that the player perceives when the suggestive effect appears increases.

Also, in the case where the accuracy of information transmitted to the player is higher under condition B than under condition A, it is desirable that condition B is less likely to appear (harder to achieve).
For example, if the condition B is set to a normal state and the condition A is set to be a condition for rare appearance, the player can expect a medal character with a danger pattern to appear under the condition B set as a normal state. After receiving that the set value Ve is 6 as the suggested content, the condition A, which is a specific condition, is established, and there is a high possibility that the information of the suggested content with reduced accuracy is additionally received. This is not desirable because the content of suggestions received under condition A becomes meaningless information for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the condition A is set to be during a normal game, and the condition B is set to be a specific condition that is rarely met, so that the player can enjoy the condition of being playing a normal game. By receiving the information that "the set value Ve is 5 or 6" due to the occurrence of the suggestive effect below, the suggestive effect that appeared after that occurred under specific conditions "The possibility that the set value Ve is 5 disappeared. It is more likely that you will receive information upgraded to "Confirmed to be 6". Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes a similar performance (that is, a performance in which a medal character with a danger pattern appears), both suggestive performances can be given meaning, and meaningless suggestive performances can be reduced. At the same time, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play.

For example, the condition B as a specific condition may be established when "the jackpot lottery is not won over 500 decorative symbol variation display games (=so-called 500-time addiction)". That is, if the player continues to fail in the big win lottery for a long time, there is a possibility that the player will stop playing the game. By facilitating the acquisition of such information, the desire to play until the next big win game can be maintained.

This effect is achieved not only by the configuration in which the set value suggestion effect 1 as the suggestion effect can be executed for each decorative symbol variation display game as in this example, but also by the set value suggestion effect by a specific image effect displayed after the end of the big win. It can also be obtained by configuration.
That is, after a jackpot game in which the game is won after being hooked 500 times, a set value suggesting effect is performed so that the above-mentioned upgraded information can be obtained (or easily obtained), thereby motivating the player to play. It can be maintained until the next big hit game.

<10. Suggestion production about the big hit>

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the suggestive effect (previous notice effect described above) relating to the big win can be appropriately performed. The suggestive performance regarding the big win is a performance that makes it possible to guess whether or not the player playing the gaming machine 1 has won the big winning lottery performed by the gaming machine 1 .

[10-1. type of performance]

Types of suggestive effects (hereinafter referred to as "big win suggestive effects") that can be executed in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described (Fig. 120).
First, as shown in FIG. 120, the big-hit suggesting effect is divided into "prediction/relevant" and "effect means".
The distinction based on "prediction/relevant" indicates whether the relevant jackpot suggesting effect is "predictive notice effect" or "prediction effect in the relevant variation". The variation indicates a decoration symbol variation display game that is currently executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 .

Incidentally, each big hit suggesting effect is performed using any one of the effect means of "sound", "light", "liquid crystal", "movable body", and "button" in the same way as the suggesting effect regarding the set value described above. It may be executed using one effect means, or may be executed using a plurality of effect means.
The production using "sound" as the production means is a sound production using the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46. FIG. Rendering means using "light" as rendering means is light rendering using an optical display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs. The effect using the "liquid crystal" as the effect means is an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like. The production using the "movable body" as the production means is a visual production using a movable accessory or the like. The production using the "button" as the production means is a bodily sensation type production using the production button 13, a wind pressure device, or the like.

[10-2. performance timing]

The timing at which the big hit suggestion effect is performed will be explained. As shown in FIG. 121, the timing at which the big hit suggestion effect is performed is performed only during "fluctuation". It should be noted that during the "waiting for the customer" and the "during the jackpot", the jackpot suggestion effect is not executed.

The big-hit suggesting effect performed during the "fluctuation" is further subdivided into timings 10-25. Since each timing has already been explained, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

[10-3. Production example]

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of jackpot suggesting effects (effects 50 to 67) and the timings of execution. Each jackpot suggestion production is demonstrated.

(Direction 50)

The effect 50 is a big-hit suggesting effect as a pre-reading forewarning effect performed using a "liquid crystal" and a "button", for example, a "suspended change forewarning effect". The pending change notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started or the all symbol stop timing when all the decorative symbols are stopped.
Specifically, the operation holding balls (holding icons) displayed in the holding display areas 76 and 77 provided in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 are different colors (blue, red, yellow, etc.) from the normal color (for example, silver). ) or a special pending display mode (rainbow pattern, danger pattern, etc.) to suggest a big hit lottery result in a specific variable display game after the next time. That is, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the result of the jackpot lottery will be winning in the variable display game targeted for the pending change notice effect.

The specific flow of this production will be explained.
First, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery for whether or not the pending change notice effect can be executed. Setting value information is used for this lottery. That is, the effect is such that the appearance probability of the effect changes according to the set value Ve.
When the lottery is won, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 at a predetermined timing. At this time, an image effect such as shaking the pending icon may be performed at the same time. This allows the player to understand that the pending change notice effect can be executed.
Next, when the player presses the effect button 13, the image effect of changing the reserved icon displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 from the normal color to the specific color, or if the color is already the specific color, further An image effect of changing the display mode to a highly anticipated display mode, and an image effect of maintaining the original display mode of the pending icon without causing a change of the pending icon are executed.

Whether or not to change the pending icon is decided by lottery by the effect control unit 24 when, for example, lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the pending change notice effect. The lottery for the execution of the pending change notice effect may be performed together with the execution of the big win lottery related to the corresponding operation pending ball, or may be performed each time the special symbol variation display game is started.

On the other hand, when the player does not press the effect button 13, an image effect is executed in which the pending icon changes at a predetermined timing.

Other specific production examples are conceivable. For example, the colors and display modes of the pending icons are rainbow, red, orange, yellow, blue, and silver (normal colors) in descending order of expectation.
When the pending change notice effect is executed, first, within the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, the effect of changing the pending icon from silver to blue is executed. Furthermore, an image prompting the user to press the effect button 13 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 .
When the player presses the production button 13, an image production is performed showing a lottery as to whether or not the pending icon will change to a color with a high degree of expectation. This lottery may actually be executed at this timing, or an image effect based on a predetermined lottery result may be executed.

When the lottery is won, an image effect of changing the blue pending icon to yellow is performed, and an image effect of further prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is performed. By repeating this, an effect of finally changing to a rainbow image icon can be executed.
Further, when the lottery is lost, the change of the pending icon to a color/display mode with a higher degree of expectation does not occur, and the pending change notice effect ends.

Such an effect may be executed, for example, while changing the display position of the active pending ball, which is the object of the pending change notice effect, along with the completion of the special symbol variation display game. For example, after the color of the holding icon of the operation holding ball in the holding display section b1 of FIG. 4 changes from silver to blue with the execution of the holding change notice effect, the holding display section After the blue hold icon moves to a1, the hold change notice effect is performed again (or the previous hold change notice effect is continuously executed), and the color of the hold icon of the operation hold ball in the hold display part a1 changes from blue to blue. May change to yellow.

Note that the pending change notice effect may be executed using only the liquid crystal display device 36 without using the effect button 13 or the like.

(Direction 51)

The effect 51 is a big-hit suggesting effect as a pre-reading forewarning effect performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "movable body", for example, "special zone entry forewarning effect".
The special zone entry notice performance gives the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that there is a possibility of entering the special zone performance executed over one or more times of the special symbol variation display game. is.
The special zone entry notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started or the all symbol stop timing when all the decorative symbols are stopped.

In the special zone, for example, the background image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is different from the normal one, and there is a possibility of winning the jackpot lottery in the last special symbol variation display game of the zone. It is a section for suggesting that the value is high while giving the player a sense of anticipation over the previous several special symbol variation display games (that is, while entering the special zone).
If the special zone has only one special symbol variation display game, for example, after an image effect with a background color different from usual is performed in the variation display game, it is announced that the player has won the jackpot lottery. A notification is made to the player. Further, in one special symbol variation display game, a pseudo continuous effect may be performed with a pseudo continuous variation display state of decorative symbols.

A plurality of types of effect patterns may be provided for the special zone entry notice effect. For example, it may be possible to execute a fixed effect suggesting that the player must enter the special zone, or it may be possible to execute an effect that can be selected both when entering the special zone and when not entering the special zone. good.
Further, an effect with a high possibility of entering a special zone or a low effect may be provided.
By making various special zone entry notice effects executable in this way, it is possible to provide effects with a high degree of game interest.

A specific flow of production will be described. Here, an example will be described in which an effect relating to the special zone is executed over three special symbol variation display games.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 performs lottery processing as to whether or not the effect can be executed. In this lottery process, setting differences are provided in the appearance probabilities by referring to set value information.
When the lottery for execution of the effect is won, the variable display operation of the decorative pattern is started in the special symbol variable display game (first game: special zone entry notice effect), and the light effect means provided in each part of the gaming machine is used. At the same time, an image effect is performed in such a manner that a liquid crystal display device 36 draws a lottery as to whether or not to enter a special zone.
As in the present example, when entering a special zone, the movable accessories are used to produce an effect that is highly interesting to the player, and the light production means mounted on the movable accessories is used to emit light, Furthermore, an image rendering is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to suggest that the player has successfully entered the special zone.
On the other hand, if the player does not enter the special zone, an image rendering is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to suggest that the player has failed to enter the special zone. At the same time, a light-emitting effect by the light effect means or an effect using a movable accessory may be produced.

After suggesting that entry into the special zone has been successful or that it has failed, the first round of the special symbol variation display game is completed, and the special symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode indicating that the special symbols are out of the jackpot lottery. be. In other words, the special symbol is stopped when it comes out. At this time, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed as a result of a missed roll.
In this way, the effect executed in the special symbol variation display game as the first game is the "special zone entry notice effect". Incidentally, when the effect of failing to enter the special zone is executed, one special symbol variation display game ends and the series of effects related to the special zone ends.

In the next variable display game (second game: entry into the special zone), when the variable display operation of the decorative symbols is started, the liquid crystal display device 36 is designed to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. image production (for example, production that excites whether or not the battle is won, production that excites whether or not a specific mission can be achieved, etc.) is executed. Then, an image including characters such as "NEXT" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the winning number is lost. During execution of this variable display game (second game) and the next variable display game (third game), a display is made on the liquid crystal display device 36 to indicate that the player is entering a special zone.

Furthermore, in the next variable display game (third game: big win/loss suggestion game), after the image performance for enlivening the performance is executed, the big win lottery win/loss suggestion is finally made by the stop mode of the decorative pattern. For example, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern are all stopped with decorative patterns representing ``3'', such as an image effect suggesting that the jackpot lottery has been won, or the left pattern and the right pattern are both ``3''. By presenting a stop mode in which a decorative pattern representing ``2'' is displayed and the middle pattern is a decorative pattern indicating ``2'', an image effect is executed to suggest that the big winning lottery has been lost.

It should be noted that, in the case where the special zone effect is executed over the three special symbol variation display games, the execution of the special symbol variation display game three times including the variation is confirmed at the start of the effect. It is desirable to have That is, when the special zone-related effect is executed based on the start of the special symbol variation display game related to the next operation-reserved ball, it is executed on the condition that the number of operation-reserved balls is 3 or more (3 or 4). be. In other words, when the execution of a series of effects relating to the special zone is started, it is sufficient that the game is the first game and the number of pending balls to be activated is two or more.
This is for the purpose of pre-reading the information relating to the win or loss of the big win lottery, and taking into account that the special zone entering effect is likely to be executed when the pre-read lottery result is winning. It is clear to the player that the expected value of winning is low even if a series of performances starting from the special zone entry notice performance as described above is executed for the special symbol variation display game that cannot be foreseen even if the player does not win a prize. This is because it is not possible to provide an effect that enhances the interest of the game.

The above example is merely an example, and a series of effects may be realized by a pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by a pseudo-continuously varying display state of decorative symbols.

(Direction 52)

The effect 52 is a big-hit suggesting effect as a pre-reading forewarning effect performed using a "liquid crystal", for example, a "countdown forewarning effect". The countdown notice effect is a notice effect that is executed over a plurality of special symbol variation display games. Also, it may be executed in conjunction with a plurality of times of pseudo continuous variation display which is performed during one special symbol variation display game. In this case, the countdown notice effect is completed in one special symbol variation display game.

When the lottery for execution of the countdown notice effect is won, an image effect is performed in which a predetermined numerical value (for example, "2") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as a count value in a specific symbol variation display game. The count value is decremented each time the special symbol variation display game is executed and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and when the count value becomes "0", an image effect suggesting the result of the big win lottery is executed. be.
In the specific pattern variation display game where the count value display is "0", in addition to the image effect that suggests the jackpot lottery result, there are other effects such as the effect that develops into the first type super reach and the second type super reach. may be configured to do so.

Also, the countdown notice effect does not have to be continued until the count value becomes "0". Execution on the device 36 may end the countdown preview effect.
By enabling execution of such an effect, when the countdown notice effect occurs, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being paid only to the special symbol variation display game in which the count value is "0", Even in a state in which the count value is "1" or "2", the game can be played with expectation that the performance will continue, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A specific flow of production will be described.
The production control unit 24 performs a lottery for whether or not the countdown announcement production can be executed in response to the reception of the pending addition command. The set value information is not referred to in this lottery. That is, the lottery is won with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.
After winning the lottery for whether or not to execute the countdown notice performance, the performance control part 24 determines the initial value of the count value in consideration of the number of balls in operation suspension. For example, the number of pending balls including the pending balls increased this time is set to "3", and the initial value of the count value is determined to be "2".

With the start of the next special symbol variation display game, the number of balls to be activated becomes "2", the character image and the count value of "2" are notified on the liquid crystal display device 36, and a countdown notice effect is produced. An image effect is executed to notify the player that the execution of is started.

Furthermore, with the start of the next special symbol variation display game, the number of activated pending balls becomes "1", the fact that the count value is "1" is reported on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the countdown notice effect continues. An image effect indicating that the player is playing is executed.

Then, with the start of the next special symbol variation display game, the number of activated pending balls becomes "0", the fact that the count value is "0" is reported on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the countdown notice effect is performed. When the game ends, the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery is notified on the liquid crystal display device 36. - 特許庁Specifically, along with the stop display of the special symbol variation display game, an image effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a stop mode indicating that the decorative symbols have won the jackpot lottery (or in a stop mode indicating that the lottery has been lost). is executed.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of initial values of the count value may be prepared as a variation of the effect. Also, each initial value of the count value may have a different winning expectation.

(Direction 53)

The effect 53 is a big-hit suggesting effect as a pre-reading forewarning effect performed using the 'liquid crystal' and 'buttons', for example, a 'chance forewarning effect'.
The chance notice effect can be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started, the timing at the time of low speed variation, the timing at the time of high speed variation, or the timing when all symbols are stopped.

It should be noted that "during slow fluctuation" is the timing during execution of a symbol fluctuation display game with a relatively long fluctuation time such as the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 12 seconds" or "normal fluctuation 8 seconds". It refers to the state where the game digestion speed of is low. Such variation is likely to be implemented, for example, when the number of balls withheld in operation is small.
Also, "at the time of high-speed fluctuation" is the timing during execution of a symbol fluctuation display game with a relatively short fluctuation time such as "normal fluctuation 4 seconds" or "normal fluctuation 6 seconds". It refers to the state where the game digestion speed of is high. Such variation is likely to be executed, for example, when the number of balls withheld in operation is large.

An example of a specific flow of production will be described.
Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 executes a lottery for whether or not to execute the chance eye announcement effect. When the player wins the lottery, the performance control part 24 makes the second chance announcement performance appear.
Specifically, a decorative design variation display game is started in which decorative designs are varied on the liquid crystal display device 36 . On the liquid crystal display device 36, a left pattern (during variable display), a middle design (during variable display), and a right design (during variable display) are displayed, and characters, pictures, etc. prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 are displayed as images. displayed inside.

When the player presses the effect button 13, for example, the left symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device . Further, the images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (left symbol (still displayed), middle symbol (variable display), right symbol (variable display)) further include text or the like prompting the user to press the effect button 13. included.

When the player further presses the effect button 13 in response to the suggestion by the image effect, the liquid crystal display device 36 stops displaying the right symbol.
Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, there is an image rendering including a left symbol (during stop display), a middle symbol (during variable display), a right symbol (during stop display), and characters prompting the user to press the effect button 13. executed.

When the player presses the effect button 13 for the third time based on the image effect, an image effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to stop and display the medium symbol.
On the liquid crystal display device 36, the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is suggested to the player by the color of each decorative pattern displayed stopped.

For example, the left pattern is a decorative pattern imitating a blue letter "2", the middle pattern is a decorative pattern imitating a blue letter "8", and the right pattern is a decorative pattern imitating a blue letter "6". If it is, the three decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed are all decorative patterns that imitate blue letters, so the expectations for the ball that will be used in the pattern variation display game after this are higher than usual. is suggested to the player.

The left pattern is a decorative pattern imitating a red letter "5", the middle pattern is a decorative pattern imitating a red letter "1", and the right pattern is a decorative pattern imitating a red letter "7". If it is, the three decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed are all decorative patterns that imitate red letters, so the expectation for the ball that will be used in the pattern variation display game after this is higher than usual. is suggested to the player. It should be noted that, for example, the degree of expectation is higher for decorative patterns with red letters than for decorative patterns with blue letters.

It should be noted that the order in which the decorative symbols are stopped may indicate the degree of expectation. For example, in the above description, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed in this order. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation is higher in the mode in which the right symbols, the middle symbols, and the left symbols are stopped and displayed in this order than in this stop mode.

The chance prediction effect is configured to appear at a constant probability regardless of the set value.

(Direction 54)

The effect 54 is a jackpot suggesting effect in the variation performed using "light", for example, a "win-time lamp notice effect".
The win-time lamp notice effect is executed at the timing when the number of operation pending balls increases by winning a prize.

A specific flow of production will be described.
During the execution of a special symbol variation display game for a winning ball, when the number of operation pending balls increases due to a new winning, a performance control part 24 performs a lottery for execution of a winning lamp announcement performance. In this lottery, the set value Ve is referred to. That is, the appearance probability of the effect differs depending on the set value Ve.

By winning the lottery, the winning lamp announcement effect is executed. In this lottery process, information as to whether or not the special symbol variation display game currently being executed is a big hit is referred to. That is, when the special symbol variation display game currently being executed is a big win, the winning lamp announcement effect is likely to be executed.

When the execution of the prize-winning lamp advance notice effect is determined, the light effect of lighting the specific light display device 45a is executed as the win-time lamp notice effect.

In addition, in the case of effecting lighting of the optical display device 45a at the timing when the number of operation pending balls increases due to winning, as described above, the winning lamp notice indicating the degree of expectation for the special symbol variation display game that is currently fluctuating. In addition to executing the effect, it may be possible to execute a pre-reading forewarning effect suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation for the increased number of pending balls to be activated.

Also, these effects may appear in a similar effect mode. In this case, the player who recognizes the light effect recognizes that the degree of expectation for winning the special symbol variation display game that is currently varying is high, and even if the special symbol variation display game that is currently varying is not a big hit. Even if it is a miss, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the held ball that triggered the performance execution. In other words, a sense of anticipation can be obtained twice with one performance, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

(Direction 55)

The effect 55 is a jackpot suggesting effect in the variation performed using "sound", "light", and "liquid crystal", for example, "the pending change notice effect".
The pending change notice effect is at the start of fluctuation, at low speed fluctuation, at high speed fluctuation, at the time of the first design stop when one of the decorative patterns is stopped, the second pseudo-continuation, the third pseudo-continuation, and the fourth pseudo-continuation. It can be executed in time.

If the lottery for execution of the pending change notice effect is won, the color, pattern, shape, etc. of the icon of the pending game currently being played K displayed above the icon of the receiving seat J shown in FIG. By changing, an effect is performed to suggest to the player that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery in the change is higher than usual.

Here, an example in which the pending change notice effect is executed in conjunction with the pseudo continuous effect will be given to explain the flow of the effect. The colors and display modes of the pending icon are rainbow, red, orange, yellow, blue, and silver (normal colors) in descending order of expectation.
First, when the special symbol variation display game is started, the effect control section 24 performs a lottery for whether or not the effect can be executed. In this lottery, since the set value information is referred to, the appearance probability of the pending change notice effect is determined according to the set value Ve.
When the lottery for execution of performance is won, a decorative pattern variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and an image performance is performed in which the pending icon changes from silver (normal color) to blue. At the same time, an effect of making the specific light display device 45a shine in blue, which is the same color as the hold icon, is executed, and an effect of outputting a sound effect from the sound generator 46a suggesting that the hold icon has changed to a highly expected one. is executed.

Subsequently, after the decorative pattern variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 temporarily stops in a pseudo manner, when the second quasi-continuous presentation changes again, an image presentation in which the pending icon changes from blue to yellow. is executed. At the same time, an effect is performed by the optical display device 45a and the sound generator 46a.

After the decorative pattern variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is changed to the second pseudo-stop display, the suspended icon changes from yellow to red when it again varies by the third pseudo-continuous performance. Image rendering is executed. At the same time, an effect is performed by the optical display device 45a and the sound generator 46a.

Furthermore, after the decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 36 are displayed in a pseudo-third stop display, when they are again varied in a pseudo-continuous effect for the fourth time, the pending icon changes from red to rainbow. A changing image rendition is performed. At the same time, an effect is performed by the optical display device 45a and the sound generator 46a.

By performing such an effect, the player can expect to be notified that the big winning lottery has been won after the fourth pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

(Direction 56)

The effect 56 is a big hit suggestion effect in the variation performed using the "movable body" and the "button", for example, it is a "button vibe announcement effect".
The button vibe preview effect is, for example, an effect that is executed in parallel with the ready-to-win effect that is executed when two of the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

The flow of production will be explained concretely.
Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 refers to the set value information and performs a lottery for whether or not the button vibration notice effect can be executed. That is, the effect appears with a probability corresponding to the set value.
After the special symbol variable display game is started, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the first, second and third symbols in a variable manner. At this time, when there is a high possibility of winning the variable jackpot lottery, an effect may be performed during the variable display of the three decorative symbols.
For example, when the previous execution possibility lottery is won, the button vibration announcement effect is executed.
Specifically, by vibrating the movable accessary, a sense of anticipation is visually aroused, and by vibrating the production button 13, an effect is performed to make the player feel the height of the expected value.

Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the first pattern and the second pattern are stop-displayed along with the execution of the button vibration announcement effect. At this time, two patterns are provided for the stop mode of the first symbol and the second symbol. One pattern is a pattern in which the decorative symbols of the first symbol and the second symbol are the same, and the ready-to-win effect is continuously executed upon completion of the button vibe advance notice effect.
The other pattern is a pattern in which the decoration patterns of the first pattern and the second pattern are different, and the variation ends with the stop display of the third pattern without executing the ready-to-win effect.

A plurality of types of vibration patterns of the movable accessory and the effect button 13 may be prepared, and the selection probability may be changed according to whether or not the player wins the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the vibration pattern A may be configured to be easily selected when winning, and the vibration pattern B may be configured to be easily selected when losing. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect with high game interest.

(Direction 57)

The effect 57 is a big hit suggestion effect in the variation performed using the "liquid crystal" and the "movable body", for example, it is a "movable body fanning notice effect".
For example, the movable body fanning notice effect is a highly reliable movable body effect in a configuration that can execute a highly reliable performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the player will win a jackpot lottery by moving the movable body. It is a rendition that is executed before execution. This effect can be executed together with the ready-to-win effect, for example.
For example, the movable body fanning announcement effect is an effect of vibrating the movable body, and a pattern of executing the above-mentioned highly reliable movable body effect and a pattern of not executing it are provided following execution of the movable body fanning announcement effect. . In other words, the movable body fanning announcement effect is a effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the effect will develop into a highly reliable effect.

Concretely, the flow of production will be described.
Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery for whether or not the movable body fanning announcement performance can be executed and a lottery for whether or not the highly reliable movable body performance can be executed. In this lottery, by referring to the set value information, the winning probability differs according to the set value Ve.
The result of the lottery is a pattern A in which both effects are performed and an effect is executed to inform the player that he has won the jackpot lottery result, and a pattern A in which both effects are performed but notifies the player that he has lost the big win lottery result. It is branched into a pattern B in which a notifying performance is executed, a pattern C in which a movable body fanning announcement performance is executed but does not develop into a highly reliable movable body performance, and a pattern D in which neither of the two performances is executed.

Here, Pattern A will be described as an example.
After the special symbol variation display game is started, the liquid crystal display device 36 variably displays the first, second and third symbols. At this time, an effect of vibrating the movable body accessory is executed, and an image effect is executed as if a lottery is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as to whether or not it will develop into a highly reliable movable body effect.

Subsequently, after the first pattern and the second pattern are stop-displayed in the same decorative pattern on the liquid crystal display device 36 and the ready-to-win state is reached, an image effect suggesting that the effect will develop is executed, and the movable accessory is executed. A high-reliability performance (for example, a performance in which two movable accessories are united or separated) using is executed, and there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot lottery on the liquid crystal display device 36. is executed.

Furthermore, on the liquid crystal display device 36, all of the first to third patterns are stopped and displayed with decorative patterns imitating the same number, thereby executing an image effect indicating that the jackpot lottery has been won, and a movable body role. A production that suggests winning is also executed for objects.

(Direction 58)

The effect 58 is a big-hit suggesting effect in the variation performed using "light", for example, an "illumination flash notice effect".
The illumination flash notice effect is an effect in which an illumination panel installed in the game machine emits light in a predetermined pattern. The illumination panel includes, for example, a rectangular light guide plate and a light emitting portion disposed at the edge of the light guide plate. Light emitted from the light emitting portion passes through the light guide plate and travels forward at a predetermined position It is formed so that a predetermined pattern emerges by being reflected toward it. That is, the illumination flash notice effect is a effect in which a predetermined pattern is visually recognized by the player by causing the light emitting portion to emit light.
The illumination flash notice effect can be executed together with the ready-to-win effect.

I will explain the flow of production in detail.
Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control section 24 performs a lottery for whether or not to execute the illumination flash notice effect. In this lottery, by referring to the set value information, the winning probability differs according to the set value Ve.

When the execution possibility lottery is won, the first and second patterns are stopped on the liquid crystal display device 36, the ready-to-win performance is executed, and the light-emitting part of the illumination panel is caused to emit light so that a predetermined pattern appears on the illumination panel. Illumination flash announcement effect is executed. Thus, it is possible to inform the player that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than usual.

It should be noted that the illumination panel can form a reflecting portion so as to reflect forward only the light emitted from a specific direction. Therefore, the reflective part that reflects forward the light emitted from the left and right ends of the illumination panel is arranged to form a pattern A, and the reflection part that reflects the light emitted from the upper and lower ends forward. By arranging the parts so as to form the pattern B, it is possible to make a plurality of types of patterns emerge on the illumination panel.
By using such an illumination panel, it is possible to separately display an illumination flash announcement effect with high reliability and an illumination flash announcement effect with low reliability.

Moreover, it is possible to express the level of reliability by preparing a plurality of types of flash patterns. For example, a high-reliability effect can be expressed by displaying a flash pattern that flashes the illumination panel at a high frequency, and a low-reliability effect can be expressed by displaying a flash pattern that flashes at a low frequency. is.
Alternatively, the degree of reliability may be expressed by changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting section.

(Direction 59)

The effect 59 is a jackpot suggesting effect performed using "sound", "liquid crystal", and "button", for example, "telephone notice effect".
It should be noted that here, an announcement effect using the "telephone", which is an important item appearing in the theme of the gaming machine 1, is executed. Therefore, the announcement effect using other important items in line with the theme of the gaming machine 1 may be used. For example, if the game machine 1 has a soccer theme, a "soccer ball announcement effect" using a "soccer ball" may be executed.

The telephone announcement effect can be executed together with the reach effect. For example, after the first pattern and the second pattern are stopped on the liquid crystal display device 36 and the ready-to-win effect is executed, an image effect showing a state in which a call is received is executed, and the sound generator 46a performs the call. A ringing tone is output as a sound effect, and an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to prompt the user to press the effect button 13 .

The flow of production will be described with a specific example.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 executes a lottery for whether or not to execute the telephone announcement effect.
When the lottery is won, the same decoration pattern is stopped and displayed as the first pattern and the second pattern on the liquid crystal display device 36, and after the ready-to-win performance is executed, the onomatopoeia of the characterized ring tone is displayed. The sound generator 46a outputs the ringing tone while performing the image effect.
After that, an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to prompt the user to press the effect button 13 .

When the player presses the performance button 13, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and an image performance is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to indicate whether or not the big win lottery has been won.

The effect 59 has a different probability of winning the lottery for whether or not it can be executed depending on the set value Ve. For example, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the probability of winning the lottery. Therefore, it can be estimated that the higher the appearance frequency of the effect 59 is, the higher the set value Ve is.

(Direction 60)

The effect 60 is a big-hit suggestive effect performed using a "liquid crystal", for example, a "background change notice effect".
The background change notice performance can be executed at timings such as, for example, the start of the special symbol variation display game, the low speed variation, the high speed variation, and the stop of the first symbol when one of the decoration symbols is stopped.

Specifically, it is an image rendering in which the background image in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is different from the normal one.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

A specific flow of production will be described.
Along with the start of the special pattern variation display game, a lottery for whether or not the background change notice effect can be executed is performed. In the case of winning, an image effect is performed in which a decorative pattern is variably displayed on a specific background image. For example, normally, the background image representing the background during the daytime is used, but when the lottery for execution of the background change notice effect is won, the background image representing the background during the evening is used.

Other effects (for example, ready-to-win effects, etc.) may be executed along with the stop display of the second symbol.
Further, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation differs depending on the execution timing of the background change announcement effect. For example, the degree of expectation may be higher for the background change notice effect to be executed when the first symbol is stopped than for the background change notice effect to be executed when the special symbol variation display game is started.

(Direction 61)

The effect 61 is a big-hit suggesting effect performed using a "liquid crystal" and a "movable body", for example, a "step-up notice effect".
The step-up notice effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display game, at the time of low speed variation, at the time of high speed variation, and at the time of the first symbol stop.

In the step-up notice effect, among image effects prepared in a plurality of stages, image effects up to a predetermined stage are executed. Then, the execution of the image effect in the final stage suggests that the player has won the jackpot lottery. Alternatively, it may be configured to suggest that it is likely that the player has won the jackpot lottery.

Such an effect may be performed over a plurality of timings described above.
A specific description will be given.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery is made as to whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect. When the lottery is won, a lottery is also executed as to what kind of step-up notice effect is to be executed. For example, as step-up notice effects, first-stage effects to fourth-stage effects are provided.
At the timing when the variable display of decorative patterns is actually started on the liquid crystal display device 36, the step-up notice effect is executed and the image effect of the first stage is executed.

Subsequently, after the decorative symbols are stop-displayed, the second-stage image effect is executed at the timing when the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, at the timing when the third pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the third-stage image effect is executed, and at the timing when the fourth pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the Four stages (final stages) of image effects are executed.
As a result, the player is informed that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery.
After that, the first to third symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the player has won the jackpot lottery.

The step-up notice effect has a fixed probability of appearance (probability of winning the lottery for execution possibility) regardless of the set value Ve.

(Direction 62)

The effect 62 is a big hit suggestion effect performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "button", for example, "prediction effect at symbol stop".
The notice effect at the time of symbol stop can be executed, for example, at the timing of the first symbol stop.

A specific flow of production will be described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery for whether or not to execute the notice effect at the time of symbol stop is executed. When the lottery is won, the notice performance at the time of symbol stop appears. This effect is executed with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the decoration symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the light emission control by the optical display device 45a is executed at the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed.

When the player presses the effect button 13, the liquid crystal display device 36 executes a stimulating effect as to whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed by stopping the second symbol.
When execution of the ready-to-win effect is suggested to the user, a pattern similar to the first pattern is stopped and displayed as a second pattern on the liquid crystal display device 36, and any ready-to-win effect appears.
On the other hand, when it is suggested to the user that the ready-to-win performance is not executed, a pattern different from the first pattern is stop-displayed as the second pattern on the liquid crystal display device 36, and subsequently the third pattern is also stop-displayed.

(Direction 63)

The effect 63 is a big hit suggestion effect performed using "sound" and "light", for example, a "roulette notice effect".
The roulette notice effect is an effect that can be performed together with the pseudo-continuous effect, and appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.
An example of the flow of the roulette announcement effect will be described.

Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, an execution possibility lottery for determining whether or not to execute the roulette notice effect is executed.
Here, it is assumed that execution of the effect is determined.
On the liquid crystal display device 36, a decorative pattern variable display game is started, and after three decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the game is restarted to start a pseudo run. A roulette announcement effect is started in response to the start of the pseudo-reunion.
In the game machine 1, for example, a plurality of shaped objects having different shapes are formed around the game area 3a. Each modeled object is, for example, round, star-shaped, or flower-shaped, and is formed to be capable of emitting light in different colors.

In the roulette notice effect, after the round-shaped, star-shaped, and flower-shaped shaped objects emit light in order, an effect is executed in which only a specific shaped object (for example, a star-shaped shaped object) emits light, and the sound generator 46a A sound effect is output.
It is designed so that only objects that are likely to win the jackpot lottery will finally emit light. degree.

After the respective shaped objects are sequentially illuminated with the start of the second pseudo-run, the star-shaped shaped objects are illuminated with the stop display of the decorative symbols in the second pseudo-run.
After the 3rd quasi-continuation is started, the respective shaped objects are sequentially illuminated, and then the star-shaped 3D objects are illuminated again with the stop display of the decorative symbols in the 3rd quasi-continuation.
Furthermore, with the start of the fourth quasi-continuation, each modeled object is sequentially illuminated again, and then the flower-shaped modeled object is illuminated with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the fourth quasi-continuation.
As a result, the player can experience the roulette notice effect according to the progress of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the player can experience the effect with anticipation as to which modeled object will be in the lighted state along with the stop display of the pseudo-continuous effect. You can experience it. That is, it is possible to provide an effect with high game interest.

Another example of the roulette announcement effect will also be described.
Reach effects are set for each of the round, star, and flower shaped objects.
Then, a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the modeled object that finally emits light is executed. That is, the ready-to-win effect corresponding to the flower shape is a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation, and when the roulette notice effect appears, the player has a high-expected reach because the flower-shaped object emits light. It is possible to experience the production while expecting that the production will be executed.

A mode may be prepared in which none of the shaped objects emits light and the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

(Direction 64)

The effect 64 is a big-hit suggestion effect performed using "light" and "liquid crystal", and is, for example, a "group notice effect".
The group announcement effect can be executed, for example, at the timing of the second symbol stop. That is, there is a possibility that it will be executed together with the ready-to-win effect.

Concretely, the flow of production will be described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery for whether or not the group notice effect can be executed is performed. When the lottery is won, the execution of the group announcement effect is determined.

After the decoration symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, the stop display of the first symbol is followed by the stop display of the second symbol. At this timing, on the liquid crystal display device 36, a group announcement effect is executed in which a large number of specific characters are displayed, and the player is notified that the possibility of winning the big win lottery is higher than usual. Further, light emission control by the optical display device 45a is executed as part of the group announcement effect.
After execution of the group announcement effect, a ready-to-win effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like is executed.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation may be expressed by different characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in the group announcement effect.

(Direction 65)

The effect 65 is a big-hit suggesting effect performed using the "liquid crystal" and "buttons", for example, "SP development notice effect".
The SP development notice effect appears when executing a fanning effect to incite whether or not the game will develop into the first type super reach.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The flow of production will be explained concretely.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control section 24 performs a lottery for whether or not the SP development notice effect can be executed.
Next, the decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed. Both the first pattern and the second pattern are the same decorative pattern, and the ready-to-win effect is developed on the liquid crystal display device 36. - 特許庁At this time, the SP development notice effect is also executed. Specifically, an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to encourage whether or not the game will develop into the first type super reach.

In this fanning effect, for example, an image effect in which the main character and the enemy character fight is executed, and at the same time, a notification prompting the user to press the effect button 13 is executed as the image effect.
When the player presses the effect button 13 according to this notification, an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in which either the main character or the enemy character wins. Here, when the image effect that the main character wins is executed, the image effect that develops into the first type super reach is further executed. As a result, the player can grasp that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery.

(Direction 66)

The effect 66 is a big-hit suggesting effect using "sound" and "liquid crystal", for example, "SP title notice effect".
The SP title notice effect is a effect performed using the display mode such as the color and pattern of the super reach title displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when it develops into the first type super reach or the second type super reach. be.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The flow of production will be explained concretely.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control section 24 performs a lottery for execution propriety of the SP title announcement effect.
Next, a decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first and second symbols are stopped and displayed. By stop-displaying the first pattern and the second pattern with the same decorative pattern, after the ready-to-win effect is executed, when the expectation is further increased to the first-class super ready-to-win, the first-to-one super ready-to-win is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

The title announcement effect suggests the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery according to the state of the title image at this time.
For example, if the title is formed in gold letters, the expectation is higher than if it is formed in red. Also, if it is a rainbow pattern or a danger pattern, it is said that the expectation is even higher than that of gold.
Also, when the title image is displayed, a sound effect is output by the sound generator 46a. A plurality of sound effects may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may be suggested depending on which sound effect is output.

(Direction 67)

The production 67 is a big-hit suggesting production performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "button", for example, it is a "promotion production inciting advance notice production".
Promotion performance The fanning notice performance is a performance (promotion performance) that suggests whether or not the player will be promoted from a low-advantage jackpot type to a high-advantage jackpot type after the player is notified of the jackpot type. .
It is more advantageous for the player to execute the promotion performance after notification of the winning of the normal 4R or normal 6R jackpot. Furthermore, when the promotion effect is executed, the game is changed (promoted) to a jackpot type such as a variable probability 6R or a variable probability 10R, which makes the situation even more advantageous for the player.

I will explain the flow of production in detail.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery for whether or not to execute the promotion performance inciting notice performance. After winning the lottery, the decorative pattern variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first, second and third patterns are stopped and displayed in the same decorative pattern. Various effects can be executed until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

After the three same decorative patterns are stop-displayed and the player is informed that he/she has won the jackpot lottery, the promotion performance inciting advance notice performance can be executed based on the previous execution possibility lottery. When this effect is executed, the player can expect to be promoted to a high-advantage jackpot type. It should be noted that inside the gaming machine 1, it is determined in advance whether the jackpot game to be executed from now on has a low advantage or a high advantage. The "promotion" here means that the player finds that the type of jackpot game, which was uncertain for the player, has a high degree of advantage.

In the promotion effect fanning notice effect, the player is informed that the promotion effect will be executed by lighting a light emitting part provided in the effect button 13 as the optical display device 45a. When the player presses the performance button 13, an image performance is executed to give a sense of anticipation as to which of the decorative symbols with a high degree of advantage and the decorative symbols with a low degree of advantage will be stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.例文帳に追加. For example, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the decoration pattern is changed again, and an effect (promoting effect) is executed to prompt the player whether or not the already notified big win type will be changed to a more advantageous big win type. You will be notified of the results. As a result, the player is correctly notified of the jackpot type determined at the time of winning.

The promotion performance fanning notice performance appears at a fixed probability regardless of the set value Ve.

<11. Other performances>

There may be an effect provided in the gaming machine 1 other than the suggesting effect regarding the set value and the suggesting effect regarding the big win.
For example, although no suggestion is made regarding the set value Ve or the big hit, an effect as liveliness may be executed.

(Direction 80)
The production 80 is a lively production performed using "liquid crystal". Specifically, it is an effect that can be executed at the timing (timing 10) when the number of operation pending balls increases by winning a prize.
Based on the start of the special pattern variation display game, a lottery for whether or not the performance 80 can be executed is performed, and when the lottery is won, an image performance of a passerby crossing from left to right is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.例文帳に追加.

Incidentally, a similar effect may be executed as a suggestive effect regarding the set value or a suggestive effect regarding the big hit. For example, an image effect in which a passerby crosses from left to right may be a lively effect, and an image effect in which a passerby crosses from right to left may be executable as a suggestive effect regarding a big win.
In this way, by making the performance similar to the suggestive performance about the set value and the suggestive performance about the big win as the lively performance, even if the lively performance does not suggest the set value or the big win, the amusement of the game can be improved.

<12. Regarding effects with different appearance probabilities depending on the setting value>

As described above, the effects installed in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment include those with different appearance probabilities depending on the set value Ve. Several examples are conceivable for the effect in which the appearance probability differs depending on the set value Ve. Here, each example will be described.

[12-1. 1st example]

A first example of an effect with different appearance probabilities depending on the set value Ve (hereinafter simply referred to as "first example of set difference") is the appearance of the effect due to the fact that the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the corresponding effect differs for each set value Ve. Probabilities are different.
For example, an example of the jackpot probability corresponding to each set value Ve is shown below.

・Set value 1: 1/180
・Set value 2: 1/170
・Set value 3: 1/160
・Set value 4: 1/150
・Set value 5: 1/140
・Set value 6: 1/120

Furthermore, an example of the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for a certain effect X, that is, the probability that the effect X is executed will be shown below.

・Set value 1: 1/8 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Set value 2: 1/7 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Set value 3: 1/6 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Set value 4: 1/5 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Set value 5: 1/4 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Set value 6: 1/3 when winning the jackpot lottery

The appearance probability of the effect X per variation (one game) is calculated from these numerical values as follows.

・Set value 1: 1/1440
・Set value 2: 1/1190
・Set value 3: 1/960
・Set value 4: 1/750
・Set value 5: 1/560
・Set value 6: 1/360

Thus, it can be estimated that the setting value Ve is higher for the game machine 1 in which the number of appearances of the effect X is higher.
Also, the player can estimate the set value Ve by grasping the number of appearances of the effect X with respect to the number of winnings of the big win lottery.

[12-2. Second example]

In the second example of the effect with different appearance probabilities depending on the set value Ve (hereinafter simply referred to as "second example of set difference"), the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the effect is constant regardless of the set value Ve, In the first place, the appearance probability of the effect X differs because the winning probability in the jackpot lottery differs depending on the set value Ve.
For example, the jackpot probability corresponding to each set value Ve is assumed to be the same as in the first example. Also, the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the performance X is assumed to be 1/5 when winning the jackpot lottery regardless of the set value Ve.
At this time, the appearance probability of the effect X per variation (one game) can be calculated as follows.

・Set value 1: 1/900
・Setting value 2: 1/850
・Set value 3: 1/800
・Setting value 4: 1/750
・Set value 5: 1/700
・Set value 6: 1/600

Thus, it can be estimated that the setting value Ve is higher for the game machine 1 in which the number of appearances of the effect X is higher.
As in the first example, the set value Ve cannot be estimated even if the number of appearances of the effect X is grasped with respect to the number of times the jackpot lottery is won.

<13. Example of selective implementation in gaming machines>

All of the suggested effects and the big hit suggested effects related to the set values described above may be implemented in one gaming machine, or may be partially implemented in one gaming machine.
Here, an example will be described in which a part of each suggested effect described above is selected and implemented in one gaming machine.

In the gaming machine 1 in this example, each of the effects 1 to 21, the effects 50 to 67, and the effect 80 described above is selectively implemented.
Specifically, the gaming machine 1 includes effects 1, effects 4, effects 15, effects 20, effects 50, effects 52, effects 53, effects 54, effects 58, effects 62, effects 63, effects 64, effects 65, Effects 66, 67, and 80 are implemented. In the following description, this gaming machine will be referred to as gaming machine 1A.
In the example described above, the effect 20 is executed at each timing during the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state. That is, as an example, among the timings 01 to 42, it is configured to be executable at the timings 10 to 25 in the time-saving state.
The gaming machine 1A in the present example is configured so that an effect 20 can be executed only at a timing 10 as a look-ahead forewarning effect in the time-saving state.

FIG. 122 shows each effect implemented in the gaming machine 1A.
122, the effects are classified into "setting value change suggesting effect", "set value suggesting effect", "big win suggesting effect (with setting difference)", "big win suggesting effect (no setting difference)", and "lively effect". .

The set value Ve can be estimated, such as those with different appearance probabilities depending on the set value Ve, those with different effect modes depending on the set value Ve, or those with different effect modes depending on the set value Ve. It is a performance.
The production with setting difference is defined as "setting value suggesting production" and "jackpot suggesting production (with setting difference)".
In addition, the effects with no setting difference are "set value change suggesting effect", "big hit suggesting effect (no setting difference)", and "lively effect".
It should be noted that the "set value change suggestion effect" may be an effect with a setting difference.

In the following description, the set value change suggestion production is "production A", the set value suggestion production is "production B", the big hit suggestion production (with setting difference) is "production C", the big hit suggestion production (no setting difference) ) is sometimes referred to as “effect D”, and a lively effect that is neither a big win suggestive effect nor a suggestive effect about a set value is sometimes described as “effect E”.

Here, the grouping of the classification of each effect will be described. Note that the effect (effect 80) that is neither a big hit suggestive effect nor a suggestive effect related to the set value is excluded here.
First, as one of the groupings, it is conceivable to distinguish between a suggestive performance that does not suggest a big win and a suggestive performance that suggests a big win.
In this case, a "setting value change suggesting effect" and a "set value suggesting effect" are provided as effects for purely suggesting a set value without suggesting a big hit.
In addition, as for the production for suggesting a big hit, "big hit suggestion production (with setting difference)" and "big hit suggestion production (no setting difference)" are provided.

Furthermore, as another classification method, it is conceivable to make a distinction between suggestion effects including suggestions regarding set values and suggestion effects not including suggestions regarding set values.
In this case, "setting value change suggesting effect", "set value suggesting effect", and "jackpot suggesting effect (with setting difference)" are provided as suggestive effects including suggestions about set values.
In addition, as a suggestive effect that does not include suggestions regarding set values, a "big win suggestive effect (no setting difference)" is provided.

[13-1. Regarding the appearance timing of the production]

The classification of appearance timings of various effects has been described using timings 01 to 42 described above, but a different classification will be used here.
Specifically, each timing at which the effect can appear is classified into "during customer waiting", "during prediction", "during fluctuation (first half)", "during fluctuation (second half)", and "during big hit".

"Waiting for customers" is a period equivalent to timings 01 to 09 described above.
"During look-ahead" is the timing at which the look-ahead notice effect can appear, and the operation suspension ball that has not yet been used for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols) (that is, the operation suspension that has not been digested) ball), it is the timing at which the jackpot lottery for the symbol variation display game related to the operation pending ball can be executed as the look-ahead determination process.

“During fluctuation (first half)” is a period from the start of the decorative symbol fluctuation display game to the stop display of the second symbol (for example, the right symbol), focusing on the decorative symbols.
In terms of the timings described above, this period is equivalent to timings 10-16.
In the following description, the "fluctuating (first half)" may also be described as the first period.

"During fluctuation (second half)" means that the first pattern (for example, the left pattern) and the second pattern (for example, the right pattern) are stopped and displayed with the same decorative pattern, and the third pattern (for example, the middle pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. It is a period from the state where the third symbol is stopped to the state where the third symbol is stopped. In other words, the period from when the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state to when the three decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed.
In terms of the timings described above, this period is equivalent to timings 17-25.
In the following description, the “during fluctuation (latter half)” may also be described as the second period.

"During the jackpot" is the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end, which corresponds to the period of timings 26 to 42 described above.

[13-2. About waiting for customers]

Among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effect that can be executed while the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment is waiting for a customer is the effect 01 as the set value suggesting effect.
In addition, other effects are configured not to be executed while waiting for customers. That is, the effect 01 is the only effect that can be executed while waiting for a customer.

While the setting value suggesting performance can be executed while the customer is waiting, the game machine 1A can be configured so that the performance is difficult to be executed while the customer is waiting by not executing the suggesting performance of suggesting a big win. .
Therefore, when the effect 01 is executed while waiting for a customer, the player can be made to recognize that it is a relatively rare case, and the player's interest in the gaming machine in which the effect 01 is executed can be realized. It is possible to arouse interest. In particular, compared with a game machine in which various effects appear constantly, it is possible to realize effective effects with a small number of times of effects.
It should be noted that such an effect can be further enhanced by not executing the lively effect while the customer is waiting.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
a storage unit for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A setting value estimable effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value based on the appearance probability and/or the effect content, and a setting value that makes it impossible to guess the setting value based on the appearance probability and/or the effect content The unguessable production is provided to be executable,
A game machine characterized in that the setting value estimable performance can appear while the set value estimable performance does not appear while waiting for a customer.

Moreover, such a configuration can also be rephrased as follows.
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. and a third performance capable of estimating the level of the set value based on the mode of performance and estimating the level of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery. , and
A gaming machine, wherein the effect executing means enables execution of the first effect and disables execution of both the second effect and the third effect while the player is waiting for a customer.

In addition, the gaming machine 1A may be configured so as to be able to execute the setting value change suggesting effect while the customer is waiting, unlike the implementation mode of the effect shown in FIG. In that case, both the set value change suggesting effect and the set value suggesting effect can be executed while waiting for the customer.
If the game machine 1A has such a configuration, it is possible to guess whether or not the set value Ve has been changed even while waiting for a customer, and to guess the set value Ve set in the game machine 1A. is possible by the appearance of the effect, and it is possible to increase the willingness to play the game machine.

In addition, since the effect executed here is related to the set value Ve rather than the suggestive effect about the big win, the effect related to the set value Ve is advantageous for the player in the gaming machine where the player is not playing. When executed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will play the game machine for a long time.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A set value change suggesting performance capable of estimating whether or not the set value has been changed after the last power-on operation based on the performance mode, and a setting value change suggesting performance capable of estimating the high or low of the set value based on the performance mode and the winning expectation of the jackpot lottery. A first performance in which the height cannot be guessed, a second performance in which the height of the set value can be guessed based on the performance mode and the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery can be guessed, and the height of the set value is guessed based on the performance mode. and a third performance that makes it impossible to guess the winning expectation level of the jackpot lottery, and a performance executing means that can execute the third performance,
The effect means is capable of executing the setting value change suggesting effect and the first effect while waiting for a customer, and is disabled from executing the second effect and the third effect. .

[13-3. About prefetching]

Among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the look-ahead of the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment are the effect 20 as a setting value suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect (with setting difference). , and productions 52 and 53 as big hit suggesting productions (no setting difference).

The number of types of suggestive effects that may appear during the look-ahead is greater than the number of types of suggestive effects that do not suggest a big win.
The "number of types of effects" referred to here is to count effects of the same system as one. For example, in the production 09 described with reference to FIG. 92, since three types of titles to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 are prepared, at least three patterns are prepared as the production modes. Become. If the appearance timing is taken into consideration, the production pattern will increase further. However, in the "number of types of effects", they are collectively counted as "one".
In the following description, when different production patterns are counted as one, they are described as "total number of production modes".

During the look-ahead, there is a high degree of expectation regarding the operation-reserving ball, and even if the set value suggesting performance is executed in such a state, there is a high possibility that the player will win the jackpot lottery for the operation-reserving ball. There is a risk of causing misunderstanding.
Therefore, in order to prevent such misunderstandings from occurring, the number of types of suggestive performances suggesting a big win is greater than the number of types of suggestive performances that do not suggest a big win, thereby increasing the number of types of suggestive performances that suggest a big win. It is possible to increase the possibility that production will be performed.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of the decorative patterns in a dramatic manner in accordance with the execution of the variable display operation of the special patterns;
Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by detection of a game ball by the starting means;
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is provided for the execution of the special symbol variable display operation in the special symbol display means, the storage order is specified with a predetermined maximum reserved storage number as the upper limit. a holding storage means for holding and storing as an operation holding ball capable of
Retained ball number notification means for notifying the number of retained balls, which is the number of the activated retained balls, by displaying a retained icon for the number of retained balls;
pre-reading determination means for performing a pre-reading determination of a hit or loss of a jackpot lottery related to the operation-reserving ball at a predetermined timing before the operation-reserving ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol;
Prefetching notice effect means for performing a prefetching notice effect of changing the display mode of the reserve icon for the actuation reserve ball that is the target of the prefetching determination;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
As the fore-reading notice effects, a first effect in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the effect mode and it is impossible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first effect in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and At least one of a second performance capable of estimating the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery and a third performance capable of estimating the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery without estimating the level of the set value based on the mode of performance. with
The number of types of the first effects that can be executed as the foreknowledge effects is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that can be executed as the foreknowledge effects is b ( b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effects that can be executed as the look-ahead preview effect is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine, wherein a is a number smaller than (b+c).

Further, another configuration example that produces the above effects will be shown below.
a setting means capable of setting a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
a display means capable of variably displaying a performance pattern composed of three pattern groups which respectively fluctuate according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
an effect execution control means capable of executing and controlling a first-type effect suggesting the set value set in the game machine and a second-type effect suggesting the lottery result,
Let s the number of first-type effects that can be executed in a look-ahead period in which a look-ahead forewarning effect for a ball with pending operation is executed based on the lottery result of the ball with pending operation before being provided for variable display,
Assuming that the number of second-type effects that can be executed in the look-ahead period is t,
A gaming machine characterized in that t > s > 0

In a state where the relationship between the variable s and the variable t is established, the first type effect may include a effect (effect a) that mainly suggests a set value as the purpose of effect. In addition, the second type effect is mainly related to the winning or losing of the lottery result for the purpose of production, and the effect (production b) in which the selection ratio differs according to the set value, and An effect (effect c) that makes a suggestion and has the same selection ratio regardless of the set value may be included.
That is, when the above variable s is the number of effects a, and the variable t is the sum of the number of effects b and the number of effects c, t>s≧0 may be established.

As a result, during the look-ahead, the performance mainly aimed at suggesting the lottery result of the big win can be executed more than the performance mainly aimed at suggesting the set value. As a result, in a state in which the player's expectation for the operation-reserving ball is high, many effects including suggestions about the big win appear, thereby making it difficult for the player to be confused and increasing the player's willingness to play. can perform effectively. In addition, since it is difficult for the first type effect to appear, the processing load of the effect execution control means and the power consumption can be reduced.
Note that the variable t and the variable s referred to here may be the "number of types of effects" or the "total number of effects modes".

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A production a is a production that mainly suggests the setting value as a production purpose,
As a production purpose, mainly suggesting the winning or losing of the lottery result, and making a production b in which the selection ratio is different according to the set value,
As a performance c, the performance c is mainly performed to suggest the winning or losing of the lottery result, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The production a is included in the first type production,
The game machine, wherein the effect b and the effect c are included in the second type effect.

In a state where the variables s and t are established, the first type effect may be the effect b, and the second type effect may be the c.
That is, when the above variable s is the number of effects b and the variable t is the number of effects c, t>s≧0 may be established.

As a result, when focusing on the effect that suggests a big hit to be executed during the look-ahead, it appears regardless of the setting value, rather than the effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value that has a different appearance frequency depending on the setting value. Since the performance with the same frequency appears more often, the player can enjoy the performance without much consideration of whether the suggestion is related to the set value or the big win. Further, by making the first type effect difficult to appear, the processing load of the effect execution control means and the power consumption can be reduced.

In addition, regarding the production whose main purpose is to suggest a set value, by making a production that is different from the production mainly aimed at suggesting a big win or a production that is not confusing, it is possible to avoid player confusion and perform an appropriate production. can be done. For example, setting values may be casually suggested by causing a specific character image to appear in a corner of the liquid crystal display device 36 during execution of an effect suggesting a big win. In addition, when the effect of suggesting a big win is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 and the player is paying attention to the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emitting effect using the decorative lamp 45 or the like is casually performed. Thus, it may appeal to players who have advanced understanding of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the variable t and the variable s referred to here may be the "number of types of effects" or the "total number of effects modes".

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 that produces the above effects will be shown.
A production a is a production that mainly suggests the setting value as a production purpose,
As a production purpose, mainly suggesting the winning or losing of the lottery result, and making a production b in which the selection ratio is different according to the set value,
As a performance c, the performance c is mainly performed to suggest the winning or losing of the lottery result, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The production b is included in the first type production,
A gaming machine, wherein the effect c is included in the second type effect.

In a state in which the variables s and t are established, the first type effect may be the effect a and the effect b, and the second type effect may be the effect c.
That is, when the above variable s is the sum of the number of effects a and the number of effects b, and the variable t is the number of effects c, t>s≧0 may be established.

As a result, during the look-ahead, the number of performances mainly aimed at suggesting the set value, that is, the number of performances a and b is reduced, so that the player can pay more attention to whether or not the operation pending ball is a big hit. It is possible to experience the production while doing it. That is, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect without causing confusion for the player. Further, by avoiding the appearance of the effects a and b as the first type effects, the processing load of the effect execution control means and the power consumption can be reduced.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 that exhibits such effects is shown below.
A production a is a production that mainly suggests the setting value as a production purpose,
As a production purpose, mainly suggesting the winning or losing of the lottery result, and making a production b in which the selection ratio is different according to the set value,
As a performance c, the performance c is mainly performed to suggest the winning or losing of the lottery result, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The production a and the production b are included in the first type production,
A gaming machine, wherein the effect c is included in the second type effect.

Several examples are conceivable for the number of first-type effects and the number of second-type effects described above. One is to regard productions with different appearance timings and appearance occasions as one production. That is, in other words, similar effects with the same appearance timing and appearance timing but with slightly different effects, such as effects with only different lines displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, are not possible. It is regarded as a mere variation, and it is regarded as one production including various variations.
Thus, the number of types of performances that a player can actually perceive as the number of performances, that is, the number of performances in which a plurality of variations are grouped together, can be considered to balance the performances implemented in the game machine 1.例文帳に追加can be done. In other words, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects suggesting setting values so as not to confuse the player, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, the balance of effects that does not cause discomfort to the player can be achieved. It is feasible.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown.
The number of productions with different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timing and/or appearance timing are similar to each other is counted separately,
A gaming machine, wherein the t and the s are numbers of effect groups.

As another example of the number of first-type effects and the number of second-type effects, even effects with similar appearance timings and appearance opportunities are treated as one effect. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and the appearance opportunity are the same, if the presentation mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different presentation. In other words, the more variations of effects, the more the number of effects.
The presentations with different variations are partially stored as common information inside the game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, by treating effects with different variations as different effects (separate effects), it is possible to realize various modes of effects while improving the usage efficiency of the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of effects with different appearance timings and/or appearance triggers is the number of effect groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timing and/or appearance timing are similar to each other is counted separately,
A gaming machine, wherein said t and said s are the numbers of effect variations.

In order to prevent misunderstandings, the game machine 1A is configured so that when executing the setting value suggesting effect, the big win suggesting effect (no setting difference) or the big win suggesting effect (with the setting difference) is always executed. It is possible to

Next, consider the amount of production opportunities. The effect 20 in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment can be executed during the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state, and can be executed in the game state other than the time saving state like the effects 50, 52 and 53. It has not been. That is, compared with the effects 50, 52 and 53, the effect 20 is set to have fewer execution opportunities.
Therefore, the above-described misunderstandings are less likely to occur in the gaming machine 1A by providing more opportunities to execute the suggestive performance that suggests the big win than to execute the suggestive performance that does not suggest the big win. becomes.

In addition, considering the number of performance opportunities, it can be considered that the gaming machine 1A has more opportunities to execute the suggestive effect that does not include the suggestion about the set value than the suggestive effect that includes the suggestion about the set value. be. Specifically, there are more opportunities to execute the effects 52 and 53 than to execute the effects 20 and 50 .
As a result, it is possible to prevent the players from being confused because they do not know what the performance is suggesting due to the appearance of many performances suggesting only the jackpot lottery results purely related to the operation-reserving balls. can.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of the decorative patterns in a dramatic manner in accordance with the execution of the variable display operation of the special patterns;
Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by detection of a game ball by the starting means;
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is provided for the execution of the special symbol variable display operation in the special symbol display means, the storage order is specified with a predetermined maximum reserved storage number as the upper limit. a holding storage means for holding and storing as an operation holding ball capable of
Retained ball number notification means for notifying the number of retained balls, which is the number of the activated retained balls, by displaying a retained icon for the number of retained balls;
pre-reading determination means for performing a pre-reading determination of a hit or loss of a jackpot lottery related to the operation-reserving ball at a predetermined timing before the operation-reserving ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol;
Prefetching notice effect means for performing a prefetching notice effect of changing the display mode of the reserve icon for the actuation reserve ball that is the target of the prefetching determination;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
As the look-ahead notice effect, a first effect in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode, and At least one of a second performance capable of estimating the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of the set value based on the mode of performance and estimating the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. with
The number of types of the first effects that can be executed as the foreknowledge effects is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that can be executed as the foreknowledge effects is b ( b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effects that can be executed as the look-ahead preview effect is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine, wherein (a+b) is a number equal to or less than c.

Next, a suggestion effect for suggesting a big hit will be described.
In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, performances 50, 52, and 53 can be executed during the look-ahead as a suggestion performance for suggesting a big hit. Among them, the number of types of effects is larger in the big hit suggesting effect (without setting difference) than in the big win suggesting effect (with setting difference).
As a result, more jackpot suggestive performances (no set difference) can appear without confusion as to whether it is a suggestive performance about the set value Ve or a suggestion about the winning or losing of the big win lottery, so that the player can easily understand the performance. can be done. In particular, as shown in FIG. 122, the number of types of effects implemented in the gaming machine 1A as a jackpot suggesting effect (with setting difference) is one (50 effects), so that the player can By grasping that the production 50) is a production that includes suggestions regarding the set value Ve, it can be seen that the other productions (productions 52 and 53) are productions that only suggest a big hit. You can enjoy the production without worrying about it.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of the decorative patterns in a dramatic manner in accordance with the execution of the variable display operation of the special patterns;
Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by detection of a game ball by the starting means;
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is provided for the execution of the special symbol variable display operation in the special symbol display means, the storage order is specified with a predetermined maximum reserved storage number as the upper limit. a holding storage means for holding and storing as an operation holding ball capable of
Retained ball number notification means for notifying the number of retained balls, which is the number of the activated retained balls, by displaying a retained icon for the number of retained balls;
pre-reading determination means for performing a pre-reading determination of a hit or loss of a jackpot lottery related to the operation-reserving ball at a predetermined timing before the operation-reserving ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol;
Prefetching notice effect means for performing a prefetching notice effect of changing the display mode of the reserve icon for the actuation reserve ball that is the target of the prefetching determination;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
As the foreknowledge effect, the level of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be estimated, and the level of the set value cannot be estimated based on the effect mode. Equipped with at least one of the third effects that can guess the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery,
The number of types of the second effects that can be executed as the foreknowledge effects is b (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effects that can be executed as the foreknowledge effects is c ( c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine, wherein b is a number smaller than c.

[13-4. About changing (first half)]

Among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the fluctuation (first half) of the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment are the effect 04 as a set value change suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect (setting Effect 54 as an effect (with a difference), effect 62, 63 as a big hit suggesting effect (no set difference), and effect 80 as a lively effect.

The number of types of suggestive effects that may appear during fluctuation (first half) is greater than the number of types of suggestive effects that do not suggest a big win.
Concretely, the number of types of suggestive effects that do not suggest a big hit is only one, that is, the set value change suggestive effect. In addition, the number of types of suggestive performances for suggesting big wins is one big win suggestive performance (with set difference) and two big win suggestive performances (no set difference), for a total of three. Note that, as described above, the effect 80 that does not suggest the set value or the big win is excluded here.

During the fluctuation (first half), the player's interest in whether or not each notice effect such as the ready-to-win effect is executed is heightened. If the setting value suggesting performance and the set value change suggesting performance are executed many times in such a state, it becomes an unwilling performance for the players who are highly interested in whether or not the variation wins the jackpot lottery. There is a risk that the attractiveness of the gaming machine 1A will be halved.

In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the number of types of suggestive effects that suggest a big win is greater than the number of types of suggestive effects that do not suggest a big win. It is said that many suggestive productions related to the big hits of interest can appear.

An example of the configuration of such a gaming machine 1 will be given.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. 2nd effect that can guess the high or low of the set value, 3rd effect that can not guess the high or low of the set value based on the performance mode and can guess the high or low of the winning expectation of the jackpot lottery, and change the set value based on the performance mode and a production executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth productions capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The effect execution means can be executed during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of two of the first, second and third decorative symbols. The number of types of the first effects is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that can be executed during the specific period is b (b is 0 or more), and is executed during the specific period. The number of types of the possible third effects is c (c is 0 or more), the number of types of the fourth effects that can be executed in the specific period is d (d is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that (a+d) is a number smaller than (b+c).

In addition, especially in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the suggesting effect that does not suggest the big hit that appears during the variation (first half) is only the effect 04, which is the set value change suggesting effect. It is sufficient for the player to confirm the set value change suggesting effect once, and the set value change suggesting effect becomes unnecessary while the game is continued thereafter. Therefore, the setting value change suggesting effect is less likely to appear many times while the game is continued, and the appearance probability may be set lower than other suggesting effects. In fact, as described above, the effect 04 can be executed only when winning a prize, which is the first variation start timing after the power is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not it appears once after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, the performances 54, 62 and 63 are configured to appear many times a day, and as an opportunity to execute the performance, the suggestion of the big win is suggested rather than the suggestion performance of not suggesting the big win. There are more suggestive productions.
As a result, almost all of the effects experienced by the player during the fluctuation (first half) are suggestive effects that suggest a big hit, so there is a possibility that the player will be confused as to what the suggestive effect has appeared. has been lowered.

Note that the setting value change suggesting effect (for example, effect 04) is a effect with extremely limited effect opportunities, but it is also an important effect for determining whether or not to continue playing the gaming machine in which the effect appears. be.
Since such an effect can be executed even though there are few chances for the effect, it is possible to arouse the desire to play for a long time.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, it has been explained that the only suggesting effect that does not suggest a big hit that appears during the fluctuation (first half) is the effect 04, which is the setting value change suggesting effect. For example, it is configured so that the setting value suggestion effect does not appear during the fluctuation (first half).
This reduces the possibility that the player will be confused as to what suggestive effect has appeared.

An example of the configuration of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects will be given.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. a second effect that makes it possible to guess how high or low a value is, a third effect that makes it impossible to guess how high or low a set value is based on the performance mode, and a third effect that makes it possible to guess how high or low an expectation is for winning a jackpot lottery, and changes set values based on the mode of performance. a production executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth productions capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The effect execution means performs the second 1 production is made impossible to execute.

In addition, since two or more types of suggestive performances (performances 54, 62, 63) are provided for suggesting a big hit, it is possible to suggest a big win by using various performances without being monotonous. It has become. That is, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.
In particular, since a plurality of jackpot suggestive effects (no setting difference) are implemented and the number of types of effects is the largest (two effects 62 and 63), there is interest in winning and losing the big hit lottery related to the change. It is possible to perform an effective production for the player who has it.

An example of the configuration of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects will be given.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. 2nd effect that can guess the high or low of the set value, 3rd effect that can not guess the high or low of the set value based on the performance mode and can guess the high or low of the winning expectation of the jackpot lottery, and change the set value based on the performance mode a production executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth productions capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The effect executing means performs a plurality of types of effects during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of two of the first, second and third decorative symbols. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing the third effect of.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the total number of types of setting value change suggesting effect, set value suggesting effect, and lively effect (1, 0, 1, total 2) The total number of types of performance (with setting difference) and big win suggesting performance (no setting difference) (1 and 2, total 3) is greater, so that the player is most interested in the jackpot lottery. There are many variations of suggestive performances regarding the success or failure of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

An example of the configuration of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects will be given.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. a second effect that makes it possible to guess how high or low a value is, a third effect that makes it impossible to guess how high or low a set value is based on the performance mode, and a third effect that makes it possible to guess how high or low an expectation is for winning a jackpot lottery, and changes set values based on the mode of performance. At least one of a fourth performance capable of estimating the presence or absence of a game, and a fifth performance making it impossible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be executed. means for execution;
The effect execution means can be executed during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of two of the first, second and third decorative symbols. The number of types of the first effects is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that can be executed during the specific period is b (b is 0 or more), and is executed during the specific period. The number of possible types of the third effect is c (c is 0 or more), the number of types of the fourth effect that can be executed during the specific period is d (d is 0 or more), and the specific period The number of types of the fifth effect that can be executed in is e (e is 0 or more),
A gaming machine, wherein (a+d+e) is set to a number smaller than (b+c).

[13-5. About fluctuation (second half)]

Among the respective effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the fluctuation (second half) are the effect 58 as the big hit suggesting effect (with setting difference), the effect 64 as the big win suggesting effect (no setting difference), and the effect. 65, effect 66, and effect 67.
That is, the gaming machine 1A in this example is not provided with a setting value change suggesting effect and a set value suggesting effect that can be executed during fluctuation (second half), and there is only one big win suggesting effect (with a setting difference) and a big win suggesting effect. There are four productions (no setting difference).

During the fluctuation (second half), since the setting value change suggesting effect and the set value suggesting effect are not provided, the effect executed by the gaming machine 1A becomes a effect suggesting a big hit. not cause confusion.
In particular, during the variation (second half), the decorative pattern on the liquid crystal display device 36 is in a ready-to-win state, so the interest in whether or not the variation is a big hit is remarkably improved. It is not preferable to execute an effect of only suggesting the set value at such timing.

For example, when executing a flashy effect that gives a sense of expectation to a player who is playing a game without knowing the features of the gaming machine 1A well, the game is played despite the effect suggesting a high set value. Players may expect that the decorative symbol variation display game being executed at that time is highly likely to be a big hit. As a result, if the decorative symbol variation display game is lost, the player may be confused, or the player may become discouraged and end the game.
According to this example, since the effect of only suggesting the setting value Ve during the fluctuation (second half) cannot be executed, there is no risk of causing such a situation, and the effect is executed. , it is possible to enjoy the performance by paying attention only to the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. a second effect that makes it possible to guess how high or low a value is, a third effect that makes it impossible to guess how high or low a set value is based on the performance mode, and a third effect that makes it possible to guess how high or low an expectation is for winning a jackpot lottery, and changes set values based on the mode of performance. a production executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth productions capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The effect executing means specifies a range from a ready-to-win state in which two of the first, second, and third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed until three decorative symbols are stopped. A gaming machine characterized in that neither the first effect nor the fourth effect can be executed during a period.

In addition, since two or more types of suggestive performances for suggesting a big hit are provided, it is possible to suggest a big win by using various performances without being monotonous. That is, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. 2nd effect that can guess the high or low of the set value, 3rd effect that can not guess the high or low of the set value based on the performance mode and can guess the high or low of the winning expectation of the jackpot lottery, and change the set value based on the performance mode a production executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth productions capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The effect executing means specifies a range from a ready-to-win state in which two of the first, second and third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed until three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. A game machine, wherein a plurality of types of the second effect and the third effect can be executed during a period.

It should be noted that the performance in the reach state may take a long time to execute. In such a state, if not only the suggestion performance of suggesting the big win but also the suggestion performance of not suggesting the big win are further executed, there is a risk that the performance time will be prolonged, and the player will feel annoyed. You may feel it.
According to the present example, since the suggestive effect that does not suggest the big win is not executed during the fluctuation (second half), the effect time is prevented from becoming unnecessarily long.

Among the timings 17 to 25 during the variation (latter half), the number of suggestion performances for suggesting a big win that can be executed at the timing 17 is the largest.
Specifically, there are two types of suggestive effects, i.e., effects 58 and 64, for suggesting a big hit that can be executed at the timing 17. - 特許庁There are two types of suggestive performances, i.e., performances 65 and 66, for suggesting a big hit that can be executed at the timing 19.例文帳に追加A suggestive effect for suggesting a big hit that can be executed at timings 20, 22 and 23 is one type of effect 66. - 特許庁A suggestive effect for suggesting a big hit that can be executed at timings 24 and 25 is one type of effect 67.例文帳に追加
A suggestive effect for suggesting a big hit that can be executed at the timings 18 and 21 is not implemented in the gaming machine 1A in this example.

Timing 17 is the timing at which the second symbol stops, and is one of the timings that the player has great expectations for. In other words, the player has a great interest in whether or not the decoration symbol that is the same as the first symbol will stop.
The game machine 1A can be provided with a game machine 1A with a high level of interest in the game by implementing many suggestion performances for suggesting a big win that can be executed at the timing 17 in the game machine 1A.

It should be noted that other timings are conceivable for the player to meet with high expectations. For example, it may correspond to during execution of win-lose fan effect at timing 20, during run of win-lose fan effect at timing 23, and during fanning effect to notify whether or not the effect at timing 19 develops. A similar effect can be obtained by preparing a wide variety of suggestion effects that suggest a possible big win at such timing.

Further, among a plurality of timings at which the player's expectations are high, it may be possible to execute various effects by narrowing down to one timing, or it may be possible to execute various effects at all the timings.
When a variety of performances can be executed focusing on one timing, the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not the performance will be executed is heightened when the relevant timing is reached. In other words, when the relevant timing is recognized by the player as the timing at which the gaming machine 1A is most interesting, the timing is regarded as a timing unique to the gaming machine 1A, and is differentiated from other gaming machines. can be planned.
In addition, it is possible to remarkably improve the player's willingness to play by occasionally appearing a suggestive performance suggesting a big win in a manner that catches the player's surprise at a timing other than the corresponding timing.

Note that these effects are not limited to during fluctuation (second half). That is, the same effect can be obtained by constructing the gaming machine 1A so as to be able to execute various effects at the timing that the player expects.

[13-6. About the jackpot]

Of the effects shown in FIG. 122, only the effect 15 as a set value suggesting effect can be executed during the jackpot (during the jackpot game) of the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment.

During the big win, the game machine 1A is configured so that the big win suggesting performance does not appear, so that it is determined that the performance appearing during the big win period is the performance suggesting the set value. The viewer can appropriately grasp the content of the performance.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
A gaming machine, wherein the effect executing means is configured to disable execution of the second effect and the third effect during a jackpot game.

Further, during the jackpot, it is a period in which the player enjoys an advantageous situation, and is also a period in which it is determined whether or not the game should be continued in the gaming machine 1A.
Since the effect that appears during such a period is only the set value suggesting effect, the player who has visually recognized or experienced the effect can make an appropriate judgment.

During the jackpot game, it is possible to acquire a predetermined number of prize balls by winning game balls into the opened big winning hole 50, but since winning the big winning hole 50 is relatively easy, it is not so easy. It is possible to play the game without paying attention to the big winning opening 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest in the gaming machine 1A will fade during the jackpot game.
However, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, in the effect 15 as the set value suggestion effect, the sound effect based on the occurrence of over winning can be executed. That is, by launching the game ball so as to encourage the occurrence of over winning, the probability of occurrence of the set value suggesting effect can be improved. As a result, the player can improve the accuracy of guessing the set value Ve of the gaming machine 1A. That is, since the player can concentrate on the big win game to generate an over-win, the game interest can be improved.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
a big winning means formed in the game area and capable of executing a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball and an open state in which it is easy to enter a game ball;
Entering ball number counting means for counting game balls that have entered the big winning means based on information detected by entering ball detecting means for detecting game balls that have entered the big winning means;
a lottery means for executing a lottery as to whether or not to win;
an opening control means capable of controlling the big winning means to the open state until the number of game balls counted by the entering ball number counting means reaches a prescribed number of entering balls within a range not exceeding a predetermined specified time;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The game machine is characterized in that the effect executing means is capable of executing the first effect when the counted number of game balls exceeds the prescribed number of winning balls.

During the big win, even if a game ball wins the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, the winning amount exceeding the maximum reserved storage number is not subject to the big winning lottery. That is, at the stage when the number of operation pending balls reaches the maximum pending storage number, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the prize winning of the game balls to the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 will fade.
Therefore, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 in a state in which the number of operation pending balls is maximized during the jackpot game, some kind of effect sound for suggesting the set value is reproduced. The game machine 1A may be configured so as to be able to execute a set value suggestion effect. As a result, the player can be interested in the game ball winning the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 even after the number of operation retention balls reaches the maximum retention storage number. , It is possible to improve the game interest.

[13-7. About change (overall)]

Among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during (whole) the fluctuation of the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, that is, during the fluctuation (first half) and during the fluctuation (second half) Effect 04 as a set value change suggesting effect, effects 54 and 58 as a big hit suggesting effect (with setting difference), effects 62, 63, 64, 65 as a big win suggesting effect (no setting difference), 66, 67.

In the gaming machine 1A of the embodiment, the setting value suggesting effect is not included in the effect that may appear during (whole) variation. In addition, the effect 04 as the set value change suggesting effect that can only appear is only at the time of winning, which is the first fluctuation start timing after the power is turned on, as described above. Timing is severely limited.
Therefore, the suggestive effects related to the set values are almost not included in the effects that can appear during the fluctuation (whole).
As a result, since the performances appearing during the variation (entirely) are almost certainly the big hit suggesting performances except for the performance 80 that does not suggest anything, appropriate information can be provided without confusing the players. is suggested.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The game machine is characterized in that the effect executing means is unable to execute any of the first effects during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols.

In addition, among the jackpot suggestive productions that can appear during fluctuation (entire), those with setting differences (productions 54, 58) and those without setting differences (productions 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67). The number of types is reduced in comparison.
During fluctuations, interest in winning or losing the jackpot draw for that fluctuation is at its highest. On the other hand, the effect of only suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win lottery without suggesting the set value Ve (that is, the effect of suggesting a big win (no set difference)) is the suggestion of the set value Ve and the expectation of the big win lottery. It is possible to provide a performance that does not confuse the player as to what the suggestion performance is by providing more than the performance of suggesting both degrees (that is, the performance suggesting a big hit (with setting difference)). .

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The effect executing means sets the number of types of the second effect executable during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the stop display of the three decorative symbols to be b (b is 0 or more). , the number of types of the third effects that can be executed in the specific period is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine, wherein c is set to a number larger than b.

Furthermore, a plurality of types of big hit suggestion effects (with setting differences) are provided as effects that can appear during fluctuation (overall). As a result, it is possible to carry out a variety of effects suggesting only the result of the variable jackpot lottery that the player is most interested in, thus improving the interest in the game.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern by using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The game machine is characterized in that the effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the third effect during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols.

In some cases, it is possible to obtain an effect by changing the mode of production (production content, appearance probability, etc.) to be executed during fluctuation (first half) and during fluctuation (second half) that constitutes fluctuation (whole). .
For example, the number (n) of effects (type 1 effects) that can be executed during the first period (during fluctuation (first half)) is the second period (during fluctuation (second half)) It is conceivable that the number (m) of the first-type effects made executable in .
During the second period, it is considered essential from the point of view of game interest to be able to execute an effect for suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery. In such a period, performing an effect that can suggest a setting value increases the number of effects that are executed in the second period, and in some cases, a plurality of types of effects are executed at the same time. As a result, the length of time used for the effect becomes longer, and the processing load on the CPU involved in the effect increases. According to this configuration, by avoiding such a situation, it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load and the power consumption. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility of dropping frames in the image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
a setting means capable of setting a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
a display means capable of variably displaying performance symbols according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
an effect execution control means capable of executing and controlling a first type effect suggesting the set value set in the game machine during the variation of the effect symbol by the display means,
In a gaming machine in which the performance symbols are composed of three groups of symbols that respectively fluctuate,
A period from when the three symbol groups start to change on the display means until two of them stop varying is defined as a first period (during variation (first half)), and the two symbol groups do not change. When the second period (fluctuating (latter half)) is the period from when the game is stopped until all the three symbol groups are stopped,
The number of the first type effects that can be executed during the first period is n,
Assuming that the number of the first type effects that can be executed during the second period is m,
A gaming machine characterized in that n>m≧0 holds true.

In addition, by providing a difference in the effect that can be executed according to the stop mode when two symbol groups out of the three symbol groups (left symbol group, middle symbol group, right symbol group) are stopped and displayed, effect It is sometimes possible to obtain
For example, the number of first-class effects (m1) that can be executed in the second period when the stop mode when the two symbol groups are stopped and displayed is not "ready state (ready state)" is "ready state ( It is conceivable to increase the number of type 1 effects that can be executed in the second period (m2) in the case of the reach state).
During the second period, it is essential for the enjoyment of the game to be able to execute an effect for suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery. do not have. Therefore, in the non-reach state, there is a high possibility that the performance for suggesting the result of the jackpot lottery will not be executed, and it is unlikely that the performance and the first-class performance will be executed at the same time, so the processing load on the CPU. The first type effect can be executed without causing an increase in power consumption or an increase in power consumption. In addition, by executing the first type effect instead of not executing the effect for suggesting the result of the winning lottery, it is possible to efficiently suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.
That is, in the second period, it is desirable to increase the number of executable first-type effects in the non-reach state than in the reach state.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
In the display mode when two of the three symbol groups stop varying after the three symbol groups start varying,
When the two symbol groups are not in the predetermined ready-to-win mode, the number of the first type effects that can be executed in the second period is m1,
When the two symbol groups are in a predetermined ready-to-win mode, the number of the first type effects that can be executed in the second period is m2,
A gaming machine characterized in that m1>m2≧0 holds true.

Some specific examples of the above-described first-class effect (effect that can suggest a set value) will be described.
In the following description, the effect whose main purpose is to suggest the set value is "effect a", and the effect whose main purpose is to suggest the outcome of the jackpot lottery is "effect b". Or, it is called "Direction c". As for the “effect b” and the “effect c”, the effect in which the selection ratio differs according to the set value is “effect b”, and the effect in which the selection ratio does not differ according to the set value is “effect c”.
In the first example, the first type effect includes the effect a and does not include the effect b and the effect c.
As a result, since the production mainly aimed at suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery is not included in the first type production, it is desirable to execute the production for suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery at the desired timing. By not executing the seed effect, it is possible to obtain the various effects described above.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A production a is a production that mainly suggests the setting value as a production purpose,
As a production purpose, a production b that mainly suggests the winning or losing of the lottery result and has a different selection ratio according to the set value,
As a performance c, a performance c that mainly suggests the winning or losing of the lottery result and has the same selection ratio regardless of the set value,
A gaming machine, wherein the first-type effect includes the effect a and does not include the effect b and the effect c.

In the second example of the above-described first type effect, the first type effect includes the effect b and does not include the effect a and the effect c.
As a result, although the main purpose is to suggest the results of the jackpot lottery, there is also an effect that includes suggestions about set values, so to speak, an effect that makes some players hesitate as to what they are suggesting. It is defined as the first type production.
By controlling such a first-class performance so that it is not executed at the timing when it is desirable to execute the performance for suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery, the player does not misunderstand the contents of the suggestion. can be executed at the appropriate time. Further, even if the performance (performance a) whose main purpose is to suggest a setting value, the performance is mainly directed to suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery, and By making it possible to execute an effect with a different selection ratio according to the set value, it is possible to interpolate not to execute the effect a.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A production a is a production that mainly suggests the setting value as a production purpose,
As a production purpose, mainly suggesting the winning or losing of the lottery result, and making a production b in which the selection ratio is different according to the set value,
As a performance c, the performance c is mainly performed to suggest the winning or losing of the lottery result, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
A game machine, wherein the type 1 effect includes the effect b and does not include the effect a and the effect c.

Furthermore, in the third example of the above-described first-type effect, the first-type effect includes the effect a and the effect b, but does not include the effect c.
As a result, not only the production (production a) whose main purpose is not to suggest the result of the big win lottery, but also the main purpose is to suggest the result of the big win lottery. The effects that are allowed to be suggested are also defined as the first type effects.
By not executing such a first-class performance at the timing when it is desirable to execute the performance for suggesting the win-loss result of the jackpot lottery, the player can obtain the setting value set in the game machine 1 currently playing the game. It is possible to enjoy the production without worrying about what the Ve is. Also, at this timing, by mainly executing an effect with the same selection ratio regardless of the set value, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU and reduce the power consumption.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A production a is a production that mainly suggests the setting value as a production purpose,
As a production purpose, mainly suggesting the winning or losing of the lottery result, and making a production b in which the selection ratio is different according to the set value,
As a performance c, the performance c is mainly performed to suggest the winning or losing of the lottery result, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
A gaming machine, wherein the first type effect includes the effect a and the effect b, but does not include the effect c.

Also, several examples are conceivable for the number of first-type effects. One is to regard productions with different appearance timings and appearance occasions as one production. That is, in other words, similar effects with the same appearance timing and appearance timing but with slightly different effects, such as effects with only different lines displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, are produced. It is regarded as a mere variation, and it is regarded as one production including various variations.
Thus, the number of types of performances that a player can actually perceive as the number of performances, that is, the number of performances in which a plurality of variations are grouped together, can be considered to balance each performance implemented in the game machine 1.例文帳に追加can be done. In other words, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects suggesting set values so as not to confuse the player, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, the balance of effects that does not cause discomfort to the player can be achieved. It is feasible.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of productions with different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timing and/or appearance timing are similar to each other is counted separately,
A gaming machine, wherein said n and said m are the numbers of effect groups.

As another example of the number of first-type effects, even effects having similar appearance timings and appearance opportunities are treated as one effect. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and the appearance opportunity are the same, if the presentation mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different presentation. In other words, the more variations of effects, the more the number of effects.
The presentations with different variations are partially stored as common information inside the game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, by treating effects with different variations as different effects (separate effects), it is possible to realize various modes of effects while improving the usage efficiency of the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of productions with different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timing and/or appearance timing are similar to each other is counted separately,
A gaming machine, wherein said n and said m are the numbers of effect variations.

[13-8. Setting Suggestion Effect and Appearance Timing]

The set value suggesting effects that can appear in this embodiment are effects 01, 15, and 20. FIG. As for these effects, the number of types of effects appearing during a period other than that during fluctuation (entire) is larger. Specifically, there are 0 types of setting value suggesting effects that can appear during (whole) fluctuation, and there are 3 types of setting value suggesting effects that can appear in other periods.
As a result, it is made difficult for the performance suggesting the set value to appear during (whole) the variation in which the winning or losing of the jackpot lottery for the variation concerned is the most interesting, and the game machine 1A during the game is continued in the other time zones. A set value suggesting effect that can be used as a judgment material for judging whether or not to play the game is likely to appear. Therefore, appropriate information is provided.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
a performance executing means capable of executing at least one first performance that makes it possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and makes it impossible to estimate the level of the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery;
The effect executing means sets the number of types of the first effect executable during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the stop display of the three decorative symbols to be a (a is 0 or more), and The number of types of the first effect that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a number smaller than b.

[13-9. Jackpot Suggestion Production and Appearance Timing]

In the present embodiment, effects 50, 54, and 58 are the big hit suggesting effects (with setting differences) that can appear. As for these effects, the number of types of effects that can appear during the fluctuation (entire) is greater than the number of types of effects that can appear during other periods.
That is, there are two types of jackpot suggestive performances (with set differences) that can appear during fluctuation (overall), and jackpot suggestive performances (with set differences) that can appear in other periods. is considered to be one type.

Since the big hit suggestive effect (with setting difference) is a kind of big win suggestive effect, it is possible to appear many times during the fluctuation. It is possible to perform.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
a performance execution means capable of executing at least one second performance capable of estimating the level of the set value based on the performance mode and of estimating the level of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery;
The effect executing means sets the number of types of the second effect executable during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the stop display of the three decorative symbols to be a (a is 0 or more), and The number of types of the second effects that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a number larger than b.

It should be noted that during the fluctuation, the setting value suggesting effect is not separately executable, but the big win suggesting effect also serves as the set value suggesting effect, that is, the big win suggesting effect (with setting difference) can appear. As a result, most of the effects that appear during the variation are effects that suggest a big hit, so that appropriate suggestions can be made to the player, and a game that is interested in the set value Ve can be performed. Appropriate suggestions regarding the set value Ve can also be made to the operator. In addition, since the effect 54 and the like serves both as a suggestive effect for the set value Ve and a suggestive effect for the big win, the number of effects implemented in the gaming machine 1A can be suppressed, so that the number of effects used for the effect can be reduced. It can contribute to reduction of storage area.

In the present embodiment, the big hit suggestive effects (no setting difference) that can appear are effects 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, and 67. The number of types of effects that can appear during the fluctuation (entirely) is increased (six types) as compared with other periods for the big hit suggestive effects (no setting difference). As a result, since the big win suggestion performance (no setting difference) appears at the timing when the player is most interested in winning or losing the big win lottery, it is possible to make an appropriate suggestion to the player.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of special symbols and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
a performance execution means capable of executing at least one third performance which makes it impossible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and makes it possible to estimate the level of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery;
The effect execution means sets the number of types of the third effect executable in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the stop display of the three decorative symbols to be a (a is 0 or more), and The number of types of the third effect that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a number larger than b.

In addition, the largest number of types of jackpot suggestive effects (no setting difference) are prepared that can appear during the fluctuation (second half) even during the fluctuation. During fluctuation (second half) is a ready-to-win state, and is a period in which the player is most interested in winning or losing the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation. By preparing various jackpot-indicating effects (no setting difference) during such a period, the game interest is improved without making the player bored.

[13-10. Production button and each production]

Each effect implemented in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment includes effects that appear using operators such as the effect button 13 and the like. Specifically, each of the effects 01, 50, 53, 62, 65, and 67 can be executed by operating the manipulator. The effect circled in FIG. 122 corresponds to this.

The effect that appears using the operator is, for example, an effect that appears when the operator is operated, but does not appear if the operator is not operated. Alternatively, an effect appears immediately by operating the operator, but if the operator is not operated, the effect appears (progresses) after a predetermined time elapses.

The effects appearing (progressing) after a predetermined period of time has passed even if the manipulator is not operated include those in which the effect time varies depending on the presence or absence of the operation.
A specific example will be described.
First, an image effect A is executed in which an image prompting the user to press the effect button 13 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 . When the player presses the production button 13, the production progresses by executing the image production B on the liquid crystal display device 36, and finally the image production C is performed to give some suggestion. On the other hand, if the player does not press the effect button 13, after a predetermined period of time such as 5 seconds has elapsed, an image effect C for presenting suggested content is performed.
That is, the flow of effects on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect button 13 is pressed continues with image effects A, B, and C, whereas the flow of effects on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect button 13 is not pressed continues. The flow of effects continues with image effects A and C.
Such an effect is regarded as one aspect of an effect that appears (progresses) triggered by an operator.

Of the effects implemented in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the effect that appears using the operator is compared with the set value suggesting effect (effect 01), and the big hit suggesting effect (effect 50 , 53, 62, 65, 67) have more types.
The set value suggesting effect allows the player to obtain important information used for determining whether to continue the game of the gaming machine 1A or whether to start the game of the gaming machine 1A. It is a possible performance. Such an important performance does not appear depending on the presence or absence of operation of the operator, and the performance time of important performance is shortened by the presence or absence of operation of the operator, resulting in insufficient confirmation of suggested contents. can be extremely detrimental to the player.

In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the setting value suggesting effect that appears using the operator such as the effect button 13 is only the effect 01, so many of the set value suggesting effects Suggestion contents can be equally transmitted without depending on the operation of the person.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special pattern display means for executing a variable display operation of special patterns and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that an operating means operable by a player and a starting means detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is established. and,
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The number of types of the first effects executed triggered by the operation of the operating means is a (where a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects executed triggered by the operation of the operating means is b. (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effects to be executed triggered by the operation of the operation means is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine, wherein a is a number smaller than (b+c).

Among the suggestive effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13 implemented in the gaming machine 1A, the set value suggestive effect does not change the effect start timing and end timing depending on the operation.
For example, in the performance 01, after the set value suggesting performance is started by pressing the performance button 13, the performance ends at a predetermined timing after the performance is started regardless of whether or not the performance button 13 is pressed. That is, the end timing of the effect is set to the timing when a certain period of time has passed from the start of the effect regardless of pressing of the effect button 13.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, among the suggestive effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13, the start timing and the end timing of the effect are different depending on the operation for the big win suggestive effect.
For example, in the effect 50, the pending change notice effect is executed, but after the image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed, the next image effect (for example, An image rendering that changes the pending icon from a normal color to a specific color) is executed. That is, the image effect of changing the reserved icon from the normal color to the specific color, which is started by pressing the effect button 13, has different timing according to the pressing of the effect button 13. FIG. Further, if the depression of the effect button 13 is delayed, the end timing of the effect is delayed accordingly.

In other words, among the suggestive effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13 implemented in the gaming machine 1A, the set value suggestive effect has an effect time length that is unchanged by the operation. .
Further, among the suggestive effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13, the effect time length of the big hit suggestive effect can be said to be variable by the operation.

Regarding the set value suggestion effect, as described above, the effect does not appear depending on whether the operator is operated or not, and the effect time is shortened depending on the operation of the operator. Since it can be extremely disadvantageous to the player if it is enough, the end timing and the presentation time length are not changed.

On the other hand, the big hit suggestive effect is a suggestive effect related to the win or loss of the big win lottery in the variation (or the change scheduled to be executed in the future for the operation reserve ball), and the desire to quickly obtain information about the win or loss according to the player. And there is a desire to enjoy the contents of the production slowly and carefully. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the start timing, the end timing, and the presentation time length are made variable by the operation timing of the operation button 13, etc., so that an appropriate presentation in line with the game mode of the player can be achieved. It is possible to appear.

A configuration example of such a gaming machine 1 is shown below.
A special pattern display means for executing a variable display operation of special patterns and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that an operating means operable by a player and a starting means detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is established. and,
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The end timing of the first effect executed triggered by the operation of the operation means is fixed regardless of the operation timing of the operation means or whether or not the operation is performed,
The end timing of at least a part of the second effect or the third effect that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means is variable according to the operation timing or whether or not the operating means is operated. A gaming machine characterized by:

Also, the following configuration example of the gaming machine 1 is conceivable.
A special pattern display means for executing a variable display operation of special patterns and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that an operation means operable by a player and a starting means detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is established. and,
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The effect time length of the first effect executed with the operation of the operation means as a trigger is fixed according to the operation timing or whether or not the operation means is operated,
The performance time length of at least a part of the second performance or the third performance that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means is made variable according to the operation timing or the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine characterized by:

Also, the effect 01 is executed in response to the player pressing a certain operator while waiting for a customer, and is a so-called hidden effect. Therefore, it is different from other effects in which execution is determined to appeal to the player with suggested content, but execution is canceled due to non-operation of the manipulator.
Therefore, regarding the setting value suggesting effect executed during the game of the gaming machine 1A (during look-ahead, during variation, or during the big win), the contents of the suggestion can be equally transmitted regardless of the player's operation.

In the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the jackpot suggesting effects appearing by using the operators such as the effect button 13 are effects 50, 53, 62, 65, and 67. In addition, there are also cases in which the effects do not appear due to the player's operation, and cases in which the effect time is shortened.
The big-hit suggestive performance is a performance that suggests whether or not a big-hit game will occur in the near future from the execution of the performance. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the sense of realism and enhancing the amusement of the game, many of the big-hit suggestive effects appear (or develop) according to the operation of the manipulator.

As long as it is limited to during variation (whole), there is no set value suggesting effect executed in response to the operation of the manipulator.
The effect that is executed in response to the operation of the manipulator is a highly anticipated effect for the player. When such an effect is executed during variation, the player tends to assume that it is a suggestive effect about the variation jackpot that the player is most interested in at that time. If the set value suggestion effect is executed at such timing, there is a risk that the effect that cannot meet the expectations of the player will be executed, or that the player will be confused by the content of the effect.
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, when an effect involving the operation of the manipulator is executed during variation, a big win suggestive effect is always performed.
By adopting such a configuration, an appropriate effect that meets the expectation of the player is executed, and the confusion of the player is not caused.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special pattern display means for executing a variable display operation of special patterns and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that an operation means operable by a player and a starting means detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is established. and,
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect triggered by the operation of the operation means during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect does not include the first effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the content of the set value suggesting effect triggered by the operation of the manipulator such as the effect button 13 is unchanged regardless of the operating mode of the manipulator. For example, the effect 01 implemented in the gaming machine 1A is started by pressing the effect button 13. FIG. However, the contents of the effect are based on the contents of the effect determined by lottery in advance, and are not variable depending on the operation mode of the effect button 13 (operation timing and presence/absence of operation).

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the content of the jackpot suggestive effect triggered by the operation of the operator such as the effect button 13 is variable depending on the operating mode of the operator. For example, the effect 50 implemented in the gaming machine 1A executes an image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13, and then whether or not the pending icon further changes to a high-expectation color by pressing the effect button 13. An image effect is executed to show that a lottery is being held to select whether or not, and an image effect is executed to change the pending icon to one with a high degree of expectation.
However, if the effect button 13 is not pressed after the execution of the image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13, the image effect of changing the pending icon to the highly anticipated one after a certain period of time is executed. be done. That is, depending on whether or not the effect button 13 is pressed, the image effect mode differs.

Since the set value suggesting effect is an important effect for the player to decide whether to continue the game or the like, the same effect content is displayed regardless of the operating mode of the operator such as the effect button 13, so that the game can be played. It presents appropriate suggestions to the user.
The big-hit suggestive performance is a performance that suggests whether or not a big-hit game will occur in the near future from the execution of the performance. Therefore, in order to improve the player's enjoyment of the game, the content of the effect is configured to change according to the operating mode of the operator such as the effect button 13 or the like.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 is shown below.
A special pattern display means for executing a variable display operation of special patterns and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that an operation means operable by a player and a starting means detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is established. and,
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
In the first effect executed triggered by the operation of the operating means, the same effect is provided regardless of the difference in the operation mode,
In at least a part of the second effect or the third effect executed with the operation of the operating means as a trigger, a different effect mode is set according to the difference in the mode of the operation. game machine.

The gaming machine 1 described above may further include the following features.
A gaming machine, wherein the different performance modes are different performance times.

Also, the gaming machine 1 may have the following features.
A gaming machine, wherein the different presentation modes are different image presentations.

In the effect that appears using the operator (hereinafter referred to as operation effect), the difference between during fluctuation (first half) and during fluctuation (second half) may be considered.
For example, the first period (during fluctuation (first half)) is the period from when three symbol groups start to fluctuate until two of them stop fluctuating, and two symbol groups stop fluctuating. When the period from 1 to 3 until all three symbol groups are stopped is the second period (during fluctuation (second half)), the effect that can suggest the set value for the operation effect that can be executed in the second period (first It is conceivable that it does not include seed production).
During the second period, it is considered essential from the point of view of game interest to be able to execute an effect for suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery. In such a period, if a performance capable of suggesting a set value is performed as an operation performance, the number of performances executed in the second period increases, and in some cases, a plurality of types of performances are executed at the same time. As a result, the length of time used for the effect becomes longer, and the processing load on the CPU involved in the effect increases. According to this configuration, by avoiding such a situation, it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load and the power consumption. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility of dropping frames in the image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
a setting means capable of setting a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
a display means capable of variably displaying performance symbols according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
an operation performance using the operation means;
a first-type effect suggesting the set value set in the gaming machine; and effect execution control means capable of controlling the execution of
The production pattern is composed of three different pattern groups that vary,
A period from when the three symbol groups start to change on the display means to when two of the symbol groups stop varying is defined as a first period, and after the two symbol groups stop varying and the three symbol groups When the period until all the symbol groups are stopped is the second period,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation effects that can be executed at least during the second period do not include the first type effects.

Several examples of the above-described first-type effect will be described.
In addition, the production which is an operation production and whose main purpose is to suggest the set value is called "Production Ba", and it is an operation production and its main purpose is to suggest the result of the jackpot lottery. Let the effect be "effect Bb" or "effect Bc". As for the “effect Bb” and the “effect Bc”, the effect in which the selection ratio differs according to the set value is “effect Bb”, and the effect in which the selection ratio does not differ according to the set value is “effect Bc”.
Also, an effect that is both an operation effect and a first type effect is defined as a “specific effect”, and an effect that is an operation effect but is not the first type effect is defined as a “non-specific effect”.

In the first example, the specific effect includes the effect Ba and does not include the effect Bb and the effect Bc. As a result, since the operation performance mainly aimed at suggesting the result of the jackpot lottery is not included in the specific performance, it is desirable to execute the performance for suggesting the result of the jackpot lottery. By not executing the performance, it is possible to execute an appropriate operation performance without confusing the player. Further, by not executing the effect Bb or the effect Bc at the timing of executing the specific effect, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU and the power consumption.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A specific effect is the effect that is the operation effect and is the first type effect,
As a non-specific effect that is the operation effect and the effect other than the first type effect,
The effect Ba is the effect that is the operation effect and mainly suggests the setting value as the effect effect,
As the operation effect and the purpose of the effect, the effect is mainly directed to the winning or losing of the lottery result, and further, a effect Bb in which the selection ratio is different according to the set value,
Suggestion of winning or losing of the lottery result is mainly performed as the operation effect and the effect purpose, and further, the effect Bc in which the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value is used as the effect Bc,
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the specific effect includes the effect Ba and does not include the effect Bb and the effect Bc.

In the second example, the specific effect includes the effect Bb and does not include the effect Ba and the effect Bc. As a result, although the main purpose is to suggest the results of the jackpot lottery, an operation effect that also includes suggestions about the set values, so to speak, it is possible for some players to get lost as to what they are suggesting. A certain effect is defined as a specific effect.
By controlling not to execute the specific performance at the timing when it is desirable to execute the performance for suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery, the performance is performed at appropriate timing so as not to mislead the player about the contents of the suggestion. can be executed. By not executing the specific effect, even if the effect Ba whose main purpose is to suggest a set value does not appear, the effect Bb with a different selection ratio depending on the set value can appear. An effect that substitutes for the suggestion regarding the set value can be made to appear. Therefore, depending on the player, the information regarding the set value can be appropriately transmitted, and various information can be provided with a small effect.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A specific effect is the effect that is the operation effect and is the first type effect,
As a non-specific effect that is the operation effect and the effect other than the first type effect,
The effect Ba is the effect that is the operation effect and mainly suggests the setting value as the effect effect,
As the operation effect and the purpose of effect, the effect is mainly directed to the winning or losing of the lottery result, and further, the effect Bb is a effect in which the selection ratio differs according to the set value,
Suggestion of winning or losing of the lottery result is mainly performed as the operation performance and the performance purpose, and further, the performance Bc in which the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value is used as the performance Bc,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific effect includes the effect Bb and does not include the effect Ba and the effect Bc.

In the third example, the specific effect includes the effect Ba and the effect Bb and does not include the effect Bc. As a result, an effect in which setting values can be suggested is defined as a specific effect. Therefore, when the operation performance is executed at the timing at which the specific performance is not made to appear, the player grasps the suggested content of the result of winning or losing the big win lottery without causing confusion about the content of the performance (or the suggested content in the performance). be able to. That is, the suggestive content by the presentation is made easy to understand.
Also, at the timing when the specific effect is not displayed, the effect Ba and the effect Bb are not executed, so the processing load of the CPU is reduced, the power consumption is reduced, or the processing of the display means (such as the liquid crystal display device 36) used for the effect is performed. It is possible to reduce the burden. In particular, in the liquid crystal display device 36, the frequency of performing processing for displaying a plurality of effects at the same time is reduced, so that the possibility of dropping frames or the like can be reduced.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A specific effect is the effect that is the operation effect and is the first type effect,
As a non-specific effect that is the operation effect and the effect other than the first type effect,
The effect Ba is the effect that is the operation effect and mainly suggests the setting value as the effect effect,
As the operation effect and the purpose of the effect, the effect is mainly directed to the winning or losing of the lottery result, and further, a effect Bb in which the selection ratio is different according to the set value,
Suggestion of winning or losing of the lottery result is mainly performed as the operation effect and the effect purpose, and further, the effect Bc in which the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value is used as the effect Bc,
A game machine, wherein the specific effect includes the effect Ba and the effect Bb, but does not include the effect Bc.

Also, in the effects executed during the variation, it is conceivable to increase the number of non-specific effects over the number of specific effects.
The specific effects include effects that can suggest settings. By reducing the possibility that such an effect appears during fluctuation, the number of effects suggesting the result of the big win lottery is relatively increased. That is, by increasing the appearance of the non-specific performance during the change in which the player's interest is directed to whether or not the player wins the big win lottery, an appropriate performance that matches the player's interest is performed. can be done.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
During the fluctuation of the production pattern by the display means,
The number of specific effects that can be executed by the effect execution control means is i,
Assuming that the number of non-specific effects that can be executed by the effect execution control means is j,
A gaming machine characterized in that j>i≧0 holds true.

Both the specific effect and the non-specific effect use the operation of the operating means, but the effect can be produced without operating the operating means. The difference between the specific effect and the non-specific effect depending on whether or not the operating means is operated will be described.
First, in a specific effect including an effect that can suggest a setting value and a non-specific effect that includes an effect that can suggest the result of a big win lottery, the end timing of each effect and the operation of the operating means. The presence/absence relationship will be explained.

For example, it is conceivable that the end timing of the specific effect does not change depending on whether or not the operating means is operated, but the end timing of the non-specific effect changes depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.
As described above, the specific effects include effects that can suggest setting values. The setting values are often kept unchanged during the game, and are important information that determines whether or not the player continues the game. Therefore, it is possible that the performance can be canceled by operating the operating means, and the shortening of the time during which the suggestive information regarding the setting value is presented to the player is extremely disadvantageous to the player. expensive. In addition, the suggestive information is presented early because the operating means is operated early, and the presentation of the suggestive information is started late due to the operation means being operated late, which shortens the presentation time of the suggestive information. It is also possible.
There is a high possibility that the specific effect presenting suggestive information about the set value appears less frequently than the non-specific effect suggesting the result of the big win lottery. For this reason, shortening the presentation time of suggestive information about set values is highly likely to be extremely disadvantageous to the player. It is desirable to Similarly, it is desirable to keep the performance start timing unchanged regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated.

As for the suggestion of the result of the jackpot lottery, for example, even if the player misses it, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot game will automatically start, so there is a possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage. is low. Therefore, as for the performance of suggesting the result of the big win lottery, it is possible to perform a highly entertaining performance by starting, developing and developing the performance in synchronism with the player's operation.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
In the specific effect, there is no change in the end timing of the effect depending on whether or not the operation means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the non-specific effects, the end timing of the effects changes depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.

In addition, in the specific effect, the length of time required for the effect does not change regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, but in the non-specific effect, it is considered that the length of time required for the effect changes depending on whether or not the operating means is operated. be done.
With such a configuration as well, it is possible to reduce the possibility of incurring the above-described disadvantages for the player.

A specific configuration example of the game machine 1 is shown below.
In the specific effect, there is no change in the effect time length required for the effect depending on whether or not the operation means is operated,
A game machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the non-specific effects, the length of the effect required for the effect varies depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.

Furthermore, in the specific effect, the content of the effect does not change regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, but in the non-specific effect, it is conceivable that the content of the effect changes depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.
Since the specific effect includes a suggestion regarding the setting value, if the effect is not displayed by not operating the operation means and the effect cannot be suggested, the above-mentioned reasons may occur. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player will be significantly disadvantaged.
On the other hand, the non-specific effect includes the suggestion of the result of winning or losing the big win lottery, and even if the effect does not appear without operating the operating means, the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged.
Therefore, regarding the specific effect, it is desirable that the end timing of the effect be unchanged regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated. As for the non-specific effect, it is desirable that the effect is not displayed or the effect is started with a delay depending on whether or not the operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that is synchronized with the operation of the player, and it is possible to produce an effect that is highly appealing for the suggestive content.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
In the specific effect, there is no change in the effect content depending on whether or not the operation means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the non-specific effects, the contents of the effects change depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.

Also, several examples are conceivable for the number of specific effects and non-specific effects. One is to regard productions with different appearance timings and appearance occasions as one production. That is, in other words, similar effects with the same appearance timing and appearance timing but with slightly different effects, such as effects with only different lines displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, are not possible. It is regarded as a mere variation, and it is regarded as one production including various variations.
Thus, the number of types of performances that a player can actually perceive as the number of performances, that is, the number of performances in which a plurality of variations are grouped together, can be considered to balance the performances implemented in the game machine 1.例文帳に追加can be done. In other words, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects suggesting setting values so as not to confuse the player, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, the balance of effects that does not cause discomfort to the player can be achieved. It is feasible.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of effects with different appearance timings and/or appearance triggers is the number of effect groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timing and/or appearance timing are similar to each other is counted separately,
A gaming machine, wherein said i and said j are numbers of effect groups.

As another example of the number of specific effects and non-specific effects, even effects with similar appearance timings and appearance opportunities are treated as one effect. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing or the appearance opportunity is the same, if the presentation mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different presentation. In other words, the more variations of effects, the more the number of effects.
The presentations with different variations are partially stored as common information inside the game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, by treating effects with different variations as different effects (separate effects), it is possible to realize various effects modes while improving the usage efficiency of the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of effects with different appearance timings and/or appearance triggers is the number of effect groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timing and/or appearance timing are similar to each other is counted separately,
A gaming machine, wherein said i and said j are the numbers of effect variations.

<14. Example 2 of Selective Implementation in Gaming Machine>

Here, the gaming machine 1B in which each of the effects 1 to 21, the effects 50 to 67, and the effect 80 described above is selectively implemented will be described.
The effects selectively implemented in the game machine 1B are effect 01, effect 04, effect 15, effect 20, effect 51, effect 52, effect 54, effect 58, effect 62, effect 63, effect 64, effect 65, effect 66 and production 67.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1B, the effect 20 is a pre-reading announcement effect in a time-saving state that can be executed only at the timing 10.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 1B, there are four types of effects, namely, effects 01, 62, 65, and 67, which appear (develop) triggered by the operation of the operator such as the effect button 13.
Among them, only the effect 01 can be executed during the fluctuation stop. It should be noted that "during stop of fluctuation" means a state in which all of the first, second and third symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. FIG.

In the gaming machine 1B, the effect triggered by the operator that can appear while the fluctuation is stopped is only the effect 01, which is one of the set value suggestion effects. The number of types of set value suggesting performances (ie, 1) triggered by the operator is greater than the number of types of jackpot suggesting performances (ie, 0) triggered by operators that can appear during fluctuation stoppage.
While there is increasing interest in winning or losing the big hit lottery in the variation during the variation, it is also the timing when the variation is not performed during the suspension of the variation. It also includes the state in which the person is bored.
At such timing, it is possible that the player hesitates whether or not to continue playing the game on the gaming machine.
According to the gaming machine 1B of the present embodiment, the number of types of suggestive effects triggered by the operation of the manipulator executed at such timing is larger for the set value suggestive effects than for the big win suggestive effects. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Also, aspects of the gaming machine 1 that are different from the gaming machine 1B will be described. FIG. 125 summarizes the types of effects (setting value change suggesting effects, set value suggesting effects, etc.) and execution timings (waiting for customers, looking ahead, etc.) for each effect implemented in the gaming machine 1. is a table shown in
FIG. 125 shows, as types of effects, setting value change suggesting effect (effect d), setting value suggesting effect (effect a), jackpot suggesting effect with setting difference (effect b), and jackpot suggesting effect without setting difference (effect c), a lively effect (effect e) is shown. In addition, it is indicated to which type of effect each effect implemented in the gaming machine 1 belongs, and to which effect execution timing is executed.
Further, the table shows information indicating the number of types of variations for each effect and whether or not the effect is associated with pressing a button. Pressing a button means that the player operates not only the performance button 13 but also any of various operators provided in the gaming machine 1 .
For example, production No. is set to 01, that is, the effect 01 is an effect accompanied by pressing a button, and has one variation. In addition, the effect 20 is a effect that does not involve pressing a button and has three variations. As an example of variations of the effect 20, the number of specific characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is three patterns of one to three.

The summary column in FIG. 125 shows aggregated information about effects that can be executed at each execution timing. For example, there is a total of one effect that is executed while waiting for a customer, and it is indicated that it is a set value suggesting effect. Also, there is only one effect associated with pressing a button.

A configuration example of such a game machine 1 is shown below.
A special pattern display means for executing a variable display operation of special patterns and deriving and displaying a display result on condition that an operating means operable by a player and a starting means detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is established. and,
Along with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbols, a first symbol display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, a second symbol display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and a third symbol for variably displaying the third decorative symbol. decorative pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern in a dramatic manner using the three-pattern display area;
a storage means for storing a set value representing a stage of the probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the level of the winning expectation level of the big win lottery cannot be estimated, and the level of the set value can be estimated based on the performance mode and the winning expectation level of the big win lottery. Execution of a performance capable of executing at least one of a second performance capable of estimating the level of a set value and a third performance making it impossible to estimate the level of a set value based on a performance mode and capable of estimating the level of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery. comprising means and
The effect execution means sets the number of types of the first effects that can be executed by the operation of the operation means to be a (a is 0 or more) in a specific state in which three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the second effects that can be executed in a specific state triggered by the operation of the operating means is set to b (where b is 0 or more), and the second effect that can be executed in the specific state triggered by the operation of the operating means. 3 The number of types of effects is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a number greater than (b+c).

<15. About the definition>

(Regarding “Type 1 production” and “Type 2 production”)
As already mentioned, one of the features of the present invention is that in a scene where the player expects a big hit (synonymous with terms such as scene, timing, production part, etc.), a production (announcement, announcement, etc.) that suggests settings is provided. , Notification, display, pronunciation, luminescence, etc. are synonymous, hereinafter the same). to do.

However, in a gaming machine, it is not easy to draw a clear line between the two effects (set value suggestive effect and jackpot suggestive effect). This is because the big hit suggestion production (for example, when the "group notice" comes out, the jackpot expectation is about 50%, etc.), but the setting value suggestion production (for example, when the "group notice" comes out, the This is because it is assumed that it also serves as confirmation that something exists, etc.).

Therefore, hereinafter, the set value suggestive effect is defined as the "first type effect" and the jackpot suggestive effect is defined as the "second type effect", and with reference to FIG. indicates

First, the effects performed during the game are divided into three types of effects a to c as follows. Note that this may be the only effect, or effects with different purposes (for example, effects d and effects e shown in FIG. 125) may be provided.

(Effect a) Set Value Suggestion Effect The main purpose of this effect is to suggest a set value. In other words, the suggestion of the result of the jackpot lottery is only a bonus. For example, with respect to the suggestion of a big hit, there is a case where the player does not have much expectation even if this effect appears.
Specifically, when the expectation of the big win lottery is less than 50%, less than 30%, or less than 10%, the big win lottery is won even if the performance appears. For example, if you have little expectations of what you are doing.
Also, the setting value suggestion effect may include an effect in which the big hit suggestion is not performed at all.
Alternatively, the effect a may be defined by focusing on the part that the user pays attention to. For example, when a set value is suggested by moving a movable role along with a sound effect and executing a character image effect on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player's attention is focused on the movement of the movable role and the liquid crystal display device 36. image (image change). At this time, when casually suggesting a big hit at a place other than the movable accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a light emitting effect using a part of the housing), the attention of the player who experiences the effect is increased. Since the information obtained from the location is only information related to setting value suggestion, such an effect may be classified as a setting value suggestion effect.
Further, in the case of performing a similar effect using a movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36, if the jackpot suggestion is made in an area of less than 50% of the display area on the liquid crystal display device, the degree of attention of the player is increased. It can be presumed that it is directed to setpoint suggestions. Therefore, such an effect can also be classified as the effect a.
Further, the classification may be based on the information that the player first receives. For example, of the two types of information, suggestive information about set values and suggestive information about big wins, an effect in which the information that the player first receives after the start of the effect is the suggestive information about set values may be classified as effect a.

As an example, if the effects belonging to the effect a are specifically classified using FIG. Also, the effect 04 may be included in the effect a.

(Production b) Production that suggests a big win with setting difference The purpose of this production is to suggest the result of the big win lottery. However, since there is a setting difference in the appearance frequency, it is also possible to suggest a setting value.
When the performance classified as the performance b is defined, it is a performance with a relatively higher expectation than other performances, for example, when the expectation level of the jackpot lottery is 50% or more, or 30% or more.
In addition, a part of the effect that not only has a set difference in the appearance frequency but also suggests a set value may be classified as the effect b.
For example, as defined in the effect a, the effect b may be defined by focusing on the part that the user pays attention to. In the case of suggesting a big hit by moving the movable role along with the sound effect and executing the character image production on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player's attention is focused on the movement of the movable role and the image of the liquid crystal display device 36 ( image change). At this time, even if you casually suggest a setting value (for example, a light emitting effect using a part of the housing) at a place other than the movable accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36, you will not be able to experience the effect. Since the information obtained from the player's point of interest is only suggestive information about the big win, such an effect may be classified as an effect b.
Also, in the case of performing a similar effect using a movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36, if setting values are suggested in an area less than 50% of the display area on the liquid crystal display device, the player's attention level can be presumed to be aimed at suggesting a big hit from the size of the area occupied by the liquid crystal display device 36 . Therefore, such an effect can also be classified as an effect b.
Furthermore, even if there is no set value difference on the table referred to when executing the processing for selecting the effect, that is, the effect is selected with a certain probability regardless of the set value. Even in this case, effects (details will be described later) with substantially different appearance frequencies may be classified as effects b because there is actually a setting difference.
Alternatively, the information may be classified by focusing on the information that the player receives first. For example, of two types of information, suggestive information about set values and suggestive information about big wins, an effect in which the first information received by the player after the start of the effect is the big win suggestive information may be classified as effect b.

As an example, if the effects belonging to the effect b are specifically classified using FIG.

(Production c) No set difference big win suggestive production The purpose of this production is to suggest the result of the big win lottery as in the production b. In particular, unlike the production b, there is no setting difference, so it can be said that this is a production that purely suggests the result of the jackpot lottery.
Note that the effect described in the effect b, that is, the effect in which the appearance frequency is substantially different even if the effect is not provided with a difference due to the setting value on the table referred to when executing the process of selecting the effect , and since there is no set difference in the selection rate on the table, the effect is not intended to intentionally produce a set difference, so it may be classified as effect c.

As an example, if the effects belonging to the effect c are specifically classified using FIG. 67.

Next, the above-mentioned first type effect and second type effect will be described using these effect classifications.
(Example 1)
The first type effect includes the effect a and does not include the effect b and the effect c.
As a result, since the production mainly aimed at suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery is not included in the first type production, it is desirable to execute the production for suggesting the result of winning or losing the jackpot lottery at the desired timing. By not executing seed effects, the chances of executing a plurality of types of effects at the same time can be reduced, the length of time used for effects can be shortened, and an increase in the processing load of the CPU relating to effects can be suppressed. can.

(Example 2)
The first type effect includes the effect b and does not include the effect a and the effect c.
For example, at the timing when the first type effect is not executed, only the effect a and the effect c can appear. That is, only the effect a whose main purpose is to suggest a set value and the big hit suggesting effect c with no setting difference. As a result, the player does not have to worry about whether the performance suggests a set value or a big win, so that an effective performance can be presented without causing confusion. It is possible to issue

(Example 3)
The first type effect includes the effect a and the effect b, but does not include the effect c.
For example, at the timing when the first type effect is not executed, only the effect c can appear. That is, since there are few effects that can appear, the number of opportunities for executing a plurality of effects at the same time is reduced, thereby reducing the processing load and suppressing the lengthening of the effects.

(Example 4)
The second type effect includes the effect b and the effect c, but does not include the effect a.
For example, at the timing when the second type of effect is more likely to be executed than the first type of effect, the state in which the effect mainly intended to suggest the setting value such as the effect a is difficult to appear, so that the player can It can be less confusing.

(Example 5)
The second type effect includes the effect c and does not include the effect a and the effect b.
For example, at the timing when the second type effect is more likely to be executed than the first type effect, not only the effect mainly intended to suggest the set value such as the effect a, but also the big hit with the setting difference such as the effect b Since the suggestive effect is also made difficult to appear, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to be confused.

(Regarding "Frequency" and "Selection Ratio")
Although the terms “appearance frequency” and “selection ratio” are used in the above explanations, the definitions of these terms will be explained here.
"Appearance frequency" means that the target effect is "appearance frequency per hour (for example, once an hour)" or "appearance frequency per fluctuation number (for example, once in 100 times)", or " The frequency of appearing when a specific condition is established (for example, once in 10 times when normal reach is established).
In other words, the fact that the frequency of appearance differs depending on the setting value means that the target effect selection ratio differs for each setting value (or only one or a plurality of specific setting values) in the effect selection table. Therefore, "frequency of appearance" and "selection ratio" are substantially synonymous and can be replaced with each other.

As described above, if there are effects P selected with the same effect selection ratio (for example, 1/100 at the time of loss fluctuation) on the effect selection table, the terms of appearance frequency and selection ratio have different meanings. There are also different cases.
The fact that the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value (the jackpot probability does not need to be different for all set values, but if the jackpot probability is the same for all set values, there is no point in setting the set value in the first place), This means that the probability of losing differs depending on the set value. Therefore, in the above example, the effect P (effect that appears at 1/100 when the loss fluctuates) has no difference in the selection ratio between the set values, but there is a difference in the frequency of loss depending on the set value. It will be different (the effect P will appear more frequently if the setting is low).

However, if all of them are considered, there will be no effect that belongs to the category of "no difference in setting", so basically which word is used except when two terms are used differently in the same claim If the selection ratios in the selection table are the same even if they are used, it is defined as "no setting difference", and if the selection ratios in the selection table are different, it is defined as "setting difference".

In addition, "no setting difference" is further subdivided to indicate that there is no setting difference between specific setting values, such as no setting difference among specific setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3). good too.
Similarly, "with setting difference" may be further subdivided so that only a specific setting value (for example, setting value 6) has a different selection ratio from other setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 5). .

<16.1 CPU configuration>
[16-1. Control Configuration of Pachinko Machine]

Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1A as another embodiment will be described.
The pachinko game machine 1A is obtained by converting a computer device for effect control into a single CPU.
The appearance of the pachinko game machine 1A is substantially the same as that explained with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2, so the explanation is omitted. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those already explained, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is a schematic block diagram of the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.
3, the pachinko gaming machine 1A differs from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in that the liquid crystal control section 40 is not provided.

In the pachinko game machine 1A, an effect control section 24A is provided instead of the effect control section 24. - 特許庁The performance control unit 24A, as a so-called 1 CPU, implements the functions of the performance control unit 24 in the pachinko game machine 1 of FIG. It is configured.
In addition, the effect control section 24A in this example is configured to realize a function corresponding to the sound control section described above as well as the function of the liquid crystal control CPU (sound controller 280 to be described later).

In this example, a main LCD 36M and a sub LCD 36S are provided as the liquid crystal display device 36. However, as in the case of FIG. 3, only a single liquid crystal display device 36 is provided. can also
On the main LCD 36M, under the control of the effect control section 24A, for example, three decorative symbols, left, middle, and right, are variably displayed on the background image. In addition, various effects images such as normal effects, ready-to-win effects, and super ready-to-win effects are displayed. The secondary LCD 36S similarly performs display corresponding to various effects.
In addition, the main LCD 36M variably displays the decorative design by the image in synchronization with the variable display of the first and second special designs by the special design display devices 38a and 38b.

Since the effect control section 24A also has a function as a control device for the main LCD 36M and the sub-LCD 36S, it also has functions as a VDP, an image ROM, and a VRAM.
VDP refers to a function of controlling overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing.
The image ROM refers to a memory in which image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image expansion processing is stored.
VRAM is an image memory area for temporarily storing image data developed by VDP.

With these configurations, the effect control section 24A generates various image data based on commands (effect control commands) from the main control section 20, and outputs them to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

[16-2. Configuration of Production Control Unit]

FIG. 128 shows a specific configuration example of the effect control section 24A.
Note that the illustration of the memory 244 is omitted in FIG.
128 is configured by externally connecting a ROM 242, a CGROM 260 (CG: Computer Graphics, equivalent to the above-described image ROM), and a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) 278 to the composite chip 250, for example. there is
The composite chip 250 includes a CPU circuit 250a with a built-in CPU 241 and a VDP circuit 250b that functions as a VDP. It has functions for motor control and sound control.
I will explain each part of the configuration.

In the composite chip 250 , the CPU circuit 250 a and the VDP circuit 250 b are connected through the CPU interface circuit 258 . The CPU interface circuit 258 is a circuit that relays transmission/reception data between the CPU circuit 250a and the VDP circuit 250b.
In this composite chip 250, the CPU circuit 250a issues a display list DL (details will be described later) at predetermined time intervals, and the VDP circuit 250b outputs image data based on the issued display list DL. It generates and drives the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

A ROM 242 and a work memory 259 are connected to the CPU interface circuit 258 . The work memory 259 is, for example, a RAM having a storage capacity of about 2 Mbytes, and is configured to be accessible from the CPU circuit 250a. The work memory 259 reserves a DL buffer BUF for temporarily storing a display list DL describing a series of instruction commands specifying one frame of each of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

In the case of this example, the series of instruction commands in the display list DL include a texture load command such as a TXLOAD command for reading out image materials (textures) from the CGROM 260 and decoding (expanding) them, and a VRAM as a decoding (expansion) destination. Texture setting commands such as the SETINDEX command, which has functions such as specifying an area (index space) in advance, and decoded (expanded) image materials at predetermined positions in the virtual drawing space (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 143, etc.) Primitive drawing commands such as the sprite command for placement, and commands such as the SETDAVR command and the SETDAVF command for specifying the drawing area to be actually drawn on the display device among the images drawn in the virtual drawing space by the drawing commands. Contains an environment setting command and an index table control system command (WRIDXTBL) related to the index table 268 that manages the index space.

The CPU circuit 250a is a circuit having performance equivalent to that of a general-purpose one-chip microcomputer. A watchdog timer) circuit 251, a RAM 243 having a storage capacity of about 16 kbytes and used as a work area for the CPU 241, a DMAC (Direct Memory Access Controller) 252 for realizing data transfer without going through the CPU 241, For controlling the operation of a serial input/output port (SIO) 253 having a plurality of input ports Si and output ports So, a parallel input/output port (PIO) 254 having a plurality of input ports Pi and output ports Po, and the CPU circuit 250a. and various control registers 255 into which various values of are written.

For the sake of convenience, the expression "input/output port" is used, but in the effect control section 24A, the input/output port includes an input port and an output port that operate independently. This point also applies to the input/output circuit 256 and the input/output circuit 257 described below.

The parallel input/output port 254 is connected to an external device such as the main control unit 20 through an input/output circuit 256, and the CPU 241 transmits a control command (effect control command) CMD and a strobe signal via the input/output circuit 256. (Interrupt signal) STB is received.
The received control command CMD is supplied to a parallel input/output port (PIO) 254 via an input/output circuit 256 . Also, the strobe signal STB is supplied to the interrupt terminal of the CPU 241 via the input/output circuit 256, thereby activating the reception interrupt process. Therefore, the CPU 241, which grasps the control command CMD based on the reception interrupt process, performs unified control of the sound effect, light effect, motor effect, and image effect corresponding to this control command CMD through effect lottery and the like. become.

Although not particularly limited, in this example, an SMC (Serial Management Controller) 276 of the VDP circuit 250b is used for light effects and motor effects. The SMC unit 276 is a composite controller containing a lamp controller 276a and a motor controller 276b, and is configured to output a serial signal in clock synchronization. In addition, the motor controller 276b is configured to be capable of outputting a latch pulse at an arbitrary timing based on a setting value to a predetermined control register in various registers 265 (to be described later) provided in the VDP circuit 250b. can be entered.

Therefore, in this example, a motor drive signal (a drive signal for the movable body accessory motor 80c) and a lamp drive signal (a drive signal for the optical display device 45a) are output from the SMC unit 276 in synchronization with the clock signal. A latch pulse is output as the operation control signal ENABLE at appropriate timing.

Also, in this example, the SMC unit 276 is connected to a parallel/serial conversion unit 277 . A position detection sensor 82a is arranged corresponding to the movable body accessory motor 80c shown in FIG.
Further, FIG. 128 shows an example in which user operation information from the operation unit 17 is also input to the parallel/serial conversion unit 277 . User's operation information is a signal corresponding to the operation of the effect button 13, the cross key 16, or the like.
The parallel/serial conversion unit 277 is mounted in the effect control unit 24A as an IC built in a composite chip, for example, but may be mounted in the effect control unit 24A as an IC separate from the composite chip 250.
The parallel/serial conversion unit 277 receives signals of, for example, 32 systems, converts the input data into serial data, and supplies the serial data to the motor controller 276b. The operation of the parallel/serial converter 277 is controlled by a control signal from the motor controller 276b. Also, the parallel/serial conversion unit 277 performs serial data transfer using a clock signal.
With this configuration, the SMC 276 can efficiently detect the operating state of the movable body accessory motor 80c and the user's operation on the operation unit 17 such as the effect button 13, ie, collectively the input required for effect control. Therefore, the CPU 241 can efficiently grasp the effect state.

It should be noted that the use of the SMC unit 276 is not essential for the control of light effects and motor effects. That is, since the CPU circuit 250a has a built-in general-purpose serial input/output port (SIO) 253, it is possible to use these ports to control the light effect and the motor effect.
128, the clock signal CK and the driving signal SDATA are output via the input/output circuit 257 connected to the serial input/output port 253 in the configuration indicated by the broken line. , an operation control signal ENABLE is output via an input/output circuit 256 connected to the parallel input/output port 254 . For convenience, they are expressed as input/output ports and input/output circuits, but what actually functions are output ports and output circuits.

Here, in the serial input/output port 253, the serial output port SO is configured with a built-in 16-stage FIFO register. When the serial input/output port 253 is used to control the light effect and the motor effect, the DMAC circuit 252 is activated upon receipt of an operation start instruction from the CPU 241, and the light effect and the motor effect drive data table ( Hereinafter, the necessary driving data are read out from the "lamp/motor driving table") in order, and DMA-transferred to the FIFO register of the serial output port SO. The drive data stored in the FIFO register are serially output from the serial output port SO in clock synchronization. The DMAC circuit 252 has a plurality of (for example, 4) DMA channels. Lamp driving data is DMA-transferred by the first DMA channel, and motor driving data is DMA-transferred by the second DMA channel.

In the CPU circuit 250a, the WDT circuit 251 counts down based on a value set in a predetermined control register (such as a WDT control register) among a plurality of control registers provided as a control register 255 accessible from the CPU 241. It is configured with a WDT counter. The WDT counter starts from a predetermined initial value and counts down toward zero in a predetermined operation cycle. When the counted-down value reaches zero, an internal interrupt (WDT interrupt) is generated.

After executing the WDT interrupt processing program, the CPU 241 enters a reset state by software reset processing.

The DMAC circuit 252 transfers from the transfer source (Source) to the transfer destination (Destination) in a predetermined DMA transfer mode for each predetermined data transfer unit, based on the set value in a predetermined control register in the control register 255. , a circuit that repeats data transfer a predetermined number of times.

For example, in an embodiment in which the serial output port SO functions (see the dashed line in FIG. 128), a predetermined control register of the control registers 255 stores the top address of the lamp/motor drive table (the top value of the transfer source address) and , the address of the input register of the serial output port SO (fixed value of the transfer destination address), the data transfer unit (8 bits), and the number of transfers are specified. Then, the DMAC circuit 252, which receives an operation start instruction from a predetermined control register, DMA-transfers the driving data to a predetermined transfer destination address while updating the transfer source address.

This point is substantially the same in the case of the later-described embodiments (for example, FIG. 150, etc.) in which the DMAC circuit 252 issues the display list DL. That is, the CPU 241 stores the start address of the transfer source (DL buffer BUF), the address of the transfer destination (transfer port TR_PORT), the DMA transfer mode, the data transfer unit, and the number of transfers in a predetermined control register of the CPU circuit 250a. , to set other conditions. Note that these points will be described later with reference to FIG. 151 and the like.

In general, DMA transfer modes include a "cycle steal transfer mode" in which DMA operations do not occupy the memory bus, such as releasing the bus control right in the middle of a unit operation (R operation/W operation) of DMA transfer, and a "cycle steal transfer mode" in which DMA operations do not occupy the memory bus. There is a "burst transfer (pipeline transfer) mode" in which the bus control right is not released until the specified number of transfers are completed, such as continuous operation and W operation, and a mode in which DMA transfer requests (demands) received from other devices are active. A "demand transfer mode" in which the DMA operation is continued during the interval is conceivable.
The DMAC circuit 252 of this example functions in a cycle steal transfer mode in which at least one cycle of memory release period is provided between read access activation (R operation) and write access activation (W operation) during DMA transfer. , so as not to interfere with the operation of the CPU 241 . Specifically, by adopting the cycle steal transfer mode, the bus can be used by the CPU 241 during the one-cycle memory release period, and the bus is released to the CPU 241 for each read access, which greatly delays the operation of the CPU 241. There is no

Then, for example, in an embodiment using the DMAC circuit 252 when issuing the display list DL to the VDP circuit 250b, the data transfer unit (one operand) of one cycle is set to 32×2 bits, and the display list DL is stored. While appropriately increasing the source address of the RAM 243 (+8 for each 1-operand transfer), the DMA transfer operation is executed for the transfer port register TR_PORT (see FIG. 140) of the data transfer circuit 267 specified by the fixed address. are doing.
As will be described later, in the above embodiment, by adding the necessary number of NOP (no operation) commands to the display list DL, the overall data size is fixed (for example, 4×64=256 bytes, or its equivalent). 1-operand transfer of 32 bits×2 times is repeated 32 times (or its integral multiple) to complete the issuance of the display list DL. Note that execution of the NOP command by the drawing circuit 274 does not, in effect, cause any change.

Next, the VDP circuit 250b will be described.
Connected to the VDP circuit 250b are a CGROM 260 that stores compressed data that constitutes elements of still images and moving images that make up an image effect, and a DRAM 278 that has a storage capacity of about 4 Gbit, and a main LCD 36M and a sub LCD 36S. is connected. Note that the DRAM 278 is preferably composed of DDR (Double-Data-Rate SDRAM).

Although not particularly limited, the CGROM 260 in this example is composed of a flash SSD (Solid State Drive) composed of a NAND flash memory with a storage capacity of about 62 Gbit, and acquires necessary compressed data by serial transmission. is configured to Therefore, the problem of skew (difference in transmission speed for each bit data) that inevitably occurs in parallel transmission is resolved, and extremely high-speed transmission operation becomes possible. Although not particularly limited, in this example, the CGROM 260 is accessed at high speed by the HSS (High Speed Serial) method conforming to SATA (Serial ATA).

Regardless of whether or not the HSS method conforming to Serial ATA is adopted, the NAND type flash memory is mechanically more stable than the hard disk and is capable of high-speed access, while being a sequential access memory. , compared to DRAM and SRAM, random access is difficult. Therefore, by executing a preload operation in which a group of compressed data (CG data) is read into the DRAM 278 prior to the drawing operation, smooth random access of the CG data during the drawing operation can be realized. Incidentally, the access speed decreases in the order of VRAM261>DRAM278>CGROM260.

Specifically, the VDP circuit 250b includes various registers 265 in which various operating parameters that define the operation of the VDP can be set by the CPU 241, and about 48 Mbytes used when generating image data to be displayed on the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. a VRAM 261, a data transfer circuit 267 for executing data transmission/reception between internal parts of the chip and data transmission/reception with the outside of the chip, an index table 268 capable of specifying Source and Destination address information for the VRAM 261, and a drawing operation preceding the drawing operation. A preloader 269 capable of executing a preload operation for read-accessing the CGROM 260, a GDEC (graphics decoder) 273 for decoding (decoding/decompressing/expanding) compressed data read from the CGROM 260, and still image data after decoding (expanding). A drawing circuit 274 that generates one frame of image data for each of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S by appropriately combining the image data and the moving image data. 3-system (A/B/C) display circuits capable of executing appropriate image processing in parallel by reading image data generated by the engine 275 and the drawing circuit 274 and held in the frame buffers FBa and FBb of the VRAM 261 270 and the output of the display circuit 270 of three systems (A/B/C), it is possible to output up to three systems of two systems of LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) output and one system of digital RGB output. an LCD interface 271, an output selection unit 272 that appropriately selects and outputs the outputs of the three systems (A/B/C) of the display circuit 270, the aforementioned SMC unit 276, and a sound controller 280 that functions as a sound source IC. have.
Here, in the VRAM 261, the frame buffer FBa is used as a frame buffer for the main LCD 36M, and the frame buffer FBb is used as a frame buffer for the sub LCD 36S.
The VDP circuit 250b includes a CPU interface unit 264 that relays data transmission/reception with the CPU interface circuit 258 described above, a CG bus interface unit 263 that relays data reception from the CGROM 260, and a DRAM that relays data transmission/reception with the DRAM 278. It has an interface unit 266 and a VRAM interface unit 262 that relays data transmission/reception with the VRAM 261 .

FIG. 129 shows the relationship between the CPU interface section 264, CG bus interface section 263, DRAM interface section 266 and VRAM interface section 262 and various registers 265, CGROM 260, DRAM 278 and VRAM 261. FIG.
In an embodiment that performs a preload operation, CG data acquired from the CGROM 260 is transferred as preload data to the preload area of the DRAM 278 via the data transfer circuit 267 and the DRAM interface section 266 .
It should be noted that the preload operation is not an essential operation at all, and an embodiment that does not perform the preload operation is also possible. Also, the data transfer destination is not limited to the DRAM 278 and may be the VRAM 261 .
CG data is transferred to the VRAM via the data transfer circuit 267 and the VRAM interface section 262 in an embodiment that does not perform the preload operation.

By the way, in this example, the VRAM 261 stores an expansion area of the compressed data read from the CGROM 260, an image specifying each ARGB information (32 bits=8×4) of W×H display pixels of the LCD (liquid crystal display device) 36. A frame buffer area for storing data and a Z buffer area for storing depth information for each display pixel are required. In the ARGB information, A means 8-bit α-plane data, and RGB means 8-bit data of three primary colors.

Here, each area of the VRAM 261 is indirectly accessed by the CPU 241 based on various instruction commands (texture, sprite, etc.) described in the display list DL. , the destination address and the source address of the VRAM 261 are complicated.
Therefore, in this example, in the initial processing after resetting the CPU, a one-dimensional or two-dimensional logical memory space (hereinafter referred to as "index space") required for the drawing operation is secured, and an index is stored in each index space. Assigning a number enables access based on the index number.
Specifically, after resetting the CPU, the VRAM 261 is roughly divided into three types of memory areas, and the necessary number of index spaces are secured in each memory area. By constructing an index table 268 (see FIG. 141) that stores index spaces and index numbers in association with each other, subsequent operations based on the index numbers are realized.
A specific example of the method of using the VRAM 261 using the index space in this example and a specific method of drawing operation in the VRAM 261 will be described later.

In FIG. 128, the data transfer circuit 276 uses the resources (storage media) inside the VDP circuit 250b and the external storage media as transfer source ports or transfer destination ports, and performs data transfer operations between them by DMA (Direct Memory Access). is a circuit that executes
Details of the data transfer circuit 276 will be explained later.

The preloader 269 executes necessary preload operations based on the display list DL issued by the CPU 241 and transferred by the data transfer circuit 267 . Specifically, the preloader 269 analyzes the display list DL and transfers the image materials referred to therein, ie, the CG data on the CGROM 2260, to the designated area on the DRAM 278, ie, the preload area.
At this time, the preloader 269 outputs a display list DL (hereinafter referred to as “rewritten list DL′”) in which the reference destination of the CG data is rewritten to the address on the DRAM 278 after transfer. This rewrite list DL' is stored in the DL buffer area BUF' secured on the DRAM 278. FIG. The rewrite list DL' stored in the DL buffer area BUF' is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 by the data transfer circuit 267. FIG.
Note that the preload area and the DL buffer area BUF' are secured in advance during the initial processing after CPU reset (ST3 in FIG. 145).

The drawing circuit 274 sequentially analyzes the instruction command strings of the display list DL and the rewriting list DL' transferred via the data transfer circuit 267, and forms them in the VRAM 261 in cooperation with the GDEC 273, the geometry engine 275, and the like. This is a circuit that draws an image for one frame on the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S in the frame buffers (FBa, FBb).

As described above, in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 functions, the reference destination of the CG data of the rewrite list DL' is not the CGROM 260 but the preload area set in the DRAM 278. FIG. Therefore, sequential access to CG data that occurs during execution of drawing by the drawing circuit 274 can be executed quickly, and high-resolution moving images with rapid motion can be drawn without problems. In other words, according to this example, it is possible to use an inexpensive serial ATA module as the CGROM 260 and execute complex and advanced image effects.

Here, the frame buffer FB in the VRAM 261 is a double buffer divided into a drawing area Ad and a readout area Ar, and these two areas are alternately used by switching their uses. Also, in this example, two LCDs 36M and 36S are connected, so that two sections of frame buffers FBa/FBb are secured. Therefore, the drawing circuit 274 draws one frame of image data in the drawing area Ad (writing area) of the frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M, and draws the image data for one frame in the drawing area Ad (writing area) of the frame buffer FBa for the sub LCD 36S. area), image data for one frame is drawn. Note that when image data is written in the drawing area Ad, the display circuit 270 reads the image data in the other read area Ar (display area) and outputs it to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

The display circuit 270 is a circuit that reads the image data in the frame buffer FB, performs final image processing, and outputs the data. Final image processing includes, for example, scaling processing for enlarging/reducing the image, subtle color correction processing, and dithering processing for minimizing the quantization error of the entire image.

FIG. 130 shows a block diagram of the three systems of display circuitry 270 and LCD interface 226 .
The display circuits 270 of the A/B/C systems each have a synchronization signal generator 285, and perform processing in synchronization with each image frame. The synchronizing signal generator 285 generates, for example, a V blank signal indicating a vertical blank period (ineffective line scanning period), a horizontal synchronizing signal, and a vertical synchronizing signal as synchronizing signals. These synchronization signals can be used for control processing inside the composite chip 250, and are also used for display data transfer to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S and display control operations.
Synchronization signals used in each display circuit 270 can be synchronized with each other. For example, each display circuit 270 can be forcibly synchronized using the falling edge of the vertical synchronization signal of an external display such as the main LCD 36M as a trigger.

Each display circuit 270 acquires the frame data read from the frame buffer FB of the VRAM 261 by the VRAM reading section 281 .
The display circuits 270 of the A/B systems can perform scaling processing in the scaler 282, color correction processing in the color correction unit 283, and dithering processing in the ditherer 284 on the acquired frame data. As outputs after processing by the ditherer 284, digital RGB output and LVDS output are performed. The same applies to the display circuit 270 of the C system, but in the example of this figure, the display circuit 270 of the C system does not have the function of the scaler 282 .
Here, in this example, since there are two LCDs 36, the display circuits 270 to be operated are only two systems of A/B. Specifically, the A system display circuit 270 reads data from the frame buffer FBa, the B system display circuit 270 reads data from the frame buffer FBb, and performs the final image processing described above.

The LCD interface 271 has a digital RGB output section 271a and an LVDS output section 271b.
The digital RGB output unit 271a is supplied with display data as a digital RGB output from the display circuits 270 of the A/B/C systems. The digital RGB output unit 271a can select one digital RGB output of each display circuit 270 and output it to the connected display device.
Display data as LVDS output from each display circuit 270 is supplied to the LVDS output section 271b. The LVDS output unit 271b can select two LVDS outputs from each display circuit 270 and output them to the connected display device.
In the case of the pachinko game machine 1A of this example, the LVDS output of the A system display circuit 270 among the display circuits 270 is output to the main LCD 36M, and the LVDS output of the B system display circuit 270 is output to the sub LCD 36S. there is
Of course, this is just an example, and outputting the digital RGB output to the main LCD 36M or the sub LCD 36S is also conceivable.
The selection of which display circuit 270 outputs to which system is realized by controlling the LCD interface section 271 by the output selection section 272 described above.

In FIG. 128, a sound controller 280 is provided in the VDP circuit 250b.
The sound controller 280 has a sound data storage section for storing compressed sound data, for example, decodes the compressed sound data under the control of the CPU 241 to generate an output sound signal, and outputs the output sound signal to the external amplifier section 46d.
Regardless of whether or not the sound controller 280 is mounted, the CPU 241 may control a sound source IC provided outside the composite chip 250 to output an audio signal to the amplifier section 46d.

The SMC unit 276 is a composite control controller containing a lamp controller 276a and a motor controller 276b. Then, it outputs an LED drive signal and a motor drive signal in synchronization with a clock signal to a lamp driver section 45d and a motor driver section 80d (driver IC having a built-in shift register) mounted on an external substrate. It is configured to be able to output a latch pulse at the timing.

Regarding the internal circuit of the VDP circuit 250b and its operation, the contents of the operation to be executed by the internal circuit are defined by operation parameters (set values) set in various registers 265 by the CPU 241 in the CPU circuit 250a. The execution state can be specified by reading the operation status values of various registers 265 . The various registers 265 mean a large number of VDP registers RGij mapped in a memory space of about 1 Mbyte (0 to FFFFFH) on the memory map of the CPU 241. A (setting) operation and an operation status value READ operation are executed (see FIG. 129).

As shown in FIG. 129, various registers 265 (VDP register RGij) include a "system control register" in which initial setting values relating to system operations such as interrupt operations are written, and various area settings for the VRAM 261 (for example, the AAC area described later). (a), page area (b), etc.), an “index table register” related to construction or modification of the index table 268, and settings related to data transfer processing by the data transfer circuit 267 between the CPU 241 and the internal circuit of the VDP circuit 250b. A "data transfer register" to which values are written, a "GDEC register" to specify the execution status of the GDEC 273, a "drawing register" to which instruction commands and setting values related to the drawing circuit 274 are written, and operations related to the preloader 269. A "preloader register" in which setting values are written, a "display register" in which setting values relating to the operation of the display circuit 270 are written, a "lamp control register" in which setting values relating to the lamp controller 276a are written, and a motor controller. 276b into which the settings for 276b are written.

In the following description, one or more registers RGij included in the various registers 265 may be referred to by the individual names described above or may be generically referred to as VDP registers RGij. The internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b is controlled by writing an appropriate set value to the register RGij. Specifically, the CPU 241 realizes a predetermined image effect based on the display list DL, which is updated at appropriate time intervals, and the set value in the predetermined VDP register RGij. In this example, since the CPU 241 is in charge of the lamp effects and the motor effects, the VDP register RGij also includes a lamp control register and a motor control register.

[16-3. Function comparison of production control unit]

FIG. 131 shows a configuration in which a computer device (liquid crystal control unit 40) for liquid crystal control is provided separately from the computer device as the effect control unit 24 like the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a functional block diagram schematically showing each functional configuration of the effect control unit 24 and the liquid crystal control unit 40 in the case of "2 CPU configuration").
As can be understood from the description so far, the effect control unit 24 receives and analyzes the effect control command from the main control unit 20, and based on the analysis result, effects other than image effects such as lamps, sounds, and motors Scenario data (performance progress data: specifically, various registration information as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38) is generated, and drive data for lamps, sounds, and motors are generated and output based on the scenario data. The desired production operation is realized.
Further, regarding the liquid crystal, a liquid crystal control command obtained based on the analysis result of the effect control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control section 40 side.

The effect control unit 24 has a effect control command buffer F11 ("command receiving buffer" described above), which is a buffer area (storage area) for holding the effect control command transmitted by the main control unit 20, and the effect control command A production control command analysis processing unit F12 that analyzes the production control command held in the buffer F11, and a lamp, a sound, and a scenario data for the motor are generated based on the command analysis result by the production control command analysis processing unit F12. It has an effect control scenario execution processing unit F13 that executes processing based on the scenario data obtained, and a command output buffer F14 that is an output buffer for liquid crystal control commands.

In the effect control command analysis processing section F12, the process shown in FIG. 42 is performed as the effect control command analysis process, and the type of the command is specified. As for the production control command, a process to be executed is predetermined for each type. Depending on the type of effect control command, it is determined that a process of transmitting a predetermined liquid crystal control command to the liquid crystal control section 40 is performed. For example, it is the processing of "command set" illustrated in FIGS. 43D and 43E. In this case, a predetermined liquid crystal control command is set in the command output buffer F14 as a result of the analysis processing of the effect control command analysis processing section F12.
Moreover, as the effect control command, there is also a command that is determined to transmit (that is, transmit through) the same command as the effect control command to the liquid crystal control board F12. Also in this case, a liquid crystal control command (same as the received effect control command as data) is set in the command output buffer F14 as a result of the analysis processing of the effect control command analysis processing unit F12.
The through transmission of commands will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135-137.

In the production control scenario execution processing section F13, the generation of scenario data based on the command analysis result is realized by the scenario registration processing provided as part of the command response processing (S2106) as in step S2141 of FIG. 43D, for example. .
Further, specific processing based on the scenario data executed by the effect control scenario execution processing unit F13 includes the processing related to updating the scenario (S2004) described in FIG. , output processing (S2032, S2033, S2034, S2042, S2202, S2203 in FIG. 44), and the like.

Here, as the effect control command, there is also a command that specifies that a predetermined liquid crystal control command should be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the effect control command (hereinafter referred to as liquid crystal control command (also referred to as “time-staggered transmission”).
In this example, when performing such time-lag transmission, scenario data (hereinafter also referred to as "command transmission scenario data") for managing commands to be transmitted and transmission timings for liquid crystal control commands is used.
When such command transmission scenario data is generated as a result of command analysis by the production control command analysis processing unit F12, the production control scenario execution processing unit F13 executes processing according to the command transmission scenario data. , a liquid crystal control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 . That is, in this case, a predetermined liquid crystal control command is set in the command output buffer F14 as the scenario is executed by the effect control scenario execution processing section F13.
The time-lag transmission of liquid crystal control commands will also be described later with reference to FIGS.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 includes a liquid crystal control command buffer F21, which is a buffer area for holding liquid crystal control commands transmitted by the effect control unit 24, and a liquid crystal for analyzing the liquid crystal control commands held in the liquid crystal control command buffer F11. A control command analysis processing unit F22 generates scenario data (hereinafter also referred to as "liquid crystal scenario data") for liquid crystal effects based on command analysis results by the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F22, and performs processing based on the generated scenario data. and a liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F23 to be executed.
The liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F23 performs processing based on the liquid crystal scenario data, so that the above-described display list is created and drawn, and the image data necessary for realizing the image effect is generated as appropriate. is output to the liquid crystal display device 36 . As a result, various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

Here, in the case where the effect control unit 24 is provided with the control function for the image effect that the liquid crystal control unit 40 has as described above and one CPU is used, a program for effect control other than the image effect (main control Analysis of production control commands transmitted from unit 20, generation of scenario data for lamps, sounds, motors, etc.) and a program for image production control are integrated to create a new program, and the program is executed as one CPU. It is conceivable that the computer device (the CPU 241 of the effect control section 24A in the pachinko game machine 1A) is made to execute.
At this time, since it is not necessary to transmit the liquid crystal control command to the liquid crystal control section 40 in the case of one CPU, the generation of the liquid crystal scenario data is performed without interposing a command separate from the command from the main control section 20. It is conceivable to construct such a program.

However, according to this, the image effect control program executed by one CPU requires a relatively large change from the program executed by the liquid crystal control section 40 (liquid crystal control CPU), and the work load of program creation is increased. There is a risk that it will increase.
In particular, under circumstances such as having the programs for the effect control section 24 and the programs for the liquid crystal control section 40 created by different companies, the load of creating the programs to be executed by one CPU becomes greater.

Therefore, in this example, a control configuration as shown in FIG. 132 is adopted for the effect control section 24A as one CPU.
24 A of production|presentation control parts have the production|presentation control command buffer F11, the production|presentation control command analysis process part F12, and the production|presentation control scenario execution process part F13 like the production|presentation control part 24 like illustration. In this case, the command output buffer F14 is omitted and the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is provided. Furthermore, the effect control section 24A has a liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and a liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17.
The processing contents of the liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17 are the same as those of the liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F22 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F23 in the liquid crystal control section 40, respectively. Specifically, the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 analyzes the liquid crystal control commands held in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15, and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17 analyzes the command analysis result of the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16. Based on this, liquid crystal scenario data is generated, and processing based on the generated liquid crystal scenario data is executed to generate image data necessary for realizing the liquid crystal effect, and display it on a liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36. - 特許庁

In the effect control section 24A, the effect control command buffer F11 is set as a part of the storage area of the RAM 243, for example. The liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is also set as a partial storage area of the RAM 243, for example.
When the CPU 241 of the production control unit 24A determines that the liquid crystal control command should be transmitted in accordance with the processing of the production control command analysis processing unit F12 and the production control scenario execution processing unit F13, the target liquid crystal control command is converted into the liquid crystal control command. Set in buffer F15.

As described above, the effect control unit 24A includes the effect control command buffer F11 that holds the effect control command transmitted by the main control unit 20, and the liquid crystal control command that holds the liquid crystal control command obtained by analyzing the effect control command. and a command buffer F15.
As a result, the effect control unit 24A analyzes the effect control command, and sets the liquid crystal control command obtained by the analysis in the predetermined storage area. ) can be followed.
In addition, regarding the control processing of the image effect, the liquid crystal control command set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is obtained, the liquid crystal scenario data is generated based on the liquid crystal control command, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is changed based on the liquid crystal scenario data. It is possible to follow the same processing as the liquid crystal control section 40, such as control (control of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S in the configuration of FIG. 127).
As a result, the program to be executed by the effect control unit 24A as one CPU is the program executed by the effect control unit 24 at the time of two CPUs and the program executed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (liquid crystal control CPU) almost unchanged. It is possible to follow. A specific change is mainly that the liquid crystal control command is set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 instead of the command output buffer F14.
Therefore, it is possible to substantially eliminate the need to rewrite an existing program when implementing a single CPU, and to reduce the work load associated with program creation.

In addition, the effect control unit 24A controls the progress of effects other than image display based on the analysis result of the effect control command transmitted from the main control unit 20. ), and image display instruction information generating means (effect control scenario execution processing section F13) for generating image display instruction information (liquid crystal control command) relating to image display according to the progress of the effect by the first effect progress managing means. second effect progress management means (liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution process It has a part F17).
The processing by the first effect progress management means and the image display instruction information generating means is the same as the process by the effect control scenario execution processing section F13 of the effect control section 24. FIG. The processing by the second effect progress management means is the same as the processing by the liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F22 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F23 of the liquid crystal control section 40. FIG.
As a result, the program to be executed by the effect control unit 24A as one CPU is the program executed by the effect control unit 24 at the time of two CPUs and the program executed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (liquid crystal control CPU) almost unchanged. It is possible to follow.
Therefore, it is possible to substantially eliminate the need to rewrite an existing program when implementing a single CPU, and to reduce the work load associated with program creation.

Here, the program for realizing the processing of the first performance progress management means and the image display instruction information generating means and the program for realizing the processing of the second performance progress management means are independent program modules. Can be configured.

[16-4. Processing of production control unit]

Next, processing of the effect control section 24A will be described.
The CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A executes the same process as in the pachinko game machine 1 for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 44). CPU241 of production control section 24A mainly executes the processing which differs from CPU241 of production control section 24 concerning production control main processing (Figure 41).

The flowchart of Drawing 133 shows the production control main processing which CPU241 of production control part 24A performs.
In addition, below, only different processes will be described in comparison with the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24, and duplicate processes will be given the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

A major difference from the main processing shown in FIG. 41 is that steps S2060 and S2061 and steps S2025 to S2028 are added because the CPU 241 in this case executes processing according to the liquid crystal control command.
In this case, various initial setting processes are performed in step S2000' instead of the various initial setting processes in step S2000. Necessary initial setting processing is performed before the start of the game operation, such as the initialization of the object origin return processing and control, the initialization of the sound source control, and the initialization of the scheduler (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler). However, in the initialization process of step S2000′, various processes shown in FIG. 145 are performed, which is different from step S2000. Note that the processing of FIG. 145 will be described later.

In this case, when the CPU 241 determines in step S2003 that the frame update flag is OFF, the process advances to step S2060 to execute liquid crystal control frame update processing. This liquid crystal control frame updating process corresponds to the process of advancing the scenario for the image effect, whose progress is managed by the above-described liquid crystal scenario data, by one frame.
In the liquid crystal scenario data, a value such as a timer value that manages the progress timing of the scenario is registered, such as the "waiting time (delay)" and "sub-scenario timer (scTm)" of the scenario registration information shown in FIG. 37A. included in the information. Therefore, in the liquid crystal control frame update process in step S2060, the image effect scenario is advanced by one frame by updating the value.

In step S2061 following step S2060, the CPU 241 performs drawing update processing. That is, based on the liquid crystal scenario data, for example, the display list DL, which is a group of drawing commands described in the drawing order as described above, is created, and the drawing start control of the drawing circuit 274 is performed. In addition, in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 functions, preload execution start control is performed.
In addition, in the drawing update process of step S2060, processing for switching between the drawing area Ad and the reading area Ar is also performed for the double buffer as the frame buffer FB. The details of the drawing update process in this example will be explained later.

After executing the drawing update process in step S2061, the CPU 241 advances to the scenario scheduler frame update process in step S2004. As a result, the timer of the effect scenario is advanced by one timing at the start of the frame.

Also, in this case, the CPU 241 can perform analysis processing for the liquid crystal control command when the V-blank interrupt counter is 0, that is, in the first half of the frame, by the processing of steps S2025 to S2028.
Specifically, in this case, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2025 when there is no received command in step S2022 or when the scheduler update flag is turned OFF in step S2024 after the command analysis processing in step S2023. Check if the Vblank interrupt counter is 1 or 0. In addition, here, it is clearly indicated that the received command confirmed in step S2022 is the effect control command from the main control unit 20.

If the V blank interrupt counter is 1 in step S2025, the CPU 241 advances to step S2026 to confirm reception of the liquid crystal control command. Specifically, it is checked whether or not one or more liquid crystal control commands are stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 described above. If there is no liquid crystal control command, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2030.
If one or more liquid crystal control commands are stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15, the CPU 241 analyzes the commands stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 as liquid crystal control command analysis processing in step S2027. In the liquid crystal control command analysis process, a predetermined process is executed according to the received command in the same manner as in the effect control command analysis process. Among the liquid crystal control commands, there are those which, as a corresponding process, define a process of registering a scenario in the liquid crystal scenario data, in which case a new scenario is added to the liquid crystal scenario data.
For example, in this way, liquid crystal scenario data is generated based on the analysis result of the liquid crystal control command.

In the drawing update process of step S2061 described above, the display list DL is created based on the liquid crystal scenario data generated based on the analysis result of the liquid crystal control command as described above, and the preload execution start control is performed. The image data necessary for rendering is obtained in the circuit 250b.

In response to executing the command analysis process in step S2027, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2028, and proceeds to step S2030.

Up to this point, the effect control main process executed by the CPU 241 in the effect control section 24A has been described, but in the above process examples, the CPU 241 performs various processes according to the frame period of the display data.

FIG. 134 shows various timings within a frame period of display data.
The drawing process by the drawing circuit 274 is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period. For example, the drawing of the display data of the frame FR1 is executed during the display period of the frame FR0. Specifically, since drawing is started in step S2061, drawing for the next frame is started at the beginning of the frame. This drawing is normally completed within a frame period.

In a working embodiment of preloader 269, preloading is performed during the period one frame further back in preparation for drawing. For example, preloading for drawing display data of frame FR2 is performed within the frame period of frame FR0. Specifically, since it starts at step S2061, preloading for the frame two frames after is started at the beginning of the frame. Even preloading is normally completed within the frame period.

At the start timing of each frame, the CPU 241 first performs the processing of step S2060 to update the liquid crystal control frame. Then, by the processing in step S2061, the area where drawing is to be newly performed for the frame buffer FB is switched (drawing area Ad<=>reading area Ar in the drawing), and the display list DL is created and the drawing circuit 274 is changed. Controls the start of drawing and the start of preload execution. Furthermore, the CPU 241 updates the scheduler frame (scenario, lamp, sound) in step S2004.
After the scheduler frame update process is performed once, if necessary, effect control command analysis process in step S2022, liquid crystal control command analysis process in step S2027, and various scheduler execution processes in steps S2032 to S2034 ( Scenarios, sounds, lamps, and in this example scheduler updates for command transmission scenarios) are performed.
Furthermore, each process of updating and outputting the lamp driving data in steps S2041 and S2042 and the key event process in step S2043 are executed.

Then, if the processing up to the above is completed within the first half of the frame period (within 16 ms), it is possible to perform the analysis processing of the effect control command and the liquid crystal control command again. Furthermore, various scheduler execution processes, lamp driving data update/output processes, and key event processes are performed.

[16-5. Operation example of production control]

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137, an operation example of effect control realized by the processing of the effect control section 24A (CPU 241) described above will be described.
In the following operation example, an operation example of effect control performed corresponding to the end of the jackpot will be described.

FIG. 135A shows an example of the type of effect control command that the main control unit 20 transmits.
As the effect control command, various commands are defined by the value of the upper 1 byte as shown in the figure. Processing to be executed corresponding to each command (corresponding processing) is predetermined (defined as a "function" in this example).
Focused in this example is the effect control command ("0xF3") as the jackpot end designation command.

FIG. 135B exemplifies a list of liquid crystal control commands whose transmission is determined in the corresponding processing of the jackpot end designation command.
With respect to the jackpot end designation command, the through transmission of the jackpot end designation command (F301H) is defined, as well as the selection character command (02xxH), the number of consecutive villas command (03xxH), the capture flag command (05xxH), and the jackpot. Transmission of a pattern command (0AxxH), a jackpot basic command (88xxH), a character command (9FxxH) at the time of decision, and a background designation command (01xxH) is defined.

The selected character command is a command that indicates the character selected by the player (for example, a favorite character), and the consecutive game number command is a command that indicates the number of consecutive big wins. The capture flag command is a command that indicates whether or not the player has successfully captured the selected character, the jackpot pattern command is a command that indicates the pattern as the prize this time, and the jackpot basic command is the type of jackpot this time, such as big or small. It is a command that indicates the jackpot of , how many rounds the jackpot is, and so on.

The character command at the time of determination and the background designation command are commands designated to be transmitted after a predetermined time from the reception of the jackpot end designation command (that is, the above-described time difference transmission). In the pachinko game machine 1A of this example, the player is made to select a character in response to the end of the big win. For example, a specific character is selected from the characters displayed on the main LCD 36M or the like, and the effect control section 24A accepts an operation of a predetermined operator such as the effect button 13 as a determination operation for character selection by the player. .
The determined character command is a command representing the type of character determined by the player's operation.
The background designation command is, for example, a command for designating the type of background image in the display image of the main LCD 36M (for example, the background image corresponding to the determined character is designated).
In this example, the character command and the background designation command at the time of determination are determined as commands to be transmitted with a time difference of approximately 9 seconds (270 frames) from the reception of the jackpot end designation command. In other words, in the effect at the end of the big win in this case, the selection (decision) operation of the character by the player is accepted from the end of the big win until 9 s, and then the character command at the time of decision corresponding to the decided character is accepted. And the background designation command is transmitted (set to the liquid crystal control command buffer F15).

In this example, the above-described command transmission scenario data is used for the transmission management of the determined character command and the background designation command for which time-lag transmission is specified.
Specifically, the effect control unit 24A of the present example, in the command analysis processing (step S2023) when the received effect control command is the jackpot end designation command, the jackpot end designation command (through Transmission), selected character command, consecutive house number command, capture flag command, big win pattern command, and big win core command are set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15.
In the command analysis process (S2023) in this case, the main scenario number (mcNo) determined corresponding to the received jackpot end designation command is registered in the scenario registration information. In the main scenario, a scenario of lamps, sounds, and motors corresponding to the end of the jackpot is defined, and a scenario of transmitting a character command and a background designation command at the time of determination after 9 seconds is defined. In other words, by registering the main scenario number (mcNo) corresponding to the jackpot end designation command as described above, the various scheduler execution processes (S2032 to S2034) after that will correspond to the lamp, sound, and motor at the time of the jackpot end. Registration of scenarios (sub-scenarios) for each effect and registration of command transmission scenarios are performed. As described above, scheduler execution processing for command transmission scenario data can be executed, for example, as part of the scenario scheduler execution processing in step S2032.

FIG. 136 schematically represents each scenario data for sound, lamp, motor, button, and command transmission determined corresponding to the jackpot end designation command.
Note that the time (f) in the figure represents the progress time of the effect, and the unit is "frame" (frame of display data). In this case, the production scenario at the end of the big win is assumed to have a time length of 300 frames. For time (f), the numbers in parentheses represent the scenario execution time of the corresponding line. This corresponds to the execution time (time) for the lamps and sounds/motors discussed above (see FIGS. 40A and 40B).

As shown in the figure, in the scenario data in this case, the sub-scenario data for the sound, the lamp, and the motor are set in the line of time=0, and the sub-scenario data of the button lamp is set as the sub-scenario data of the lamp in the line of time=120. It is determined to set data representing lighting. Here, the button means an operator used for the operation of determining the character described above, and the button lamp means a lamp for lighting the operator. Assume that the button here is the effect button 13 in this example.
Also, it is determined to set information indicating the start and end of activation of the button on the line of time=123 and the line of time=144. Valid/invalid here means valid/invalid of operation acceptance.
Further, at the time=270 line, data representing turning off of the button lamp is set as sub-scenario data for the lamp, and data representing transmission of the character command at the time of determination and the command to specify the background are set as command transmission scenario data. It is stipulated.
A code representing the end of the scenario is written in the line of time=300 (see the end codes D_LSEND and D_SEEND described above).

Here, an example is shown in which enabling/disabling of buttons is managed based on scenario data, but the method of managing enabling/disabling of buttons is not necessarily limited to a method using scenario data.

FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the flow of processing executed by the effect control section 24A in response to reception of the jackpot end designation command.
In FIG. 137, the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time within one frame period, and the vertical axis represents the elapsed time per frame. For reference, the flow of each process within one frame period is shown at the top in the same manner as in FIG.

Assume that a jackpot end designation command from the main control unit 20 is received in a certain n-th frame. Assume that the timing of receiving the command is the timing during execution of each scheduler frame update process (S2004) as shown in the figure. Note that the command reception processing is executed in the external interrupt processing as described above.

In this case, in the first effect control command analysis process (S2023) of the nth frame, the process corresponding to the received jackpot end designation command is executed. That is, the process of setting the above-mentioned jackpot end designation command (through transmission), selected character command, number of consecutive houses command, capture flag command, jackpot pattern command, and jackpot core command in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 (command to liquid crystal control Transmission processing) and registration of the main scenario number (mcNo) determined in correspondence with the jackpot end designation command to the scenario registration information is performed.

Then, in the following liquid crystal control command analysis processing (S2027), the jackpot end designation command, the selected character command, the number of consecutive villas command, the capture flag command, the jackpot pattern command, and the jackpot core command set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15. Analysis processing is performed.

As described above, scenario registration is performed in the liquid crystal scenario data depending on the liquid crystal control command analysis processing. Then, in the drawing updating process in step S2061, the display list DL is created based on the liquid crystal scenario data, and the start of preload execution is controlled to obtain the image data necessary for rendering.
The liquid crystal scenario based on the liquid crystal scenario data updated in the nth frame is started by updating the value for managing the scenario progress timing by the liquid crystal control frame update processing (S2060) in the n+1th frame, and the drawing immediately after that is started. Processing for drawing update according to the started scenario is performed by the update processing (S2061).

In the n-th frame, depending on the various scheduler execution processes (S2032 to S2034) executed immediately after the liquid crystal control command analysis process described above, sub-scenarios for lamps and sounds corresponding to the registered main scenario numbers are registered and started. be done. Further, by the lamp drive data update/output process (S2041, S2042) immediately thereafter, update/output of drive data (LED drive data) for performing lamp control according to the registered lamp sub-scenario is started. That is, the corresponding lamp effect is started.

In addition, when the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command, a scenario related to time difference transmission (after 270 frames) of the character command and the background designation command at the time of determination is registered as the command transmission scenario.
Therefore, depending on various scheduler execution processes in the (n+270)th frame, the liquid crystal control command as the character command and the background designation command at the time of determination are transmitted according to the command transmission scenario data. Also, in the line of time=270, a sub-scenario related to turning off the button lamp is registered. Output of corresponding lamp drive data is started by data update/output.
In the n+270th frame, the determined character command and the background designation command transmitted by the various scheduler execution processes can be analyzed in the liquid crystal control command analysis process executed in the n+270th frame. In the example of FIG. 137, the lamp driving data output processing is completed at a timing sufficiently earlier than 16 ms from the start of the frame period, so that these commands are analyzed by the liquid crystal control command analysis processing in the (n+270)th frame. showing. As described above, the liquid crystal control command analysis process can be executed within 16 ms from the start of the frame period.

Although not shown, the character command and background designation command at the time of determination are also added to the liquid crystal scenario data based on the command analysis results in the same way as the various commands (selected character commands, etc.) that are not subject to the time difference transmission described above. is registered, the new scenario is started by the liquid crystal control frame update process in the next frame, and the drawing update process corresponding to the started scenario is performed by the drawing update process immediately thereafter.

Here, the analysis processing of the effect control command and the liquid crystal control command becomes processing with a relatively heavy processing load, and the number of processing increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the command type, it may be necessary to perform a lottery or the like for presentation.
In this example, such processing is performed only in the first half of the frame.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which subsequent scheduler execution processing and lamp drive data update/output processing are not completed within the frame period.

On the other hand, in this example, it is allowed to perform the analysis processing of the effect control command and the liquid crystal control command a plurality of times during the first half of the frame. As a result, the received command can be efficiently analyzed in a limited processing period.

[16-6.1 Summary of CPU configuration and modified example]

According to the above pachinko game machine 1A, the processing for effect control can be made efficient, and appropriate effect control can be realized.
Moreover, the production control processing load can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1A has, as a first configuration, main control means (main control section 20) for controlling the progress of game operations, and production control based on instruction information (production control commands) from the main control means. Effect control means (effect control unit 24A), and the effect control means includes first means (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13) for managing the execution of effects other than image display, and the execution of effects related to image display. second means for managing (liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17); instruction information storage means (effect control command buffer F11) for storing instruction information from the main control means; , analysis means for analyzing the instruction information stored in the instruction information storage means (production control command analysis processing unit F12), second instruction information ( and second instruction information storage means (liquid crystal control command buffer F15) for storing liquid crystal control commands).

Since the production control means has the second instruction information storage means as described above, when the production control means is configured as a so-called 1 CPU, the instruction information from the main control means is analyzed and obtained by the analysis. Regarding the processing of setting the second instruction information in the predetermined storage area, it is possible to follow the processing of the effect control means (effect control unit 24) in the case of two CPUs.
In addition, regarding the control processing of the image rendering, the second instruction information set in the second instruction information storage means is obtained, and the image rendering device is controlled based on the second instruction information. It is possible to follow the same processing as the control means (liquid crystal control CPU of the liquid crystal control section 40).
In this way, by having the second instruction information storage means, the program to be executed by the effect control means as one CPU includes the program executed by the effect control means at the time of two CPUs and the image effect control means. It is possible to follow the program being executed almost as it is.
Therefore, it is possible to substantially eliminate the need to rewrite an existing program in order to implement a single CPU, thereby reducing the work load of creating a program and reducing the cost.
Also, the program for image effect control can be substantially the same for the one-CPU and two-CPU cases, so that the versatility of the program can be enhanced. Similarly, programs for controls other than image effect control can be substantially the same for the 1-CPU and 2-CPU cases, thereby enhancing versatility.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the first configuration described above, the second instruction information is command information.
This makes it possible to further reduce changes from the existing program in response to the case where the second instruction information in the existing two-CPU configuration is command information.
Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the work load of creating a program for realizing a single CPU, and to further reduce costs. Also, the versatility of the program can be further enhanced.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1A has, as a second configuration, main control means (main control section 20) that controls the progress of game operations, and production control based on instruction information (production control commands) from the main control means. Effect control means (effect control unit 24A), and the effect control means includes first means (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13) for managing the execution of effects other than image display, and the execution of effects related to image display. second means for managing (liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17); and analysis means for analyzing instruction information from the main control means (effect control command analysis processing unit F12). , the first means includes first production progress management means (production control scenario execution processing unit F13) for managing the progress of production other than image display based on the analysis result by the analysis means, and production by the first production progress management means. image display instruction information generating means (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13) for generating image display instruction information (liquid crystal control command) regarding image display according to the progress of a second presentation progress management means (liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17) for managing the progress of presentation relating to image display based on the image display instruction information generated by the information generation means; have.

In the case of a 2-CPU configuration, the image effect control means (liquid crystal control CPU of the liquid crystal control section 40) obtains image display instruction information obtained by the effect control means (effect control section 24) by analyzing the instruction information from the main control means. Then, the image display device is controlled based on the image display instruction information to realize the required image rendering operation.
Therefore, by having the second means (second effect progress management means) as described above, it is possible to follow the program of the image effect control means almost as it is for the control related to the image effect. be.
In addition, since the processing by the first means is substantially the same as the processing executed by the effect control means in the 2-CPU configuration, it is possible to follow the program used during the 2-CPU configuration almost as it is.
As a program to be executed by the effect control means as one CPU, the program executed by the effect control means in the case of two CPUs and the program executed by the image effect control means can be followed almost as they are. be.
Therefore, it is possible to substantially eliminate the need to rewrite an existing program when implementing a single CPU, thereby reducing costs.
Also, the programs for realizing the first means and the second means can be substantially the same as in the case of two CPUs, so that the versatility of the programs can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the second configuration described above, the image display instruction information is used as command information.

This makes it possible to further reduce changes from the existing program in response to the case where the image display instruction information in the existing two-CPU configuration is command information.
Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the work load of creating a program for realizing a single CPU, and to further reduce costs. Also, the versatility of the program can be further enhanced.

<17. Image production control>
[17-1. Comparison with and without preload]

Next, details of the image effect control in the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be described.
First, with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139, the case where the preloader 269 is not operated and the case where the preloader 269 is operated are compared.
Here, as a premise, the CPU circuit 250a and the VDP circuit 250b repeat predetermined operations at a cycle corresponding to the frame cycle of the display data. Hereinafter, such an operation period corresponding to the frame period (which coincides with the frame period in this example) will be referred to as "operation period δ".

In an embodiment in which the preloader 269 does not function, as shown in FIG. , and the drawing circuit 274 completes the image data in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by a drawing operation based on the display list DLi. The image data completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb are output by the display circuit 270 to the main LCD 36M and the sub-LCD 36S in the next frame period, so that the player can perceive them through the subsequent display operations of the main LCD 36M and the sub-LCD 36S. The display screen will be displayed.

On the other hand, in an embodiment where the preloader 269 functions, as shown in FIG. 139, the display list DLi completed by the CPU 241 is issued to the preloader 269, which interprets the display list DLi and performs the necessary look-ahead operations. At the same time, part of the display list DLi is rewritten to complete the rewrite list DL'. The prefetched CG data and rewrite list DL' are stored in appropriate locations in the DRAM 278. FIG.
Next, the drawing circuit 274 acquires the rewrite list DL' from the DRAM 278 in the next frame period (+.delta.), and completes the image data in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by the drawing operation based on the rewrite list DL'. Then, the image data completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb are output by the display circuit 270 to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S in the next frame period (+2δ), so that the subsequent display of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S is performed. It becomes a display screen that the player perceives by the action.

[17-2. About the data transfer circuit]

FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of data transfer circuit 267 together with related circuit configurations.
As shown in FIG. 140, the data transfer circuit 267 is configured to transmit and receive data to and from the CGROM 260, DRAM 278, and VRAM 261 via an integrated connection bus ICM having a router function. The CGROM 260 and DRAM 278 are accessed via the CG bus interface section 263 and the DMAM interface section 266 .

On the other hand, the CPU circuit 250 a issues the display list DL to the drawing circuit 274 and preloader 269 via the transfer port register TR_PORT incorporated in the data transfer circuit 267 . The CPU circuit 250a and the data transfer circuit 267 are bi-directionally connected, but when the display list DL is issued, the transfer port register TR_PORT functions as a data write port for receiving one unit of data constituting the display list DL. do. The write unit (one unit data length) of the transfer port register TR_PORT is 32 bits corresponding to the FIFO structure of the CPU bus control section 267d.

As shown, the CPU 241 can write-access the transfer port register TR_PORT via the CPU interface circuit 258, while the DMAC circuit 252 directly write-accesses the transfer port register TR_PORT when the DMAC circuit 252 is utilized. It will be. A series of instruction commands written in the transfer port register TR_PORT (that is, a series of instruction commands forming the display list DL) are processed in 32-bit units by a CPU bus containing a FIFO buffer with a FIFO structure (32 bits x 130 stages). It is configured to be automatically stored in the control unit 267d.

In addition, the data transfer circuit 267 executes data transmission/reception operations on the transmission paths of three channels ChA to ChC, and has a FIFO buffer with a FIFO structure (64 bits×N stages) ChA control circuit 267a (N=130 stages) ), a ChB control circuit 267b (N=1026 stages), and a ChC control circuit 267c (N=130 stages).

The instruction command string (display list DL) accumulated in the CPU bus control unit 267d is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 or the preloader 269 based on the set value of the data transfer register RGij (one of the various registers 265) by the CPU 241. be done.
In an embodiment in which the preloader 269 is disabled, the display list DL is transferred from the CPU bus control section 267d to the drawing circuit 274 via the FIFO buffer of the ChB control circuit 267b, as indicated by the arrow. In a working embodiment of preloader 269, display list DL is transferred to preloader 269 via the FIFO buffer of ChC control circuit 267c.

In this example, the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267b are specialized for the transfer operation of the display list DL, and the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer of the CPU bus control unit 267d Alternatively, it is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 or the display list analyzer of the preloader 269 as part of the display list DL via the FIFO buffer of the ChC control circuit 267c.

The drawing circuit 274 then starts a drawing operation based on the transferred display list DL. On the other hand, the preloader 269 performs necessary preload operations based on the transferred display list DL. The CG data of the CGROM 260 is read ahead into the preload area secured in the DRAM 266 by the preload operation, and the display list DL in which the source address of the texture is changed in relation to the TXLOAD command, that is, the rewrite list DL' described above is secured in the DRAM 266. It is stored in the DL buffer area BUF'.

On the other hand, a ChA control circuit 267a and a connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e function for data transfer between storage media such as the CGROM 260, DRAM 266, and VRAM 261. FIG. When accessing the VRAM 261, which requires the address information of the index table 268, the index table access arbitration circuit 267f functions. Specifically, the ChA control circuit 267a, for example, (a) transfers the compressed data of the CGROM 260 to the VRAM 261, (b) preloads (reads ahead) the compressed data of the CGROM 260 and transfers it to the DRAM 278, (c) Functions when prefetch data in the preload area is transferred to the VRAM 261 .

Here, the ChA control circuit 267a is configured to be able to operate in parallel with the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267c. 146, PT11 in FIG. 154) and the transfer operation of the rewrite list DL' (PT10 in FIG. 154). In addition, the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267c can also be executed simultaneously. For example, the processing of step PT10 in FIG. can be executed by However, since there is only one transfer port register TR_PORT, at the timing when one of the transfer port registers (267b/267c) is using the transfer port register TR_PORT, the other (267c/267b) can access the transfer port register TR_PORT. can't.

During operation of the ChA control circuit 267a, the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e arbitrates data transmission with each storage element (CGROM 260, DRAM 266) via the integrated connection bus ICM. On the other hand, the index table access arbitration circuit 267f arbitrates data communication with the VRAM 261 by controlling the ChA control circuit 267a based on the index table 268. FIG. In the case of the embodiment in which the preloader 269 functions, the rewrite list DL' saved in the DL buffer area BUF' of the DRAM 278 is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 via the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e and the ChB control circuit 267b. (See FIG. 156).

As described above, the data transfer circuit 267 of this example provides data transfer between a data transfer source arbitrarily selected from various storage resources (Resource) and a data transfer destination arbitrarily selected from various storage resources (Resource). It provides high speed data transfer. As can be seen from FIG. 140, the storage resources on which the data transfer circuit 267 functions include not only the VRAM 261 but also external devices via the CPU interface section 258, CG bus interface section 263, and DRAM interface section 266.

The data transfer amount with an external device in which the ChA control circuit 267a functions, such as the amount of data to be acquired at one time from the CGROM 260 (memory sequential read), is the display in which the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267c function. The list DL is huge compared to the case of the list DL, and the amount of data transfer is greatly different from each other.

Here, it is conceivable that the unit data amount and the total transfer data amount can be finely set for these various types of data transfer. Movement is hindered. Therefore, in this example, the minimum data amount Dmin for data transfer is uniquely defined, and the total transfer data amount is limited to be an integer multiple of the minimum data amount DTmin, thereby achieving high-speed and smooth data transfer operations. are doing. Although not particularly limited, in the data transfer circuit 267 of the embodiment, the minimum data amount Dmin (unit data amount) is set to 256 bytes, and the total transfer data amount is limited to integral multiples of this.

Therefore, the instruction command string of the display list DL accumulated in the FIFO buffer of the CPU bus control unit 267d for each 32 bits is sent to the ChB control circuit 267b or the ChC control circuit 267b at the timing when the total amount reaches the minimum data amount Dmin. It will be transferred and accumulated in each FIFO buffer.

The display list DL consists of a series of instruction commands. In this example, the display list DL has a command length of 32 bits integer N times (N >0). Therefore, the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 that receive the display list DL instruction command via the data transfer circuit 267 can quickly and smoothly start command analysis processing (DL analyze). It should be noted that the command length of 32-bit integer N times does not necessarily mean that all of them are significant bits, but that it is 32-bit integer N times including non-significant bits (Don't care bits).

[17-3. Preload data cache]

Here, as described above, the rewrite list DL' is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 via the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e of the data transfer circuit 267 and the ChB control circuit 267b when the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started. Forwarded to Display List Analyzer. The drawing circuit 274 then executes the drawing operation based on the rewrite list DL'. Therefore, based on the TXLOAD command or the like, the CG data that should originally be obtained from the CGROM 260 is obtained from the preload area of the DRAM 278 as preload data preloaded in the preload area. In this case, the preload data can be used repeatedly as long as it is not overwritten, and the preload data hit in the preload area is reused repeatedly.

In this example, since the preload area is set in the external DRAM 278 having a sufficient storage capacity, the above cache hit function works effectively. In addition, since the memory capacity of the DRAM 278 is large, multiple preloading, in which CG data for a plurality of frames are preloaded at once, is also possible. That is, regarding the operation period of the preloader 269, the operation period of a series of preload operations including the read-ahead operation of the CG data is appropriately set within the range of integral multiples of the operation cycle δ of the VDP circuit 250b, whereby multiple preloading can be achieved. Realized.

However, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed here that there is no multiple preload. In this case, the preloader 269 completes the preload operation for one frame during one operation period (δ).

[17-4. Regarding the use of VRAM during drawing]

As described above, in this example, an index space is defined by the index table 268, and the VRAM 261 is used during drawing.
This index space needs to be (1) added after initial processing, and conversely (2) freed. Therefore, when the adding/releasing CPU 241 operates, a flag area FG can be used to determine whether or not it is possible to perform the adding/releasing process, and whether or not the processes such as adding/releasing have actually been completed. are provided in the index table 268 . The VRAM 261 is roughly divided into three types of memory areas: two AAC areas (a1, a2), a page area (b), and an arbitrary area (c), which will be described below. The index table 268 is divided into three sections corresponding to a1, a2), (b), and (c). Details are as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 142, in this example, the first AAC area (a1) and the second AAC area (a2) are secured as the AAC area (a). It's good to be alone. In the following description, the first and second AAC areas (a1, a2) may be collectively referred to as the AAC area (a).

In this example, the VRAM 261 consists of (a) an AAC area having an index space and its index number automatically assigned by internal processing and having a memory cache function, and (b) a two-dimensional space of, for example, 4096 bits×128 lines as a unit space. , and (c) an arbitrary area in which the top address STx and horizontal size Hx can be arbitrarily set (see FIG. 142). . However, in order to facilitate the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b, the head address STx of the index space arbitrarily set in the arbitrary area (c) has 0 in the lower 11 bits, and is in units of predetermined bits (2048 bits=256 bytes). should be

Then, after resetting the CPU, the maximum value of the memory space required for each and the top address (lower 11 bits=0) are defined, and the first AAC area (a1), the second AAC area (a2), and the page area are defined. (b) is secured, and the remaining memory area becomes the arbitrary area (c). In order to facilitate the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b, the maximum value of the memory space of the AAC area (a) is defined in units of 2048 bits, and the maximum value of the memory space of the page area (b) is 4096 bits×128 lines as described above. is an integral multiple of the unit space of

Next, the necessary number of index spaces are set in each of the areas (a1, a2), (b), and (c) thus secured. When using the arbitrary area (c), the horizontal size Hx of the index space that handles two-dimensional data can be arbitrarily set as a multiple of 256 bits in order to facilitate the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b. Its vertical size is a fixed value (eg, 2048 lines).

In any case, the first and second AAC areas (a1, a2) are automatically given an index space and an index number by the VDP circuit 250b. If the AAC area (a) is specified ahead, the TXLOAD (texture load) command that reads CG data from the CGROM 260 only needs to specify the source address of the CGROM 260 and the horizontal and vertical sizes after expansion (decoding). become. Therefore, in this example, still images (textures) such as characters temporarily appearing during the announcement effect and I-stream moving images are decoded to the AAC area (a).

Since this AAC area (a) is provided with a memory cache function, for example, when the same texture in the CGROM 260 is read into the AAC area (a) multiple times, The decoded data cached in the AAC area (a) can be used, and redundant READ accesses and decoding processes can be suppressed. However, if the AAC area (a) is used up, the old data will be automatically destroyed. Then, only specific textures that are used repeatedly are acquired in the second AAC area (a2).

Examples of repeatedly used textures include a character that appears repeatedly during a predetermined advance notice effect, and a background image when the background screen is composed of a still image. In such a case, set the decoding destination to the second AAC area (a2) with the SETINDEX command of the texture setting commands, and decode the textures such as characters and background images to the second AAC area (a2) with the TXLOAD command. After that, the decoding result is protected by not using the second AAC area (a2).

Then, after specifying the decoding destination to the second AAC area (a2) with the SETINDEX command, executing the same TXLOAD command to reacquire the already acquired texture will cause a cache hit for the already acquired texture. , the read access to the CGROM 260 and the time required for the decoding process can be eliminated.
As described above, this kind of cache hit function is exhibited even in the preload data prefetched in the preload area of the DRAM 278, but the preload data that hits the cache in the preload area is compressed data before decoding. , and AAC area (a) is significant in that it is the decompressed data after decoding.

By the way, "texture" is generally a concept that refers to the texture and feel of the surface of an object. Also, it is used as a concept including not only image data to be pasted on rendering primitives such as triangles and squares, but also image data after decoding. When image data is to be copied (hereinafter referred to as movement) inside the VRAM 261, the texture setting command SETINDEX is used to set the original image data as a texture, and then the SPRITE command is executed. will be executed.

By executing the sprite command, the Source image data of the movement source is formally drawn in the virtual drawing space shown in FIG. , and the index space that becomes the frame buffer FB is set in advance by environment setting commands (SETDAVR, SETDAVF) and texture setting commands (SETINDEX). By drawing, the Source image data of the movement source is drawn in a predetermined index space (frame buffer FB) (see FIG. 143).

In any case, in this example, the VRAM 261 is roughly divided into the AAC area (a1, a2), the page area (b) and the arbitrary area (c), and an appropriate number of index spaces can be secured for each area. , each index space is specified by an independent index number for each region (a), (b), and (c). The index number is, for example, 1 byte long, and for the page area (b) (excluding the AAC area (a) automatically assigned by the internal circuit) and the arbitrary area (c), the CPU 241 can freely assign index numbers.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 141, a pair of frame buffers FBa is secured in an arbitrary area (c) for the main LCD 36M, and index numbers 255 and 254 are given to both sides of the double buffer structure. there is That is, an index space 255 and an index space 254 that are toggled and used are secured as the frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M. Although not particularly limited, the index spaces 255 and 254 have a horizontal size of 1280 corresponding to the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the main LCD 36M. Since each pixel is specified by 32-bit ARGB information, the horizontal size 1280 means 32×1280=40960 bits (a multiple of 256 bits).

For the sub LCD 36S, another pair of frame buffers FBb is secured in the arbitrary area (c), and index numbers 252 and 251 are given to both of the double buffer structures. That is, an index space 252 and an index space 251 are secured as a frame buffer FBb for the sub LCD 36S. The index spaces 252 and 251 have a horizontal size of 480 corresponding to the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the sub LCD 36S. Also in this case, each pixel is specified by 32 bits of ARGB information, so the horizontal size 480 means 32×480=15360 bits (a multiple of 256 bits).

The reason why the frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured in the arbitrary area (c) is that the arbitrary horizontal size can be set in the arbitrary area (c) as a multiple of 32 bytes (=256 bits=8 pixels). This is because, if the number of horizontal pixels of the main LCD 36M and the sub-LCD 36S are made equal to each other as described above, the reserved area will not be wasted. On the other hand, in the page area (b), only horizontal/vertical sizes that are integral multiples of the unit space of 128 pixels×128 lines can be set.

However, the vertical size of the two-dimensional index space secured in the arbitrary area (c) is a fixed value (for example, 2048 lines). Therefore, in the frame buffer FBa, only the area of horizontal size 1280×vertical size 1024 is the valid data area for the main LCD 36M. This point is the same for the sub LCD 36S, and in the frame buffer FBb, only the area of horizontal size 480×vertical size 800 is the valid data area for the sub LCD 36S (see FIG. 143).
Here, FIG. 144 shows the relationship between the entire frame buffers FBa and FBb and their valid data areas.

The effective data areas of the frame buffers FBa and FBb as described above will be further described later. /251) are alternately used, and each double buffer (255/254, 252/251) is alternately used as a display area for the display circuit 270 of the two systems of A/B. In this example, since the Z-buffer for storing the depth information of the display pixels is not used, a missing number (253) occurs. Spaces 253 and 250 provide Z-buffers for primary LCD 36M and secondary LCD 36S.

Also, in this example, when an additional index space (memory area) is secured in the optional area (c) where the frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured, an index number starting from 0 is assigned. Although it is not limited in any way, in this example, an effect image composed of a character or other still image can be arbitrarily set as a work area for an advance notice effect that appears in a part of the display screen in an appropriate rotational posture as necessary. An index space (0) is secured in the area (c).

However, the use of a work area is not essential, and an index space as a work area may be secured in the page area (b) instead of the arbitrary area (c). If the page area (b) is used, it is possible to secure an index space with dimensions that are multiples of a square unit space of horizontal size 128 (=4096 bits)×vertical size 128, so it is suitable for handling small effect images.

By the way, in this example, the background image is composed of moving images, and the image effect is realized almost exclusively by moving images. In particular, a large number (usually 10 or more) moving images are drawn at the same time during the variable presentation. Each of these moving images is stored in the CGROM 260 in a compressed state as a series of moving image frames. and Here, an I frame (Intra coded frame) means a frame in which an input image is directly compressed independently of other screens. On the other hand, a P-frame (Predictive coded frame) means a frame for which forward predictive coding is performed, and requires an I-frame or P-frame positioned in the past in terms of time.

Therefore, in this example, the IP stream moving image is developed in the page area (b) instead of the AAC area (a) where there is concern that the old data will be destroyed. That is, in the page area (b) where index spaces of multiple dimensions of horizontal size 128 x vertical size 128 can be secured, a large number of index spaces (IDX0 to IDXN) are secured, and a series of video frames are assigned to each video MVi. The corresponding, always identical index space IDXi is used for decoding. That is, the moving picture MV1 is developed in the index space IDX1, the moving picture MV2 is developed in the index space IDX2, and similarly, the moving picture MVi is developed in the index space IDXi.

More specifically, the moving image MVi is specified in advance by the SETINDEX command that "the decoding destination of the IP stream moving image MVi is the index space (i) of the index number i in the page area (b)", A TXLOAD command is executed to acquire one moving image frame of the IP stream moving image MVi.

Then, one frame of the moving picture (either of a series of moving picture frames) on the CGROM 260 specified by the TXLOAD command is first acquired in the AAC area (a), and then is transferred to the page area (b ), one frame of the acquired moving image is decoded and developed in the index space (i).

On the other hand, in this example, the I-stream moving picture is handled in the same way as the still picture. run the command. As a result, the moving image frame is acquired in the first AAC area (a1), and then the automatically started GDEC 273 develops the decoded data in the first ACC area (a1). As explained above, the index space of the AAC area (a) is automatically generated, so there is no need to specify the index number. Note that the expansion volume required for the index space, that is, the horizontal size and vertical size of the decoded texture (video frame), is TXLOAD regardless of whether the expansion destination is the AAC area (a) or the page area (b). Identified by command.

By the way, IP stream moving images MVi and I stream moving images MVj are generally composed of N moving image frames (I frames and P frames). Therefore, the TXLOAD command specifies, for example, the source address of the CGROM 260 in which the k-th (1≤k≤N) video frame is stored, and the horizontal and vertical sizes after development. Although not limited in any way, in an embodiment in which still images are rarely used, most of the 48 Mbytes (approximately 30 Mbytes) of the memory space of the VRAM 261 is allocated to the page area (b). In an embodiment in which still images are hardly used, only the first AAC area (a1) is secured as the AAC area (a), the second AAC area (a2) is not secured, and the above-described AAC area ( The cache hit function of a) is also not used.

A dedicated GDEC circuit may be provided in order to speed up the decoding process of compressed video data. If a dedicated GDEC circuit is incorporated in the VDP circuit 250b, it is sufficient to instruct the GDEC circuit of the head address of the compressed moving image data in the decoding process of the compressed moving image data composed of N compressed moving image frames. It is no longer necessary to specify the start address for each of the N compressed video frames.

However, incorporating a plurality of such dedicated GDEC circuits for each compression algorithm further complicates the internal configuration of the VDP circuit 250b. Therefore, a software GDEC may be used so that IP stream moving images, I stream moving images, still images, and other data such as α values are decoded by software processing corresponding to each compression algorithm. The processing time difference between hardware processing and software processing does not matter much, and the processing time that matters is the access (READ) time from the CGROM 260 .

[17-5. CPU processing related to image effect control]

Hereinafter, details of processing related to image effect control executed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 159. FIG.
The flowchart in FIG. 145 shows the processing executed in the various initial setting processing (S2000′) shown in FIG. 133 above.
In the various initial setting processes of step S2000′, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A stores the VRAM 261 having a storage capacity of 48 Mbytes in an ACC area (a) having an appropriate storage capacity, a page area (b), and an arbitrary area (c). ) and appropriately (ST1). Specifically, for the ACC area (a1, a2) and the page area (b), the start address and necessary total data size are set in a predetermined index table register RGij (ST1). Then, the remaining area not included in the secured ACC area (a1, a2) and the page area (b) becomes the arbitrary area (c).

Here, the first address of the first and second ACC areas (a1, a2) and the top address of the page area (b) must be 0 in the lower 11 bits, but can be arbitrarily selected in units of 2048 bits ( Selection of every 256 addresses (1 address = 1 byte). Also, the total data size is arbitrarily selected within the range of integral multiples of the unit size. Although not particularly limited, the unit size of the ACC area (a) is 2048 bits, and the unit size of the page area (b) is 512 kbits.

Thus, in this example, certain conditions are set for the area setting of the ACC area (a1, a2) and the page area (b). This is for the purpose of facilitating the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b while eliminating it. In other words, if the storage capacity of the VRAM 261 is recklessly increased, manufacturing costs will rise and the chip area will increase. This is because the VRAM access processing time cannot be shortened. It is for the same reason that certain restrictions are placed on securing the index space described below.

Following the processing of step ST1, the CPU 241 secures the necessary index space IDXi for the page area (b) and the arbitrary area (c) (ST2). Specifically, by setting necessary information in a predetermined index table register RGij, an index space IDXi for each area (b) and (c) is secured.

For example, when an index space IDXi is provided in the page area (b), multiple information of an arbitrary horizontal size Hx and an arbitrary vertical size Wx (vertical and horizontal multiple information for the unit space) ) is set in a predetermined index table register RGij (ST2).

As described above, the index space IDXi of the page area (b) has a horizontal size of 128×vertical size of 128 lines as a unit space, and one pixel is specified by 32-bit information. Based on the setting of the size Wx, an index space IDXi of data size (bit length)=32×128×Hx×128×Wx is secured. The top address of the index space IDXi of the page area (b) is automatically assigned internally.

When the index space IDXi is provided in the arbitrary area (c), an arbitrary start address STx and multiple information of an arbitrary horizontal size Hx corresponding to an arbitrary index number i are stored in a predetermined index table register RGij. (ST2). Note that "arbitrary" here means that the horizontal size Hx is arbitrarily determined in units of 256 bits, the lower 11 bits of the start address STx are 0, and is arbitrarily determined in units of 2048 bits. As described above, the vertical size of the arbitrary area is fixed to 2048 lines, so based on the setting of the horizontal size Hx, after the start address STx, the data size (bit length) = 2048 × Hx index A space has been secured.

Specifically, as the frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M, a pair of index spaces each having a horizontal size of 1280×vertical lines of 2048 are set in one or a plurality of predetermined index table registers RGij with index numbers specified, As a frame buffer FBb for the sub LCD 36S, a pair of index spaces of horizontal size 480×vertical lines 2048 are set in one or more predetermined index table registers RGij with each index number specified. If the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 does not match the integral multiple of 256 bits/32 bits, the horizontal size of each index space should be larger than the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 and an integral multiple of 256/32=8. to minimize wasted memory space.

As described above, the necessary number of index spaces IDXi is generated by setting the necessary size information and address information in the predetermined index table registers RGij for the page area (b) and the arbitrary area (c). (ST2). Then, in correspondence with this setting process (ST2), an index table 268 specifying address information and size information of each index space IDXi is automatically constructed.
As shown in FIG. 141, the index table 268 stores the head address of each index space IDXi together with other necessary information. It is referred to when acquiring data (see FIG. 140). Note that the index space IDXi of the AAC area (a) is automatically generated when necessary and is automatically deleted, so the setting process of step ST2 is unnecessary.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, a pair of frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured in the arbitrary area (c), and index numbers are assigned to each pair. In an embodiment that does not use the Z-buffer, a pair of index spaces 255 and 254 assigned index numbers 255 and 254 are reserved as the frame buffer FBa. A pair of index spaces 252 and 251 to which index numbers 252 and 251 are assigned are secured as the frame buffer FBb. In this example, a work area with index number 0 (index space 0) is also secured in the arbitrary area (c).

In this example, the page area (a) secures the necessary number of index spaces IDXi to be the decoding area of the IP stream moving image, and assigns the index number i. However, initially, only the index space IDX0 for the background moving image (IP stream moving image) is reserved. Then, according to the necessity of the image effect (fluctuation effect and advance notice effect), the index space IDXj of the page area (a) is increased based on the setting process to the index table register RGij and the instruction command of the display list DL, After that, when it becomes unnecessary, the index space IDXj is released.

The index space of the ACC area (a) is automatically generated when necessary based on the instruction command described in the display list DL. and other necessary information are automatically set. In this example, this AAC area (a) is used as a decoding area for still images and other textures.

The above operation of securing the index space is mainly realized by the setting operation to the index table register RGij included in the various registers 265. Following the processing of steps ST1 and ST2, another VDP register RGij may be set to another VDP register RGij. 138 and 139, the operation of the VDP circuit 250b described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 is enabled.

For example, by writing predetermined operation parameters (the number of lines and the number of pixels) to a predetermined display register RGij that defines the operation of the display circuit 270, the number of display lines and the number of horizontal pixels are set for the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. (SS30). As a result, in each of the frame buffers FBa and FBb, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the valid data area (broken line portion in FIG. 144) to be READ-accessed by the display circuit 270 are specified.

Next, a predetermined operation parameter (address value) is written in a predetermined display register RGij to specify the vertical display start position and horizontal display start position for each of the frame buffers FBa and FBb (SS31). As a result, the effective data area whose vertical and horizontal dimensions are specified in the process of step SS30 is determined on the frame buffers FBa and FBb. Here, the vertical display start position and the horizontal display start position are relative address values in each index space, and the display start position is (0, 0) in this example.

Subsequently, "display area (0 )” and “display area (1)” are set to define each display area (SS32).

Here, the "display area" means an index space (frame buffers FBa, FBb) from which image data should be read in order for the A/B display circuits 270 to drive the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. It means either one of the double buffers in the frame buffers FBa and FBb having a double buffer structure (see the "read area Ar" described above). However, the display circuits 74A and 74B actually read the image data only in the "effective data area" specified in steps SS30 to SS31 in the display area (0) or the display area (1).

Although not limited in any way, as a definition of the display area at the time of initialization, in this example, for the frame buffer FBa, the index space 254 of the index number 254 in the arbitrary area (c) is defined as "display area (0)", The index space 255 of the index number 255 in the arbitrary area (c) is defined as "display area (1)" (SS32). As for the frame buffer FBb, the index space 251 of the index number 251 in the arbitrary area (c) is set to "display area (0)", and the index space 252 of the index number 252 in the arbitrary area (c) is set to "display area (1). )” (SS32).
It should be noted that defining the "display area" in the initial processing (SS3) is not particularly limited. You can switch.

In this example, after the above initial processing (SS30 to SS32) is completed, next, the set value of the predetermined system control register RGij is set to the first type inhibition setting register so as not to be changed by the influence of noise or the like. A predetermined prohibition value is set in RGij (first prohibition setting SS33).

Here, the set values for which writing is prohibited include (1) set values related to the display clocks of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S, (2) set values related to the LVDS sampling clock, and (3) selection operations related to the output selection circuit 272. (4) Synchronous relationship between a plurality of main LCDs 36M and sub-LCDs 36S (that the display circuit 270(B) is subordinate to the operation cycle of the display circuit 270(A)). Although there is software processing for canceling the first prohibition setting, it is not used in this example. However, it is also suitable to use it as needed.

Next, by setting a predetermined prohibition value in the second type prohibition setting register RGij, write prohibition is set for the initial setting VDP register RGij (second prohibition setting SS34). Here, the prohibited registers include the VDP registers RGij related to steps SS30 to SS32.

On the other hand, by setting a predetermined prohibition value in the third type of prohibition setting register RGij, it is possible to prohibit many VDP registers, including the VDP registers related to the setting processing of steps ST1 to ST3 (Section 3 prohibition setting). However, it is not used in principle in this example. In any case, the second prohibition setting and the third prohibition setting can be arbitrarily canceled by writing a release value to a predetermined release register RGij, and the set value can be changed after initial setting. It becomes possible.

(Example of not using preloader)

Next, the details of the drawing update process in step S2061 in FIG. 133 will be described. The content of this drawing update process differs depending on whether the preloader 269 is functioning or not.
First, the case where the preloader 269 is not operated will be described below.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart of drawing update processing (S2061) when the preloader 269 is disabled.
First, the CPU 241 of the effect control section 24A determines whether or not the processing start condition is satisfied (ST5). Note that, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 133, this determination timing corresponds to the start of the frame period. The display timing of the sub LCD 36S is set at the initial setting (S2000') so as to follow the display timing of the main LCD 36M.

The conditions for starting step ST5 will be described.
When the preloader 269 is to function, the circuit configuration and program are originally designed so that the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b proceeds as shown in the time chart of FIG. That is, based on the display list DL completed at the start of a certain frame period, the drawing circuit 274 should finish the drawing operation within the frame period. However, for example, like the display list DL3 completed at the start of the third frame period (T1+2δ) in FIG. I can't say I can't do it.

The determination process of step ST5 takes such a situation into consideration. determines whether or not has completed the required operation. For example, at timing T1+δ in FIG. 138, read access is made to the status information of the drawing register related to the drawing circuit 274, and it is determined whether or not the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 has ended.

In step ST5, if the start condition is not satisfied (unsuitable), the abnormality flag ER that counts the number of times of abnormality is incremented, and steps ST6 to ST8 are skipped. The abnormality flag ER is determined in the processing of steps ST9 and ST10 together with other serious abnormality flags ABN. On the premise that the serious abnormality flag ABN is in a reset state, if the number of consecutive abnormalities is not large (ER≤2), As in the normal time, processing for analyzing the effect control command is executed (S2022-S2024).
Here, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the effect control command is not received in step S2022, the command analysis process of step S2023 is performed for the received effect control command, and the scheduler update flag is turned OFF in step S2024. In that case, the CPU 241 returns to step S2002 in FIG.

In the above description, the case where the processing start condition is not satisfied and the abnormality flag ER is ER≦2 has been described. The process of switching areas in a toggle manner (ST6) and the process of creating a display list DL (ST7) are skipped, and the rendering scenario does not proceed (the frame update flag is not turned on in step S2005 of FIG. 133, (because the process does not proceed from step S2003 to step S2020). This is to prevent output of image data in the frame buffers FBa and FBb that are incomplete. Therefore, for example, in the frame period starting from the timing (T1+3δ) in FIG. 138, the image effect does not progress, and the original screen (the screen based on DL2) is displayed again, resulting in a dropped frame.

Here, in order to avoid frame dropping, a configuration of waiting until the start condition of step ST5 is satisfied is also conceivable. However, there are many control processes to be executed by the CPU 241, and it is necessary to secure the processing time for each process. Therefore, in this example, if the start condition is not satisfied, a frame drop will occur.

However, even if a frame drop occurs, the progress of the image presentation is only delayed by about 1/30 to 2/30 of a second, and the player rarely notices this. Moreover, when the frame is dropped, the progress of effects other than the image effects such as sounds and lamps is also skipped (steps S2032 to S2042 in FIG. 133 are skipped), so the ready-to-win effect, the advance notice effect, and the role that are started after that are skipped. In object presentation, there is no possibility that the start timings of image presentation, sound presentation, lamp presentation, motor presentation, etc. are shifted.
In other words, in the production scenario, the start timing of image production, sound production, lamp production, and motor production, and the content of production to be executed after that are centrally managed. Synchronization of the performance of is never out of sync. For example, when there is an effect operation that combines an explosion sound, an explosion image, a character object movement, and a lamp flash operation, each of the above effect operations is correctly started in synchronization even after a frame drop occurs. be.

In the above, a comparatively minor abnormality has been described, but when the serious abnormality flag ABN is set or when the number of consecutive abnormalities is large (ER>2), an infinite loop state is entered after the determination in step ST10. there is As a result, the down-count operation of the WDT timer progresses, the composite chip 250 including the CPU 241 is abnormally reset, and then the initial processing (ST1 to ST3) is re-executed. is expected to be resolved.

Abnormalities have been described above, but in reality, the abnormalities described above rarely occur, even if they are minor. Based on this, the "display areas" of the frame buffers FBa and FBb for storing image data to be read by the display circuit 270(A) and the display circuit 270(B) are toggled (ST6). As described above, "display area (0)" and "display area (1)" are defined in advance in the initial processing (ST3). 'display area' specifies which of display area (0)/display area (1).

By executing this step ST6, the display circuit 270(A) alternately displays the Image data is read out to drive the main LCD 36M. Similarly, the display circuit 270(B) alternately reads out image data from the index space 251 (display area (0)) and the index space 252 (display area (1)) every operation cycle δ, and displays the image data on the sub LCD 36S. will drive the It should be noted that the actual READ access by the display circuit 270 is limited to the effective data area in the display area (0)/display area (1) as described above (see FIG. 144).

In any case, in this example, since the "display area" (readout area Ar) is switched every operation period δ, the display circuits 270(A) and 274(B) complete the drawing circuit 274 during the immediately preceding frame period. The output processing to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S is started for the image data that has been set. However, since the process of step ST5 is started at the start of the vertical blanking period (V blank) of the main LCD 36M, the image data output process is actually started after the vertical blanking period is completed. It will be. In FIG. 138, the arrows shown in the display circuit column indicate the operation cycle of this output process.

After completing the processing of step ST6 having the above significance, the CPU 241 subsequently completes the display list DL specifying the image data to be output to the LCD 36 by the display circuit 270 (ST7). Although not particularly limited, in this example, a list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) of the RAM 243 is secured and the display list DL is completed there (see FIG. 140).

The display list DL is configured by listing a series of instruction commands in an appropriate order, and is configured to end with an EODL (End Of DL) command. When the drawing circuit 274 recognizes this EODL command in the display list DL, the drawing circuit 274 terminates the generation processing of the image data indicated by the display list DL.
In this example, in order to realize smooth operation of the data transfer circuit 267, the drawing circuit 274, and the preloader 269, all the instruction commands including the EODL command are set to an integer N times (N>0) the command length of 32 bits. It is limited to instruction commands only. As described above, an instruction command composed of 32-bit integer N times may include a don't care bit.

In this way, the display list DL of this example is composed only of instruction commands whose command length is an integer N times 32 bits (N>0). It is always an integral multiple of the minimum command length unit (32 bits=4 bytes). Furthermore, in this example, considering the minimum data amount Dmin of the data transfer circuit 267, the data volume value of the display list DL is set to an integral multiple (1 or more) of the minimum data amount Dmin and the minimum Adjusted to be an integral multiple of the unit (4 bytes). For example, if Dmin=256 bytes, the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to any value of 256 bytes, 512 bytes, and so on.

Here, depending on the complexity of the content of the presentation, it is also suitable to adjust to 256 bytes or 512 bytes as appropriate. The data volume value of the display list DL is always adjusted to 256 bytes in consideration of the fact that the performance will not be executed.
However, this method is not limited in any way, and in the case of a gaming machine with three or more LCDs 36, or in the case of a game machine that executes complicated image effects including the sub LCD 36S, it is adjusted to 512 bytes or 768 bytes. Also, during normal production, the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to 256 bytes, and only when executing a special production, the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to 512 bytes or 768 bytes. is also suitable.

As a method for adjusting the data volume value of the display list DL, there is a simple method (A) in which a 32-bit long EODL command is followed by a 32-bit length NOP (No Operation) command to compensate for the lacking area, or a 32-bit length filling the lacking area. A standard method (B) is conceivable in which a 32-bit length EODL command is described at the end after filling with a long NOP command. The data volume value (total amount of data) of the display list DL is terminated by the EODL command without any adjustment, and dummy data is additionally transferred during the operation of the data transfer circuit 267 to obtain an integral multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin. A non-adjustment method (C) that secures the transfer amount of is also conceivable.

Here, when adopting the standard method (B), first, the command counter CNT is initialized to a specified value (64-1 corresponding to 256 bytes), and every time a significant instruction command is written to the DL buffer area BUF Another possible method is to decrement the command counter CNT as appropriate, write a NOP command until the command counter CNT becomes zero, and write an EODL command at the end when a series of significant instruction commands have been written. In the case of this example, the command length is limited to an integer N times 32 bits (N>0), so the above processing is easy. Subtraction processing corresponding to

On the other hand, when the simplified method (A) is adopted, when creating the display list DL, it is sufficient to first fill the entire list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) with NOP commands. seems to be excellent. Also, from the viewpoint of simplicity, the no-adjustment method (C) seems to be superior. However, in this example, the standard method (B) is basically adopted, and the actual amount of data from the head of the display list DL to the EODL command, that is, the amount of data up to the EODL command is always the lowest value of the data transfer circuit 267. It is adjusted to be an integral multiple of the data amount Dmin.

This considers an embodiment that utilizes the preloader 269. If the simple method (A) or the no-adjustment method (C) is adopted, the amount of actual data in the display list DL up to the EODL command will be random. This is because the transfer of the rewrite list DL′ rewritten by the preloader 269 to the DRAM 278 and the transfer of the rewrite list DL′ from the DRAM 278 to the drawing circuit 274 are hindered. The ChA control circuit 267a of the data transfer circuit 267 functions when the rewrite list DL' is transferred to the DRAM 278, and the ChB control circuit 267b functions when the rewrite list DL' is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 (see FIG. 140 above). ), in either case, only the rewrite list DL' up to the EODL command is transferred.

The advantage of the standard method (B) for adjusting the data volume values of the display list DL has been described above. Therefore, the use of the simplified method (A) and the no-adjustment method (C) is not prohibited at all.

However, in the following description, the details of the display list DL will be described with reference to FIG. 147 on the premise that the standard method (B) is adopted in principle regardless of whether the preloader 269 is used.

Although not particularly limited, in this example, the display list DL first describes the instruction command string (L11 to L16) regarding the main LCD 36M, and then describes the instruction command string (L17 to L20) regarding the secondary LCD 36S. . Also, the standard method (B) is adopted to adjust the data volume value of the display list DL to a fixed length (256 bytes). Note that FIG. 147 actually shows the procedure for writing the instruction command in the list buffer area of the RAM 243 by the CPU 241 and the operation of the drawing circuit 274 based on the display list DL.

As shown in FIG. 147, at the top of the display list DL, an instruction command (SETDAVR) for setting the environment is described, and the upper left base point address (X, Y) on the index space IDX is defined for the frame buffer FBa of the main LCD 36M. (L11). As described with reference to FIG. 141, in this example, a pair of frame buffers FBa are reserved in the arbitrary area (c) for the main LCD 36M. Usually, by setting the base point address (X, Y)=(0, 0) corresponding to the effective data area for the display circuit 270, the frame buffer FBa is used by the drawing circuit 274 from the head position. .

In FIG. 143A, the actual drawing area on the lower left side is indicated by L11. This is because the instruction command L11 causes the actual drawing area on the frame buffer FBa to move to the base address (0, 0) position of the frame buffer FBa. It means that it is specified if it starts with . However, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the actual drawing area and the index number that specifically specifies the actual drawing area are not yet determined, and are determined by an instruction command (SETINDEX) L13, which will be described later. The instruction command L11 also designates whether or not to use the Z buffer.

Next, set the upper left base point coordinates (Xs, Ys) and the lower right diagonal point coordinates (Xe, Ye) in the virtual drawing space using the instruction command (SETDAVF) of the environment setting system, and set the W x H dimension. is defined (L12). Here, the virtual drawing space is a virtual two-dimensional space of ±8192 in the X direction and ±8192 in the Y direction that can be drawn by a drawing instruction command (such as a sprite command) (see FIG. 143A).

By means of this instruction command L12 (SETDAVF), the virtual drawing space is divided into a drawing area in which drawing contents are actually reflected on the main LCD 36M and other non-drawing areas. The instruction command L12 (SETDAVF) associates the actual drawing area whose start position (base point address) is defined by the instruction command L11 with the drawing area in the virtual drawing space.

In other words, the instruction command L12 defines a W×H real drawing area starting from the base address corresponding to the drawing area in the virtual drawing space in the frame buffer FBa (the index space is undetermined). will be Therefore, the drawing area specified by the instruction command L12 must be equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the frame buffer FBa. Normally, the drawing area and the actual drawing area are defined to have the same dimensions as the effective data area (FIG. 144) for the display circuit 270. FIG.

After the drawing circuit 274 executes the instruction commands L11 and L12, of the drawing contents drawn in the virtual drawing space, only those contained in the drawing area are reflected in the actual drawing area of the frame buffer FBa. become. Therefore, the drawn content of the part protruding from the drawing area and the part described as the work area in FIG. 143A is not directly reflected in the frame buffer FBa. Note that when a work area is secured in the virtual drawing space, a non-drawing area in the virtual drawing space is used.

Next, in the current operation cycle, the drawing circuit 274 specifies where to draw the content to be drawn based on the display list DL to be completed (L13). Specifically, for the double-buffered frame buffer FBa, an index space IDX that serves as a "writing area" (drawing area Ad) for drawing content based on the current display list DL is specified (L13). Specifically, the SETINDEX command, which is a command of the texture setting system, determines that (1) the frame buffer FBa is secured in an arbitrary area, and (2) an arbitrary area of the index space IDXN that serves as a "write area". The index number N above is identified.

For example, when N=255 is specified by this instruction command L13, the actual drawing area corresponding to the drawing area defined in the virtual drawing space is specifically is defined to be index space IDX255.

In the case of this example, the index number of the frame buffer FBa is 255 or 254 (FIG. 141), and either one of them is designated by being toggled (L13). This index number is the index number other than the display area (0)/(1) specified in step ST6 described above. For example, when the display area (0) is specified for the display circuit 270 in the process of step ST6, the display area (1) becomes the “writing area” for the drawing circuit 274. FIG.

As described above, after the correspondence relationship between the actual drawing area (W×H logical space) and the drawing area (W×H virtual space) is generally defined by the instruction command L11 and the instruction command L12, The instruction command L13 (SETINDEX) specifically specifying the index space IDX associates the W×H virtual space with the W×H logical space in the specific index space IDX.

In other words, the content to be virtually drawn in the W×H virtual space based on a series of instruction commands is determined by the VDP circuit 250b that defines the correspondence relationship between the virtual space and the real addresses of the VRAM 261. Based on the internal conversion table, the image data is stored in the VRAM 261 (frame buffer).

Subsequently, an instruction command for executing a frame buffer clear process for filling the index space IDX specified as the "write area" with black, for example, is described (ST14, ST15). This is nothing but erasing processing of the image data written in the frame buffer FBa two frame periods before.

Specifically, the SETFCOLOR command, which is a type of environment setting command, is used to select, for example, black color, and the RECTANGLE command, which is a primitive drawing command, is used to specify that the rectangular area should be filled. The RECTANGLE command specifies the XY coordinates of the upper left end point and the lower right end point of the drawing area set in the virtual drawing space (virtual space corresponding to the frame buffer FBa) (see FIG. 143A).

With the above processing, the rendering preparation processing is completed. Next, instruction commands for rendering appropriate textures such as still images and one frame of moving images in the virtual rendering space are listed. Typically, first, the index space IDX to which the texture is to be developed is specified by the SETINDEX command of the texture setting system, and then the TXLOAD command, which is the instruction command of the texture load system, is written, and the predetermined Textures are described in the display list DL so as to be developed in a predetermined index space IDX.

As described above, in this example, the background moving image is composed of IP stream moving images. Therefore, for example, the index space IDX in which the background moving image should be developed is specified as the index space IDX0 of the page area (b) by the SETINDEX command of the texture setting system, and then the TXLOAD command of the texture load system is described. . In the TXLOAD command, it is necessary to specify the start address of the CGROM 260 (texture source address) and the data size after expansion (horizontal×vertical) for the video frame to be loaded this time.

When the above TXLOAD command is executed in the VDP circuit 250b, one frame (texture) of the background video is first acquired in the AAC area (a), and then transferred to the page area (b ) in the index space IDX0. Next, one frame of this moving image is drawn in the virtual drawing space. In this case, the SETINDEX command (texture setting system) may be used to set that "the index space IDX0 of the page area (b) is the texture to be processed subsequently", but the processing will continue after the TXLOAD command. In this case, the description of this SETINDEX command can be omitted.

In any case, in a state where "the index space IDX0 of the page area (b) is the texture to be processed subsequently" is specified, next, parameters for the α-blending process are set, etc., as appropriate. Describe the instruction command for the inter-rendering operation system. Note that the α-blending process relates to a transparent/semi-transparent process between an image already written in the drawing area (frame buffer FBa) and an image to be overwritten from now on. Therefore, like the moving image frame of the background moving image, in the drawing operation of the first frame, it is not necessary to use the instruction command of the inter-drawing arithmetic system.

Next, using the sprite command, which is an instruction command for drawing primitives, "texture in index space IDX0 of page area (b) (1 frame of background video)" is drawn in an appropriate place (rectangular destination area) in the virtual drawing space. Describe the sprite command as much as possible. For the sprite command, it is necessary to specify the upper left end point and the lower right end point of the destination area of the virtual drawing space.

This destination area is the whole or part of the drawing area (virtual space defined on the virtual drawing space) previously associated with the actual drawing area (FBa) by the instruction commands L11 and L12. However, since the background moving image is usually drawn on the entire display screen, the destination area in such a case is the entire drawing area or more. Note that the case where the Destination area is larger than the entire rendering area is, for example, the case where the background moving image is zoomed up.

With the above processing, the drawing of the moving image frame of the background moving image is completed. The display list DL is configured to draw various textures superimposed on the background moving image. As described above, a large number of moving images are required during the variable rendering. (NEWPIX) will be described.

For example, regarding the second IP stream video, after allocating an additional index space IDX1 in the page area (b) with the NEWPIX command, specify this index space IDX1 (SETINDEX), and Designate the development of one frame (TXLOAD), and place the developed texture in the appropriate place in the drawing area (SPRITE). Normally, the Destination area in this case is part of the drawing area.

After that, the index space IDXk is secured one after another by the NEWPIX command, and then, while executing an appropriate α-blending process, a plurality of IP streams are drawn in the drawing area. The image data is sequentially accumulated in the frame buffer FBa, which is the actual drawing area. When a plurality of N IP stream moving images are rendered, a plurality of N index spaces are functioning in the page area (b).

Then, when a series of variable effects is completed, the DELPIX command is used to release the unnecessary index space IDX among the many index spaces IDX1 to IDXk secured in the page area (b). The index space IDX should be deleted.

When drawing a still image or an I-stream video, use the SETINDEX command to specify that these textures are to be decoded in the AAC area (a), and then execute the TXLOAD command to load the AAC area. The texture acquired in (a) is then developed in the ACC area (a) by the automatically activated GDEC 273 . Then, the developed texture can be drawn in the proper place of the drawing area by the sprite command. The first AAC area (a1) or the second AAC area (a2) is used depending on whether or not the cache hit function is used.

In the description so far, each texture is directly drawn in the drawing area of the main LCD 36M, but the operation is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if an appropriate drawing area is provided without overlapping the drawing area already reserved for the main LCD 36M (FIG. 143A), and this drawing area is associated with the work area of the VRAM 261, an intermediate drawing area is constructed. By doing so, an appropriate effect image can be completed. Here, the reason why the drawing area for the main LCD 36M is not overlapped is that the overlapping area is given priority in subsequent setting of association, and the drawing contents for that area are not reflected in the frame buffer FBa.

As shown in FIG. 143A, the work area in this example is the index space IDX0 in the arbitrary area (c). Then, at the timing of rendering using this working area, an instruction command sequence (SETDAVR, SETDAVF, SETINDEX). As shown in FIG. 143A, the rendering area for the effect image is secured in an area that is not included in the rendering area for the main LCD 36M.

After that, it is sufficient to list instruction commands similar to the instruction command string L16 regarding the frame buffer FBa to complete an appropriate effect image in the index space IDX0. In this example, since the effect image is composed of a still image, an instruction command (SETINDEX) is written so that the decoded data is developed in the first AAC area (a1). A primitive drawing system instruction command (SPRITE) with the appropriate place as the Destination will be used. It should be noted that such an operation is repeated once or multiple times according to the content of the effect.

Then, after positioning the index space IDX0 in which the effect image is completed as a texture (SETINDEX), the effect image (texture) of the index space IDX0 can be drawn in the proper place of the drawing area of the main LCD 36M by the sprite command. In such a case, it is conceivable to decompose the effect image in the index space IDX0 into triangular drawing primitives, rotate them to an appropriate angle, and then draw them in the drawing area. Note that the texture rotation angle is associated with, for example, the reliability of the advance notice effect.

The instruction command sequence (L11 to L16) for completing one frame of the main LCD 36M has been described above, but the instruction command sequence (L17 to L12) for completing one frame of the sub LCD 36S is similar. That is, the start XY coordinates of the frame buffer FBb are defined (L17: normally X=0, Y=0), and the drawing area for the secondary LCD 36S is defined in the virtual drawing space shown in FIG. 143B (L18).

By the way, in this example, after the generation of the image data for the main LCD 36M is completed, the process shifts to the generation process for the sub LCD 36S. You can freely set the drawing area without any problems. Therefore, when developing a display list DL generation program, for example, when pasting an appropriate texture to a newly set drawing area with the SPRITE command, the setting of the operation parameter (Destination area) of the SPRITE command, etc. It can be standardized to some extent.

After the definition of such an arbitrary drawing area is completed (L18), next, for the frame buffer FBb of the secondary LCD 36S of the double-buffer configuration, an index space IDX that becomes a "writing area" for drawing contents based on the current display list DL. is specified (L19). The index number of this index space IDX is the index number of the frame buffer FBb that does not correspond to the display area (0)/(1) specified in step ST6 of the main processing.

After that, instruction command strings L20 to L22 for the secondary LCD 36S are listed in the same manner as the instruction command strings L14 to L16 for the main LCD 36M. It is also possible to use the effect image completed in the index space IDX0.

As described above, the instruction commands L11 to L22 forming the display list DL are all limited to commands having an integer multiple of 32 bits in this example. As described above, the data volume value (total amount of data) of the display list DL in this example is adjusted to a fixed length (256 bytes), and the required number of NOP commands (L23) as dummy commands are added. The above is terminated with the EODL command (L24). That is, the embodiment of FIG. 147 adopts the standard method (B) described above.

However, even if the standard method (B) is adopted, it is not essential to fix the total data amount of the display list DL to 256 bytes in all operation cycles. That is, in another embodiment, if the total data amount of the display list DL excluding NOP commands exceeds 256 bytes (for example, during a special performance period), the total data amount of the display list DL may be added with NOP commands. , adjusted to N×256 bytes of 512 bytes or more. As described above, when the standard method (B) is adopted, the end of N×256 bytes is terminated with the EODL command.

The configuration of the display list DL has been described in detail above. The CPU 241 issues the completed display list DL of fixed byte length to the VDP circuit 250b (ST7-ST8).

FIG. 148 is a flow chart for explaining the DL issuing process (ST8 in FIG. 147) in which the CPU 241 directly write-accesses the transfer port register TR_PORT of the data transfer circuit 267 and issues the display list DL to the drawing circuit 274. FIG.
Note that the transfer port register TR_PORT is a kind of data transfer register RGij that defines the operation contents of the data transfer circuit 267 .

In order to implement the DL issuing process, it is first necessary to set necessary setting values in a plurality of data transfer registers RGij that define the operation contents of the data transfer circuit 267 . Specifically, the transfer operation mode of the data transfer circuit 267 and the transmission path inside the data transfer circuit 267 are specified in a predetermined data transfer register RGij. Although the contents of the setting are not particularly limited, here, data is transmitted from the CPU interface unit 264 via the ChB control circuit 267b (FIG. 140), and the CPU bus control unit 267d is checked while checking the remaining amount of the FIFO buffer. Execution of the transfer operation is set (ST20). In the following description, the ChB control circuit 267b may be abbreviated as "transfer circuit ChB" for convenience.

Next, the total transfer size is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij. As described above, in this example, the total data amount of the display list DL is adjusted to an integral multiple of 256 bytes, so that value is set. Note that the total amount of data=256×N is also integer N times the minimum data amount Dmin of the data transfer circuit 267 . Normally, the multiple N is 1 or 2, but in the following explanation, it will be explained as N=1.

Here, since the transfer port register TR_PORT (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as transfer port) is a 32-bit long register, the CPU 241 executes a register write operation to the transfer port TR_PORT every 32 bits. Become. Therefore, the value of the management counter CN that manages the number of register writes is initialized to 64 (ST21). If the non-adjustment method (C) is adopted, at this timing, the data transfer amount that is an integral multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin is determined and the management counter CN is set.

Since the initial setting is completed by the above processing, next, the data transfer operation via the transfer circuit ChB is set to the start state (ST22), and the predetermined drawing register RGij that defines the operation of the drawing circuit 274 is set. Based on the value, the drawing operation is started (ST23). As a result, quick and smooth analysis processing by the drawing circuit 274 (display list analyzer) is ensured for the instruction command sequence for which the CPU 241 performs the register write operation to the transfer port TR_PORT thereafter.

It should be noted that the fact that the instruction commands listed in the display list DL are limited to those with a command length of 32-bit integral multiples also effectively contributes to the quick and smooth Analyze processing. Timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 indicate the operation timings of step ST23. Since the display list DL issuing process (ST8) ends quickly, FIGS. 138 and 139 do not show the time required for the issuing process.

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the setting in step ST22 has functioned (ST24). This is because the initial setting of each part of the data transfer circuit 267 requires more processing time than the register write operation (setting operation) by the CPU 241, so that subsequent instructions are not given to the data transfer circuit 267 in an incomplete state. is. If the operation does not start even after waiting for a predetermined period of time, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuing process ends (ST25). As a result, the WDT circuit 251 then functions and the composite chip 250 is abnormally reset (see ST10 in FIG. 146).

However, since the setting in step ST22 is normally completed quickly, the FIFO buffer (32 bits×130 stages) of the CPU bus control section 267d is confirmed not to be full (ST26). , the instruction command is written to the transfer port TR_PORT line by line from the top line constituting the display list DL (ST28).
Then, while decrementing the management counter CN (ST29), the processing of steps ST26 to ST29 is repeated until the management counter CN becomes zero (ST30). In the case of this example, the data transfer circuit 267 has a minimum data amount Dmin. transfer operation.

In any case, in this example, the DL issuance processing (ST28) is quickly completed. , the FIFO buffer full state may not be resolved even after waiting for a predetermined time. In such a case, after setting initialization data in a predetermined VDP register RGij to initialize the drawing circuit 274 and the data transfer circuit 267, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuance process is started. Finish (ST27).

By the way, at this timing, the data transfer circuit 267 and the rendering circuit 274 have already started operating and have completed a certain amount of processing. (1) set all internal parameters that may be set by the display list DL to their initial values, (2) set all internal control circuits to their initial states, and (3) Initializing the GDEC 273 and (4) initializing the cache state of the AAC area. Similarly, the initialization processing of the data transfer circuit 267 includes initialization processing of the entire data transfer up to that point, such as clearing the FIFO buffer. As a result, the status information indicating the operating state of the data transfer circuit 267 changes to a predetermined value (a value indicating that the entire data transfer is being initialized).

Although the contents of the drawing register RGij are maintained in the initialization process of step ST27, the contents of a predetermined drawing register may be initialized. Predetermined drawing registers cleared to initial values include (a) an execution control register (see ST23) for setting the start of drawing execution, (b) a status register indicating the execution status of the drawing circuit 274, and (c) the current A status register is included that identifies the position of the display list being processed.

In any case, as a result of setting the serious anomaly flag ABN, the WDT circuit 251 then functions and the composite chip 250 is anomaly reset (ST10). is not necessarily required. On the other hand, when the drawing circuit 274 and the data transfer circuit 267 are initialized, as a result, recovery from the abnormality can be expected. It is also preferred to do

This point is the same in the processing of step ST25, and after initializing the data transfer circuit 276 and the drawing circuit 274, it is preferable to return to the processing of step ST20 without setting the serious abnormality flag ABN. However, in such a case, the number of re-executions of the DL issuance process is counted, and if the number of re-executions exceeds the limit value, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuance process is terminated.

FIG. 149 is a confirmation illustration of normal operating conditions. As illustrated, the issued display list DL is analyzed by the drawing circuit 274 (display list analyzer) in the order of the listed instruction commands, and an operation based on each instruction command is executed. This operation is executed in parallel with the display list DL issuing process and the data transfer operation of the data transfer circuit 267 (ST26 to ST30).

For example, by executing the instruction command (TXLOAD), the necessary textures are read from the CGROM 260 and acquired in the AAC area (a), after which the GDEC 273 is automatically activated to perform the decoding operation. Later data is expanded in a predetermined index space. Depending on the instruction command, the geometry engine 275 and others function, but in any case, the image data corresponding to the display list DL are completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by cooperation of each part of the drawing circuit 274. will be

Next, the case where the display list DL is issued through the DMAC circuit 252 will be described.
The flowchart of FIG. 150 shows the processing to be executed by the CPU 241 of the effect control section 24A when issuing the display list DL through the DMAC circuit 252. FIG. Specifically, it is a process to be executed as step ST8.
Of the first to fourth DMA channels built in the DMAC circuit 60, the third DMA channel is used, although not limited in any way.

In FIG. 150, the CPU 241 first sets a clear value in a predetermined data transfer register RGij and a predetermined drawing register RGij to initialize the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 (ST20). This processing is the same as the error processing of step ST27 in FIG. 148, the internal circuit of the data transfer circuit 267 including the FIFO buffer is initialized, and the status bit of the data transfer register indicating the progress of data transfer is initialized. Thus, the bit indicating that the entire data transfer is being initialized has a predetermined value.
The same applies to the drawing circuit 274. (1) Setting the internal parameters to the initial values, (2) setting the internal control circuit to the initial state, (3) initializing the GDEC 273, and (4) ) includes processing to initialize the cache state of the AAC area. Also in the initialization process of the drawing circuit 274 (ST20 in FIG. 150), the predetermined drawing register RGij may be initialized. Incidentally, in the processing of FIG. 148, such initialization processing may be executed first.

In the process of FIG. 150, next, it is confirmed by reading a predetermined status register RGij that specifies the operating states of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 that the initialization process has been completed normally (ST21). If the initialization is not possible, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the process ends (ST22). However, such a situation almost never occurs in practice.

Next, the transfer operation mode of the data transfer circuit 267 and the transmission route inside the data transfer circuit 267 are set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST23). Although the contents of the setting are not particularly limited, here, the transfer protocol from the CPU interface unit 264 via the ChB control circuit 267b and the transfer protocol to the CPU bus control unit 267d is set to follow the setting of the DMAC circuit 252 ( ST23).

Next, the total transfer size is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST24). As in the case of FIG. 148, the data total amount=256. Note that when the non-adjustment method (C) is adopted, at this timing, the total transfer size that is an integer multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin is determined and set.
Next, the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started based on the set value in the predetermined drawing register RGij (ST25). Timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 are also the operation timings of step ST25. Then, after starting the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 (ST26), the data transfer operation of the data transfer circuit 267 is started (ST27).

The processing for starting the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is as shown in FIG. 151. First, with the DMAC transfer disabled, it waits until the transfer of one cycle of data transfer unit (one operand) is completed (ST40). The detailed contents of the operation are the same as the process shown in FIG. 152, and are divided into the process of prohibiting DMAC transfer (ST53) and the subsequent standby process (ST54).

Such processing is provided because (1) in other embodiments, the DMAC circuit 252 (third DMA channel) may be used in main processing and timer interrupt processing, and (2) 146, the DMAC circuit 252, which has started issuing the display list DL, may not be able to complete the DL issuing operation within its operation cycle (.delta.). It is taken into consideration.

In such an exceptional situation, if a new setting value (such as a conflicting setting value) is additionally set for the DMAC circuit 252 in operation, normal DMA operation cannot be ensured at all, and serious trouble may occur. Although it is a concern, providing the process of step ST40 ensures normal operation based on subsequent set values. That is, even in the modified embodiment that partially modifies the present embodiment, it is possible to realize normal DMA operation thereafter regardless of the preceding trouble.

After executing the processing of step ST40 having the above significance, next, the operating conditions of the DMAC circuit 252 are set (ST41). Specifically, the cycle steal transfer mode is selected, and 1-operand transfer is set to 32-bit transfer×2 times. Also, the Source address is the address of the list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) of the RAM 243 and should be recognized as increasing sequentially, while the Destination address is the transfer port TR_PORT and should be a fixed value. .

Next, the start address of the DL buffer BUF of the RAM 243 is set in a predetermined operation control register that defines the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 (ST42), and the address of the transfer port TR_PORT, which is the transfer destination address, is set (ST43). . Also, after setting the total transfer size, that is, the total amount of data of the display list DL to 256 bytes (ST44), the DMA operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is started (ST45).

By the way, the explanation so far is based on the premise that the actual bit length of all instruction commands is an integer multiple of 32 bits. However, since the display list DL and the configuration of the instruction command are not necessarily limited, such a case will be described below.

For example, when the total data amount X of the display list DL is an arbitrary value X that is not an integer multiple of 32 bits, including the case of adopting the non-adjustment method (C), in the process of step ST44, this arbitrary value X is , the transfer amount MOD is adjusted to an appropriate amount, and then the total transfer size setting process is executed. Here, an appropriate transfer amount MOD is defined based on the settings for one-operand transfer and the minimum data amount Dmin (bytes) of the data transfer circuit 267 .

Specifically, if the 1-operand transfer setting is N bytes×M times, the transfer amount MOD is adjusted to an integer multiple of N×M (bytes) and an integer multiple of Dmin (bytes). be done. For example, if N×M=8×4 and Dmin=256, the arbitrary value X (=300) bytes is adjusted to the transfer amount MOD (=512) bytes.

As described above including the general theory, the DMA operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is that the cycle steal transfer operation is started, and the display list DL is transferred every 32 bits in the case of the embodiment without hindering the operation of the CPU 241 in particular. , it is transferred to the transfer port TR_PORT. The transferred data is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 via the transfer circuit ChB.

In order to realize such an operation, in this example, following the processing of step ST45, the transfer operation of the data transfer circuit 267 is started and the processing ends (ST27). After that, the data transfer circuit 267 receives the instruction command string of the display list DL from the DMAC circuit 252 in units of the minimum data amount Dmin, and transfers it to the drawing circuit 274 . The drawing circuit 274 then executes the drawing operation based on the instruction command of the display list DL. Therefore, after the process of step ST27, the CPU 241 can start the processes after step S2004 in FIG. 133 through step ST9 in FIG. At the same time, you can control the effects of sounds, lamps, and motors.

FIG. 153 illustrates the content of this operation. Prior to the DMA transfer, the drawing circuit 274 starts operating (ST25), the display list analyzer of the drawing circuit 274 quickly and smoothly executes the Analyze processing, and the GDEC 273, geometry engine 275, etc. , one frame of image data is generated for each of the LCDs 36M and 36S in the frame buffers FBa and FBb.

By the way, the method of FIG. 150 in which the DL issuing process ends with the process of step ST27 is not necessarily limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 162, which will be described later, when another CPU provided separately from the CPU 241 controls the effect control of the sound, the lamp, and the motor, after the processing of step ST27, the DMAC circuit 252 and data transfer Proper operation of circuit 267 is preferably verified.

FIG. 152 is an operation subsequent to step ST27 in FIG. 150, and is a flowchart for explaining normal operation confirmation processing.
First, a predetermined status register is referred to confirm that the transfer operation of the DMAC circuit 252 has been completed normally (ST50). It also confirms that the data transfer circuit 267 has completed the transfer operation (ST51). Normally, the DL issuing process of FIG. 150 is completed through such a route.

On the other hand, even if it waits for a predetermined time, . If the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 has not been completed, or if the data transfer circuit 267 has not completed the transfer operation, a clear value is set in a predetermined VDP register RGij for the drawing circuit 274 and the data transfer circuit 267. to initialize the DL issuing process (ST52). This is an operation based on the fact that the processing for issuing the display list DL has not ended normally. be.

That is, in this case as well, the drawing circuit 274 has already started operating and has completed a certain amount of processing. (2) setting all internal control circuits to their initial values; (3) initializing the GDEC 273; (4) initializing the cache state of the AAC area; It includes converting

Next, after prohibiting a new DMA transfer operation (ST53), it waits for the end of the one-operand transfer operation being executed (ST54). As described above, in this example, 32-bit transfer×2 times is used as one operand to avoid abrupt initialization of the DMAC circuit 252 in operation.

After this preparatory work is completed, the DMAC circuit 252 is initialized by setting a clear value in a predetermined operation control register that defines the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 (ST52). Then, the serious anomaly flag ABN is set, and the DL issuing process ends. In this case, since recovery from the abnormality can be expected by the processing of steps ST52 and ST55, it is preferable to return to step ST20 in FIG. 150 and re-execute the DL issuing processing without setting the serious abnormality flag ABN. be. However, if the number of re-executions of the DL issuance processing (ST23 to ST27) is counted and the number of re-executions exceeds the limit value, it is necessary to set the serious abnormality flag ABN and finish the DL issuance processing.

(Example of functioning preloader)

Next, the processing for making the preloader 269 function will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159. FIG.
FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing drawing update processing (S2061) to be executed by the CPU 241 when the preloader 269 is to function.
The processing in FIG. 154 is similar to the processing in FIG. 146, but first, the content of the start condition determination (ST5') is different. That is, in the embodiment using the preloader 269, the status information of the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 is read-accessed at the start of each operation cycle to confirm that the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 is completed and that the display list Confirm that the preload operation based on DL2 has ended (ST5').

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 139, the preloader 269 should have finished the prefetch operation (preload operation) during the frame period (T1 to T1+δ) based on the display list DL1 issued at timing T1. is. Also, the drawing circuit 274 should have finished the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 during the frame period (T1+δ to T1+2δ) based on the operation start command issued in the frame period starting at the timing T1+δ, for example. is.

Therefore, in step ST5', the status information of the VDP register RGij relating to the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 is read-accessed to confirm the normal operation. In FIG. 139, normal operation is confirmed in the judgments of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th frame periods. not shown.

Then, when such an abnormality occurs, the abnormality flag ER is incremented (ER=ER+1), and the process of step ST9 is performed. Therefore, as in the case of FIG. 146, frame drop occurs. That is, the same screen is displayed again because the display area switching process (ST6) is skipped. A frame period (T1+3δ to T1+4δ) shown in FIGS. 138 and 139 shows the operation state.

Further, if the start condition is not satisfied in the judgment of step ST5′, the drawing circuit 274 is not operated because the drawing operation start instruction (PT10) based on the rewriting list DL′ is not executed to the drawing circuit 274. state and no new display list is generated. In FIG. 139, timings t0, t2, and t4 indicate the operation timing of the drawing operation start instruction (PT10), more precisely, the timing of step ST26 in FIG. 155, which will be described later.

The case where the judgment in step ST5' is not suitable has been described above, but in the normal case, after the display areas of the frame buffers FBa and FBb are toggled (ST6), the rewrite list DL is sent to the rendering circuit 274. ' is started (PT10). The specific contents are as shown in FIG. to perform the drawing operation.

Before describing the flowchart of FIG. 155 for realizing this operation, the operation of the preloader 269 is confirmed. Completed and prefetched data has already been stored in the preload area reserved in the DRAM 278 . For the texture load command (TXLOAD) described in the display list DL, the source address is rewritten to the address of the preload area, and the rewrite list DL' is the DL buffer BUF' of the DRAM 278 (see FIG. 140). stored in

In this rewriting process, the total data amount of the display list DL does not change, and the total data amount of the rewriting list DL' is the same as that of the display list DL. Also, the display list DL is created by the standard method (B), and the end of the rewrite list DL' is the EODL command as in the case of the display list DL.

155 based on the above, the CPU 241 first sets a clear value in a predetermined data transfer register RGij and a predetermined drawing register RGij to initialize the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274. (ST20). This process has the same content as the process of ST20 in FIG. Next, it is confirmed that the initialization processing has been completed normally (ST21), and if the initialization is not completed even after a predetermined time has passed, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the processing ends (ST21). ST22).

Normally, the initialization of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 ends normally, so next, the transmission route inside the data transfer circuit 267 is set to a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST23). Specifically, data is set to be transferred from the DRAM 278 to the drawing circuit 274 via the ChB control circuit 267b (ST23). Next, the start address of the DL buffer BUF' of the DRAM 278 storing the rewrite list DL' is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST24).

Also, for this rewrite list DL', the total transfer size is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST25). As described above, the total data amount of the rewrite list DL' is the same as the total data amount of the display list DL, specifically, 256 bytes, for example.

Next, the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started based on the set value in the predetermined drawing register RGij (ST26). Timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 are also the operation timings of step ST26. Then, the data transfer circuit 267 is started to operate based on the set value in the predetermined data transfer register RGij, and the process is finished (ST27). After that, the CPU 241 does not particularly participate in the operations of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274, and shifts to the display list generation process (ST7) to be executed in the next operation cycle.

On the other hand, the drawing circuit 274, which starts operating at the timing of step ST26, executes a drawing operation based on the rewrite list DL' to generate image data based on the rewrite list DL' in the frame buffers FBa and FBb. In this operation, the drawing circuit 274 does not read-access the CGROM 260 but exclusively accesses the preload area, so that a series of drawing operations can be completed quickly.

The contents of the processing of step PT10 have been described above. Returning to FIG. 154, the description continues. It is created based on the standard method (B) (ST7). For example, in the frame period starting from timing T1 shown in FIG. 19, the display list DL to be referred to by the drawing circuit 274 in the next frame period (T1+δ to T1+2δ) is created.

Next, the CPU 241 issues the created display list DL to the preloader 269 instead of the drawing circuit 274 (PT11). Specific operation contents are as shown in FIGS. First, with regard to the embodiment (FIG. 146) in which the preloader 269 does not function, the CPU 241 issues the display list DL directly to the drawing circuit 274 (FIG. 149) and issues it via the DMAC circuit 252 (FIG. 149). 153), but FIGS. 158 and 159 show almost the same operation except that the preloader 269 is the issue destination.

FIG. 157 is a flow chart for explaining the operation of FIG. 158, which is almost the same as the flow chart of FIG. However, there is a difference between passing from the CPU interface unit 264 through the ChC control circuit 267c and setting the CPU bus control unit 267d to execute the data transfer operation while checking the remaining amount of the FIFO buffer (ST20). . In the following description, the ChC control circuit 267c may be abbreviated as "transfer circuit ChC" for convenience.

Next, the total transfer size (for example, 256 bytes adjusted by the standard method (B)) is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij, and the management counter CN is initialized to 64 (ST21). Further, the data transfer operation via the transfer circuit ChC is set to the start state (ST22), and the preload operation is started based on the set value of the preload register RGij that defines the operation of the preloader 269 (ST23).

As a result, after that, the preloader 269 executes necessary analysis (Analyze) processing for each instruction command written by the CPU 241 to the transfer port TR_PORT. It is preloaded and stored in the preload area of the DRAM 278 . Also, the rewrite list DL' in which the source address of the texture is changed is stored in the DL buffer area BUF' of the DRAM 278. FIG.

Timings t1, t3, and t5 in FIG. 139 actually indicate the operation timings of step ST23 in FIG. However, even in this embodiment, if some kind of abnormality occurs during the process of issuing the display list DL, the processes of steps ST25 and ST27 are executed. Specifically, the operations of the data transfer circuit 267 and the preloader 269 are initialized, and the display list DL issuing process (ST20 to ST30) is re-executed within a possible range. The initialization processing of the preloader 269 includes erasure of the incomplete rewriting list DL' and clearing of the preload area in which new preload data is stored.

[17-5. Modifications and Other Modifications Related to Image Effect Control]

As described above, the case where the preloader 269 is not operated and the case where the preloader 269 is operated have been described in detail, but the specific operation contents are not particularly limited.
FIG. 160 shows an embodiment in which the display list DL generated by the CPU 241 is issued to the drawing circuit 274 with a delay of one operation period, instead of the generated operation period (frame period). In such an embodiment, rendering circuitry 274 can use substantially the entire time of one frame period, thereby reducing the possibility of dropped frames.

FIG. 161 shows an embodiment in which the display list DL generated by the CPU 241 is issued to the preloader 269 with a delay of one operation period instead of the generated operation period. In this case, the preloader 7269 can use substantially the entire time of one frame period to perform the preload operation, again reducing the possibility of dropped frames.

In the explanation so far, the composite chip 250 is used, but the CPU 241 and the VDP circuit 250b do not necessarily need to be integrated into one element.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the entire effect control is controlled by a single CPU (CPU 241), but the upstream CPU and the downstream effect control CPU cooperate with each other to control the effect. may be executed.

FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing a schematic internal configuration of the effect control section 24A' corresponding to such an embodiment. As illustrated, in this embodiment, the upstream CPU 241' (the CPU in the chip 250c in the effect control unit 24A') controls the sound effect, the lamp effect, and the motor effect. On the other hand, the CPU 300 on the downstream side (the CPU in the chip as the image control unit 250d provided in the effect control unit 24A' and in which the VDP circuit 250 is mounted) controls only the image effect based on the control of the CPU 241'. there is

In the case of adopting such a configuration, CPU 300 does not need to execute the processing (particularly S2032 to S2042, etc.) for effect control of sounds and lamps described in FIG. A more complex display list DL can be generated, and more complex and advanced image effects such as 3D (Dimension) can be realized. In such a case, the display list DL becomes large, but in that case, the total amount of data in the display list DL is adjusted to 512 bytes or more (N×256 bytes) by adding dummy commands. be.

Further, since the operation of the CPU 300 on the downstream side is specialized for image rendering control, it is possible to confirm that the drawing operation is completed after issuing the display list DL. The lower part of FIG. 148 shows an example of operation control in this case. If the drawing operation is not completed even after the limit time has passed, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the process ends (ST32). Since the processing of the CPU 300 on the downstream side is only image effect control, it may simply wait for completion of the drawing operation in an infinite loop.

When adopting such a configuration, the start condition determination (ST5) in FIG. 146 can be repeated for a predetermined time. Even with this configuration, if the delay in completion of the drawing operation is not so long, the only problem that arises is the delay in switching between the display area (0) and the display area (1). That is, as in the frame period starting from the timing T1+3δ shown in FIG. 163, while the display operation is repeated twice, the frames are dropped only in the first half, and normal frames are displayed in the second half.

This point is the same when using a preloader, and the start condition determination (ST5') in FIG. 154 can be repeated for a predetermined time. If there is some delay, only the first half of the frame period starts from the timing T1+3δ shown in FIG. However, if the completion of the drawing operation is significantly delayed, a complete frame drop will occur as in the frame period (T1+3δ to T1+4δ) in FIG. will start. Therefore, after that, all or part of the effect control operation (only the image effect) should be abnormally reset. This point is the same when the preloader is not used.

Further, when the control operation of the CPU 300 is specialized for image rendering control, in the embodiment employing DMA transfer, as shown in FIG. , the completion of the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is determined (ST50' to ST52'). If any of the operations does not end normally, the operations of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 are initialized, and the same processes (ST55'-ST57') as the processes of steps ST53-ST55 are executed. be. Also in this case, it is preferable to re-execute the DL issuing process a predetermined number of times.

By the way, in the above description, an embodiment has been described in which index spaces of horizontal sizes perfectly matching the number of horizontal pixels of each LCD 36 are constructed as the frame buffers FBa and FBb of the main LCD 36M and sub-LCD 36S.
FIG. 166 shows this relationship for confirmation. , corresponds to the number of horizontal/vertical pixels of the display device.

In such a correspondence relationship, the drawing operation to the virtual drawing space by the display list DL is not necessarily limited to the drawing area (W×H). By temporally moving the drawing position of the drawing image (W'xH') exceeding (WxH), the drawing contents in the actual drawing area WxH indicated by the lower left slanted line in the lower part of Fig. 167 can be changed. , can be moved vertically/horizontally/obliquely.

Also, in order to execute such effects, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, an index space having a horizontal size W larger than the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 may be provided. In this case, the drawing area W×H in the virtual drawing space defined by the instruction command L12 (SETDAVF) of the display list DL is set larger than the actual drawing area w×h corresponding to the number of horizontal/vertical pixels of the LCD 36. be done. In the lower portion of FIG. 167, the actual drawing area w×h is indicated by diagonal lines extending downward to the left.
The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the actual drawing area w×h are specified as the number of display lines and the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 in the process of step SS30 in FIG. In the processing of step SS31, the vertical/horizontal display start position is set in a predetermined display register.

On the other hand, the base point address (X, Y) in the index space is set in a predetermined drawing register by the instruction command L11 of the display list DL. As described above, specifically, the upper left base point address in the index space IDX is defined as (0, 0), for example, by the instruction command L11 (SETDAVR) of the environment setting system. If the upper left end point of the actual drawing area w×h is moved as appropriate, the drawing contents of the actual drawing area W×H indicated by the lower left diagonal line in FIG. become.

As described above, the VDP register RGij related to steps SS30 to SS32 is set to write prohibition at the time of initial setting (second prohibition setting SS34). By writing a release value to the register RGij, this prohibition setting is released.

Although various embodiments have been described in detail above, the specific description does not limit the present invention. For the sake of convenience, the pinball game machine is described, but the present invention can be suitably applied to other game machines such as a reel game machine.

The various examples described above can be appropriately combined as long as the combination is not impossible.

Further, in the above, an example of using an LCD (liquid crystal display device) as the image display means was given, but other image display means such as an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device can also be used.

Here, as shown in FIG. 133, the CPU 241 performs history display processing in step S2050.
As described above, in the history display process of step S2050, the CPU 241 generates a liquid crystal control command for displaying the setting operation history (see FIGS. 54 and 55 and their description). In the case of a 1-CPU configuration, this liquid crystal control command is analyzed by the command analysis processing in step S2027 (FIG. 133), and the CPU 241 creates a display list DL in step S2061 according to the analysis result, and changes the created display list DL. Issue to the VDP circuit 250b.
The VDP circuit 250b performs necessary drawing processing based on the issued display list DL, and the display circuit 270 displays the image instructed by the display list DL on the main LCD 36M.
Through such a flow of processing, the information of the setting operation history is displayed on the display screen of the main LDC 36M.

1, 1A pachinko game machine 13 effect button 16 cross key 20 main control board (main control unit)
201 CPUs
202 ROMs
203 RAM
24 production control board (production control unit)
241 CPUs
242 ROMs
243 RAM
36 liquid crystal display device 38a, 38b special pattern display device 40 liquid crystal control unit 45 decorative lamp 45a optical display device 46 speaker 46a sound generator 61 front door open sensor 94 setting key switch 97 setting/performance indicator 98 RAM clear switch Gs setting history confirmation screen

Claims (1)

Control means for performing control processing related to games;
a storage means from which information can be read and written by the control means;
stored information clearing means capable of executing a clearing process for clearing information in the storage means;
display means for displaying predetermined information calculated based on game performance;
display control means for performing display control of the display means;
image control means for issuing a display list specifying display contents to be displayed on a display device for image display;
image generation means for completing predetermined image data based on the display list in a predetermined first memory;
a second memory for storing various compressed data as basic data of the image data ;
In the first memory, it is possible to secure one or a plurality of areas that can be used as expansion space for expanding compressed data for moving images based on a base address in which the lower bits below a predetermined bit position are 0,
capable of executing a decoding operation to expand the compressed data acquired from the second memory into a predetermined two-dimensional work space;
A first process of partitioning the first memory into a plurality of memory areas including a development memory area by setting necessary setting values in predetermined internal registers, and setting necessary setting values in predetermined internal registers. By doing so, a second process of securing a two-dimensional work space configured to be an integer N times (N≧1) the unit space in the expansion memory area and giving unique information that is unique in the expansion memory area; , is executed, new unique information and a new two-dimensional work space can be secured by writing predetermined information in the display list, and unnecessary two-dimensional work space can be deleted. is configured to
First information specifying a two-dimensional work space in which the compressed data should be decompressed, and second information specifying the compressed data in the second memory and designating acquisition of the compressed data are described in the display list. configured to expand the compressed data specified by the second information in the two-dimensional work space specified by the first information, corresponding to
The display control means is
It is possible to execute control for intermittently lighting the display means at a predetermined cycle,
After the clearing process is completed, the operation confirmation display of the display means is executed for a predetermined time.
game machine.

Images